volume iii divisions 21 & 33...a. asme bpvc-ix - boiler and pressure vessel code, section ix -...

VOLUME IIIDIVISIONS 21 & 33

REQUEST FOR BIDS

CONSTRUCTION OF DOVER ADMINISTRATION BUILDING

CONTRACT NO. C-19-818-DO

ISSUE DATE: September 22, 2020

DELAWARE SOLID WASTE AUTHORITY1128 SOUTH BRADFORD STREET

DOVER, DELAWARE 19904

PREPARED BY BECKER MORGAN GROUP, INC.

(PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

Delaware Solid Waste Authority Section 00011 Table of Contents

i C-19-818-DO

SECTION 00011

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PROJECT MANUAL

DELAWARE SOLID WASTE AUTHORITY

REQUEST FOR BIDS

CONSTRUCTION OF DOVER ADMINISTRATION BUILDING

CONTRACT NO. C-19-818-DO

VOLUME I

DIVISION 0 – BIDDING REQUIREMENTS

Section 00001 Bidders Check List

Section 00011 Table of Contents

Section 00012 List of Drawings

Section 00100 Notice to Bidders

Section 00200 Instructions to Bidders

Section 00310 Construction Project Schedules

Section 00320 Geotechnical Data

Section 00330 Existing Conditions/Coordination of Work

Section 00410 Bid Form

Section 00440 Bid Bond

Section 00450 Bidder Qualifications Statement

Section 00462 Equipment, Manpower, and Projected Workload Form

Section 00480 Noncollusion Affidavit

Section 00490 Affidavit of Self-Performance

Section 00500 Agreement

Section 00611 Performance Bond

Section 00612 Payment Bond

Section 00622 Hold Harmless Agreement

Section 00632 Certificate of Insurance

Section 00700 General Conditions

Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions

Section 00801 Health and Safety Criteria

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIRMENTS

Section 01005 Administrative Provisions

Section 01010 Summary of Work

Section 01025 Measurement and Payment

Section 01026 Schedule of Values

Section 01027 Applications for Payment

Section 01046 Control of Work

Section 01050 Project Surveying


ii C-19-818-DO

Section 01110 Environmental Protection Procedures

Section 01170 Special Provisions

Section 01200 Project Meetings

Section 01300 Submittals

Section 01310 Project Management and Coordination

Section 01320 Construction Progress Documentation

Section 01323 Photographic Documentation

Section 01400 Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC)

Section 01500 Mobilization, Demobilization, Facilities and Temporary Controls

Section 01510 Temporary Facilities and Controls

Section 01600 Material and Equipment Handling

Section 01650 Product Requirements

Section 01700 Contract Closeout

Section 01720 Project Record Documents

Section 01730 Execution

Section 017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal

Section 01782 Operation and Maintenance Data

Section 018113 Sustainable Design requirements – LEED

Section 019113 General Commissioning Requirements

Section 019114 Plumbing Systems Commissioning Requirements

Section 019116 Electrical Systems Commissioning Requirements


iii C-19-818-DO

VOLUME II

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

N/A

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

03 1000 Concrete Forming and Accessories

03 2000 Concrete Reinforcing

03 3000 Cast-in-Place Concrete

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

04 2000 Unit Masonry

04 7200 Cast Stone Masonry

DIVISION 05 - METALS

05 1200 Structural Steel Framing

05 2100 Steel Joist Framing

05 3100 Steel Decking

05 4000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing

05 5000 Metal Fabrications

05 5100 Metal Pan Stairs

05 5213 Pipe and Tube Railings

05 7300 Decorative Metal Railings

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

06 1000 Rough Carpentry

06 1600 Sheathing

06 1800 Glued-Laminated Construction

06 2013 External Finish Carpentry

06 2023 Internal Finish Carpentry

06 8200 Composite Trim

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 1113 Bituminous Dampproofing

07 2100 Thermal Insulation

07 2119 Foamed-In-Place Insulation

07 2726 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers

07 4113.16 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels

07 4213.13 Formed Metal Wall Panels

07 4213.19 Insulated Core Metal Wall Panels

07 4213.23 Metal Composite Material Wall Panels

07 5323 Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing

07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

07 7129 Manufactured Roof Expansion Joints


iv C-19-818-DO

07 7200 Roof Accessories

07 7253 Snow Guards

07 7273 Vegetated Roof System

07 7616 Concrete Deck Pavers and Pedestals

07 8413 Penetration Firestopping

07 9200 Joint Sealants

07 9219 Acoustical Joint Sealants

07 9513.13 Interior Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies

07 9513.16 Exterior Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

08 1416 Flush Wood Doors

08 2200 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Doors and Frames

08 3100 Access Doors and Panels

08 3323 Overhead Coiling Doors

08 4113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts

08 4413 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls

08 6300 Metal-Framed Skylights

08 7000 Door Hardware

08 8000 Glazing

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

09 2116.23 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies

09 2216 Non-Structural Metal Framing

09 2900 Gypsum Board

09 3013 Ceramic Tiling

09 5113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings

09 6513 Resilient Base and Accessories

09 6519 Resilient Tile Flooring

09 6536 Static Control resilient flooring

09 6813 Tile Carpeting

09 7200 Wall Coverings

09 8433 Sound Absorbing Wall Units

09 9123 Interior Painting

09 9300 Staining and Transparent Finishing

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

10 1419 Dimensional Letter Signage

10 1423 Panel Signage

10 1463 Electronic Message Signage

10 2113.19 Plastic Toilet Compartments

10 2800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories

10 4413 Fire Protection Cabinets

10 4416 Fire Extinguishers

10 5300 Patio Covers and Pergolas

10 7343 Transportation Stop Shelters


v C-19-818-DO

10 7516 Ground-Set Flagpoles

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

11 5213 Projection Screens

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

12 2413 Roller Window Shades

12 3216 Manufactured Plastic-Laminate-Clad Casework

12 3623.13 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops

12 3661.16 Solid Surfacing Countertops

12 4813 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

N/A

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

14 2123.16 Machine Room-Less Electric Traction Passenger Elevators


vi C-19-818-DO



vii C-19-818-DO

VOLUME III

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 0500 Common Work Results For Fire Suppression

21 0553 Identification For Fire Suppression Piping And Equipment

21 1300 Fire Suppression Sprinklers

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

22 0523 General-Duty Valves For Plumbing Piping

22 0553 Identification For Plumbing Piping And Equipment

22 0719 Plumbing Piping Insulation

22 1005 Plumbing Piping

22 1006 Plumbing Piping Specialties

22 3000 Plumbing Equipment

22 4000 Plumbing Fixtures

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

23 0513 Common Motor Requirements For Hvac Equipment

23 0519 Meters And Gages For Hvac Piping

23 0548 Vibration And Seismic Controls For Hvac Piping And Equipment

23 0553 Identification For Hvac Piping And Equipment

23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For Hvac

23 0713 Duct Insulation

23 0716 Hvac Equipment Insulation

23 0719 Hvac Piping Insulation

23 0800 Hvac Commissioning Requirements

23 0950 Building Automation System (Bas) General

23 0951 Bas Basic Materials, Interface Devices, And Sensors

23 0952 Bas Operator Interfaces

23 0953 Bas Field Panels

23 0954 Bas Communication Devices

23 0955 Bas Software And Programming

23 0958 Sequence Of Operation

23 0969 Variable Frequency Controllers

23 2113 Hydronic Piping

23 2114 Hydronic Specialties

23 2123 Hydronic Pumps

23 2300 Refrigerant Piping

23 2500 Hvac Water Treatment

23 3100 Hvac Ducts And Casings

23 3300 Air Duct Accessories

23 3423 Power Ventilators

23 3600 Air Terminal Units

23 3700 Air Outlets And Inlets

23 4000 Hvac Air Cleaning Devices

23 5100 Breechings, Chimneys, And Stacks

23 5216 Condensing Boilers


viii C-19-818-DO

23 7413 Package Outdoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units

23 8101 Terminal Heat Transfer Units

23 8127 Small Split-System Heating And Cooling

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 0519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables

26 0526 Grounding And Bonding

26 0529 Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems

26 0533.13 Conduit for Electrical Systems

26 0533.16 Boxes for Electrical Systems

26 0533.23 Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems

26 0553 Identification For Electrical Systems

26 0573 Power System Studies

26 0919 Enclosed Contactors

26 0923 Lighting Control Devices

26 2100 Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance

26 2200 Low-Voltage Transformers

26 2416 Panelboards

26 2726 Wiring Devices

26 2813 Fuses

26 2817 Enclosed Circuit Breakers

26 2818 Enclosed Switches

26 2913 Enclosed Controllers

26 3213 Engine Generators

26 3600 Transfer Switches

26 4113 Lightning Protection For Structures

26 4300 Surge Protective Devices

26 5100 Interior Lighting

26 5600 Exterior Lighting

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 1317 Access Control Systems And Database Management

28 3100 Fire Detection And Alarm Specification

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

31 1000 Site Clearing

31 2000 Earth Moving

31 2319 Dewatering

31 3116 Termite Control

31 5000 Excavation Support and Protection

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 1216 Asphalt Paving

32 1313 Concrete Paving

32 1373 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants

32 1400 Unit Paving


ix C-19-818-DO

32 1713 Parking Bumpers

32 1723 Pavement Markings

32 1726 Tactile Warning Surfacing

32 3300 Site Furnishings

32 9200 Turf and Grasses

32 9300 Plants

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

33 4100 Storm Utility Drainage Piping

**END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS**


x C-19-818-DO


DSWA Admin. Bldg. 2018230.00 September 22, 2020

COMMON WORK RESULTSFOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 0500 - 1

SECTION 21 0500COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Pipe, fittings, sleeves, escutcheons, seals, and connections for sprinkler systems.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 8413 - Penetration Firestopping.B. Section 21 1300 - Fire Suppression Sprinklers: Sprinkler systems design.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing, and Fusing

Qualifications; 2015.B. ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250; 2010.C. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; 2011.D. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 125 and 250; 2011.E. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch

Standard; 2013.F. ASME B16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings; 2012.G. ASME B16.11 - Forged Fittings, Socket-welding and Threaded; 2011.H. ASME B16.25 - Buttwelding Ends; 2012.I. ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; 1999

(Reapproved 2014).J. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless; 2012.K. ASTM A135/A135M - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe; 2009

(Reapproved 2014).L. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings; 1984 (Reapproved 2014).M. ASTM A795/A795M - Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use; 2013.N. AWWA C110/A21.10 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings; 2012.O. AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; 2012.P. AWWA C151/A21.51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast; 2009.Q. AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; 2011.R. FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide; current edition.S. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition.T. Delaware State Fire Prevention Regulations; 2012.U. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection

Association; 2010.V. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems; 2013.W. NFPA 20 - Standard for Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection; National Fire

Protection Association; 2010.X. NFPA 24 - Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and their Appurtenances;

2007.Y. NFPA 25 - Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire

Protection Systems; 2011.



21 0500 - 2

Z. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, and floor and wall

penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, andpiping connections.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering.E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions and spare parts lists.F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's use in

maintenance of project.1. See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

1.05 LEED SUBMITTALS: COMPLY WITH SECTION 018113.A. EQ Credit 2: Low-Emitting Materials

1. For interior wet-applied paints and coatings: Certificate stating compliance with CaliforniaDepartment of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method including TVOC range.a. Include product data stating VOC content in g/L.b. Include volume of material applied per product in liters (L).

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this

section.1. Minimum five experience.

C. Conform to UL or FM requirementsD. Valves: Bear FM (AG), UL (DIR), ITS (DIR) or Warnock Hersey, and _______ product listing

label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place.B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until

installation.1.08 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide products, spare parts and maintenance materials in quantities specified in individualspecification sections. Deliver items to project site and place in location as directed by Owner.

B. Provide extra sprinkler heads under provision of NFPA 13. Provide suitable wrenches for eachhead type.

C. Provide metal storage cabinet for above items in location as directed by Owner.1.09 WARRANTY

A. See Section 00 1720 - Project Record Documents, for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.



21 0500 - 3

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

A. Sprinkler Systems: Comply with NFPA 13.B. Standpipe and Hose Systems: Comply with NFPA 14.C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Comply with ASME BPVC-IX.

2.02 BURIED PIPINGA. Cement Lined Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51.

1. Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10, standard thickness.2. Joints: AWWA C111/A21.11, styrene-butadiene rubber (SBR) or vulcanized SBR gasket.3. Mechanical Couplings: Shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and

washers.4. Minimum depth of cover shall be 48 inches.5. Valves shall be in accordance with NFPA 24 and shall be indicating type.6. Concrete thrust blocks shall be designed and installed in accordance with NFPA 24 and

NFPA 13.a. The new underground fire protection water main shall be installed with joints anchored

in accordance with NFPA 24 and local regulations.2.03 ABOVE GROUND PIPING

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Allied Tube & Conduit2. Youngstown Tube Company3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Steel Pipe 2" and smaller: ASTM A53 Schedule 40 or ASTM A795 Schedule 40, black.1. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings and ASME B16.4, threaded

fittings.2. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings and ASTM A47/A47M.3. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C"

shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized forgalvanized pipe.

4. All steel piping shall have a minimum Corrosion Resistance Ratio (CRR) of 1.00.Equipment data sheets for piping as required for shop drawing submittals shall indicate theCRR.

C. Steel Pipe 2-1/2" and larger: ASTM A795 Schedule 10 or ASTM A135/A135M Schedule 10,black.1. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings and ASME B16.4, threaded

fittings.2. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings and ASTM A47/A47M.3. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C"

shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized forgalvanized pipe.

4. All steel piping shall have a minimum Corrosion Resistance Ratio (CRR) of 1.00.Equipment data sheets for piping as required for shop drawing submittals shall indicate theCRR.

2.04 ABOVEGROUND PIPE FITTINGSA. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Central Sprinkler Company (TYCO)2. Anvil International, Inc., Gruvlok3. Victaulic Fire Protection4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.



21 0500 - 4

B. All fittings shall be listed or approved for the specific pipe and type of system they are to beinstalled on and shall meet or exceed the standards as listed in NFPA 13.

C. Plain-end, hooker, press-on, key type or slip type fittings are not permitted.D. All threaded pipe and fittings shall have threads cut to ASME B1.20.1.E. For pipe sizes 2” and smaller, all fittings shall be either welded or threaded. No mechanical

grooved, drilled, clamped or gasketed fittings will be permitted.F. For pipe sizes 2-1/2” and larger, contractor may use UL listed grooved style fittings. Only “rigid”

type couplings are approved.G. All grooved mechanical fittings and couplings provided shall be the product of a single

manufacturer. All fasteners, parts, and materials used shall be the product of the couplingmanufacturer, and specifically intended by the manufacturer for the installation with the fittingand coupling.

H. Any leakage repairs required to welded pipe or welded/threaded outlets shall only be repairedby cutting out the damaged area and replacement with a threaded joint.

I. All mechanical fittings and appliances shall be torqued in accordance with the manufacturer’srecommendations.

2.05 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGSA. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Central Sprinkler Company (TYCO)2. Anvil International, Inc., Gruvlok3. Victaulic Fire Protection4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Unions: 150 psi malleable iron for threaded ferrous piping.C. Flanges: 150 psi forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping.D. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Rigid, malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, only

with "C" shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers.E. All mechanical fittings and appliances shall be torqued in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations.2.06 SYSTEM CONTROL VALVES

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. TYCO2. NIBCO Inc.3. Viking Corporation4. Reliable5. Victaulic6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. All valves shall be UL listed for their intended use and the specific system they are installed on.C. Valves shall be of ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A-536. The pressure ratings of all

valves shall meet or exceed the maximum working pressures of the sprinkler and/or standpipesystems.

D. All valves controlling connections to water supplies and controlling the flow of water to sprinklersshall be listed indicating type valves and shall be supervised with tamper switches.

E. Drain valves and test valves shall be listed and/or approved for their intended use.F. Valves listed as supervised shall be provided with a UL listed supervisory switch and shall be

connected to the building fire alarm system.G. All control, drain and test connection valves shall be provided with signs as listed in NFPA 13.

Control valves shall have a sign indicating the portion of the system that is controlled by thevalve. All drain and test connection valves shall be provided with signs indicating their purpose.



21 0500 - 5

H. Provide auxiliary drain valves at all low points of dry pipe sprinkler piping and at all trappedsections of dry pipe sprinkler piping. Where the capacity of the trapped sections of pipe is lessthan 5 gallons, the auxiliary drain shall consist of a valve not smaller than ½ inch and a plug ornipple. Where the capacity of the trapped sections of pipe is greater than 5 gallons the auxiliarydrain shall consist of two 1” valves and one 2” x 12” condensate nipple and located inaccordance with NFPA 13.

I. Valve Operators:1. Provide hand wheels for gate, globe (or angle,) and drain valves.2. For butterfly valves provide gear operators.3. Listed indicating valves shall not close in less than 5 seconds when operated at maximum

operating speed from the fully open position.4. Provide chain operators for all shut off, isolation and drain valves that are located 10 feet

or greater above finished floors.J. Valve Connections:

1. Provide valve connections to match pipe joints. Use valves of pipe size.2. For copper tube, provide threaded solder adapters for connection to valve.3. Provide butterfly valve with tapped lug body when used for isolating service.

2.07 WET PIPE RISER ASSEMBLYA. The new wet pipe sprinkler system shall be provided with a new riser assembly and coordinated

with the new water supply piping and backflow prevention assembly. The riser assembly shallbe provided with a butterfly control valve, riser check valve and vane-type water flow switch.Riser check valve shall be provided with trim package which includes the necessary valves,gauges, fittings, drain connections and alarm test connections.

B. The riser assembly shall include a listed control valve and riser check valve. The check valveshall be equipped with a removable cover assembly. The valve shall be listed for installation inthe vertical or horizontal position. The check valve shall be equipped with gauge connectionson the system side and supply side of the valve clapper.

C. Check valve assembly shall be listed for use in fire suppression systems with a maximumworking pressure of 250 psi.

D. Coordinate with Owner and fire alarm contractor for the installation of an electric waterflowalarm bell to be provided on the exterior of the building for local alarm. Exterior alarm bell shallbe activated by sprinkler flow switch(s) through the building existing fire alarm control panel.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Viking Corporation2. Tyco3. Victaulic4. Reliable5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.08 WATERFLOW DETECTORA. Provide and install UL listed Vane type waterflow detectors on wet pipe sprinkler systems.

Switch shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. The detectors shall becapable of being mounted either vertically or horizontally.

B. The waterflow detectors shall have a sensitivity setting to signal a waterflow that equals orexceeds the discharge from one sprinkler head.

C. The detector switch mechanism shall incorporate an instantly recycling pneumatic retardelement with an adjustable range of 0 to 75 seconds.

D. Waterflow detectors shall be wired to provide a waterflow alarm and shall be connected to thebuilding fire alarm system control panel.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Viking Corporation



21 0500 - 6

2. Potter Electric Signal3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.09 TAMPER SWITCHA. Provide a valve supervisory/tamper switch capable of monitoring the open position of all control

and/or sectional valves such as OS&Y valves, butterfly valves and ball type valves. Switch shallbe installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. The switch shall be equipped with two sets of Form “C” (SPDT) contacts.C. Tamper switches shall be provided for all valves which control or isolate the various water

supplies for the sprinkler systems. Refer to bid drawings for locations. Valves may have tamperswitches which are integral to the valve operator or they may be mounted externally on thevalve.

D. Switches shall be wired to provide supervisory signal and shall be connected to the building firealarm system control panel.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Viking Corporation2. Potter Electric Signal3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.10 DOUBLE CHECK BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLYA. Backflow prevention shall be in accordance with the local utility requirements. The backflow

prevention device shall be a double check assembly and shall consist of two independentlyoperating spring loaded check valves, two shutoff valves and required test cocks. Backflowprevention assembly shall meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA C510-07 and UL listedfor fire suppression systems.

B. Assembly shall be approved for use with UL/FM gate valves attached at each end of thecombined check valve housing. Housing shall be constructed with either grooved or flangedconnections.

C. Shall be approved for horizontal or vertical installations. Assembly shall be installed withadequate clearance and accessibility for maintenance and testing.

D. Means shall be provided downstream of backflow assembly for flow tests at system demand.2.11 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION (FDC)

A. New FDC shall meet the requirements of the Delaware State Fire Prevention Regulations(DSFPR), the AHJ, and local fire department. New FDC shall supply the new sprinkler system.Contractor shall locate the FDC within 300 feet of a fire hydrant. Field coordinate the finallocation of the FDC with the AHJ and show on show drawings.

B. FDC shall be a 5 inch Storz type Large Diameter FDC and shall have a 30 degree body styleand shall be provided with a female NPT outlet and locking Storz Inlet. FDC shall be a straightpattern 4” NPT x 5” Storz. FDC shall be provided with escutcheon and be labeled as“SPRINKLER”. FDC shall be provided with a blind cap including securing wire and chain.

C. Fire department connection shall be designated by a signage in accordance with the DSFPR .D. A listed check valve with automatic ball drip shall be installed in the fire department connection

piping and located to maximize accessibility and minimize freezing.E. The fire department connection shall be connected to the sprinkler system piping on the system

side of the main riser control valve and check valve, but on the supply side of any isolationvalves.

F. The new FDC shall be installed not less than 18 inches and not more than 4 feet above the levelof the adjacent grade or access level. Fire department connection shall be located and arrangedso that hose lines can be readily and easily attached without interference from nearby objects.

2.12 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTSA. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.



21 0500 - 7

B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook.E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.F. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.G. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier

or steel support.2.13 MECHANICAL COUPLINGS

A. Rigid Mechanical Couplings for Grooved Joints:1. Dimensions and Testing: Comply with AWWA C606.2. Minimum Working Pressure: 300 psig.3. Housing Material: Fabricate of ductile iron complying with ASTM A536.4. Housing Coating: Factory applied orange enamel or __________.5. Gasket Material: EPDM suitable for operating temperature range from minus 30 degrees

F to 230 degrees F.6. Bolts and Nuts: Hot-dipped-galvanized or zinc-electroplated steel.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install sprinkler system and service main piping, hangers, and supports in accordance with

NFPA 13.B. Install standpipe piping, hangers, and supports in accordance with NFPA 14.C. All sprinkler system piping shall be arranged for flushing as required in NFPA 13, section 8.16.3.D. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient.E. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work.F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected

equipment.H. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacentwork.

2. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.3. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe

movement without disengagement of supported pipe.4. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of

connected horizontal piping.5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or

trapeze hangers.I. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top

of pipe level.J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Interior wet-applied paints

and coatings: Comply with low-emitting requirements in Division 01 Section “Sustainable DesignRequirements - LEED.”

K. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NFPA%2013


























21 0500 - 8

L. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors, walls, partitions, and _______. Seal pipeincluding sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required.

M. Escutcheons:1. Install and firmly attach escutcheons at piping penetrations into finished spaces.2. Provide escutcheons on both sides of partitions separating finished areas through which

piping passes.3. Use chrome plated escutcheons in occupied spaces and to conceal openings in

construction.N. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are

compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, unions, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.

3.03 UNDERGROUND WATER SUPPLYA. New underground water supply design, installation and acceptance testing shall be completed

as part of the fire suppression system scope of work. All work shall be in accordance with NFPA24 and the local public utilities department for Lewes, Delaware.

B. New underground water supply main shall be a minimum of 8 inches and shall be installed tosupply the new fire suppression system for the building. All connections and taps to existingmains shall conform to the requirements of the local public utility and shall be performed by thePublic Utilities Department or an approved utility contractor.

C. Sprinkler contractor shall coordinate all new underground work with the Owner, the local publicutility, general contractor, and all existing utilities and/or buildings. The installation of the newunderground main shall conform to National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) standards andshall conform to local public utility requirements.

D. The underground work shall include the provision of any required permits and payment of feesassociated with the installation of the new underground water main.

E. A double-check backflow assembly shall be installed on the interior fire protection supply mainlocated in the receiving area of the building. Backflow assembly shall conform to local publicutility requirements and be coordinated with the installation of the new sprinkler systems.

F. Fire suppression system design shall be based on the flow tests obtained by the FireSuppression Contractor.

3.04 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES AND ACCEPTANCE TESTINGA. Submit schedule to Owner prior to starting any acceptance testing and closeout procedures.

Coordinate all testing with Owner before starting.B. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction equipment from the building.C. Verify and adjust all valves and other operating equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered

operation.D. Perform all required acceptance testing documentation as listed in these specifications and as

required by NFPA standards.E. All fire suppression system alarm, supervisory and trouble conditions, both local and remote,

shall be simulated to demonstrate proper operation and interface with the new fire alarm paneland offsite monitoring service.

F. Provide Hydraulic Design Information signs for each system at the main risers. Hydraulic signsshall meet the requirements of NFPA 13.

G. Provide signage in accordance with these specifications and NFPA standards for each valve onthe fire suppression systems.

H. The installing contractor shall provide a general information sign in accordance with NFPA 13section 24.6.1. Sign shall be located at the main risers in receiving area. Coordinate finallocation with Owner.























































21 0500 - 9

I. Complete AHJ final inspections and testing. Provide copies of all AHJ closeout documentationand approvals to Owner.

3.05 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM TESTINGA. All underground water supply and aboveground sprinkler system work that is installed and

completed for each phase of the project shall have the completed systems tested as required bythese specifications, NFPA 13, NFPA 24, and the AHJ.

B. Prior to starting the acceptance testing for the new underground water supply and sprinklersystems, the contractor shall as a minimum complete the following:1. All piping shall be flushed as per NFPA 13 and NFPA 24 in order to remove any foreign

materials that may have entered the piping during installation. All flushing of piping shall bewitnessed by the Owner and/or Owners representative and the contractors jobsuperintendent.

2. All systems shall be visually inspected to verify that they are complete and have beenproperly installed and supported.

3. All equipment shall be checked for proper identification, operation and accessibility.4. Contractor shall verify that the required alarm, supervisory and notification devices are

installed and operational and are interfaced with the building fire alarm systems.5. Complete all preliminary testing where required before starting acceptance testing.6. Contractor shall submit to owner a letter certifying successful completion of the above

tests and inspections.C. Contractor shall perform all acceptance testing as required by NFPA 13, NFPA 24 and the Fire

Marshal’s office. All acceptance testing shall be performed by qualified personnel from thecontractor and by appropriate manufacturer representatives.

D. All testing shall be witnessed by the Owner, Owner representatives and the contractor’s jobsuperintendent. Testing shall also be witnessed by Authority Having Jurisdiction where required.

E. All system testing shall be conducted in accordance with approved test protocols as preparedby the contractor. Written test protocols including detailed test procedures, documentationsheets, testing personnel and proposed test schedule shall be submitted to Owner for approvalat least 10 working days prior to the start of acceptance testing.

F. System testing shall include, but not be limited to, the operational and supervisory testing of allcontrol equipment, pressure switches, waterflow devices, remote signaling devices, valvetamper switches, auxiliary functions, system wiring and power supplies. Proper operation of allequipment is to be verified through acceptance testing.

G. At the completion of final acceptance testing the contractor shall provide a complete test reportdocumenting the completed acceptance testing. Report shall state that all of the installedsystems are complete, fully tested, fully approved and ready for AHJ approval and ready to beplaced in service.

H. Contractor and/or manufacturer representative shall provide all testing equipment as required inappropriate NFPA standards. All equipment shall be calibrated as required and all gauges shallbear a label with latest date of calibration.

I. Contractor shall take all precautions required to protect the building structure, buildingequipment and other trades during acceptance testing.

J. The contractor shall clean and restore all systems and areas to normal conditions aftercompletion of testing.

3.06 HYDROSTATIC TESTING – WET SPRINKLER SYSTEMSA. Hydrostatically test all sprinkler system for two hours at not less than 200 psi or 50 psi above

maximum working pressure with no visible leakage. The hydrostatic pressure shall bemeasured at the low point of the individual system being tested.

B. Contractor shall provide all instruments, equipment and personnel required for testing of eachsystem. The contractor shall provide a source of water for testing and pumps, if required.

























































21 0500 - 10

C. All acceptance test documentation and test procedures must be approved by NFPA 13, theOwner and AHJ. All test reports shall be on NFPA Standard forms and copies shall besubmitted to Owner at closeout. The test reports shall include, but not be limited to, thefollowing:1. Identification and location of service, system or portion thereof.2. Test media and pressures achieved and maintained.3. List of personnel witnessing test.4. Approval by Owner or his representative.

D. Before any tests are started, consult with Owner and obtain approval for locations or areaswhere test water drainage is permissible.

E. All personnel or agencies from which test approval is required shall be notified sufficiently inadvance of testing to permit reasonable time for their representative to be present during thetest.

F. Tests shall be performed in compliance with the specified codes, standards, and manufacturer’srecommendations.

G. Should leaks occur during testing, the test shall stop, the leak shall be repaired and the testshall be repeated, starting at the beginning. All costs pertaining to the repair and repeat of thetest shall be borne by the contractor.

3.07 SYSTEM OPERATIONAL TESTSA. Perform all system operational testing required under provisions of NFPA 13. Provide all

documentation required to Owner and AHJ.B. All tests shall be witnessed by Owner or Owner’s representative and by the AHJ when required.

All testing shall be coordinated with the Owner and a schedule with test procedures shall besubmitted at least 10 days prior to and testing.

C. The sprinkler contractor is responsible for the testing of all devices on each system. Provide allinstruments, equipment and personnel required for testing the sprinkler systems.

D. All operational test documentation and test procedures must be approved by NFPA 13. All testreports shall be on NFPA Standard forms and copies shall be submitted to Owner at closeout.The test reports shall include, but not be limited to, the following:1. Identification and location of equipment or system being tested.2. Test results.3. List of personnel witnessing tests.4. Approval by Owner or his representative.

3.08 UNDERGROUND PIPING ACCEPTANCE TESTINGA. Flush new underground piping and lead-in connections as required by NFPA 13 and 24.

Minimum flow rates shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 section 10.10.2.1. Divisional valves onexisting underground piping should be closed to produce a high velocity flow through piping.Flushing of piping shall be witnessed by Owner and/or Owner’s representative, City of DoverPublic Utilities Department and AHJ.

B. Hydrostatically test all new underground piping in accordance with local utility requirements. Piping shall be tested for two hours at 200 psi or 50 psi above the maximum working pressurewith no visible leakage prior to backfilling.

C. Provide all instruments, equipment and personnel required for testing the sprinkler systems.D. Before any tests are started, consult with Owner and local utility to obtain approval for locations

or areas where test water drainage is permissible.E. All personnel or agencies from which test approval is required shall be notified sufficiently in

advance of testing to permit reasonable time for their representative to be present during thetest.

F. Tests shall be performed in compliance with the specified codes, standards, and manufacturer’srecommendations.

























































21 0500 - 11

G. All piping and joints shall be visually inspected for damage. The torquing of all bolted joints shallbe checked and documented.

H. Should leaks occur during testing, the test shall stop, the leak shall be repaired and the testshall be repeated, starting at the beginning. All costs pertaining to the repair and repeat of thetest shall be borne by the contractor.

I. Written reports shall be on NFPA Standard forms.J. The result reports shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Identification and location of service, system or portion thereof.2. Test media and pressures achieved and maintained.3. List of personnel witnessing test.4. Approval by Owner or his representative.

3.09 OWNER EDUCATIONA. The contractor shall provide the Owner with a minimum of one, four-hour training class on the

sprinkler systems. The training shall include, but not limited to the following:1. Overview of system operation.2. Overview of Operation and Maintenance manuals.3. Detailed maintenance procedures.4. Periodic testing and procedures.5. Overview of system equipment and device locations.

B. The contractor shall submit a proposed training agenda for Owners review and approval at least10 days prior to starting the acceptance testing. Training sessions shall be scheduled by theOwner at a time that is mutually agreeable to the contractor and owner. The instruction shall bescheduled for after final acceptance testing but prior to final payment.

C. Each attendee shall receive an instructional certificate indicating attendance and satisfactorycompletion of the training.

3.10 CLEANINGA. Upon completion of work, clean all parts of the installation.B. Clean equipment, pipes, valves, and fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge that may have

accumulated from the installation and testing of the system.END OF SECTION





































21 0500 - 12






IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRESUPPRESSION PIPING ANDEQUIPMENT

21 0553 - 1

SECTION 21 0553IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


A. Nameplates.B. Tags.C. Pipe markers.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Stencil paint.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. Delaware State Fire Prevention Regulations; 2012.B. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection

Association; 2010.C. NFPA 20 - Standard for Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection; National Fire

Protection Association; 2010.D. NFPA 24 - Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and their Appurtenances;

2007.E. NFPA 25 - Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire

Protection Systems; 2011.F. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2007.G. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2013.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.C. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location,

function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.D. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation

instructions.F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS

A. Control Panels: Nameplates.B. Major Control Components: Nameplates.C. Piping: Tags.D. Pumps: Nameplates.E. Valves: Nameplates and ceiling tacks where above lay-in ceilings.

2.02 NAMEPLATESA. Manufacturers:

1. Kolbi Pipe Marker Company; ______: www.kolbipipemarkers.com/#sle.2. Seton Identification Products, a Tricor Direct Company; ______: www.seton.com/#sle.3. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.1. Letter Color: White.


IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRESUPPRESSION PIPING ANDEQUIPMENT

21 0553 - 2

2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch.3. Background Color: Black.4. Thickness: 1/8 inch.5. Plastic: Comply with ASTM D709.

2.03 TAGSA. Manufacturers:

1. Advanced Graphic Engraving, LLC; ______: www.advancedgraphicengraving.com/#sle.2. Brady Corporation; ______: www.bradycorp.com/#sle.3. Brimar Industries, Inc; ______: www.pipemarker.com/#sle.4. Kolbi Pipe Marker Company; ______: www.kolbipipemarkers.com/#sle.5. Seton Identification Products, a Tricor Direct Company; ______: www.seton.com/#sle.6. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smoothedges.

C. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.2.04 PIPE MARKERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Brady Corporation; ______: www.bradycorp.com/#sle.2. Brimar Industries, Inc; ______: www.pipemarker.com/#sle.3. Kolbi Pipe Marker Company; ______: www.kolbipipemarkers.com/#sle.4. Seton Identification Products, a Tricor Company; ______: www.seton.com/#sle.5. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1.C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing

and printed markings.D. Color code as follows:

1. Fire Quenching Fluids: Red with white letters.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply withsufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.C. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.D. Provide Fire Department Connection sign on exterior of building in compliance with the State of

Delaware Fire Prevention Regulations.E. Provide all signage and labeling of sprinkler system in accordance with NFPA 13.F. Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel

closest to equipment.END OF SECTION


FIRE SUPPRESSIONSPRINKLERS

21 1300 - 1

SECTION 21 1300FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS


A. Wet-pipe sprinkler system.B. System design, installation, and certification.C. Fire department connections.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 8413 - Penetration Firestopping.B. Section 28 4600 - Fire Detection and Alarm.C. Section 21 0500 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: Pipe, fittings, and valves.D. Section 21 0553 - Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment.E. Section 21 3000 - Fire Pumps.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.B. Delaware State Fire Prevention Regulations, 2012C. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection

Association; 2010.D. NFPA 20 - Standard for Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection; National Fire

Protection Association; 2010.E. NFPA 24 - Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and their Appurtenances;

2007.F. NFPA 25 - Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire

Protection Systems; 2011.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers

catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, supportrequirements, and piping connections.

C. Shop Drawings:1. Submit preliminary layout of finished ceiling areas indicating only sprinkler locations

coordinated with ceiling installation.2. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers,

components and accessories. Indicate system controls.3. Submit shop drawings, product data, and hydraulic calculations to Fire Marshall for

approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect.D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements,

record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location andnumbers of service depot.

E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's use inmaintenance of project.1. Extra Sprinklers: Type and size matching those installed, in quantity required by

referenced NFPA design and installation standard.2. Sprinkler Wrenches: For each sprinkler type.



21 1300 - 2

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Maintain one copy of referenced design and installation standard on site.B. Conform to FM requirements.C. Designer Qualifications: Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Fire

Protection Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in Delaware.D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this section with minimum ten years documented experience.E. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum 5 years experience approved by manufacturer.F. Equipment and Components: Provide products that bear FM label or marking.G. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories

Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide temporaryinlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Sprinklers, Valves, and Equipment:1. Tyco Fire Protection Products, a Tyco Business: www.tyco-fire.com/#sle.2. Viking Corporation: www.vikinggroupinc.com/#sle.3. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

2.02 SPRINKLER SYSTEMA. Sprinkler System: Provide coverage for building areas noted.B. Occupancy: Light Hazard, Orinary Hazard, Group1, and Ordinary Hazard, Group 2. Comply with

NFPA 13..C. Water Supply: Determine volume and pressure from water flow test data. D. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm system.E. Pipe Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:

1. Beam Clamps, threaded rods; UL listed, FM approved.2. Other Types: As required.

2.03 SPRINKLERSA. Suspended Ceiling Type: Concealed pendant type with matching screw on cover plate.

1. Response Type: Quick.2. Coverage Type: Standard.3. Finish: Brass.4. Cover Plate Finish: Enamel, color white.5. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.

B. Exposed Area Type: Standard upright type .1. Response Type: Quick.2. Coverage Type: Standard.3. Finish: Brass.4. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.

C. Sidewall Type: Semi-recessed horizontal sidewall type with matching push on escutcheonplate.1. Response Type: Quick.2. Coverage Type: Standard.3. Finish: Chrome plated.



21 1300 - 3

4. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.D. Institutional Type: Tamper Resistant to be utilized in all secure areas.

1. Response Type: Quick.2. Coverage Type: Standard.3. Finish: Enamel, color white.4. Product: Tyco - Raven.

a. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.E. Guards: Finish to match sprinkler finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Fire Protection Contractor shall perform a water flow test and prepare shop drawings andhydraulic calculations for the wet sprinkler system based on the flow test data. Submit drawingsand calculations to the Engineer and Fire Marshal for review and approval.

B. Install in accordance with referenced NFPA design and installation standard.C. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.D. Install buried shut-off valves in valve box. Provide post indicator.E. Provide approved double check valve assembly at sprinkler system water source connection.F. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.G. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings.H. Center sprinklers in two directions in ceiling tile and provide piping offsets as required.I. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler

escutcheons do not receive field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace paintedsprinklers.

J. Install and connect to fire pump system in accordance with Section 21 3000.K. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.L. Hydrostatically test entire system.M. Require test be witnessed by Fire Marshal.

3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTSA. Ensure required devices are installed and connected as required to fire alarm system.

3.03 OWNER EDUCATIONA. The sprinkler contractor shall provide the Owner with a minimum of one, four-hour training class

on the sprinkler, water tank and fire pump systems. The training shall include, but not limited tothe following:1. Overview of system operation.2. Overview of Operation and Maintenance manuals.3. Detailed maintenance procedures.4. Periodic testing and procedures.5. Overview of system equipment and device locations.

B. The contractor shall submit a proposed training agenda for Owners review and approval at least10 days prior to starting the acceptance testing. Training sessions shall be scheduled by theOwner at a time that is mutually agreeable to the contractor and owner. The instruction shall bescheduled for after final acceptance testing but prior to final payment.

C. Each attendee shall receive an instructional certificate indicating attendance and satisfactorycompletion of the training.

3.04 SCHEDULESA. System Hazard Areas:

1. Offices: Light Hazard.



21 1300 - 4

2. Jail: Light Hazard3. Evidence Storage: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.4. Sallyport: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.5. Vehicle Processing: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1

END OF SECTION


GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FORPLUMBING PIPING

22 0523 - 1

SECTION 22 0523GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING


A. Applications.B. General requirements.C. Angle valves.D. Ball valves.E. Butterfly valves.F. Check valves.G. Globe valves.H. Chainwheels.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.B. Section 22 0719 - Plumbing Piping Insulation.C. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping.D. Section 22 1500 - General-Service Compressed-Air Systems.

1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMSA. CWP: Cold working pressure.B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.D. NRS: Non-rising stem.E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.F. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene.G. RS: Rising stem.H. SWP: Steam working pressure.I. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. API STD 594 - Check Valves: Flanged, Lug Wafer, and Butt-Welding; 2007 (Errata 2010).B. ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch); 2013.C. ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250; 2010.D. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch

Standard; 2013.E. ASME B16.10 - Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Valves; 2009.F. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2012.G. ASME B16.34 - Valves-Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End; 2013.H. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2014.I. ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe

Fittings; 2004 (Reapproved 2014).J. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings; 1984 (Reapproved 2014).K. ASTM B61 - Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings; 2008 (Reapproved

2013).



22 0523 - 2

L. ASTM B62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings; 2015.M. MSS SP-67 - Butterfly Valves; 2011.N. MSS SP-70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; 2011.O. MSS SP-71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; 2011.P. MSS SP-72 - Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service; 2010.Q. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; 2013.R. MSS SP-85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; 2011.S. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends;

2010.T. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014 (Errata 2015).U. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on valves including manufacturers catalog information. Submit

performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections.C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in

Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's name and registered with manufacturer.D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating

instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listings.E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish Delaware Solid Waste Authority with one wrench for every ten

plug valves, in each size of square plug valve head.1. See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer:

1. Obtain valves for each valve type from single manufacturer.2. Company must specialize in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less

than three years of documented experience.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:1. Minimize exposure of operable surfaces by setting plug and ball valves to open position.2. Protect valve parts exposed to piped medium against rust and corrosion.3. Protect valve piping connections such as grooves, weld ends, threads, and flange faces.4. Adjust globe, gate, and angle valves to the closed position to avoid clattering.5. Secure check valves in either the closed position or open position.6. Adjust butterfly valves to closed or partially closed position.

1.08 EXERCISE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING:A. Handle large valves with sling, modified to avoid damage to exposed parts.B. Avoid the use of operating handles or stems as rigging or lifting points.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Provide the following valves for the applications if not indicated on Drawings:1. Shutoff: Ball, butterfly, gate.2. Throttling: Provide globe or angle.

B. Substitutions of valves with higher CWP classes or SWP ratings for same valve types arepermitted when specified CWP ratings or SWP classes are not available.

C. Required Valve End Connections for Non-Wafer Types:



22 0523 - 3

1. Steel Pipe:a. 2-1/2 NPS to 4 NPS: Grooved or flanged ends except where threaded valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules below.b. 5 NPS and Larger: Grooved or flanged ends.

2. Copper Tube:a. 2 NPS and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is

indicated in valve schedules below.D. Low Pressure, Compressed Air Valves 150 psig or Less:

1. 2 NPS and Smaller:a. Ball: Two piece, full port, brass or bronze with stainless-steel trim.b. Bronze Lift Check: Class 125, bronze disc.

E. Domestic, Hot and Cold Water Valves:1. 2 NPS and Smaller:

a. Bronze and Brass: Provide with solder-joint ends.b. Bronze Angle: Class 125, bronze disc.c. Ball: One piece, full port, brass or bronze with stainless-steel trim.

2. 2-1/2 NPS and Larger:a. Iron, 2-1/2 NPS to 4 NPS: Provide with threaded or flanged ends.b. Iron Ball: Class 150.c. Iron Single-Flange Butterfly: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, stainless-steel disc.d. Iron Grooved-End Butterfly: 175 CWP.e. Iron Swing Check with Closure Control: Class 125, lever and spring.f. Iron Gate: Class 125, NRS.g. Iron Globe: Class 125.

2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTSA. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: No less than rating indicated; as required for system

pressures and temperatures.B. Valve Sizes: Match upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.C. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: Quarter-turn valves 8 NPS and larger.2. Handwheel: Valves other than quarter-turn types.3. Hand Lever: Quarter-turn valves 6 NPS and smaller except plug valves.4. Wrench: Plug valves with square heads.5. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator, of size

and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article.D. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2 NPS stem extensions and the following features:

1. Gate Valves: Rising stem.2. Ball Valves: Extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and

protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal ordisturbing insulation.

3. Butterfly Valves: Extended neck.4. Memory Stops: Fully adjustable after insulation is installed.

E. Valve-End Connections:1. Threaded End Valves: ASME B1.20.1.2. Flanges on Iron Valves: ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves.3. Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 1/2 NPS through 24 NPS: ASME B16.5.4. Solder Joint Connections: ASME B16.18.

F. General ASME Compliance:1. Ferrous Valve Dimensions and Design Criteria: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34.2. Solder-joint Connections: ASME B16.18.3. Building Services Piping Valves: ASME B31.9.



22 0523 - 4

G. Valve Materials for Potable Water: NSF 61 and NSF 372.2.03 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES

A. Class 125: CWP Rating: 200 psig:.1. Comply with MSS SP-80, Type 1.2. Body: Bronze; ASTM B62, with integral seat and screw in bonnet.3. Ends: Threaded.4. Stem: Bronze.5. Disc: Bronze.6. Packing: Asbestos free.7. Handwheel: Bronze or aluminum.

2.04 BRASS BALL VALVESA. Two Piece, Full Port with chrome plated brass Trim:

1. Comply with MSS SP-110.2. SWP Rating: 150 psig.3. CWP Rating: 600 psig.4. Body: Forged brass.5. Ends: Threaded or soldered.6. Seats: PTFE or Hostaflon.7. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

2.05 BRONZE BALL VALVESA. Two Piece, Full Port with chrome plated brass Trim:

1. Comply with MSS SP-110.2. SWP Rating: 150 psig.3. CWP Rating: 600 psig.4. Body: Bronze.5. Ends: Threaded.6. Seats: PTFE or Hostaflon.7. Ball: Chrome plated brass.

2.06 IRON BALL VALVESA. Class 125, Full Port, Stainless Steel Trim:

1. Comply with MSS SP-72.2. CWP Rating: 200 psig.3. Body: ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12, ductile iron.4. Ends: Flanged.5. Seats: PTFE or Teflon.6. Operator: Lever, with locking handle.

2.07 IRON, SINGLE FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVESA. Lug type: Bi-directional dead-end service without use of downstream flange.

1. Comply with MSS SP-67, Type I.2. CWP Rating: 200 psig.3. Body: ASTM A126, cast iron or ASTM A536, ductile iron.4. Stem: One or two-piece stainless steel.5. Seat: EPDM.6. Disc: Coated ductile iron.

2.08 IRON, GROOVED-END BUTTERFLY VALVESA. CWP Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).

1. Comply with MSS SP-67, Type I.2. Body: Coated ductile iron.3. Stem: Two-piece stainless steel.4. Disc: Coated ductile iron.



22 0523 - 5

5. Disc Seal: EPDM.2.09 BRONZE LIFT CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125:1. Comply with MSS SP-80, Type 1, Metal Disc to Metal Seat and Type 2, Nonmetallic Disc

to Metal Seat.2. CWP Rating: 200 psig.3. Design: Vertical flow.4. Body: Comply with ASTM B61 or ASTM B62, bronze.5. Ends: Threaded as indicated.

2.10 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES WITH CLOSURE CONTROLA. Class 125 with Lever and Spring-Closure Control.

1. Comply with MSS SP-71, Type I.2. Description:

a. CWP Rating: 200 psig.b. Design: Clear or full waterway.c. Body: ASTM A126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.d. Ends: Flanged as indicated.e. Trim: Bronze.f. Gasket: Asbestos free.g. Closer Control: Factory installed, exterior lever, and weight.

2.11 IRON PLATE TYPE CHECK VALVESA. Class 125 Single-Plate:

1. Comply with API 594.2. CWP Rating: 200 psig.3. Design: Wafer, spring-loaded plate.4. Body: ASTM A126, gray iron.5. Resilient Seat: EPDM.

2.12 IRON GATE VALVESA. OS & Y:

1. Comply with MSS SP-70, Type I.2. Class 125: CWP Rating: 200 psig:.3. Body: ASTM A126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.4. Ends: Flanged.5. Trim: Bronze.6. Disc: Solid wedge.7. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.13 IRON GLOBE VALVESA. Class 125: CWP Rating: 200 psig:.

1. Comply with MSS SP-85, Type I.2. Body: Gray iron; ASTM A126, with bolted bonnet.3. Ends: Flanged.4. Trim: Bronze.5. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.6. Operator: Handwheel or chainwheel.

2.14 CHAINWHEELSA. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, brackets, and chain.

1. Brackets: Type, number, size, and fasteners required to mount actuator on valve.2. Attachment: For connection to ball and plug valve stems.3. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile iron. Include zinc coating.4. Chain: Hot-dip galvanized steel. Sized to fit sprocket rim.



22 0523 - 6

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Discard all packing materials and verify that valve interior, including threads and flanges arecompletely clean without signs of damage or degradation that could result in leakage.

B. Verify valve parts to be fully operational in all positions from closed to fully open.C. Confirm gasket material to be suitable for the service, to be of correct size, and without defects

that could compromise effectiveness.D. Should valve is determined to be defective, replace with new valve.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Provide unions or flanges with valves to facilitate equipment removal and maintenance while

maintaining system operation and full accessibility for servicing.B. Provide separate valve support as required and locate valve with stem at or above center of

piping, maintaining unimpeded stem movement.C. Where valve support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean,

and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.D. Install check valves where necessary to maintain direction of flow as follows:

1. Lift Check: Install with stem plumb and vertical.2. Swing Check: Install horizontal maintaining hinge pin level.3. Orient plate-type into horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.

E. Provide chainwheels on operators for valves 4 NPS and larger where located 96 NPS or moreabove finished floor, terminating 60 NPS above finished floor.

END OF SECTION


IDENTIFICATION FORPLUMBING PIPING ANDEQUIPMENT

22 0553 - 1

SECTION 22 0553IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


A. Nameplates.B. Tags.C. Pipe Markers.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of

Mechanical Engineers; 2007.B. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2013.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 00 1300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.


A. Control Panels: Nameplates.B. Instrumentation: Tags.C. Piping: Pipe markers.D. Pumps: Nameplates.E. Tanks: Nameplates.F. Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling.G. Water Treatment Devices: Nameplates.

2.02 NAMEPLATESA. Manufacturers:

1. Brimar Industries, Inc.: www.pipemarker.com/#sle.2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com/#sle.3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.1. Letter Color: White.2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch.3. Background Color: Black.4. Plastic: Conform to ASTM D709.

2.03 TAGSA. Manufacturers:

1. Advanced Graphic Engraving: www.advancedgraphicengraving.com/#sle.2. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com/#sle.3. Brimar Industries, Inc.: www.pipemarker.com/#sle.4. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com/#sle.5. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/#sle.6. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smoothedges.


IDENTIFICATION FORPLUMBING PIPING ANDEQUIPMENT

22 0553 - 2

2.04 PIPE MARKERSA. Manufacturers:

1. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com/#sle.2. Brimar Industries, Inc.: www.pipemarker.com/#sle.3. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com/#sle.4. MIFAB, Inc.: www.mifab.com/#sle.5. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com.6. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Comply with ASME A13.1.C. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around

pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification offluid being conveyed.

D. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape,minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.

E. Color code as follows:1. Potable, Cooling, Boiler, Feed, Other Water: Green with white letters.2. Flammable Fluids: Yellow with black letters.3. Compressed Air: Blue with white letters.



A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply withsufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.D. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above

buried pipe.E. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller.

1. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.2. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.

END OF SECTION


PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 0719 - 1

SECTION 22 0719PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION


A. Piping insulation.B. Jackets and accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 8413 - Penetration Firestopping.B. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.B. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

[Metric]; 2014.C. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2013.D. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2015.E. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic

Stainless Steel; 2008 (Reapproved 2013).F. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.G. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.H. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current

Edition, Including All Revisions.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and

thickness for each service, and locations.1.05 LEED SUBMITTALS: COMPLY WITH SECTION 018113.

A. MR Credit 2: BPDO - Environmental Product Declarations1. For pipe insulation, if available: Product-specific declaration or Industry-wide EPD or

product-specific EPD.2. Include EPD Summary.

B. MR Credit 4: BPDO - Material Ingredients1. For pipe insulation, if available: Material Ingredient Report.

C. MR Credit 3: BPDO - Sourcing of Raw Materials1. For bio-based insulation: Manufacturer letter on company letterhead stating raw material

supplier’s compliance with Sustainable Agriculture Network’s (SAN) SustainableAgriculture Standard, including a link to a publicly available document confirming SANcompliance, dated within one year of the LEED project registration. Include statementindicating percentage by weight of the total assembly that is bio-based. Include materialcost.

2. For recycled content insulation: Documentation indicating percentages by weight ofpre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content. Include material cost value.

D. EQ Credit 2: Low-Emitting Materials1. For interior wet-applied mastics: Certificate stating compliance with California Department

of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method including TVOC range.a. Include product data stating VOC content in g/L.



b. Include volume of material applied per product in liters (L).1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified inthis section with not less than three years of documented experience.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and

thickness.1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50,maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.

2.02 GLASS FIBERA. Manufacturers:

1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com.2. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible.1. K Value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F.2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F.3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

C. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered tojacket.1. K Value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F.2. Maximum Service Temperature: 650 degrees F.3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film;moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02perm-inches.

2.03 JACKETSA. PVC Plastic.

1. Manufacturers:a. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F.b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance

with ASTM E96/E96M.d. Thickness: 10 mil.e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.

B. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq yd plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute fire retardantlagging adhesive.

C. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet.1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet.2. Finish: Smooth.



3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.


A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.C. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including

fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansionjoints.

D. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing

longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outwardclinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness asadjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied.

Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoiningpipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

F. Inserts and Shields:1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger.2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.3. Insert Location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.4. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining

insulation; may be factory fabricated.5. Insert Material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating

material suitable for the planned temperature range.G. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at

supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07 8413.H. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet above

finished floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.I. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with

insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforcedvapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side ofhorizontal piping.

J. Buried Piping: Provide factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose service jacket withself-sealing lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with one mil thick aluminumfoil sandwiched between three layers of bituminous compound; outer surface faced with apolyester film.

K. Heat Traced Piping: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material,thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Size large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.

L. Interior wet-applied mastics: Comply with low-emitting requirements in Division 01 Section“Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED.”



3.03 SCHEDULESA. Plumbing Systems:

1. Domestic Hot Water Supply:a. Glass Fiber Insulation: Piping 1-1/2" and smaller shall be 1” thick.b. Glass Fiber Insulation: Piping 2" and larger shall be 1-1/2” thick.c. Provide PVC jacket and insulation under sinks exposed to view.

2. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation:a. Glass Fiber Insulation: Piping 1-1/2" and smaller shall be 1” thick.b. Glass Fiber Insulation: Piping 2" and larger shall be 1-1/2” thick.

3. Domestic Cold Water:a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1-1/2" and smaller shall be 1/2” thick.b. Glass Fiber Insulation: 2" and larger shall be 1” thick.c. Provide PVC jacket and insulation under sinks exposed to view.

4. Roof Drainage Above Grade: 1" Thick down to floor5. Plumbing sanitary drainage, floor drains, and traps above grade: 1" thick.6. Provide PVC jacket and insulation under sinks exposed to view.

END OF SECTION


PLUMBING PIPING 22 1005 - 1

SECTION 22 1005PLUMBING PIPING


A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.1. Sanitary sewer.2. Domestic water.3. Storm water.4. Gas.5. Flanges, unions, and couplings.6. Pipe hangers and supports.7. Valves.8. Water pressure reducing valves.9. Relief valves.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 8413 - Penetration Firestopping.B. Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.C. Section 22 0719 - Plumbing Piping Insulation.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI Z21.22 - American National Standard for Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff

Devices for Hot Water Supply Systems; 1999, and addenda A&B (R2004).B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; 2011.C. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 125 and 250; 2011.D. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2012.E. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; 2013.F. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; 2014.G. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2014.H. ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing, and Fusing

Qualifications; 2015.I. ASSE 1003 - Performance Requirements for Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic

Water Distribution Systems; 2009.J. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless; 2012.K. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and

Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2015.L. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014).M. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2015a.N. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2014.O. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2013.P. ASTM B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and

Copper Alloy Tube; 2010.Q. ASTM B828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper

Alloy Tube and Fittings; 2002 (Reapproved 2010).R. ASTM D2239 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on

Controlled Inside Diameter; 2012.



S. ASTM D2447 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80,Based on Outside Diameter; 2003.

T. ASTM D2609 - Standard Specification for Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) PlasticPipe; 2002 (Reapproved 2009).

U. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers; 1992(Reapproved 2008).

V. AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; 2010.W. AWWA C550 - Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants; 2013.X. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; 2005.Y. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and

Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; 2009.Z. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe

and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; 2011.AA. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2012.AB. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry

Elements; 2012.AC. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2013.AD. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete

Elements; 2013.AE. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,

Application, and Installation; 2009.AF. MSS SP-70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; 2011.AG. MSS SP-85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; 2011.AH. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.AI. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; 2015.AJ. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014 (Errata 2015).AK. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide

manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's use in

maintenance of project.1. See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Valve Repacking Kits: One for each type and size of valve.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes.B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC-IX and applicable state labor

regulations.D. Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME BPVC-IX.E. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification,

potable water certification, water pressure rating.



1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTSA. Perform Work in accordance with State of Delaware plumbing code.B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices.C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of

installation of backflow prevention devices.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until

installation.D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections

of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings, and solder and flux (if used), thatcomply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.

B. All cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be mrked with the collective trademark of the Cast IronSoil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and be listed by NSF International.

2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDINGA. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless.

1. Fittings: Cast iron.2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies.

2.03 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADEA. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.

1. Fittings: Cast iron.2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.

2.04 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDINGA. Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, hard drawn.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze.2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder.

B. PE Pipe: ASTM D2239.1. Fittings: ASTM D2609, PE.2. Joints: Mechanical with stainless steel clamp.

2.05 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADEA. Copper Tube(Domestic Water 2" and below): ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), Drawn

(H).1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder.3. Mechanical Press Sealed Fittings: Double pressed type, NSF 61 and NSF 372 approved

or certified, utilizing EPDM, non toxic synthetic rubber sealing elements.B. Steel Pipe (Domestic Water above 2"): ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40, galvanized, using one

of the following joint types:1. Threaded Joints: ASME B16.4 cast iron fittings



2.06 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDINGA. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.

1. Fittings: Cast iron.2. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.

2.07 STORM WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADEA. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.

1. Fittings: Cast iron.2. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.

2.08 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDINGA. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black.

1. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type.2. Joints: ASME B31.1, welded.3. Jacket: AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil

polyethylene tape.2.09 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Interior Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black.1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type.2. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ASME B31.1.3. Paint all interior gas piping yellow. Interior wet-applied mastics, paints and coatings:

Comply with low-emitting requirements in Division 01 Section “Sustainable DesignRequirements - LEED.”

B. Exterior Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 galvanized.1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, galvanized malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, galvanized steel

welding type.2. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ASME B31.1.

2.10 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGSA. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under:

1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions.2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.

B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch:1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed

neoprene gaskets.2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets.

2.11 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTSA. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.

1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriatetype using MSS SP-58 recommendations.

2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapezehangers.

3. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure.4. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp.

B. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent:1. Conform to ASME B31.9.2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split

ring.3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

C. Plumbing Piping - Water:1. Conform to ASME B31.9.



2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, splitring.

3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 Inches to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.5. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

D. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.6. Manufacturers:

a. Powers Fasteners, Inc: www.powers.com/#sle.b. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

2.12 GATE VALVESA. Manufacturers:

1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.2. Conbraco Industries, Inc: www.apollovalves.com.3. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.4. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.5. Jomarvalve: www.jomarvalve.com6. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. 2 Inches and Larger:1. 1, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, handwheel, solid wedge

disc, flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mountedover 8 feet above floor.

2.13 BALL VALVESA. Manufacturers:

1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.2. Conbraco Industries, Inc: www.apollovalves.com.3. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.4. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.5. Jomarvalve: www.jomarvalve.com6. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze, two piecebody, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proofstem, lever handle with balancing stops, solder ends with union.

2.14 PLUG VALVESA. Construction: 1, 175 psi CWP, cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated, teflon or Buna N

packing, flanged or grooved ends. Provide lever operator with set screw.2.15 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

A. Up to 2 Inches:1. ASSE 1003, bronze body, stainless steel, and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric

reinforced diaphragm, strainer, threaded single union ends.B. Over 2 Inches:

1. ASSE 1003, cast iron body with interior lining complying with AWWA C550, bronze fitted,elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc, flanged.



2.16 RELIEF VALVES2.17 RELIEF VALVES

A. Pressure Relief:1. 1 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure

actuated.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Vent piping within a plenum rated ceiling must meet the code required smoke and flame spread

ratings. If the material specified to be used does not meet the 25/50 smoke / flame spreadrating it will be the installing contractors responsiblity to insulate the portion of this piping withinthe plenum.

C. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.D. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to

walls.E. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space.F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of

insulation and access to valves and fittings.H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.I. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.J. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.K. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood.L. Install water piping to ASME B31.9.M. Copper Pipe and Tube: Make soldered joints in accordance with ASTM B828, using specified

solder, and flux meeting ASTM B813; in potable water systems use flux also complying withNSF 61 and NSF 372.

N. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.O. Inserts:

1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of

reinforced concrete beams.3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4

inches.4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt

with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.P. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NSF%2061
















3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacentwork.

4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe

movement without disengagement of supported pipe.6. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

3.04 APPLICATIONA. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.B. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.C. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service.

3.05 TOLERANCESA. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated and

slope to drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot slope.B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at low points.

3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMA. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.B. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda

ash) or acid (hydrochloric).C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to

obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15

percent of outlets.E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water

entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.3.07 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Provide new sanitary and storm sewer services. Before commencing work check invertelevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can beproperly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.

B. Provide new water service complete with approved reduced pressure backflow preventer andwater meter with by-pass valves, pressure reducing valve, and sand strainer.1. Provide sleeve in wall for service main and support at wall with reinforced concrete bridge.

Calk enlarged sleeve and make watertight with pliable material. Anchor service maininside to concrete wall.

2. Provide 18 gage, 0.0478 inch galvanized sheet metal sleeve around service main to 6 inchabove floor and 6 feet minimum below grade. Size for minimum of 2 inches of loose battinsulation stuffing.

C. Provide new gas service complete with gas meter and regulators. Gas service distributionpiping to have initial minimum pressure of 7 inch wg. Provide regulators on each line servinggravity type appliances, sized in accordance with equipment.

D. The contractor shall coordinate with the local utility to obtain all permits and approvals requiredto connect services to this building.

3.08 SCHEDULESA. Pipe Hanger Spacing:

1. Metal Piping:




















































a. Pipe size: 1/2 inches to 1-1/4 inches:1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6.5 ft.2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inches.

b. Pipe size: 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches:1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft.2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch.

c. Pipe size: 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches:1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft.2) Hanger rod diameter: 1/2 inch.

d. Pipe size: 4 inches to 6 inches:1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft.2) Hanger rod diameter: 5/8 inch.

e. Pipe Size: 8 inches to 12 inches:1) Maximum hanger spacing: 14 ft.2) Hanger Rod Diameter: 7/8 inch.

f. Pipe Size: 14 inches and Over:1) Maximum Hanger Spacing: 20 ft.2) Hanger Rod Diameter: 1 inch.

END OF SECTION























PLUMBING PIPINGSPECIALTIES

22 1006 - 1

SECTION 22 1006PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES


A. Roof and floor drains.B. Cleanouts.C. Hose bibbs.D. Backflow preventers.E. Double check valve assemblies.F. Water hammer arrestors.G. Mixing valves.H. Thermostatic mixing valves.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping.B. Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASME A112.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; 2001 (R2007).B. ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers; 2004.C. ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent; 2009.D. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014 (Errata 2015).E. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.F. PDI-WH 201 - Water Hammer Arresters; 2010.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, backflow

preventers, water hammer arrestors, and other appertanences.E. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors.F. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.G. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, backflow

preventers, water hammer arrestors.H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's use in

maintenance of project.1. See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Loose Keys for Outside Hose Bibbs: One.3. Extra Hose End Vacuum Breakers for Hose Bibbs: One.


this section with not less than three years documented experience.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.



22 1006 - 2

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Specialties in Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide products that comply with NSF 61 andNSF 372 for maximum lead content.

2.02 DRAINSA. Manufacturers:

1. Josam Company: www.josam.com/#sle.2. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com.3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Roof Drains:1. Assembly: ASME A112.6.4.2. Body: Lacquered cast iron with sump.3. Strainer: Removable cast aluminum dome with vandal proof screws.4. Accessories: Coordinate with roofing type, refer to Section in Divison 07:

a. Membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop.b. Adjustable under deck clamp.c. Leveling frame.d. Adjustable extension sleeve for roof insulation.

C. Roof Overflow Drains:1. Lacquered cast iron body and clamp collar and bottom clamp ring; pipe extended to 4

inches above roof line.D. Downspout Nozzles:

1. Bronze round with straight bottom section. Nozzle to exit building 12 inches above floorelevation.

E. Floor Drain:1. ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron or stainless steel, two piece body with double

drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustablenickel-bronze strainer.

F. Prefabricated Trench Drain (TD-M): Trench drain system assembled from factory fabricated,polymer concrete castings in standard lengths and variable depths, with integral joint flangesand integral grating support rails; includes joint gaskets and grating.1. Trench Width: 4 inches.2. Trench Section Length: 48 inches.3. Grating Support Rail: Stainless steel.4. Accessories:

a. Foul air trap.G. Floor Sink (FS-1):

1. Lacquered cast iron body with dome strainer and seepage flange.2.03 CLEANOUTS

A. Manufacturers:1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com/#sle.2. Josam Company: www.josam.com/#sle.3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas :1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top

assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketeddepressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas.

C. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas :


















































22 1006 - 3

1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, andround stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.

2.04 HOSE BIBBSA. Manufacturers:

1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com/#sle.2. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com/#sle.3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Interior Hose Bibbs:1. Bronze or brass with integral mounting flange, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread

spout, chrome plated where exposed with lockshield and removable key, integral vacuumbreaker in conformance with ASSE 1011.

2.05 BACKFLOW PREVENTERSA. Manufacturers:

1. Conbraco Industries: www.apollovalves.com/#sle.2. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com/#sle.3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers:1. ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; two

independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressurerelief valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens under backpressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gatevalves, strainer, and four test cocks.

2.06 DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLIESA. Manufacturers:

1. Conbraco Industries: www.apollovalves.com/#sle.2. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com/#sle.3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Double Check Valve Assemblies:1. ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs;

two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent.2.07 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

A. Manufacturers:1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com/#sle.2. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com/#sle.3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Water Hammer Arrestors:1. Stainless steel construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDI-WH 201,

precharged suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F andmaximum 250 psi working pressure.

2.08 MIXING VALVESA. Thermostatic Mixing Valves:

1. Manufacturers:a. ESBE: www.esbe.se/en.b. Leonard Valve Company: www.leonardvalve.com.c. Honeywell Water Controls: http://yourhome.honeywell.com/#sle.d. Watts.: www.watts.com

























































22 1006 - 4

e. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.2. Valve: Chrome plated cast brass body, stainless steel or copper alloy bellows, integral

temperature adjustment.3. ASSE 1070 rated.4. Accessories:

a. Check valve on inlets.b. Volume control shut-off valve on outlet.c. Stem thermometer on outlet.d. Strainer stop checks on inlets.


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with

mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainagesystem.

C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.E. Install approved portable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of

domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems,premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibbs.

F. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.G. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water

supply piping to lavatories sinks .H. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on cold water supply

piping to flush valve water closets.I. Install air chambers on hot and cold water supply piping to each fixture or group of fixtures

(each washroom). Fabricate same size as supply pipe or 3/4 inch minimum, and minimum 18inches long.

J. Install oil/sand interceptors per manufacturer's required installation instruction and ventingprocdedures. Contractor is responsible for all field wiring required to install a fully functionalalarm panel.

END OF SECTION






































PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 3000 - 1

SECTION 22 3000PLUMBING EQUIPMENT


A. Diaphragm-type compression tanks.B. Submersible sump pumps.C. Water heaters.D. Pumps.

1. Circulators.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI Z21.10.1 - Gas Water Heaters - Volume I - Storage Water Heaters with Input Ratings of75,000 Btu per Hour or Less; 2011.

B. ANSI Z21.10.3 - Gas-Fired Water Heaters - Volume III - Storage Water Heaters with InputRatings Above 75,000 Btu per Hour, Circulating and Instantaneous; 2014.

C. ASME BPVC-VIII-1 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules forConstruction of Pressure Vessels; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013.

D. UL 174 - Standard for Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters; UnderwritersLaboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

E. UL 1453 - Standard for Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters;Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittals procedures.B. Product Data:

1. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections toother equipment and piping.

2. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements.C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components.D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data,

replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number.E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Delaware

Solid Waste Authority 's name and registered with manufacturer.1.05 LEED SUBMITTALS: COMPLY WITH SECTION 018113.

A. EQ Credit 2: Low-Emitting Materials1. For interior wet-applied mastics, paints and coatings: Certificate stating compliance with

California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method including TVOC range.a. Include product data stating VOC content in g/L.b. Include volume of material applied per product in liters (L).

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products

specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.B. Identification: Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity

identified by permanently attached label.



C. Performance: Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vaporbinding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

1.07 CERTIFICATIONSA. Water Heaters: NSF approved.B. Gas Water Heaters: Certified by CSA International to 1 or 2, as applicable, in addition to

requirements specified elsewhere.C. Electric Water Heaters: UL listed and labeled to UL 174 or UL 1453.D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories

Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.1.09 WARRANTY

A. See Section 00 1720 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 WATER HEATER MANUFACTURERS

A. A.O. Smith Water Products Co: www.hotwater.com.B. Bradford White: www.bradfordwhite.com.C. Rheem Manufacturing Company: www.rheem.com.D. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

2.02 COMMERCIAL GAS FIRED WATER HEATERSA. Type: Automatic, natural gas-fired, vertical storage.B. Tank: Glass lined welded steel ASME labeled; multiple flue passages, 4 inch diameter

inspection port, thermally insulated with minimum 2 inches glass fiber, encased incorrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish; floor shield and legs.

C. Accessories: Provide:1. Water Connections: Brass.2. Dip tube: Brass.3. Drain Valve.4. Anode: Magnesium.5. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: ASME labelled.

D. Controls: Automatic water thermostat with temperature range adjustable from 120 to 180degrees F, automatic reset high temperature limiting thermostat factory set at 195 degrees F,gas pressure regulator, multi-ribbon or tubular burner, 100 percent safety shut-off pilot andthermocouple, flue baffle and draft hood.

2.03 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKSA. Manufacturers:

1. Amtrol Inc: www.amtrol.com/#sle.2. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com/#sle.3. Taco, Inc: www.taco-hvac.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME BPVC-VIII-1;supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 125 psig, with flexibleEPDM diaphragm sealed into tank, and steel legs or saddles.

C. Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting, tank drain; precharge to 12 psig.



2.04 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPSA. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong Pumps Inc: www.armstrongpumps.com/#sle.2. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com/#sle.3. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig working pressure, with stainless steel rotor assembly.C. Impeller: Bronze.D. Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings.E. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat.F. Drive: Flexible coupling.

2.05 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPSA. Manufacturers:

1. Zoeller Company: www.zoeller.com/#sle.2. Stancor: www.stancor.com3. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Type: Completely submersible, vertical, centrifugal.C. Casing: Stainless Steel pump body and oil filled motor chamber.D. Impeller: Cast iron; open non-clog, stainless steel shaft.E. Bearings: Ball bearings.F. Servicing: Slide-away coupling consisting of discharge elbow secure to sump floor, movable

bracket, guide pipe system, lifting chain and chain hooks.G. Single Point electrical connection.H. Controls: Motor control panel containing across-the-line electric motor starters with ambient

compensated quick trip overloads in each phase with manual trip button and reset button, circuitbreaker, control transformer, electro mechanical alternator, hand-off-automatic selectorswitches, pilot lights, high water alarm pilot light, reset button and alarm horn. Provide mercuryswitch liquid level controls, steel shell switch encased in polyurethane foam with cast iron weightfor pump on (each pump), pump off (common), and alarm.

I. Oil Controls: Provide oil minder control system to de-energize pump when oil is present.1. Control panel to be NEMA 4x.2. Sensor probe to be stainless steel.3. High decibel water tight horn and silence switch.4. Test switch.5. Indicator lights for the following items:

a. Oil alertb. High waterc. High motor ampsd. Power to systeme. Pump activation

6. Alarms for remote monitoring:a. General alarmb. High waterc. System status


A. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required by code,and complying with conditions of certification, if any.

B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping work to achieve operating system.



C. Domestic Water Storage Tanks:1. Provide steel pipe support, independent of building structural framing members.2. Clean and flush prior to delivery to site. Seal until pipe connections are made.

D. Pumps:1. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and

cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

END OF SECTION


PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4000 - 1

SECTION 22 4000PLUMBING FIXTURES


A. Water closets.B. Urinals.C. Lavatories.D. Sinks.E. Service sinks.F. Electric water coolers.G. Showers.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping.B. Section 22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASHRAE Std 18 - Methods of Testing for Rating Drinking-Water Coolers with Self-Contained

Mechanical Refrigeration; 2008.B. ASME A112.6.1M - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use; 1997

(Reaffirmed 2002).C. ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings; 2012.D. ASME A112.19.2 - Ceramic Plumbing Fixtures; 2013.E. ASME A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use); 2008

(R2013).F. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014 (Errata 2015).G. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes,

trim, and finishes.C. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists.D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Delaware

Solid Waste Authority 's name and registered with manufacturer.1.05 LEED SUBMITTALS: COMPLY WITH SECTION 018113.



B. Water Efficiency Prerequisite 2: Indoor Water Use Reduction1. For water closet and urinals, documentation indicating flush rate in gallons per flush (gpf).

a. Include documentation indicating WaterSense Label.2. For faucets, aerators, and showerhead, documentation indicating flow rate in gallons per

minute (gpm).a. Showerhead: Include documentation indicating WaterSense Label.

C. MR Credit 2: BPDO - Environmental Product Declarations



1. For plumbing fixtures, if available: Product-specific declaration or Industry-wide EPD orproduct-specific EPD.

2. Include EPD Summary.D. MR Credit 4: BPDO - Material Ingredients

1. For plumbing fixtures, if available: Material Ingredient Report.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of productsspecified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in

place to protect fixtures and prevent use.1.08 WARRANTY

A. See Section 00 1720 - Project Record Documents, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for electric water cooler.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Potable Water Systems: Provide plumbing fittings and faucets that comply with NSF 61 andNSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.

2.02 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETSA. Water Closets: Vitreous china, ASME A112.19.2, wall hung, siphon jet flush action, china bolt

caps. Provide fixture with watersense label.1. Flush Volume:.92/1.28 gpf, maximum. Dual flush.2. Flush Valve: Concealed in tank.3. Flush Operation: manual, two posistion flush.4. Handle Height: 44 inches or less.5. Manufacturers:

a. American Standard Inc: www.americanstandard.com.b. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com.c. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.d. Toto: www.totousa.come. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

6. Provide fixture with WaterSense label.B. Seats:

1. Manufacturers:a. American Standard, Inc: www.americanstandard-us.com/#sle.b. Bemis Manufacturing Company; ______: www.bemismfg.com/#sle.c. Church Seat Company; ______: www.churchseats.com/#sle.d. Zurn Industries, Inc; ______: www.zurn.com/#sle.e. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

2.03 WALL HUNG URINALSA. Wall Hung Urinal Manufacturers:

1. American Standard, Inc: www.americanstandard-us.com.2. Kohler Company; ______: www.kohler.com/#sle.3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Urinals: Vitreous china, ASME A112.19.2, wall hung with side shields and concealed carrier.1. Flush Volume: 1.0 gallons, maximum.2. Flush Valve: Exposed (top spud).


































3. Flush Operation: Sensor operated. Battery powered.4. Trap: Integral.

C. Flush Valves: ASME A112.18.1, diaphragm type, complete with vacuum breaker stops andaccessories.1. Sensor-Operated Type: Solenoind or motor-driven operator, low voltage hard-wired,

infrared sensor with mechanical over-ride or over-ride push button.2. Exposed Type: Chrome plated, escutcheon, integral screwdriver stop.

D. Carriers:1. Manufacturers:

a. JOSAM Company; ______: www.josam.com/#sle.b. Zurn Industries, Inc; ______: www.zurn.com/#sle.c. JR Smith: www. jrsmith.comd. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

2. ASME A112.6.1M; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wallattachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger, bearing studs.

2.04 LAVATORIESA. Lavatory Manufacturers:

1. American Standard Inc: www.americanstandard.com.2. Kohler Company; ______: www.kohler.com/#sle.3. Zurn Industries, Inc; ______: www.zurn.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Vitreous China Wall Hung Basin: ASME A112.19.2; vitreous china wall hung lavatory,rectangular basin with splash lip, front overflow, and soap depression.

C. Supply Faucet Manufacturers:1. American Standard Inc: www.americanstandard.com.2. Kohler Company; ______: www.kohler.com/#sle.3. Zurn Industries, Inc; ______: www.zurn.com/#sle.4. Speakman: www.speakmancompany.com.5. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

D. Sensor Operated Faucet: Cast brass, chrome plated, wall mounted with sensor located onneck of spout.1. Spout Style: Standard.2. Power Supply: Battery, easily replaceable, alkaline or lithium, minimum 200,000 cycles.3. Mixing Valve: External lever operated.4. Water Supply: 3/8 inch compression connections.5. Aerator: Vandal resistant,.35 GPM, laminar flow device.6. Automatic Shut-off: 15 seconds.7. Sensor range: Factory set at a minimum of 3 inch adjustable up to 24 inch.8. Sensor range: Automatically adjusts.

a. Accessory: Optional remote reprogrammer module to adjust pre-set factoryfunctions.

9. Finish: Polished chrome.10. Sensor Operated Faucet Manufacturers:

a. American Standard, Inc: www.americanstandard-us.com.b. c. Moen Incorporated: www.moen.com.d. Sloan Valve Company: www.sloanvalve.com.e. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.f. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

E. Accessories:1. Offset waste with perforated open strainer.
























































2. Carrier:a. Manufacturers:

1) JOSAM Company; ______: www.josam.com/#sle.2) Zurn Industries, Inc; ______: www.zurn.com/#sle.3) JR Smith: www.jrsmith.com4) Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

b. ASME A112.6.1M; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wallattachment, threaded studs for fixture hanger, bearing plate and studs.

2.05 SINKSA. Sink Manufacturers:

1. American Standard, Inc; ______: www.americanstandard-us.com/#sle.2. Kohler Company; ______: www.kohler.com/#sle.3. Elkay: www.elkayusa.com4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Single Compartment Bowl: ASME A112.19.3; 25 by 22 by 5 inch outside dimensions 20 gage,0.0359 inch thick, Type 302 stainless steel, self rimming and undercoated, with ledge backdrilled for trim.1. Drain: 1-1/2 inch chromed brass drain.

C. Sink Faucet:1. Sink Manufacturers:

a. Zurn: www.zurn.com.b. Elkay: www.elkayusa.comc. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

2. Supply Faucet: ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated combination supply fitting with open gridstrainer, water economy aerator with maximum flow of 1.0 gallon per minute (low-flow),indexed handles.

3. Mixing Valve: External lever operated.4. Water Supply: 1/2 inch compression connections.5.

2.06 SHOWERSA. Trim: ASME A112.18.1; concealed shower supply with indexed handles, bent shower arm with

adjustable spray ball joint showerhead with maximum 1.5 gallons per minute flow, andescutcheon. Provide fixture with watersense label.

B. Shower Valve:1. Comply with ASME A112.18.1.2. Provide single handle ADA compliant and water sensed labeled chrome plated with

integral thermostatic mixing valve to supply 1.5 gpm.C. Low-Flow Shower Head:

1. ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated vandal-proof institutional head with integral wall bracket,built-in 1.5 gpm flow control.

2. Provide fixture with WaterSense label.2.07 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS

A. Electric Water Cooler Manufacturers:1. Elkay Manufacturing Company: www.elkay.com.2. Haws Corporation: www.hawsco.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Water Cooler: Electric, mechanically refrigerated; surface mounted, ADA compliant; stainlesssteel top, vinyl on steel body, elevated anti-squirt bubbler with stream guard, automatic streamregulator, push button, mounting bracket; integral air cooled condenser and stainless steelgrille.























































1. Capacity: 8 gallons per hour of 50 degrees F water with inlet at 80 degrees F and roomtemperature of 90 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASHRAE Std 18.

2. Electrical: 115 V, 60 Hertz compressor, 6 foot cord and plug for connection to electricwiring system including grounding connector.

2.08 SERVICE SINKSA. Service Sink Manufacturers:

1. American Standard, Inc; ______: www.americanstandard-us.com/#sle.2. Elkay Manufacturing Company; ______: www.elkay.com/#sle.3. Fiat Products: www.fiatproducts.com4. Zurn Industries, Inc; ______: www.zurn.com/#sle.5. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Trim: ASME A112.18.1 exposed wall type supply with cross handles, spout wall brace, vacuumbreaker, hose end spout, strainers, eccentric adjustable inlets, integral screwdriver stops withcovering caps and adjustable threaded wall flanges.

C. Accessories:1. 5 feet of 1/2 inch diameter plain end reinforced plastic hose.2. Hose clamp hanger.3. Mop hanger.


A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.C. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top

lavatories and sinks.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixturerough-in schedule for particular fixtures.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and

escutcheons.C. Install components level and plumb.D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and bolts.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or

overflow.3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations.B. Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

3.07 SCHEDULESA. Fixture Heights: Install fixtures to heights above finished floor as indicated.

1. Water Closet:a. Standard: 15 inches to top of bowl rim.b. Accessible: 18 inches to top of seat.



















































2. Water Closet Flush Valves:a. Standard: 11 inches min. above bowl rim.

3. Urinal:a. Standard: 22 inches to top of bowl rim.b. Accessible: 17 inches to top of bowl rim.

4. Lavatory:a. Standard: 31 inches to top of basin rim.b. Accessible: 34 inches to top of basin rim.

5. Drinking Fountain:a. Accessible: 36 inches to top of spout.

6. Shower Heads:a. Adult Male: 69.5 inches to bottom of head.b. Accessible: Adjustable arm, 75" to bottom of hose connection.

7. Emergency Eye and Face Wash:a. Standard: 38 inches to receptor rim.

END OF SECTION




















COMMON MOTORREQUIREMENTS FOR HVACEQUIPMENT

23 0513 - 1

SECTION 23 0513COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT


A. Three phase electric motors.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; 2015.B. IEEE 112 - IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators;

2004.C. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2014.D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 00 1300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection

requirements.C. Test Reports: Indicate test results verifying nominal efficiency and power factor for three phase

motors larger than 1/2 horsepower.D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate setting, mechanical connections, lubrication,

and wiring instructions.E. Operation Data: Include instructions for safe operating procedures.F. Maintenance Data: Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and

lubrication instructions.1.05 LEED SUBMITTALS: COMPLY WITH SECTION 018113.



2. For composite wood installed in building interior: Certificate stating compliance withCalifornia Air Resources Board (CARB) Airborne Toxic Control Measure (ATCM), Phase IIfor ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde (ULEF) resins or product data stating product does notcontain added formaldehyde resins.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Conform to NFPA 70.B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories

Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.C. Interior wet-applied mastics, paints, and coatings: Comply with low-emitting requirements in

Division 01 Section “Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED.”D. Composite wood installed in building interior: Comply with California Air Resources Board

(CARB) Airborne Toxic Control Measure (ATCM), Phase II for ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde(ULEF) resins or containing no added formaldehyde resins.



23 0513 - 2

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and

suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipmentand store separately.

1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 00 1720 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for motors larger than 20 horsepower.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Service:1. Motors 1/2 HP and Smaller: 115 volts, single phase, 60 Hz.2. Motors Larger than 1/2 Horsepower: 208 or 480 volts, three phase, 60 Hz.

B. Construction:1. Open drip-proof type except where specifically noted otherwise.2. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment.3. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class,

service factor, and motor enclosure type.4. Motors with frame sizes 254T and larger: Energy Efficient Type.

C. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps,locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, powerfactor, efficiency.

D. Wiring Terminations:1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials

indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit.2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide threaded

conduit connection in end frame.2.02 APPLICATIONS

A. Exception: Motors less than 250 watts, for intermittent service may be the equipmentmanufacturer's standard and need not conform to these specifications.

B. Motors located outdoors and in draw through cooling towers: Totally enclosed weatherproofepoxy-sealed type.

2.03 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORSA. Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque.B. Starting Current: Six times full load current.C. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design B

characteristics.D. Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Design B

motors.E. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better.F. Testing Procedure: In accordance with IEEE 112. Load test motors to determine free from

electrical or mechanical defects in compliance with performance data.G. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged

provision for relubrication, rated for minimum ABMA STD 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours. Calculatebearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA standardshaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate.

H. Sound Power Levels: To NEMA MG 1.I. Motors to be used with AC drives shall be inverter duty rated and shall conform to the following:



23 0513 - 3

1. All motors used with AC drives shall be equipped with thermostats in the stator windings.2. The motor shall meet NEMA MG-1, Part 31 standards.

a. 1600 Volt rated magnet wire.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any position.C. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate.

END OF SECTION



23 0513 - 4


METERS AND GAGES FORHVAC PIPING

23 0519 - 1

SECTION 23 0519METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING


A. Pressure gages and pressure gage taps.B. Thermometers and thermometer wells.C. Static pressure gages.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASME B40.100 - Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments; 2013.B. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers; 2014.C. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers; 2014.D. UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire-Protection Service; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide list that indicates use, operating range, total range and location for

manufactured components.C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and instrumentation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Manufacturers:1. Dwyer Instruments, Inc: www.dwyer-inst.com/#sle.2. Moeller Instrument Co., Inc: www.moellerinstrument.com/#sle.3. Omega Engineering, Inc: www.omega.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Pressure Gages: ASME B40.100, UL 393 drawn steel case, phosphor bronze bourdon tube,rotary brass movement, brass socket, with front recalibration adjustment, black scale on whitebackground.1. Case: Steel with brass bourdon tube.2. Size: 4-1/2 inch diameter.3. Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent.4. Scale: Psi.

2.02 PRESSURE GAGE TAPPINGSA. Gage Cock: Tee or lever handle, brass for maximum 150 psi.

2.03 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERSA. Manufacturers:

1. Dwyer Instruments, Inc: www.dwyer-inst.com/#sle.2. Omega Engineering, Inc: www.omega.com/#sle.3. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp: www.wekslerglass.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Thermometers - Adjustable Angle: Red- or blue-appearing non-toxic liquid in glass; ASTM E1;lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish, cast aluminum adjustable joint withpositive locking device; adjustable 360 degrees in horizontal plane, 180 degrees in verticalplane.


METERS AND GAGES FORHVAC PIPING

23 0519 - 2

1. Size: 9 inch scale.2. Window: Clear Lexan.3. Stem: 3/4 inch NPT brass.4. Accuracy: 2 percent, per ASTM E77.5. Calibration: Degrees F.

2.04 THERMOMETER SUPPORTSA. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as

required, and with cap and chain.B. Flange: 3 inch outside diameter reversible flange, designed to fasten to sheet metal air ducts,

with brass perforated stem.2.05 TEST PLUGS

A. Test Plug: 1/4 inch or 1/2 inch brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameterpressure or temperature probe with neoprene core for temperatures up to 200 degrees F.

2.06 STATIC PRESSURE GAGESA. Manufacturers:

1. Dwyer Instruments, Inc: www.dwyer-inst.com/#sle.2. Omega Engineering, Inc: www.omega.com/#sle.3. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp: www.wekslerglass.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. 3-1/2 inch diameter dial in metal case, diaphragm actuated, black figures on white background,front recalibration adjustment, 2 percent of full scale accuracy.


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Provide one pressure gage per pump, installing taps before strainers and on suction and

discharge of pump. Pipe to gage.C. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide gage cock to isolate each gage.

Provide siphon on gages in steam systems. Extend nipples and siphons to allow clearancefrom insulation.

D. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smallerthan 2-1/2 inch for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allow clearance frominsulation.

E. Locate duct mounted thermometers minimum 10 feet downstream of mixing dampers, coils, orother devices causing air turbulence.

F. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriatescale.

G. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operatinglevel. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.

H. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero.END OF SECTION


VIBRATION AND SEISMICCONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPINGAND EQUIPMENT

23 0548 - 1

SECTION 23 0548VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


A. Equipment support bases.B. Vibration isolators.C. Inertia bases.D. Vibration isolators.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on each.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate inertia bases and locate vibration isolators, with static and dynamic

load on each. Indicate seismic control measures.D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions with special procedures and

setting dimensions.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Isolation Technology, Inc: www.isolationtech.com.B. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc: www.kineticsnoise.com.C. Mason Industries: www.mason-ind.com.D. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. General:

1. All vibration isolators, base frames and inertia bases to conform to all uniform deflectionand stability requirements under all operating loads.

2. Steel springs to function without undue stress or overloading.2.03 INERTIA BASES

A. Structural Bases:1. Construction: Welded structural steel with gusseted brackets, to support equipment and

motor, with motor slide rails.2. Design: Sufficiently rigid to prevent misalignment or undue stress on machine, and to

transmit design loads to isolators and snubbers.B. Concrete Inertia Bases:

1. Construction: Structural steel channel perimeter frame, with gusseted brackets andanchor bolts, reinforcing; concrete filled.

2. Mass: Minimum of 1.5 times weight of isolated equipment.3. Connecting Point: Reinforced to connect isolators and snubbers to base.4. Concrete: Minimum 3000 psi concrete.

2.04 VIBRATION ISOLATORSA. Restrained Open Spring Isolators:

1. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with workingdeflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. Color code springs for loadcarrying capacity.



23 0548 - 2

2. Spring Mounts: Provide with leveling devices, minimum 0.25 inch thick neoprene soundpads, and zinc chromate plated hardware.

3. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 0.05 inch; meet requirements for neoprenepad isolators.

4. Restraint: Provide heavy mounting frame and limit stops.5. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated

springs.B. Spring Hangers:

1. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with workingdeflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. Color code springs for loadcarrying capacity.

2. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene padisolators.

3. Misalignment: Capable of 20 degree hanger rod misalignment.4. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated

springs.C. Neoprene Pad Isolators:

1. Rubber or neoprene waffle pads.a. Hardness: 30 durometer.b. Thickness: Minimum 1/2 inch.c. Maximum Loading: 50 psi.d. Rib Height: Maximum 0.7 times width.

2. Configuration: Single layer.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Bases:

1. Set steel bases for one inch clearance between housekeeping pad and base.2. Set concrete inertia bases for 2 inches clearance between housekeeping pad and base.3. Adjust equipment level.

C. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially differentfrom installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full loadis applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal.

D. Provide seismic snubbers for all equipment, piping, and ductwork mounted on isolators. Eachinertia base shall have minimum of four seismic snubbers located close to isolators. Snubequipment designated for post-disaster use to 0.05 inch maximum clearance. Other snubbersshall have clearance between 0.15 inch and 0.25 inch.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 00 1400 - Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC), for additional requirements.B. Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report. Include static deflections.

3.03 SCHEDULEA. Pipe Isolation Schedule.

1. 1 Inch Pipe Size: Isolate 120 diameters from equipment.2. 2 Inch Pipe Size: Isolate 90 diameters from equipment.3. 3 Inch Pipe Size: Isolate 80 diameters from equipment.4. 4 Inch Pipe Size: Isolate 75 diameters from equipment.5. 6 Inch Pipe Size: Isolate 60 diameters from equipment.6. 8 Inch Pipe Size: Isolate 60 diameters from equipment.7. 10 Inch Pipe Size: Isolate 54 diameters from equipment.8. 12 Inch Pipe Size: Isolate 50 diameters from equipment.



23 0548 - 3

B. Equipment Isolation Schedule.1. HVAC Pumps.

a. Base: Concrete inertia base.b. Isolator Type: Open Spring Isolators

END OF SECTION



23 0548 - 4


IDENTIFICATION FOR HVACPIPING AND EQUIPMENT

23 0553 - 1

SECTION 23 0553IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


A. Nameplates.B. Tags.C. Pipe Markers.D. Ceiling Tacks

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2007.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 00 1300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.C. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location,

function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.D. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.


A. Air Handling Units: Nameplates.B. Air Terminal Units: Tags.C. Control Panels: Nameplates.D. Heat Transfer Equipment: Nameplates.E. Major Control Components: Nameplates.F. Piping: Tags.G. Pumps: Nameplates.H. Tanks: Nameplates.I. Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling.J. Water Treatment Devices: Nameplates.

2.02 MANUFACTURERSA. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com.B. Champion America, Inc: www.Champion-America.com.C. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec.D. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 NAMEPLATESA. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.

1. Letter Color: White.2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch.3. Background Color: Black.


IDENTIFICATION FOR HVACPIPING AND EQUIPMENT

23 0553 - 2

2.04 TAGSA. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting

background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth

edges.C. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.

2.05 PIPE MARKERSA. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1.B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around

pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification offluid being conveyed.

2.06 CEILING TACKSA. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color coded head.B. Color code as follows:

1. HVAC Equipment: Yellow.2. Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers: Red.3. Heating/Cooling Valves: Blue.



A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply withsufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.D. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above

buried pipe.E. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices

with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags.F. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.G. Identify thermostats relating to terminal boxes or valves with nameplates.H. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.I. Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above lay-in panel ceilings. Locate in corner of

panel closest to equipment.END OF SECTION


TESTING, ADJUSTING, ANDBALANCING FOR HVAC

23 0593 - 1

SECTION 23 0593TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC


A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.B. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic systems.C. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.D. Commissioning activities.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 00 1400 - Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC): Employment of testing agency

and payment for services.B. Section 01 9113 - General Commissioning Requirements: Commissioning requirements that

apply to all types of work.C. Section 23 0800 - Commissioning of HVAC.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASHRAE Std 111 - Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building HVAC

Systems; 2008.B. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental

Systems; 2015, Eighth Edition.C. SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing; 2002.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be

followed and the specific approach for each system and component.1. Submit to Architect.2. Include at least the following in the plan:

a. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiencymeasurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures,parameters, formulas to be used.

b. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment tobe tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each.

c. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and pipingdrawings during the process.

d. Final test report forms to be used.e. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and issue, including:

1) Terminal flow calibration (for each terminal type).2) Diffuser proportioning.3) Branch/submain proportioning.4) Total flow calculations.5) Rechecking.6) Diversity issues.

f. Expected problems and solutions, etc.g. Details of how TOTAL flow will be determined; for example:

1) Air: Sum of terminal flows via control system calibrated readings or via hoodreadings of all terminals, supply (SA) and return air (RA) pitot traverse, SA or RAflow stations.

2) Water: Pump curves, circuit setter, flow station, ultrasonic, etc.h. Confirmation of understanding of the outside air ventilation criteria under all

conditions.



23 0593 - 2

i. Method of verifying and setting minimum outside air flow rate will be verified and setand for what level (total building, zone, etc.).

j. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution.C. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and

balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.1. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report.2. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final

copies for Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.3. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of

calibration.4. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report

format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111.5. Units of Measure: Report data in both I-P (inch-pound) and SI (metric) units.6. Include the following on the title page of each report:

a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.d. Project name.e. Project location.f. Project Engineer.g. Project Contractor.h. Report date.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. TAB contractor shall review all of the drawings with special attention to the controls drawings asthere is additional instruction on the drawings and sequence of operation as to how balancingshall be performed and what information the controls contractor is required to obtain.

B. TAB contractor shall perform ductwork leak tests prior to installation of ceiling. TAB contractorshall schedule this work thru the mechanical contractor.

C. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following:1. SMACNA (TAB).

D. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete workprior to Substantial Completion of the project.

E. Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, including fire andsmoke detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspectionprocedures with the authorities having jurisdiction.

F. TAB Agency Qualifications:1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this

section.2. Certified by one of the following:

a. TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National EnergyManagement Institute: www.tabbcertified.org/#sle.

G. TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications: Certified by same organization as TAB agency.3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the followingconditions:1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.



23 0593 - 3

4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to finalfilters.

5. Duct systems are clean of debris.6. Fans are rotating correctly.7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.10. Air outlets are installed and connected.11. Duct system leakage is minimized.12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented.13. Pumps are rotating correctly.14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place.15. Service and balance valves are open.

B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent proper systembalance.

C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.3.03 PREPARATION

A. Hold a pre-balancing meeting at least one week prior to starting TAB work.1. Require attendance by all installers whose work will be tested, adjusted, or balanced.

B. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instrumentsavailable to Architect to facilitate spot checks during testing.

3.04 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCESA. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems

and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.B. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

3.05 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings

to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such

disruption has been rectified.D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing

doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.3.06 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, andexhaust air quantities at site altitude.

B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area ofduct.

C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts

and noise.E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not

create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devicessuch as dampers and splitters.

F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.

G. For all belt driven fans provide adjustable sheave during balancing process, and thenpermanent sheave once balancing is complete.



23 0593 - 4

H. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extremeconditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and atminimum air flow rate, full heating.

3.07 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDUREA. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities.B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gages to determine

flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flowbalance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system.

C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elementsprior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential inconjunction with air balancing.

D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements.E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and

fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point.3.08 COMMISSIONING

A. See Sections 01 9113 - General Commissioning Requirements and 23 0800 for additionalrequirements.

B. Perform prerequisites prior to starting commissioning activities.C. Fill out Prefunctional Checklists for:

1. Air side systems.2. Water side systems.

D. Furnish to the Commissioning Authority, upon request, any data gathered but not shown in thefinal TAB report.

E. Re-check a random sample equivalent to 10 percent of the final TAB report data as directed byCommissioning Authority.1. Original TAB agency shall execute the re-checks, witnessed by the Commissioning

Authority. 2. Use the same test instruments as used in the original TAB work.3. Failure of more than 10 percent of the re-checked items of a given system shall result in

the rejection of the system TAB report; rebalance the system, provide a new system TABreport, and repeat random re-checks.

4. For purposes of re-check, failure is defined as follows: a. Air Flow of Supply and Return: Deviation of more than 10 percent of instrument

reading.b. Minimum Outside Air Flow: Deviation of more than 20 percent of instrument reading;

for inlet vane or VFD OSA compensation system using linear proportional control,deviation of more than 30 percent at intermediate supply flow.

c. Temperatures: Deviation of more than one degree F.d. Air and Water Pressures: Deviation of more than 10 percent of full scale of test

instrument reading.e. Sound Pressures: Deviation of more than 3 decibels, with consideration for variations

in background noise.5. For purposes of re-check, a whole system is defined as one in which inaccuracies will

have little or no impact on connected systems; for example, the air distribution systemserved by one air handler or the hydronic chilled water supply system served by a chiller orthe condenser water system.

F. In the presence of the Commissioning Authority, verify that:1. Final settings of all valves, splitters, dampers and other adjustment devices have been

permanently marked.2. The air system is being controlled to the lowest possible static pressure while still meeting

design loads, less diversity; this shall include a review of TAB methods, established control



23 0593 - 5

setpoints, and physical verification of at least one leg from fan to diffuser having allbalancing dampers wide open and that during full cooling of all terminal units taking offdownstream of the static pressure sensor, the terminal unit on the critical leg has itsdamper 90 percent or more open.

3. The water system is being controlled to the lowest possible pressure while still meetingdesign loads, less diversity; this shall include a review of TAB methods, established controlsetpoints, and physical verification of at least one leg from the pump to the coil having allbalancing valves wide open and that during full cooling the cooling coil valve of that leg is90 percent or more open.

3.09 SCOPEA. Test, adjust, and balance the following:

1. Plumbing Pumps.2. HVAC Pumps.3. Boilers.4. Air Coils.5. Air Handling Units.6. Fans.7. Air Filters.8. Air Terminal Units.9. Air Inlets and Outlets.

3.10 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTEDA. Electric Motors:

1. Manufacturer.2. Model/Frame.3. HP/BHP.4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load.5. RPM.6. Service factor.7. Sheave Make/Size/Bore.

B. V-Belt Drives:1. Identification/location.2. Required driven RPM.3. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM.4. Belt, size and quantity.5. Motor sheave diameter and RPM.6. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual.

C. Pumps:1. Identification/number.2. Manufacturer.3. Size/model.4. Impeller.5. Service.6. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP.7. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP.8. Discharge pressure.9. Suction pressure.10. Total operating head pressure.

D. Air Cooled Condensers:1. Identification/number.2. Location.3. Manufacturer.4. Model number.



23 0593 - 6

5. Serial number.6. Entering DB air temperature, design and actual.7. Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual.8. Number of compressors.

E. Heat Exchangers:1. Identification/number.2. Location.3. Service.4. Manufacturer.5. Model number.6. Serial number.7. Steam pressure, design and actual.8. Primary water entering temperature, design and actual.9. Primary water leaving temperature, design and actual.10. Primary water flow, design and actual.11. Primary water pressure drop, design and actual.12. Secondary water leaving temperature, design and actual.13. Secondary water flow, design and actual.14. Secondary water pressure drop, design and actual.

F. Cooling Coils:1. Identification/number.2. Location.3. Service.4. Manufacturer.5. Air flow, design and actual.6. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual.7. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual.8. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual.9. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual.10. Water flow, design and actual.11. Water pressure drop, design and actual.12. Entering water temperature, design and actual.13. Leaving water temperature, design and actual.14. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual.15. Air pressure drop, design and actual.

G. Heating Coils:1. Identification/number.2. Location.3. Service.4. Manufacturer.5. Air flow, design and actual.6. Water flow, design and actual.7. Water pressure drop, design and actual.8. Entering water temperature, design and actual.9. Leaving water temperature, design and actual.10. Entering air temperature, design and actual.11. Leaving air temperature, design and actual.12. Air pressure drop, design and actual.

H. Air Moving Equipment:1. Location.2. Manufacturer.3. Model number.4. Serial number.



23 0593 - 7

5. Arrangement/Class/Discharge.6. Air flow, specified and actual.7. Return air flow, specified and actual.8. Outside air flow, specified and actual.9. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual.10. Inlet pressure.11. Discharge pressure.12. Sheave Make/Size/Bore.13. Number of Belts/Make/Size.14. Fan RPM.

I. Return Air/Outside Air:1. Identification/location.2. Design air flow.3. Actual air flow.4. Design return air flow.5. Actual return air flow.6. Design outside air flow.7. Actual outside air flow.8. Return air temperature.9. Outside air temperature.10. Required mixed air temperature.11. Actual mixed air temperature.12. Design outside/return air ratio.13. Actual outside/return air ratio.

J. Exhaust Fans:1. Location.2. Manufacturer.3. Model number.4. Serial number.5. Air flow, specified and actual.6. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual.7. Inlet pressure.8. Discharge pressure.9. Sheave Make/Size/Bore.10. Number of Belts/Make/Size.11. Fan RPM.

K. Duct Traverses:1. System zone/branch.2. Duct size.3. Area.4. Design velocity.5. Design air flow.6. Test velocity.7. Test air flow.8. Duct static pressure.9. Air temperature.10. Air correction factor.

L. Duct Leak Tests:1. Description of ductwork under test.2. Duct design operating pressure.3. Duct design test static pressure.4. Duct capacity, air flow.



23 0593 - 8

5. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor.6. Test apparatus:

a. Blower.b. Orifice, tube size.c. Orifice size.d. Calibrated.

7. Test static pressure.8. Test orifice differential pressure.9. Leakage.

M. Air Monitoring Stations:1. Identification/location.2. System.3. Size.4. Area.5. Design velocity.6. Design air flow.7. Test velocity.8. Test air flow.

N. Terminal Unit Data:1. Manufacturer.2. Type, constant, variable, single, dual duct.3. Identification/number.4. Location.5. Model number.6. Size.7. Minimum static pressure.8. Minimum design air flow.9. Maximum design air flow.10. Maximum actual air flow.11. Inlet static pressure.

END OF SECTION


DUCT INSULATION 23 0713 - 1

SECTION 23 0713DUCT INSULATION


A. Glass Fiber, Flexible.B. Glass Fiber, RigidC. Polyisocyanurate, RigidD. Jackets.E. Duct insulation.F. Insulation jackets.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.B. Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings


[Metric]; 2014.C. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by

Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.D. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for

Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2013.E. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation;

2014.F. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and

Sound Absorbing Material); 2012.G. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.H. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.I. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

National Fire Protection Association; 2006.J. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005.K. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current




A. MR Credit 2: BPDO - Environmental Product Declarations1. For insulation, if available: Product-specific declaration or Industry-wide EPD or


B. MR Credit 4: BPDO - Material Ingredients1. For insulation, if available: Material Ingredient Report.

C. MR Credit 3: BPDO - Sourcing of Raw Materials



1. For bio-based insulation: Manufacturer letter on company letterhead stating raw materialsupplier’s compliance with Sustainable Agriculture Network’s (SAN) SustainableAgriculture Standard, including a link to a publicly available document confirming SANcompliance, dated within one year of the LEED project registration. Include statementindicating percentage by weight of the total assembly that is bio-based. Include materialcost.



of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method including TVOC range.a. Include product data stating VOC content in g/L.b. Include volume of material applied per product in liters (L).

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type

specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience.B. Interior wet-applied mastics: Comply with low-emitting requirements in Division 01 Section

“Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED.”1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification,including product density and thickness.

B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanicaldamage, by storing in original wrapping.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,

mastics, and insulation cements.B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION

A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.

2.02 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLEA. Manufacturer:

1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufinsulation.com.2. Johns Manville: www.jm.com.3. Owens Corning Corporation: www.ocbuildingspec.com/#sle.4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.

B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.1. 'K' value: 0.26 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.2. Minimum Density of 1.0 PCF.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket:1. 0.0032 inch vinyl.2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 1.3 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM

E96/E96M.3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.

2.03 POLYISOCYANURATE, RIGIDA. Insulation consists of a pre-manufactured panel system consisting of four (4) piece interlocking

panels.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E96/E96M







B. The interlocking panels shall be constructed of Dow Thermax polyisocyanurate insulation,ASTM D-1622, normal 2 pcf.1. Water vapor transmission as permeance less than 0.03, per ASTM E-96;2. Water absorption less than 0.3% (24 Hours), per ASTM C-209.3. Flexural strenght more than 40 psi, per ASTM C-203.

C. Operating temperature range of -100 deg. F to +250 deg. F.D. Insulation shall be clad with 0.032" thick embossed aluminum and sealed with vapor barrier

compound. All joints shall interlock to ensure a thermal seal with no pass through seams.E. Panels shall be secured with #10 self-tapping stainless screws with weather seal washers.F. Manufacturers:

1. P.T.M. Manufacturing, LLC Model Techna-Duc.2. Fab-Rite Exterior Duct Cladding System3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

G. Insulation shall be provided with a 20-year warranty.2.04 GLASS FIBER, RIGID

A. Manufacturer:1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufinsulation.com.2. Johns Manville: www.jm.com.3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.

B. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket.1. 'K' value: 0.24 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.2. Maximum service temperature: 450 degrees F.3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent.4. Maximum Density: 8.0 lb/cu ft.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket:1. 0.0032 inch vinyl.2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM

E96/E96M.2.05 JACKETS

A. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M).1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet.2. Finish: Smooth.3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.010 inch thick stainless steel.


A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials.B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. For rigid polyisocyanurate, installation shall only be completed by manufacturer licensedcontractors.

B. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature:1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.





















































4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections,and expansion joints.

C. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature:1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket.2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of

insulation.D. Ducts Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (below 10 feet above

finished floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.E. Exterior Applications: Provide insulation with vapor barrier jacket. Cover with embossed

aluminum.F. External Duct Insulation Application:

1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrieradhesive or tape to match jacket.

2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires.3. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where

necessary to prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insert spacers.4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation

without disturbing wrapping.3.03 SCHEDULES

A. Exhaust Ducts Within 10 ft of Exterior Openings: 2 inches thick, flexible glass fiber or rigidboard.

B. Outside Air Intake Ducts: 2 inches thick, flexible glass fiberor rigid board.C. Supply Ducts within insulated building envelope (R-6 min.): 2 inches thick, flexible glass fiberD. Supply Ducts within building but outside insulated building envelope (R-8 min.): 3 inches thick,

flexible glass fiber, or 2" thick rigid board.E. Return Ducts: 1 inch thick, flexible glass fiber or rigid board.F. Ducts exposed in mechanical room or non public spaces: shall be provided with rigid board and

jacket.END OF SECTION


































HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION 23 0716 - 1

SECTION 23 0716HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION


A. Equipment insulation.B. Flexible removable and reusable blanket insulation.C. Covering.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.C. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

[Metric]; 2014.D. ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular

Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2014.E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.F. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current



thickness for equipment scheduled.1.04 LEED SUBMITTALS: COMPLY WITH SECTION 018113.









1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with not less than three years of documented experience.



B. Interior wet-applied mastics: Comply with low-emitting requirements in Division 01 Section“Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED.”

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification,

including product density and thickness.B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical

damage, by storing in original wrapping.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.

2.02 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATIONA. Manufacturer:

1. Aeroflex USA, Inc: www.aeroflexusa.com.2. Armacell LLC: www.armacell.us/#sle.3. K-Flex USA LLC: www.kflexusa.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTMC534/C534M Grade 1, in sheet form.1. Minimum Service Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F.2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F.3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.

C. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.2.03 JACKETS

A. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet.1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet.2. Finish: Smooth.3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.4. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.

B. Stainless Steel Jacket: ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel.1. Thickness: 0.010 inch.2. Finish: Smooth.3. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.010 inch thick stainless steel.


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.C. Exterior Applications:

1. Provide vapor barrier jacket or finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement.2. Cover with aluminum or stainless steel.

D. Cover glass fiber insulation with metal mesh and finish with heavy coat of insulating cement.E. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over.F. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation so it can

be easily removed and replaced without damage.3.02 SCHEDULE

A. Heating Systems:1. Air Separators: 1" FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C534/C534M































2. Expansion Tanks:1" FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATIONEND OF SECTION






HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 0719 - 1

SECTION 23 0719HVAC PIPING INSULATION


A. Piping insulation.B. Flexible removable and reusable blanket insulation.C. Jackets and accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 8413 - Penetration Firestopping.B. Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.


[Metric]; 2014.C. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2013.D. ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular

Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2014.E. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2015.F. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic

Stainless Steel; 2008 (Reapproved 2013).G. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.H. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.I. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current















this section with not less than three years of documented experience.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, andthickness.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50,maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.

2.02 GLASS FIBERA. Manufacturers:

1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufinsulation.com.2. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.

B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible.1. 'K' Value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F.2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F.3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

C. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered tojacket.1. Maximum Service Temperature: 650 degrees F.2. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film;moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02perm-inches.

2.03 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATIONA. Manufacturer:

1. Armacell LLC: www.armacell.us/#sle.2. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTMC534/C534M Grade 3; use molded tubular material wherever possible.1. Minimum Service Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F.2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F.3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.

2.04 JACKETSA. PVC Plastic.

1. Manufacturers:a. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.













a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F.b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance

with ASTM E96/E96M.d. Thickness: 10 mil.e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.

B. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq yd plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute fire retardantlagging adhesive.1. Lagging Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.

C. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet.1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet.2. Finish: Embossed.3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.

2.05 REUSABLE VALVE COVER AND INSULATIONA. Manufacturers:

1. No Sweat Valve Wraps, Inc.2. ThermaXX LLC3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. All valves, strainers, autoflow valves, circuit setters, ball valves, balancing valves andcombination valves, etc., in chilled water, condenser water, and heating hot water systems, shallbe insulated with a factory fabricated removable and reusable cover.

C. Insulation shall have a minimum k- factor .26, using fiberglass blanket. Flame and smokespread shall be 25/50 per ASTM E-84.

D. Outer jacket shall be made of material equal to DuPont Tychem® QC, overlapping andcompletely covering the insulation with seams joined by tabs made from hook and loopfasteners (Velcro). Butt ends shall have sewn- in-place elastic.

E. Outer jacket shall overlap adjoining sections of pipe insulation.F. Installation shall not require the use of any special hand tools.G. For fittings where operating temperature is below 45°F (7°C), or where the pipe insulation is

greater than 1.5" (38mm), two or more layers of the insulation inserts are required beneath thevalve cover surface.

H. Tychem QC should be limited and kept below 200°F (93°C) by use of proper insulationthickness.

I. Tychem QC should be kept away from contact with, or exposure to, sources of direct or radiatedheat.

J. For fittings where operating temperatures exceed 250°F (121°C), or where pipe insulation isgreater than 1.5" (38mm), two or more layers of the insulation inserts are required beneath thevalve cover surface.


A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.




















































C. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature; insulate entire system includingfittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansionjoints.

D. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied; secure with self-sealing

longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outwardclinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness asadjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

E. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions atequipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.

F. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at equipment.G. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature.

1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoiningpipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

H. Inserts and Shields:1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger.2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.4. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining

insulation; may be factory fabricated.I. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at

supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07 8413.J. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet above

finished floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.K. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with

insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforcedvapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side ofhorizontal piping. Provide two coats of UV resistant finish for flexible elastomeric cellularinsulation without jacketing.

L. Heat Traced Piping: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material,thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Size large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.

3.03 SCHEDULEA. Heating Systems:

1. Heating Water Supply and Return: 2" Glass FiberB. Cooling Systems:

1. Heating Water Supply and Return: 2" Glass Fiber2. Condensate Drains from Cooling Coils: 1/2" Flexible Elastomeric Celluar Insulation

C. Other Systems:1. Piping Exposed to Freezing with Heat Tracing: 2" glass fiber with aluminum jacketing2. Valves and other pipe appurtances: Provide reusable valve cover and insulation

END OF SECTION


















































HVAC Commissioning Requirements 230800 - 1

SECTION 230800 - HVAC COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 1. GENERAL

1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS1.2. SUMMARY1.3. CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES1.4. COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION1.5. SUBMITTALS

PART 2. EXECUTION

2.1. TESTING PREPARATION2.2. TAB VERIFICATION2.3. TESTING



SECTION 230800 - HVAC COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for commissioning the HVAC system and its subsystems and equipment. This Section supplements the general requirements specified in Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements."

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for general requirements for commissioning processes that apply to this Section.

C. The following systems and/or equipment shall be commissioned:

1. AHUs2. VAVs3. Hydronic Hot Water Boilers4. Exhaust Fans5. Electric Unit Heaters6. Testing and Balancing (TAB) Verification7. Building Automation System

1.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The following responsibilities are in addition to those specified in Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements."

B. Contractor:

1. Attend procedures meeting for TAB Work.2. Certify that TAB Work is complete.3. Assist performing functional performance tests.

C. Mechanical Contractor:

1. Attend TAB verification testing.2. Provide representative who is has extensive knowledge of all equipment to assist with

functional performance testing.



3. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and data acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test period.

D. HVAC Instrumentation and Control Contractor: With the CxA, review control designs for compliance with the contract documents, controllability with respect to actual equipment to be installed, and recommend adjustments to control designs and sequence of operation descriptions. Provide representative who is has extensive knowledge of all equipment to assist with functional performance testing.

E. TAB Subcontractor:

1. Contract Documents Review: With the CxA, review the Contract Documents before developing TAB procedures.

a. Verify the following:

1) Accessibility of equipment and components required for TAB Work.2) Adequate number and placement of duct balancing dampers to allow proper

balancing while minimizing sound levels in occupied spaces.3) Adequate number and placement of balancing valves to allow proper

balancing and recording of water flow.4) Adequate number and placement of test ports and test instrumentation to

allow reading and compilation of system and equipment performance data needed to conduct both TAB and commissioning testing.

5) Air and water flow rates have been specified and compared to central equipment output capacities.

b. Identify discontinuities and omissions in the contract documents.c. This review of the contract documents by the TAB Subcontractor satisfies

requirements for a design review report as specified in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."

d. Assist performing functional performance tests.e. Assist in testing and balancing verification of 10% of readings from the TAB report

with the commissioning agent.

2. Additional Responsibilities: Participate in tests specified in Division 23 Sections "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" and "Sequence of Operation."

F. Electrical Contractor:

1. With the Mechanical Contractor, coordinate installations and connections between and among electrical and HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.

2. Assist with lighting controls functional testing.

1.4 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION

A. The following are in addition to documentation specified in Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements."



B. Test Checklists: CxA with assistance of Contractor shall develop test checklists for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment, including interfaces and interlocks with other systems. CxA shall prepare separate checklists for each mode of operation and provide space to indicate whether the mode under test responded as required. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements," checklists shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Calibration of sensors and sensor function.2. Testing conditions under which test was conducted, including (as applicable) ambient

conditions, set points, override conditions, and status and operating conditions that impact the results of test.

3. Control sequences for HVAC systems.4. Sequence of response(s) to control signals at specified conditions.5. Electrical power input at specified conditions.6. Expected performance of systems, subsystems, and equipment at each step of test.7. Narrative description of observed performance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

Notation to indicate whether the observed performance at each step meets the expected results.

8. Interaction of auxiliary equipment.9. Deficiencies List.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. The following submittals are in addition to those specified in Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements."

B. Testing Procedures: CxA shall submit detailed testing plan, procedures, and checklists for each series of tests. Submittals shall include samples of data reporting sheets that will be part of the reports.

C. Pre-functional checklists: Contractor shall compile pre-functional checklists from contractor certifying that systems, subsystems, equipment, and associated controls are ready for testing.

D. Pre-functional, point-to-point, startup: Contractor shall verify that installation, controls and startup activities have been completed. Certification shall include completed checklists provided by CxA.

E. Functional testing: CxA shall compile and submit functional performance testing reports, and shall include them in systems manual and commissioning report.

F. Deficiency list: CxA shall submit deficiency list.

G. Certified TAB Reports: CxA shall submit verified, certified TAB reports.



PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 TESTING PREPARATION

A. Prerequisites for Testing:

1. Certify that HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment have been completed, calibrated, and started; are operating according to the Contract Documents; and that pre-functional checklists are signed and submitted.

2. Certify that HVAC instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated; are operating according to the Contract Documents; and that pretest set points have been recorded.

3. Certify that TAB procedures have been completed, and that TAB reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.

4. Test systems and intersystem performance after approval of test checklists for systems, subsystems, and equipment.

5. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shut down, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions).

6. Verify each operating cycle after it has been running for a specified period and is operating in a steady-state condition.

7. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists. Sign off each item as acceptable, or failed. Repeat this test for each operating cycle that applies to system being tested.

8. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with and life-safety systems during each mode of operation.

9. Annotate checklist or data sheet when a deficiency is observed.10. Verify equipment interface with monitoring and control system and data points are trended

as per the design sequence.

11. Verify proper responses of monitoring and control system controllers and sensors to include the following:

a. For each controller or sensor, record the indicated monitoring and control system reading and the test instrument reading. If initial test indicates that the test reading is outside of the control range of the installed device, check calibration of the installed device and adjust as required. Retest malfunctioning devices and record results on checklist or data sheet.

b. Report deficiencies and prepare a deficiencies list.

12. Verify that HVAC equipment field quality-control testing has been completed and approved. CxA shall direct, witness, and document field quality-control tests, inspections, and startup specified in individual Division 23 Sections.

2.2 TAB VERIFICATION

A. TAB Subcontractor shall coordinate with CxA for work required in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." TAB Subcontractor shall copy CxA with required reports, sample forms, checklists, and certificates.



B. Contractor, HVAC Contractor, and CxA shall witness TAB Work.

C. TAB Preparation:

1. TAB Subcontractor shall provide CxA with data required for "Pre-Field TAB Engineering Reports" specified in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."

a. CxA shall use this data to certify that prestart and startup activities have been completed for systems, subsystems, and equipment installation.

D. Verification of Final TAB Report:

1. CxA shall select, at random, 10 percent of report for field verification.2. CxA shall notify TAB Subcontractor 10 days in advance of the date of field verification;

however, notice shall not include data points to be verified. The TAB Subcontractor shall use the same instruments (by model and serial number) that were used when original data were collected.

3. Failure of an item is defined as follows:

a. For all readings a deviation of more than 10 percent.

4. Failure of more than 10 percent of selected items shall result in rejection of final TAB report.

E. If deficiencies are identified during verification testing, CxA shall notify the HVAC Contractor and Architect, and shall take action to remedy the deficiency. Architect shall review final tabulated checklists and data sheets to determine if verification is complete and that system is operating according to the Contract Documents.

F. CxA shall certify that TAB Work has been successfully completed.

2.3 TESTING

A. Test systems and intersystem performance after test checklists for systems, subsystems, and equipment have been approved.

B. Perform tests using design conditions whenever possible.

1. Simulate conditions by imposing an artificial load when it is not practical to test under design conditions and when written approval for simulated conditions is received from CxA. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Set and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions.

2. Alter set points when simulating conditions is not practical and when written approval is received from CxA.

C. Scope of HVAC Contractor Testing:

1. Testing scope shall include entire HVAC installation, from central equipment for heat generation and refrigeration through distribution systems to each conditioned space. It shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of operational and control functions.



2. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system controllers and sensors.

D. Detailed Testing Procedures: CxA, with HVAC Contractor, TAB Subcontractor, and HVAC Instrumentation and Control Contractor, shall prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.

E. HVAC Instrumentation and Control System Testing:

1. Field testing plans and testing requirements are specified in Division 23 Sections "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" and "Sequence of Operation." The CxA, HVAC Contractor, and the HVAC Instrumentation and Control Contractor shall collaborate to prepare testing plans.

2. CxA shall convene a meeting of appropriate entities to review test report of HVAC instrumentation and control systems.

F. Deferred Testing:

1. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC system, the deficiency shall be documented and reported to owner. Deficiencies shall be resolved and corrected by appropriate parties and test rescheduled.

2. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, appropriate initial performance tests shall be completed and documented and additional tests scheduled.

G. Testing Reports:

1. Reports shall include measured data, data sheets, and a comprehensive summary describing the operation of systems at the time of testing.

2. Include data sheets for each controller to verify proper operation of the control system, the system it serves, the service it provides, and its location. For each controller, provide space for recording its readout, the reading at the controller's sensor(s), plus comments. Provide space for testing personnel to sign off on each data sheet.

3. Prepare a preliminary test report. Deficiencies will be evaluated by Architect to determine corrective action. Deficiencies shall be corrected and test repeated.

END OF SECTION


BUILDING AUTOMATIONSYSTEM (BAS) GENERAL

23 0950 - 1

SECTION 23 0950BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS) GENERAL

PART 1 - GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. General RequirementsB. Description of WorkC. Quality AssuranceD. System ArchitectureE. Distributed Processing Units/Quantity and LocationF. Demolition and Reuse of Existing Materials and EquipmentG. Sequence of Work

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTSA. Section 23 09 69 - Variable Frequency ControllersB. Section 23 09 51 - Building Automation System (BAS) Basic Materials, Interface Devices, and

SensorsC. Section 23 09 52 - BAS Operator InterfacesD. Section 23 09 53 - BAS Field PanelsE. Section 23 09 54 - BAS Communication DevicesF. Section 23 09 55 - BAS Software and ProgrammingG. Section 23 09 58 - Sequences of OperationH. Section 23 09 59 - BAS Commissioning

1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORKA. The building automation system (BAS) defined in this specification shall utilize the BACnet

communication requirements as defined by ASHRAE/ANSI 135 (current version andaddendum) for all communication.

B. Contractor shall furnish and install a building automation system (BAS). The new BAS shallutilize electronic sensing, microprocessor-based digital control, and electronic actuation ofdampers and valves to perform control sequences and functions specified. The BAS for thisproject will generally consist of monitoring and control of systems listed below. Reference alsocontrol drawings, sequences of operation, and points lists.

C. The systems to be controlled under work of this section basically comprise new HVAC systems. The HVAC systems being controlled are Air Handling Units, VAV Systems, Boilers, Pumps,Exhaust Fans, and other devices. This Section defines the manner and method by which thesecontrols function.

D. The BAS contractor shall provide Variable Frequency Controllers for all equipment identified ashaving a Variable Frequency Controler (or Variable Frequency Drives "VFD"). The VariableFrequency Controler shall be in accordance with specification section 23 09 69.

1.04 APPLICATION OF OPEN PROTOCOLSA. Subject to the detailed requirements provided throughout the specifications, the BAS and digital

control and communications components installed, as work of this contract shall be anintegrated distributed processing system utilizing BACnet. System components shallcommunicate using true BacNET in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 135 and currentaddenda and annexes, including all workstations, all building controllers, and all applicationspecific controllers. Gateways to other communication protocols are not acceptable.



23 0950 - 2

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Product Line Demonstrated History: The product line being proposed for the project must have

an installed history of demonstrated satisfactory operation for a length of 2 years since date offinal completion in at least 10 installations of comparative size and complexity. Submittals shalldocument this requirement with references.The following requirement relates to the actual installing contractor.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms specializing and experienced in control system installations fornot less than 5 years. Firms with experience in BAS installation projects with point counts equalto this project and systems of the same character as this project. If installer is a Value AddedReseller (VAR) of a manufacturer's product, installer must demonstrate at least three yearsprior experience with that manufacturer's products. Experience starts with awarded FinalCompletion of previous projects. Submittals must document this experience with references.

C. Installer's Experience with Proposed Product Line: Firms shall have specialized in and beexperienced with the installation of the proposed product line for not less than one year fromdate of final completion on at least 3 projects of similar size and complexity. Submittals shalldocument this experience with references.

D. Installer's Field Coordinator and Sequence Programmer Qualifications: Individual(s) shallspecialize in and be experienced with control system installation for not less than 5 years. Proposed field coordinator shall have experience with the installation of the proposed productline for not less than 2 projects of similar size and complexity. Installer shall submit the namesof the proposed individual and at least one alternate for each duty. Submittals shall documentthis experience with references. The proposed individuals must show proof of the followingtraining:1. Product Line Training: Individuals overseeing the installation and configuration of the

proposed product line must provide evidence of the most advanced training offered by theManufacturer on that product line for installation and configuration

2. Programming Training: Individuals involved with programming the site-specific sequencesshall provide evidence of the most advanced programming training offered by the vendorof the programming application offered by the Manufacturer.

E. Installer's Service Qualifications: The installer must be experienced in control system operation,maintenance and service. Installer must document a minimum 5 year history of servicinginstallations of similar size and complexity. Installer must also document at least a one yearhistory of servicing the proposed product line.

F. Installer's Response Time and Proximity1. Installer must maintain a fully capable service facility within a 45 mile radius of the project

site. Service facility shall manage the emergency service dispatches and maintain theinventory of spare parts.

2. Emergency response times are listed below in this section. Installer must demonstrate theability to meet the response times.

1.06 CODES AND STANDARDSA. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

1. ASHRAE 135: BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation andControl Networks. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-ConditioningEngineers, Inc. current edition including all related addenda shall apply.

B. Electronics Industries Alliance1. EIA-709.1-A-99: Control Network Protocol Specification2. EIA-709.3-99: Free-Topology Twisted-Pair Channel Specification3. EIA-232: Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit-Terminating

Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange.4. EIA-458: Standard Optical Fiber Material Classes and Preferred Sizes5. EIA-485: Standard for Electrical Characteristics of Generator and Receivers for use in

Balanced Digital Multipoint Systems.



23 0950 - 3

6. EIA-472: General and Sectional Specifications for Fiber Optic Cable7. EIA-475: Generic and Sectional Specifications for Fiber Optic Connectors and all Sectional

Specifications8. EIA-573: Generic and Sectional Specifications for Field Portable Polishing Device for

Preparation Optical Fiber and all Sectional Specifications9. EIA-590: Standard for Physical Location and Protection of Below-Ground Fiber Optic

Cable Plant and all Sectional SpecificationsC. Underwriters Laboratories

1. UL 916: Energy Management Systems.The following rating is required only for devices used for smoke control purposes. If theseare not intended, delete.

2. UUKL 864: UL Supervised Smoke ControlD. NEMA Compliance

1. NEMA 250: Enclosure for Electrical Equipment2. NEMA ICS 1: General Standards for Industrial Controls.

E. NFPA Compliance1. NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems"

where applicable to controls and control sequences.2. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)

F. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)1. IEEE 142: Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power

Systems2. IEEE 802.3: CSMA/CD (Ethernet - Based) LAN3. IEEE 802.4: Token Bus Working Group (ARCNET - Based) LAN

1.07 DEFINITIONSA. Advanced Application Controller (AAC): A device with limited resources relative to the Building

Controller (BC). It may support a level of programming and may also be intended forapplication specific applications.

B. Application Protocol Data Unit (APDU): A unit of data specified in an application protocol andconsisting of application protocol control information and possible application user data (ISO9545).

C. Application Specific Controller (ASC): A device with limited resources relative to the AdvancedApplication Controller (AAC). It may support a level of programming and may also be intendedfor application-specific applications. .

D. BACnet/BACnet Standard: BACnet communication requirements as defined by ASHRAE/ANSI135 (Current edition and addendum).

E. BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBB): A BIBB defines a small portion of BACnetfunctionality that is needed to perform a particular task. BIBBS are combined to build theBACnet functional requirements for a device in a specification.

F. Binding: In the general sense, binding refers to the associations or mappings of the sourcesnetwork variable and their intended opr required destinations.

G. Building Automation System (BAS): The entire integrated management and control systemH. Building Controller (BC): A fully programmable device capable of carrying out a number of tasks

including control and monitoring via direct digital control (DDC) of specific systems, acting as acommunications router between the controlled devices / equipment and the CSS, andtemporary data storage for trend information, time schedules, and alarm data.

I. Change of Value (COV): An event that occurs when a measured or calculated analog valuechanges by a predefined amount (ASHRAE/ANSI 135 (current version and addendum)).

J. Client: A device that is the requestor of services from a server. A client device makes requestsof and receives responses from a server device.



23 0950 - 4

K. Continuous Monitoring: A sampling and recording of a variable based on time or change of state(e.g. trending an analog value, monitoring a binary change of state).

L. Controller or Control Unit (CU): Intelligent stand-alone control device. Controller is a genericreference and shall include BCs, AACs, and ASCs as appropriate.

M. Control Systems Server (CSS): A server class computer(s) that maintains the systemsconfiguration and programming database. This server is located within the building as part ofthe DDC system and serves as an access point to BAS.

N. Controlling LAN: High speed, peer-to-peer controller LAN connecting BCs, AACs and ASCs. Refer to System Architecture below.

O. Direct Digital Control (DDC): Microprocessor-based control including Analog/Digital conversionand program logic

P. Functional Profile: A collection of variables required to define a the key parameters for astandard application. As this applies to the HVAC industry, this would include applications likeVAV terminal, fan coil units, and the like.

Q. Gateway (GTWY): A device, which contains two or more dissimilar networks/protocols,permitting information exchange between them.

R. Hand Held Device (HHD): Manufacturer's microprocessor based device for direct connection toa Controller.

S. LAN Interface Device (LANID): Device or function used to facilitate communication and sharingof data throughout the BAS

T. Local Area Network (LAN): General term for a network segment within the architecture. Varioustypes and functions of LANs are defined herein.

U. Local Supervisory LAN: Also known as the owner's Network: Ethernet-based networkconnecting Primary Controlling LANs with each other and OWSs and CSSs. See SystemArchitecture below.

V. Master-Slave/Token Passing (MS/TP): Data link protocol as defined by the BACnet standard.W. Open Database Connectivity (ODBC): An open standard application-programming interface

(API) for accessing a database developed. ODBC compliant systems make it possible toaccess any data from any application, regardless of which database management system(DBMS) is handling the data.

X. Operator Interface (OI): A device used by the operator to manage the BAS including OWSs,POTs, and HHDs.

Y. Operator Workstation (OWS): The user's interface with the BAS system. As the BAS networkdevices are stand-alone, dedicated OWS is not required for communications to occur. TheOWS can be any computer on the owner's Network that has a compatible Web browser.

Z. Point-to-Point (PTP): Serial communication as defined in the BACnet standard.AA. Portable Operators Terminal (POT): Mobile computer used both for direct connection to a

controller as well as network connection.AB. Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS): A written document, created by the

manufacturer of a device, which identifies the particular options specified by BACnet that areimplemented in the device (ASHRAE/ANSI 135 (current version and addendum)).

AC. Router: A device that connects two or more networks at the network layer.AD. Secondary Controlling LAN: LAN connecting AACs and ASCs, generally lower speed and less

reliable than the Controlling LAN. Refer to System Architecture below.AE. Server : A device that is a provider of services to a client. A client device makes requests of and

receives responses from a server device.AF. Standardized Query Language (SQL): A database computer language designed for managing

data in relational database management system (RDBMS). Its scope includes data insert,query, update and delete, schema creation and modification, and data access control.



23 0950 - 5

AG. Smart Device: A control I/O device such as a sensor or actuator that can directly communicatewith a controller through the network. This differs from an ASC in that it typically deals only withone variable.

AH. Extensible Markup Language (XML): A specification developed by the World Wide WebConsortium. XML is a pared-down version of SGML, designed especially for Web documents. It is a set of rules for encoding documents in machine-readable form that allows designers tocreate their own customized tags, enabling the definition, transmission, validation, andinterpretation of data between applications and between organizations.

1.08 FUNCTIONAL INTENTA. Throughout Sections 23 09 50 through 23 09 55, the Sequences of Operation, and Section 23

09 59 detailed requirements are specified, some of which indicate a means, method orconfiguration acceptable to meet that requirement. Contractor may submit products that utilizealternate means, methods, and configurations that meet the functional intent. However thesewill only be allowed with prior approval.

1.09 SUBMITTALSA. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 .B. Electronic Submittals: While all requirements for hard copy submittal apply, control submittals

and O&M information shall also be provided in electronic format as follows.1. Drawings and Diagrams: Shop drawings shall be provided on electronic media as an

AutoCAD (current version) and/or Adobe Portable Document Format file. All 'X reference'and font files must be provided with AutoCAD files.

2. Other Submittals: All other submittals shall be provided in Adobe Portable DocumentFormat (PDF).

C. Qualifications: Manufacturer, Installer, and Key personnel qualifications as indicated for theappropriate item above.

D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each control device, panel, andaccessory furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance and electricalcharacteristics, and material finishes. Also include installation and start-up instructions.

E. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each control system, including a complete drawingfor each air handling unit, system, pump, device, etc. with all point descriptors, addresses andpoint names indicated. Each shop drawing shall contain the following information:1. System Architecture and System Layout:

a. One-line diagram indicating schematic locations of all control units, workstations, LANinterface devices, gateways, etc. Indicate network number, device ID, , instancenumber, MAC address, drawing reference number, and controller type for eachcontrol unit. Indicate media, protocol, baud rate, and type of each LAN. Indicatemedia, protocol, baud rate, and type of each LAN. All optical isolators, repeaters,end-of-line resistors, junctions, ground locations etc. shall be located on the diagram.

b. Provide electronic floor plans locating all control units, workstations, LAN interfacedevices, gateways, etc. Include all network communication wiring routing, powerwiring, power originating sources, and low voltage power wiring. Indicate networknumber, device ID, instance number, MAC address, drawing reference number, andcontroller type for each control unit. Indicate media, protocol, baud rate, and type ofeach LAN. All optical isolators, repeaters, end-of-line resistors, junctions, groundlocations etc. shall be located on the floor plans. Wiring routing as-built conditionsshall be maintained accurately throughout the construction period and the drawingshall be updated to accurately reflect accurate, actual installed conditions.

2. Schematic flow diagram of each air and water system showing fans, coils, dampers,valves, pumps, heat exchange equipment and control devices. Include verbal descriptionof sequence of operation.

3. All physical points on the schematic flow diagram shall be indicated with names,descriptors, and point addresses identified as listed in the point summary table.



23 0950 - 6

4. With each schematic, provide a point summary table listing building number andabbreviation, system type, equipment type, full point name, point description, Ethernetbackbone network number, network number, device ID, object ID (object type, instancenumber). See Section 23 09 55 - Part III for additional requirements.

5. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control.6. Label each input and output with the appropriate range.7. Provide a Bill of Materials with each schematic. Indicate device identification to match

schematic and actual field labeling, quantity, actual product ordering number,manufacturer, description, size, voltage range, pressure range, temperature range, etc. asapplicable.

8. With each schematic, provide valve and actuator information including size, Cv, designflow, design pressure drop, manufacturer, model number, close off rating, etc. Indicatenormal positions of spring return valves and dampers.

9. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Electrical wiring diagrams shall include both ladderlogic type diagram for motor starter, control, and safety circuits and detailed digitalinterface panel point termination diagrams with all wire numbers and terminal blocknumbers identified. Provide panel termination drawings on separate drawings. Ladderdiagrams shall appear on system schematic. Clearly differentiate between portions ofwiring, which are existing, factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.

10. Details of control panels, including controls, instruments, and labeling shown in plan orelevation indicating the installed locations.

11. Sheets shall be consecutively numbered.12. Each sheet shall have a title indicating the type of information included and the HVAC

system controlled.13. Table of Contents listing sheet titles and sheet numbers.14. Legend and list of abbreviations.15. Memory allocation projections.16. Submit along with shop drawings but under separate cover calculated and guaranteed

system response times of the most heavily loaded LAN in the system.F. Open Protocol Information

1. BACnet Systems:a. BACnet object description, object ID, and device ID, for each I/O point.b. Documentation for any non-standard BACnet objects, properties, or enumerations

used detailing their structure, data types, and any associated lists of enumeratedvalues.

c. Submit PICS indicating the BACnet functionality and configuration of each controller.G. Framed Control Drawings: Laminated control drawings including system control schematics,

sequences of operation and panel termination drawings, shall be provided in panels for majorpieces of equipment. Terminal unit drawings shall be located in the central plant equipmentpanel or mechanical room panel.

H. Control Logic Documentation1. Submit control logic program listings (for graphical programming) and logic flow charts (for

line type programs) to document the control software of all control units.2. Control logic shall be annotated to describe how it accomplishes the sequence of

operation. Annotations shall be sufficient to allow an operator to relate each programcomponent (block or line) to corresponding portions of the specified Sequence ofOperation.

3. Include written description of each control sequence.4. Include control response, settings, setpoints, throttling ranges, gains, reset schedules,

adjustable parameters and limits.5. Sheets shall be consecutively numbered.6. Each sheet shall have a title indicating the controller designations and the HVAC system

controlled.7. Include Table of Contents listing sheet titles and sheet numbers



23 0950 - 7

8. Submit one complete set of programming and operating manuals for all digital controllersconcurrently with control logic documentation. This set will count toward the requirednumber of Operation and Maintenance materials specified below and in Section 01 30 00.

I. Operation and Maintenance Materials:1. Submit documents under provisions of Section 01 03 00. One copy of the materials shall

be delivered directly to the owner facilities operation staff, in addition to the copies requiredby other Sections.

2. Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts lists for each type of control device,control unit, and accessory.

3. Submit BAS User's Guides (Operating Manuals) for each controller type .4. Submit BAS advanced Programming Manuals for each controller type.5. Include all submittals (product data, shop drawings, control logic documentation, hardware

manuals, software manuals, installation guides or manuals, maintenance instructions andspare parts lists) in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.

J. Controls contractor shall provide the owner with all product line technical manuals and technicalbulletins, to include new and upgraded products, by the same distribution channel as to dealersor branches. This service will be provided for 5 years as part of the contract price, and will beoffered to the owner thereafter for the same price as to a dealer or branch.

K. Manufacturers Certificates: For all listed and/or labeled products, provide certificate ofconformance.

L. Product Warranty Certificates: submit manufacturers product warranty certificates covering thehardware provided.

1.10 LEED SUBMITTALS: COMPLY WITH SECTION 018113.A. EQ Credit 1: Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies

1. For wall-mounted carbon dioxide sensors, documentation indicating accuracy in percent.1.11 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit documents under provisions of Section 01 30 00.B. Record copies of product data and control shop drawings updated to reflect the final installed

condition.C. Record copies of approved control logic programming and database on paper and on CD's.

Accurately record actual setpoints and settings of controls, final sequence of operation,including changes to programs made after submission and approval of shop drawings andincluding changes to programs made during specified testing.

D. Record copies of approved project specific graphic software on CDs.E. Record copies shall include individual floor plans with controller locations with all interconnecting

wiring routing including space sensors, LAN wiring, power wiring, low voltage power wiring. Indicate device instance, MAC address and drawing reference number.

F. Provide record riser diagram showing the location of all controllers.G. Maintain project record documents throughout the warranty period and submit final documents

at the end of the warranty period1.12 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. The system provided shall incorporate hardware resources sufficient to meet the functionalrequirements of these Specifications. The Contractor shall include all items not specificallyitemized in these Specifications that are necessary to implement, maintain, and operate thesystem in compliance with the functional intent of these Specifications.

B. The system shall be configured as a distributed processing network(s) capable of expansion asspecified below.

C. The system architecture shall consist of the Ethernet-based owner Network, and ControllingLANs that support BCs, AACs, ASCs, Operator Workstations (OWS), Smart Devices (SD), and



23 0950 - 8

Remote Communication Devices (RCDs) as applicable. The following indicates a functionaldescription of the BAS structure.1. owner Network: Internet-based network connecting multiple facilities with a central data

and application server, accessible via standard web-browser. This is an existinginfrastructure and contractor is not required to configure any components of this network. Refer to Section 23 09 54 for requirements. This contractor shall integrate the controllingdevices and the CCS together.

2. Local Supervisory LAN: The Local Supervisory LAN shall be an Ethernet-based, 100Mbps LAN connecting Primary Control LANs and OWSs. The LAN serves as the inter-BCgateway and OWS-to-BC gateway and communications path. Contractor shall provide thisas a dedicated LAN for the control system. LAN shall be IEEE 802.3 Ethernet over Fiberor Category 5 cable with switches and routers that support 100 Mbps throughput. Power-line carrier communication shall not be acceptable for communications. Thephysical media will be that installed for the IT infrastructure of the facility and as suchnetwork drops will be provided under that scope of work to facilitate work of this scope. This network will be 100 Mbps and therefore all network interface cards shall support thatspeed. The higher level layers of this network shall be BACnet as described below:a. BACnet Supervisory LAN: Shall be BACnet/IP as defined in the BACnet standard,

and shall share a common network number for the Ethernet backbone, as defined inthe BACnet standard. Point/Object naming conventions are specified in 23 09 55 -Part III.

3. Controlling LAN: High-speed, peer-to-peer communicating LAN used to connect AACs,ASCs and Building Controllers (BCs) and communicate exclusively control information. Acceptable technologies include:a. Ethernet (IEEE802.3)b. ARCNET (IEEE802.4)c. Communication to/from building controller (BC) and the control system server (CSS)

shall utilize standard TCP/IP, BACnet/IP ports (80and/or 47808)4. Secondary Controlling LAN : Network used to connect AACs, ASCs or SDs. These can

be Master Slave/ Token Passing or polling, in addition to those allowed for PrimaryController LANs. Network speed vs. the number of controllers on the LAN shall bedictated by the response time and trending requirements.

D. Dynamic Data Access: Any data throughout any level of the network shall be available to andaccessible by all other devices, Controllers and OWS, whether directly connected or connectedremotely.

E. Remote Data Access: The system shall support the following methods of remote access to thebuilding data.1. Browser-based access: A remote user using a standard browser shall be able to access

all control system facilities and graphics with proper authentication. The owner shallmaintain continuous network connection. The following paradigms are acceptable forbrowser-based access:a. Native Internet-based user interface (HTML, Java, XML, etc.) via a standard freely

distributed web browser that does not require a Windows client software installation.F. The communication speed between the controllers, LAN interface devices, and operator

interface devices shall be sufficient to ensure fast system response time under any loadingcondition. Contractor shall submit guaranteed response times with shop drawings includingcalculations to support the guarantee. In no case shall delay times between an event, request,or command initiation and its completion be greater than those listed herein. Contractor shallrecommend reconfiguring the LAN as necessary to accomplish these performancerequirements.:1. 5 seconds between a Level 1 (critical) alarm occurrence and enunciation at operator

workstation.2. 10 seconds between a Level 2 alarm occurrence and enunciation at operator workstation.3. 20 seconds between and a Level 3-5 alarm occurrence and enunciation at operator

workstation.



23 0950 - 9

4. 10 seconds between an operator command via the operator interface to change a setpointand the subsequent change in the controller.

5. 5 seconds between an operator command via the operator interface to start/stop a deviceand the subsequent command to be received at the controller.

6. 10 seconds between a change of value or state of an input and it being updated on theoperator interface.

7. 10 seconds between an operator selection of a graphic and it completely painting thescreen and updating at least 10 points.

G. Control Systems Server (CSS): A server class computer(s) that maintains the systemsconfiguration and programming database. This server is located within the building's data centerand in a virtual environment and serves as an access point to BAS. It shall hold the backup filesof the information downloaded into the individual controllers and as such support uploading anddownloading that information directly to/from the controllers. It shall also act as a controlinformation server to non-control system based programs. It shall allow secure multiple-accessto the control information. Refer to Section 23 09 52 - BAS Operator Interfaces for itsrequirements.

H. The Operator Interface shall provide for overall system supervision, graphical user interface,management report generation, alarm annunciation, and remote monitoring. Refer to Section23 09 52 - BAS Operator Interfaces.

I. The BCs, AACs, ASCs, [and SDs] shall monitor, control, and provide the field interface for allpoints specified. Each BC, AAC, or ASC shall be capable of performing all specified energymanagement functions, and all DDC functions, independent of other BCs, AACs, or ASCs andoperator interface devices as more fully specified in Section 23 09 53 - BAS Field Panels.

J. Systems Configuration Database: The system architecture shall support maintaining thesystems configuration database on the CSS. User tools provided to the owner shall allowconfiguring, updating, maintaining, etc. current configurations and settings whether they areinitiated at the server or the end device.1. Database Schema shall be published and provided to the owner to facilitate easy access

to the data.2. Database shall be ODBC compliant.

K. Interruptions or fault at any point on any Primary Controller LAN shall not interruptcommunications between other nodes on the network. If a LAN is severed, two separatenetworks shall be formed and communications within each network shall continue uninterrupted.

L. All line drivers, signal boosters, and signal conditioners etc. shall be provided as necessary forproper data communication.

M. Anytime any controller's database or program is changed in the field, the controller shall becapable of automatically uploading the new data to the CSS.

1.13 WARRANTY MAINTENANCEA. Contractor shall warrant all products and labor for a period of (2) two years after Substantial

Completion.B. The owner reserves the right to make changes to the BAS during the warranty period. Such

changes do not constitute a waiver of warranty. The Contractor shall warrant parts andinstallation work regardless of any such changes made by the owner, unless the Contractorprovides clear and convincing evidence that a specific problem is the result of such changes tothe BAS.

C. At no cost to the owner, during the warranty period, the Contractor shall provide maintenanceservices for software and hardware components as specified below:1. Maintenance services shall be provided for all devices and hardware specified in sections

23 09 51 through 23 09 59 . Service all equipment per the manufacturer'srecommendations. All devices shall be calibrated within the last month of the warrantyperiod.



23 0950 - 10

2. Emergency Service: Any malfunction, failure, or defect in any hardware component orfailure of any control programming that would result in property damage or loss of comfortcontrol shall be corrected and repaired following notification by the owner to theContractor.a. Response by telephone to any request for service shall be provided within two (2)

hours of the owner's initial telephone request for service.b. In the event that the malfunction, failure, or defect is not corrected through the

telephonic communication, at least one (1) hardware and software technician, trainedin the system to be serviced, shall be dispatched to the owner's site within eight (8)hours of the owner's initial telephone request for such services, as specified.

3. Normal Service: Any malfunction, failure, or defect in any hardware component or failure ofany control programming that would not result in property damage or loss of comfortcontrol shall be corrected and repaired following telephonic notification by the owner to theContractor.a. Response by telephone to any request for service shall be provided within eight (8)

working hours (contractor specified 40 hr per week normal working period) of theowner's initial telephone request for service.

b. In the event that the malfunction, failure, or defect is not corrected through thetelephonic communication, at least one (1) hardware and software technician, trainedin the system to be serviced, shall be dispatched to the owner's site within three (3)working days of the owner's initial telephone request for such services, as specified.

4. Telephonic Request for Service: Contractor shall specify a maximum of three telephonenumbers for The owner to call in the event of a need for service. At least one of the linesshall be attended at any given time at all times. Alternatively, pagers can be used fortechnicians trained in system to be serviced. One of the three paged technicians shallrespond to every call within 15 minutes.

5. Technical Support: Contractor shall provide technical support by telephone throughout thewarranty period.

6. Preventive maintenance shall be provided throughout the warranty period in accordancewith the hardware component manufacturer's requirements.

1.14 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Provide factory-shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device. Maintain

cartons during shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent equipment damage, and toeliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Store equipment and materials inside and protectfrom weather.

1.15 LISTING AND LABELINGA. The BAS and components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 916) as an Energy

Management System.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS (PRE-APPROVED)

A. Automated Logic by Radius SystemsB. Johnson Controls by Modern ControlsC. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements

2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENTA. Materials shall be new, the best of their respective kinds without imperfections or blemishes and

shall not be damaged in any way. Used equipment shall not used in any way for the permanentinstallation except where drawings or specs specifically allow existing materials to remain inplace.

2.03 UNIFORMITYA. To the extent practical, all equipment of the same type serving the same function shall be

identical and from the same manufacturer.



23 0950 - 11

B. All new controllers installed on the control system network shall be furnished and installed bythe BAS contractor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which control systems are to be installed. Do not proceedwith work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEMSA. General: Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,

roughing-in drawings and details shown on drawings.B. Network Connectivity: The BAS contractor shall provide two network connections with Cat-6

cables from the Building Controller to the owner's IT network.1. The BAS contractor shall terminate one end of the two Cat-6 cables at or around the

owner's patch panel and make connections to the owner's switch with green patch cables,following the instruction of the DFM's IT personnel.

2. The BAS contractor shall terminate the other end of the two Cat-6 cables near or within thebuilding controller cabinet with dual RJ-45 terminal box and make connection of one cableto the building controller. Note: the second connection is for on-site operator interfacethrough a mobile computer. Exposed cable shall be protected by conduit or wire mold.

3. The BAS contractor shall label the two network connections BAC-1 and BAC-2 on bothends.

C. Refer to additional requirements in other sections of this specification.3.03 SURGE PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install any power supply surge protection, filters, etc. asnecessary for proper operation and protection of all BCs, AAC/ASCS operator interfaces,printers, routers, gateways and other hardware and interface devices. All equipment shall becapable of handling voltage variations 10% above or below measured nominal value, with noeffect on hardware, software, communications, and data storage.

3.04 CONTROL POWER SOURCE AND SUPPLYA. Section 23 09 50 Contractor shall extend all power source wiring required for operation of all

equipment and devices provided under Sections 23 09 50 through 23 09 55 and Sequences ofOperation.

B. General requirements for obtaining power include the following:1. Obtain power from a source that feeds the equipment being controlled such that both the

control component and the equipment are powered from the same panel. Whereequipment is powered from a 460V source, obtain power from the electrically mostproximate 120v source fed from a common origin.

2. Where control equipment is located inside a new equipment enclosure, coordinate with theequipment manufacturer and feed the control with the same source as the equipment. Ifthe equipment's control transformer is large enough and of the correct voltage to supplythe controls it may be used. If the equipment's control transformer is not large enough orof the correct voltage to supply the controls provide separate transformer

3. Where a controller controls multiple systems on varying levels of power reliability (normal,emergency, and/or interruptible), the controller shall be powered by the highest level ofreliability served. Furthermore, the controller in that condition shall monitor each powertype served to determine so logic can assess whether a failure is due to a power loss andrespond appropriately. A three-phase monitor into a digital input shall suffice as powermonitoring.

4. Standalone Functionality: Refer to Section 23 09 53.3.05 BAS STARTUP, COMMISSIONING AND TRAINNING

A. Refer to Section 23 09 59



23 0950 - 12

3.06 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONA. Refer to Section 23 09 58 - Sequences of Operation

END OF SECTION


BAS BASIC MATERIALS,INTERFACE DEVICES, ANDSENSORS

23 0951 - 1

SECTION 23 0951BAS BASIC MATERIALS, INTERFACE DEVICES, AND SENSORS


A. WiringB. Control Valves and ActuatorsC. Control Dampers and ActuatorsD. Control PanelsE. SensorsF. Flow MeterG. Electric Control Components (Switches, EP Valves, Thermostats, Relays, Smoke Detectors,

etc.)H. TransducersI. Air Flow Measuring StationsJ. Current SwitchesK. NameplatesL. Testing Equipment

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTSA. Section 23 09 50 - Building Automation System (BAS) GeneralB. Section 23 09 53 - BAS Field PanelsC. Section 23 09 54 - BAS Communications DevicesD. Section 23 09 55 - BAS SoftwareE. Section 23 09 58 - Sequences of Operation

1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORKA. Refer to Section 23 09 50 for general requirements.B. Refer to other Division 23 sections for installation of instrument wells, valve bodies, and

dampers in mechanical systems; not work of this section.C. Provide the following electrical work of this section, complying with requirements of Division 26

sections:1. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and unit control panels.2. Interlock wiring between electrically interlocked devices, sensors, and between a hand or

auto position of motor starters as indicated for all mechanical and controls.3. Wiring associated with indicating and alarm panels (remote alarm panels) and connections

to their associated field devices.4. All other necessary wiring for fully complete and functional control system as specified.

1.04 WORK BY OTHERSA. Control Valves furnished under this section shall be installed under the applicable piping section

under the direction of Section 23 09 51 Contractor who will be fully responsible for the properoperation of the valve.

B. Control Dampers furnished under this section shall be installed under the applicable airdistribution or air handling equipment section under the direction of Section 23 09 51 Contractorwho will be fully responsible for the proper operation of the damper

C. Water Pressure Taps, Thermal Wells, Flow Switches, Flow Meters, etc. that will have wetsurfaces, shall be installed under the applicable piping Section under the direction of Section 2309 51 Contractor who will be fully responsible for the proper installation and application.



23 0951 - 2

D. Controlled Equipment Power Wiring shall be furnished and installed under Division 26. Wherecontrol involves 120V control devices controlling 120V equipment, Division 26 Contractor shallextend power wiring to the equipment. Section 23 09 51 Contractor shall extend it from theequipment to the control device. Division 23 Contractor shall coordinate with Division 26Contractor during submittal phase and identify all equipment being powered to the Division 26Contractor.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. Refer to section 23 09 50 - Building Automation System (BAS) General.

1.06 LEED SUBMITTALS: COMPLY WITH SECTION 018113.A. EQ Credit 1: Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies

1. For wall-mounted carbon dioxide sensors, documentation indicating accuracy in percent.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide electronic control products in sizes and capacities indicated, consisting ofvalves, dampers, thermostats, clocks, controllers, sensors, and other components as requiredfor complete installation and reviewed and approved by the owner. Except as otherwiseindicated, provide manufacturer's standard materials and components as published in theirproduct information; designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, and asrequired for application indicated.

B. Communication Wiring: All wiring shall be in accordance with National Electrical Codes andDivision 26 of this specification.1. Contractor shall supply all communication wiring between Building Controllers, Routers,

Gateways, AAC's, ASC's and local and remote peripherals (e.g., operator workstations,printers, and modems).

2. Local Supervisory LAN: For any portions of this network required under this section of thespecification, contractor shall use Fiber or Category 6 of standard TIA/EIA(100/1000BaseT). Network shall be run with no splices and separate from any wiring overthirty (30) volts.

3. Primary and Secondary roller LANs: Communication wiring shall be individually 100%shielded pairs per manufacturers recommendations for distances installed, with overallPVC cover, Class 2, plenum-rated run with no splices and separate from any wiring overthirty (30) volts. Shield shall be terminated and wiring shall be grounded as recommendedby BC manufacturer.

C. Signal Wiring: Contractor shall run all signal wiring in accordance with National Electric Codesand Division 26 of this Specification.1. Signal wiring to all field devices, including, but not limited to, all sensors, transducers,

transmitters, switches, etc. shall be twisted, 100% shielded pair, minimum 18-gauge wire,with PVC cover. Signal wiring shall be run with no splices and separate from any wiringabove thirty (30) volts.

2. Signal wiring shield shall be grounded at controller end only unless otherwiserecommended by the controller manufacturer.

D. Low Voltage Analog Output Wiring: Contractor shall run all low voltage control wiring inaccordance with National Electric Codes and Division 16 of this Specification.1. Low voltage control wiring shall be minimum 16-gauge, twisted pair, 100% shielded, with

PVC cover, Class 2 plenum-rated. Low voltage control wiring shall be run with no splicesseparate from any wiring above thirty (30) volts.

E. Control Panels: Provide control panels with suitable brackets for wall mounting for each controlsystem. Locate panel adjacent to systems served.1. Fabricate panels of 16-gage furniture-grade steel, or 6063-T5 extruded aluminum alloy,

totally enclosed on four sides, with hinged door and keyed lock, with manufacturer'sstandard shop- painted finish and color.

2. Provide UL-listed cabinets for use with line voltage devices.



23 0951 - 3

3. Control panel shall be completely factory wired and piped, and all electrical connectionsmade to a terminal strip. Control panel shall have standard manufacturer's color.

4. All gauges and control components shall be identified by means of nameplates.5. All control tubing and wiring shall be run neatly and orderly in open slot wiring duct with

cover.6. Complete wiring and tubing termination drawings shall be mounted in or adjacent to panel.

2.02 CONTROL VALVESA. General: Provide factory fabricated control valves of type, body material and pressure class

indicated. Where type or body material is not indicated, provide selection as determined bymanufacturer for installation requirements and pressure class, based on maximum pressureand temperature in piping system. Provide valve size in accordance with scheduled or specifiedmaximum pressure drop across control valve. Control valves shall be equipped with heavy-dutyactuators, and with proper close-off rating for each individual application. Minimum close-offrating shall be as scheduled and adequate for each application, and shall generally beconsidered at dead head rating of the pump.

B. Plug-Type Globe Pattern for Water Service:1. Valve Sizing: Where not specifically indicated on the control drawings, modulating valves

shall be sized for maximum full flow pressure drop between 50% and 100% of the branchcircuit it is controlling unless scheduled otherwise. Two-position valves shall be same sizeas connecting piping.

2. Single Seated (Two-way) Valves: Valves shall have equal-percentage characteristic fortypical heat exchanger service and linear characteristic for building loop connections tocampus systems unless otherwise scheduled on the drawings. Valves shall havecage-type trim, providing seating and guiding surfaces for plug on 'top-and-bottom' guidedplugs.

3. Double Seated (Three-way) Valves: Valves shall have linear characteristic. Valves shallbe balanced-plug type, with cage-type trim providing seating and guiding surfaces on'top-and-bottom' guided plugs.

4. Temperature Rating: 25°F minimum, 250°F maximum5. Body: Bronze, screwed, 250 psi maximum working pressure for 1/2” to 2”; Cast Iron,

flanged, 125 psi maximum working pressure for 2-1/2” and larger.6. Valve Trim: Bronze; Stem: Polished stainless steel.7. Packing: Spring Loaded Teflon or Synthetic Elastomer U-cups, self-adjusting.8. Plug: Brass, bronze or stainless steel, Seat: Brass9. Disc: Replaceable Composition or Stainless Steel Filled PTFE.10. Ambient Operating Temperature Limits: -10 to 150°F (-12.2 to 66 °C)11. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements approved

manufacturers are as follows:a. Johnson Controlsb. Invensysc. Warrend. Deltae. Belimof. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

C. Butterfly Type:1. Body: Extended neck epoxy coated cast or ductile iron with full lug pattern, ANSI Class

125 or 250 bolt pattern to match specified flanges.2. Seat: EPDM, except in loop bypass applications where seat shall be metal to metal3. Disc: Bronze or stainless steel, pinned or mechanically locked to shaft4. Bearings: Bronze or stainless steel5. Shaft: 416 stainless steel6. Cold Service Pressure: 175 psi7. Close Off: Bubble-tight shutoff to 150 psi



23 0951 - 4

8. Operation: Valve and actuator operation shall be smooth both seating and unseating. Should more that 2 psi deadband be required to seat/unseat the valve, valve shall bereplaced at no cost to the owner.

9. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements approvedmanufacturers are as follows:a. Jamesbury WS815b. Bray Series 31c. Keystone AR2d. Dezurik BGSe. Belimof. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

D. Segmented or Characterized Ball Type1. Body: Carbon Steel (ASTM 216), one-piece design with wafer style ends.2. Seat: Reinforced Teflon (PTFE).3. Ball: Stainless steel ASTM A3514. Port: Segmented design with equal-percentage characteristic.5. Stem: Stainless steel.6. Cold Service Pressure: 200 psi WOG7. Cavitation Trim: Provide cavitation trim where indicated and/or required, designed to

eliminate cavitation and noise while maintaining an equal percentage characteristic. Trimshall be a series of plates with orifices to break the pressure drop into multi-stages.

8. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements approvedmanufacturers are as follows:a. Jamesbury R-Seriesb. Fisherc. Belimod. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements

2.03 CONTROL DAMPERSA. General: Provide factory fabricated automatic control dampers of sizes, velocity and pressure

classes as required for smooth, stable, and controllable air flow. Provide parallel or opposedblade dampers as recommended by manufacturers sizing techniques. For dampers locatednear fan outlets, provide dampers rated for fan outlet velocity and close-off pressure, andrecommended by damper manufacturer for fan discharge damper service. Control dampersused for smoke dampers shall comply with UL 555S. Control Dampers used for fire dampersshall comply with UL 555.

B. For general isolation and modulating control service in rectangular ducts at velocities not greaterthan 1500 fpm (7.62 m/s), differential pressure not greater than 2.5” w.c. (622 Pa):1. Performance: Test in accordance with AMCA 500.2. Frames: Galvanized steel, 16-gauge minimum thickness, welded or riveted with corner

reinforcement.3. Blades: Stainless steel in lab exhausts and galvanized steel elsewhere, maximum blade

size 8 inches (200 mm) wide by 48 inches (1219 mm) long, attached to minimum 1/2 inch(12.7 mm) shafts with set screws, 16 gauge minimum thickness.

4. Blade Seals: Synthetic elastomer, mechanically attached, field replaceable.5. Jamb Seals: Stainless steel.6. Shaft Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze, graphite impregnated nylon sleeve or

other molded synthetic sleeve, with thrust washers at bearings.7. Linkage: Concealed in frame.8. Linkage Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze or graphite impregnated nylon.9. Leakage: Less than one percent based on approach velocity of 1500 ft./min. (7.62 m/s)

and 1 inches wg. (249Pa).10. Maximum Pressure Differential: 2.5 inches wg. (622 Pa)11. Temperature Limits: -40 to 200 °F (-40 to 93 °C).



23 0951 - 5

12. Where opening size is larger than 48 inches (1219 mm) wide, or 72 inches (1829 mm)high, provide dampers in multiple sections, with intermediate frames and jackshaftsappropriate for installation.

C. For general isolation and modulating control service in round ducts up to 40 inches in size atvelocities not greater than 2500 fpm (12.7 m/s), differential pressure not greater than 4” w.c.(994 Pa):1. Performance: Test in accordance with AMCA 500.2. Frames: rolled 12 gauge steel strip for sizes 6 inch and smaller, rolled 14 gauge steel

channel for larger sizes, galvanized or aluminum finish.3. Blades: Steel construction, 12 gauge minimum thickness for dampers less than 18 inches

(457 mm) in size, 10 gauge minimum thickness for larger dampers.4. Blade Seals: Full circumference neoprene.5. Shaft: ½ inch (12.7 mm) diameter zinc or cadmium plated steel.6. Shaft Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze or stainless steel, pressed into frame,

with thrust washers at bearings.7. Leakage: Less than 0.2 percent based on approach velocity of 4000 ft./min. (20.3 m/s)

and 1 inches wg. (249Pa) differential pressure.8. Maximum Pressure Differential: 4 inches wg. (994 Pa)9. Temperature Limits: -40 to 300 °F (-40 to 149 °C).

2.04 ACTUATORSA. General: Size actuators and linkages to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with

sufficient reserve torque or force to provide smooth modulating action or 2-position action asspecified. Select spring-return actuators with manual override to provide positive shut-off ofdevices as they are applied.

B. Damper Actuators1. Ambient Operating Temperature Limits: -10 to 150°F (-12.2 to 66 °C)2. Two Position Electric Actuators: Line voltage with spring return3. Electronic Actuators: Provide actuators with spring return for two-position (24v), 0-5 Vdc,

0-10 Vdc, 2-10Vdc, 4-20 mA, or PWM input (subject to restrictions) as required. Actuatorsshall travel full stroke in less than [90] seconds. Actuators shall be designed for aminimum of 60,000 full cycles at full torque and be UL 873 listed. Provide stroke indicator. Actuators shall have positive positioning circuit. Where two actuators are required inparallel or in sequence provide an auxiliary actuator driver. Actuators shall have currentlimiting motor protection. Actuators shall have manual override where indicated. Modulating actuators for valves shall have minimum rangeability of 40 to 1.a. Close-Off Pressure: Provide the minimum torque required, and spring return for fail

positioning (unless otherwise specifically indicated) sized for required close-offpressure. Required close-off pressure for two-way water valve applications shall bethe shutoff head of associated pump. Required close-off rating of steam valveapplications shall be design inlet steam pressure plus 50 percent for low pressuresteam, and 10 percent for high pressure steam. Required close-off rating of airdamper applications shall be shutoff pressure of associated fan, plus 10 percent.

b. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements approvedmanufacturers are as follows:1) Belimo2) Johnson Controls3) Delta4) Invensys5) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements

C. Quarter-Turn Actuators (for ball and butterfly valves):1. Electric



23 0951 - 6

a. Motor: Suitable for 120 or 240 Volt single-phase power supply. Insulation shall beNEMA Class F or better. Motor shall be rated for 100 percent duty cycle. Motorsshall have inherent overload protection.

b. Gear Train. Motor output shall be directed to a self locking gear drive mechanism. Gears shall be rated for torque input exceeding motor locked rotor torque.

c. Wiring: Power and control wiring shall be wired to a terminal strip in the actuatorenclosure

d. Failsafe Positioning: Actuators shall be spring return type for failsafe positioning.e. Enclosure: Actuator enclosure shall be NEMA-4 rated, and shall have a minimum of

two threaded conduit entries. Provide an enclosure heater for actuators locatedoutside of buildings.

f. Limit Switches: Travel limit switches shall be UL and CSA approved. Switches shalllimit actuator in both open and closed positions.

g. Mechanical Travel Stops: The actuator shall include mechanical travel stops ofstainless steel construction to limit actuator to specific degrees of rotation.

h. Manual Override: Actuators shall have manual actuator override to allow operation ofthe valve when power is off. For valves 4 inches and smaller the override may be aremovable wrench or lever or geared handwheel type. For larger valves, the overrideshall be a fixed geared handwheel type. An automatic power cut-off switch shall beprovided to disconnect power from the motor when the handwheel is engaged formanual operation.

i. Valve Position Indicator: A valve position indicator with arrow and open and closedposition marks shall be provided to indicate valve position.

j. Torque Limit Switches: Provide torque limit switches to interrupt motor power whentorque limit is exceeded in either direction of rotation.

k. Position Controller: For valves used for modulating control, provide an electronicpositioner capable of accepting 4-20 mA, 0-10 Vdc, 2-10 Vdc, and 135 Ohmpotentiometer.

l. Ambient Conditions: Actuator shall be designed for operation from -140 to 150 °Fambient temperature with 0 to 100 percent relative humidity.

2.05 GENERAL FIELD DEVICESA. Provide field devices for input and output of digital (binary) and analog signals into controllers

(BCs, AACs, ASCs). Provide signal conditioning for all field devices as recommended by fielddevice manufacturers, and as required for proper operation in the system.

B. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to assure that all field devices are compatible withcontroller hardware and software.

C. Field devices specified herein are generally 'two-wire' type transmitters, with power for thedevice to be supplied from the respective controller. If the controller provided is not equipped toprovide this power, or is not designed to work with 'two-wire' type transmitters, or if field deviceis to serve as input to more than one controller, or where the length of wire to the controller willunacceptably affect the accuracy, the Contractor shall provide 'four-wire' type equal transmitterand necessary regulated DC power supply or 120 VAC power supply, as required.

D. For field devices specified hereinafter that require signal conditioners, signal boosters, signalrepeaters, or other devices for proper interface to controllers, Contractor shall furnish and installproper device, including 120V power as required. Such devices shall have accuracy equal to, orbetter than, the accuracy listed for respective field devices.

E. Accuracy: As stated in this Section, accuracy shall include combined effects of nonlinearity,nonrepeatability and hysteresis.

2.06 TEMPERATURE SENSORS (TS)A. Sensor range: When matched with A/D converter of BC, AAC/ASC, or SD, sensor range shall

provide a resolution of no worse than 0.3°F (0.16 °C) (unless noted otherwise). Wherethermistors are used, the stability shall be better than 0.25°F over 5 years.

B. Matched Sensors: The following applications shall require matched sensors:



23 0951 - 7

1. Building Loop Connections: Provide matched loop and building supply sensors wherecontrol sequence requires controlling to a temperature rise (differential).

2. Hydronic Temperature Difference Calculations: Provide matched supply and returntemperature sensors where the pair is used for calculating temperature difference for usein load calculations or sequencing such as across chillers and plants.

3. Air Handling Unit Sequencing: Provide matched pair for the cooling and heating coilleaving sensors where the sequence includes calculating an offset from the supply airsetpoint to maintain a leaving heating coil temperature.

C. Room Temperature Sensor: Shall be an element contained within a ventilated cover, suitablefor wall mounting. Provide insulated base. Following sensing elements are acceptable:1. Sensing element shall be platinum RTD, thermistor, or integrated circuit, +/- 0.4°F

accuracy at calibration point.2. Provide setpoint adjustment where indicated. The setpoint adjustment shall be a

warmer/cooler indication that shall be scalable via the BAS.3. Provide an occupancy override button on the room sensor enclosure where indicated.

This shall be a momentary contact closure4. Provide current temperature indication via an LCD or LED readout where indicated.

D. Single-Point Duct Temperature Sensor: Shall consist of sensing element, junction box for wiringconnections and gasket to prevent air leakage or vibration noise. Temperature range asrequired for resolution indicated in paragraph A. Sensor probe shall be 304 stainless steel.1. Sensing element shall be platinum RTD, thermistor, or integrated circuit, +/- 0.2°F

accuracy at calibration pointE. Averaging Duct Temperature Sensor: Shall consist of an averaging element, junction box for

wiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage. Provide sensor lengths and quantities toresult in one lineal foot of sensing element for each three square feet of cooling coil/duct facearea. Temperature range as required for resolution indicated in paragraph A.1. Sensing element shall be platinum RTD, or thermistor, +/- 0.2°F accuracy at calibration

point.F. Liquid immersion temperature sensor shall include [Stainless Steel] thermowell, sensor and

connection head for wiring connections. Temperature range shall be as required for resolutionof 0.15°F.1. Sensing element (chilled water/glycol systems) shall be platinum RTD +/- 0.2°F accuracy

at calibration point. Temperature range shall be as required for resolution of 0.15°F.2. Sensing element (other systems) shall be platinum RTD, thermistor, or integrated circuit,

+/- 0.4°F accuracy at calibration point. Temperature range shall be as required forresolution of 0.3°F.

G. Pipe Surface-Mount Temperature Sensor: Shall include metal junction box and clamps andshall be suitable for sensing pipe surface temperature and installation under insulation. Providethermally conductive paste at pipe contact point. Temperature range shall be as require forresolution indicated in paragraph A.1. Sensing element shall be platinum RTD, thermistor, or integrated circuit, +/- 0.4°F

accuracy at calibration point.H. Outside air sensors shall consist of a sensor, sun shield, utility box, and watertight gasket to

prevent water seepage. Temperature range shall be as require for resolution indicated inParagraph A1. Sensing element shall be platinum RTD, thermistor, or integrated circuit, +/- 0.4°F

accuracy at calibration point.2.07 TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS

A. Where required by Controller, or where wiring runs are over 50 feet, sensors as specified abovemay be matched with transmitters outputting 4-20 mA linearly across the specified temperaturerange. Transmitters shall have zero and span adjustments, an accuracy of 0.1°F when appliedto the sensor range.



23 0951 - 8

2.08 HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERSA. Units shall be suitable for duct, wall (room) or outdoor mounting. Unit shall be two-wire

transmitter utilizing bulk polymer resistance change or thin film capacitance change humiditysensor. Unit shall produce linear continuous output of 4-20 mA for percent relative humidity (%RH). A combination temperature and humidity sensor may be used for zone level monitoring. Sensors shall have the following minimum performance and application criteria:1. Input Range: 0 to 100% RH.2. Accuracy(% RH): +/- 2% (when used for enthalpy calculation, dewpoint calculation or

humidifier control) or +/- 3% (monitoring only) between 20-90% RH at 77°F, includinghysteresis, linearity, and repeatability.

3. Sensor Operating Range: As required by application4. Long Term Stability: Less than 1% drift per year.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Units shall be Vaisala HM Series, General Eastern, Microline, orHy-Cal HT Series. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.

2.09 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS (DP)A. General Purpose - Water: Two-wire transmitter, 4-20 mA output with zero and span

adjustments. Plus or minus 0.5% overall accuracy, 450 psig (3103 KPa) maximum staticpressure rating, 200 psid maximum overpressure rating for 6 through 60 psid range, 450 psidfor 100 through 300 psid range. Acceptable units shall be Kele & Associates Model 360 C. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.

B. General Purpose Low Pressure Air: Generally for use in static measurement of duct pressure orconstant volume air velocity pressure measurement where the range is applicable.1. General: Loop powered two-wire differential capacitance cell-type transmitter.2. Output: two wire 4-20 mA output with zero adjustment.3. Overall Accuracy: Plus or minus 1%.4. Minimum Range: 0.1 in. w.c.5. Maximum Range: 10 inches w.c.6. Housing: Polymer housing suitable for surface mounting.7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Modus T30. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.8. Static Sensing Element: Pitot-type static pressure sensing tips similar to Dwyer model

A-301 and connecting tubing.9. Range: Select for specified setpoint to be between 25% and 75% full-scale.

C. VAV Velocity Pressure: Generally for use in variable volume air velocity pressure measurementwhere the range is applicable.1. General: Loop powered two-wire differential capacitance cell type transmitter.2. Output: Two-wire, 4-20 mA output with zero adjustment.3. Overall Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.25%4. Minimum Range: 0 in. w.c.5. Maximum Range: 1 inch w.c.6. Housing: Polymer housing suitable for surface mounting.7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Setra. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.8. Range: Select for minimum range that will accept the maximum velocity pressure

expected.2.10 VALVE BYPASS FOR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSORS

A. Provide a five valve bypass kit for protection of DP sensors where the static on the pipe cancause on over pressure when connected to one port with the other at atmospheric pressure. Kitshall include high and low pressure isolation valves, high and low pressure vent valves, and abypass valve contained in a NEMA-1 enclosure.



23 0951 - 9

2.11 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES (DPS)A. General Service - Air: Diaphragm with adjustable setpoint and differential and snap acting form

C contacts rated for the application. Provide manufacturer's recommended static pressuresensing tips and connecting tubing

B. General Service - Water: Diaphragm with adjustable setpoint, 2 psig or adjustable differential,and snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application. 60 psid minimum pressuredifferential range. 0°F to 160°F operating temperature range.

2.12 PRESSURE SWITCHES (PS)A. Diaphragm or bourdon tube with adjustable setpoint and differential and snap-acting Form C

contacts rated for the application. Pressure switches shall be capable of withstanding 150% ofrated pressure.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Square D, ITT Neo-Dyn, ASCO, Penn, Honeywell, and JohnsonControls. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.

2.13 TRANSDUCERSA. Binary to Analog Transducers ([Pulse Width Modulating] or Tri-State-to-Voltage or -Current):

1. Adjustable zero and span.2. Failure Mode on Power Loss: Shall be provided with memory feature to allow the

transducer to return to last value on power failure.3. Accuracy: ± 1% of span4. Output Span: 4-20 mA, 0-5 Vdc, 1-5 Vdc, 0-10Vdc, 2-10Vdc, 0-15Vdc, 3-15Vdc5. Input: 4-20 mA, pulse width modulated or tri-state input.6. Pulse Width Modulated] and Tri-state Input Time Base: Dip switch selectable.7. Enclosure: Polymer designed for surface or panel mount.8. Failure Mode on Power Loss: Non-failsafe transducers shall have no output air loss.

Failsafe transducers shall exhaust output upon power loss.9. Acceptable Manufacturers: RE Technologies Model PWA Series. Substitutions shall be

allowed per Division 1.B. Electronic-to Electronic (Voltage or Current to Current or Voltage):

1. Adjustable zero and span.2. Failure Mode on Power Loss: Memory feature to allow the transducer to return to last value

on power failure.3. Accuracy: ± 1% of span.4. Output Span: 4-20 mA, 0-5 Vdc, 1-5 Vdc, 0-10 Vdc, 2-10 Vdc, 0-15 Vdc, 3-15 Vdc.5. Input: 0-20 Vdc, 0-20 ma, 0-10 kOhm.6. Pulse Width Modulated] and Tri-state Input Time Base: Dip switch selectable7. Enclosure: Polymer enclosure designed for surface or panel mount.8. Acceptable Manufacturers: RE Technologies Model PWA Series. Substitutions shall be

allowed per Division 1.2.14 CURRENT SWITCHES (CS)

A. Clamp-On or Solid-Core Design Current Operated Switch (for Constant Speed Motor StatusIndication)1. Range: 1.5 to 150 amps.2. Trip Point: Adjustable.3. Switch: Solid state, normally open, 1 to 135 Vac or Vdc, 0.3 Amps. Zero off state leakage.4. Lower Frequency Limit: 6 Hz.5. Trip Indication: LED6. Approvals: UL, CSA7. Max. Cable Size: 350 MCM8. Acceptable Manufacturers: Veris Industries H-708/908; Inc., RE Technologies

SCS1150A-LED. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.



23 0951 - 10

B. Clamp-on or Solid-Core Wire Through Current Switch (CS/CR) (for Constant Speed Motors):Same as CS with 24v command relay rated at 5A @ 240 Vac resistive, 3A @ 240 Vac inductive,load control contact power shall be induced from monitored conductor (minimum conductorcurrent required to energize relay 5A, max. rating of 135A). Acceptable Manufacturers shall beVeris Industries, Inc., Model # H938/735; or RE Technologies RCS 1150. Substitutions shall beallowed per Division 1.1. Where used for single-phase devices, provide the CS/CR in a self-contained unit in a

housing similar with override switch to Kele RIBX. Substitutions shall be allowed perDivision 1.

C. Clamp-On Design Current Operated Switch for Variable Speed Motor Status Indication1. Range: 1.5 to 135 Amps.2. Trip Point: Self-calibrating based on VA memory associated with frequency to detect loss

of belt with subsequent increase of control output to 60 Hz.3. Switch: Solid state, normally open, 1 to 135 Vac or Vdc, 0.3 Amps. Zero off state leakage.4. Frequency Range: 5-75 Hz5. Trip Indication: LED6. Approvals: UL, CSA7. Max. Cable Size: 350 MCM8. Acceptable Manufacturers: Veris Industries, Inc. H-904. Substitutions shall be allowed per

Division 1.D. Clamp-On Wire Through Current Switch (CS/CR) (for Variable Speed Motors): Same as CS

with 24v command relay rated at 5A @ 240 Vac resistive, 3A @ 240 Vac inductive, load controlcontact power shall be induced from monitored conductor (minimum conductor current requiredto energize relay 5A, max. rating of 135A). Acceptable manufacturer shall be Veris Industries,Inc., Model # H934. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.

E. Variable Speed Status: Where current switches are used to sense the status for variable speeddevices, the CT shall include on-board VA/Hz memory to allow distinction between a belt breakand subsequent ramp up to 60 Hz, versus operation at low speed. The belt break scenarioshall be indicated as a loss of status and the operation at low speed shall indicate normalstatus.

2.15 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CT)A. Clamp-On Design Current Transformer (for Motor Current Sensing)

1. Range: 1-10 amps minimum, 20-200 amps maximum2. Trip Point: Adjustable3. Output: 0-5 VDC.4. Accuracy: ±0.2% from 20 to 100 Hz.5. Acceptable Manufacturers: KELE SA100. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.

2.16 OUTDOOR AIR STATIC PRESSURE SENSING TIPA. Pressure sensor: Pressure sensing tip shall be designed to minimize the effects of wind and

resulting velocity pressure up to 80 mph. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Dwyer A-306. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.

B. Low Air Pressure Surge Dampener: 30-second time constant. Acceptable manufacturer shallbe Modus SD030. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.

2.17 INSERTION TYPE TURBINE METER FOR WATER SERVICEA. Turbine Insertion Flow Meter sensing method shall be impedance sensing (iron magnetic and

non-photoelectric), with volumetric accuracy of +/- 2% of reading over middle 80% of operatingrange, and +/- 4% of reading over the entire operating range. Turbine Insertion Flow Meter shallhave maximum operating pressure of 400 psi and maximum operating temperature of 200°Fcontinuous (220°F peak). All wetted metal parts shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. Flow meter shall meet or exceed all of the accuracy, head loss, flow limits, pressure andmaterial requirements of the AWWA standard C704-70 for the respective pipe or tube size.



23 0951 - 11

Analog outputs shall consist of non-interactive zero and span adjustments, a DC linearly of0.1% of span, voltage output of 0-10 V, and current output of 4-20 mA.1. Install in water systems with a minimum of 10 pipe diameters unobstructed flow. [Double

turbine insertion required at between 10 and 4 diameters unobstructed flow.]2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Onicon Corp. and Hersey. Substitutions shall be allowed per

Division 1.2.18 AIRFLOW MEASURING STATIONS (AFMS)

A. Pitot Tube Grids: Provide an array of velocity pressure sensing elements with averagingmanifolds and air straightening vanes packaged in a sheet metal casing. Distribute sensingelements in accordance with ASHRAE for traversing ducts. Provide taps to connect tubing frominstrumentation. Label AFM with drawing number designation, design flow, velocity pressure,and pressure drop. Application of pitot grids shall be allowed only where minimum expectedflow is greater than 30% or maximum flow

B. Hot Wire Grid: Provide an array of hot wire anemometer with air straightening package in asheet metal casing. Provide averaging circuitry and transmitter to transmit a linear signalproportional to airflow.

C. Vortex Shedding Grid: Provide an array of vortex shedding elements designed to producestable 'Karmen Vortices' that are linear with air velocity. Provide the electronics to totalize thepulses and output average velocity proportional to an output signal of 4-20ma.1. Sensor Accuracy: ±1.5%2. Electronics Accuracy: ±0.5%3. Range: Select minimum range to accommodate the expected flow range of the project4. Temperature Limits: 20-140°F5. Acceptable Manufacturer: Tek-Air Systems Inc. 'Vortek' Model. Ebtron 'Gold Series'

Model. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.2.19 AIR VELOCITY PRESSURE SENSORS (INSERTION TYPE)

A. Single or Multi-Point Averaging (as indicated): Sensing tip shall be for insertion into duct withmounting flange and push on tube connections. Material shall be suitable to the application.

2.20 CO2 SENSORS/TRANSMITTERS (CO2)A. CO2 sensors shall use silicon based, diffusion aspirated, infrared single beam, dual-wavelength

sensor.B. Accuracy: ±36ppm at 800 ppm and 68°F.C. Stability: 5% over 5 years.D. Output: 4-20 mA, 0-10 Vdc or relay.E. Mounting: Duct or Wall as indicated.F. Acceptable Manufacturer: Vaisala, Inc. GMD20 (duct) or GMW20 (wall).G. For wall sensors where applicable: Accuracy: Within plus or minus 10 percent.

2.21 ELECTRIC CONTROL COMPONENTSA. Limit Switches (LS): Limit switches shall be UL listed, SPDT or DPDT type, with adjustable trim

arm. Limit switches shall be as manufactured by Square D, Allen Bradley. Substitutions shallbe allowed per Division 1.

B. Electric Solenoid-Operated Pneumatic Valves (EP): EP valves shall be rated for a minimum of1.5 times their maximum operating static and differential pressure.. Valves shall be ported2-way, 3-way, or 4-way and shall be normally closed or open as required by the application. EPs shall be sized for minimum pressure drop, and shall be UL and CSA listed. Furnish andinstall gauges on all inputs of EPs. Furnish an adjustable air pressure regulator on input side ofsolenoid valves serving actuators operating at greater than 30 psig.1. Coil Enclosure: Indoors shall be NEMA-1, Outdoors and NEMA-3, 4, 7, 9.



23 0951 - 12

2. Fluid Temperature Rating: Valves for compressed air and cold water service shall have150 °F (66 °C) minimum rating. Valves for hot water or steam service shall have fluidtemperature rating higher than the maximum expected fluid temperature.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers: EP valves shall be as manufactured by ASCO or Parker. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.

4. Coil Rating: EP valves shall have appropriate voltage coil rated for the application (i.e., 24VAC, 120 VAC, 24 VDC, etc.).

C. Low Temperature Detector ('Freezestat') (FZ): Low temperature detector shall consist of a 'coldspot' element which responds only to the lowest temperature along any one foot of entireelement, minimum bulb size of 1/8" x 20' (3.2mm x 6.1m), junction box for wiring connectionsand gasket to prevent air leakage or vibration noise, DPST ( 4 wire, 2 circuit) with manual reset. Temperature range 15 to 55°F (-9.4 to 12.8°C), factory set at 38°F.

D. High Temperature Detectors ('Firestat') (FS): High temperature detector shall consist of 3-polecontacts, a single point sensor, junction box for wiring connections and gasket to prevent airleakage of vibration noise, triple-pole, with manual reset. Temperature range 25 to 215°F (-4 to102°C).

E. Surface-Mounted Thermostat: Surface-mounted thermostat shall consist of SPDT contacts,operating temperature range of 50 to 150° F (10 to 65°C) , and a minimum 10°F fixed setpointdifferential.

F. Low Voltage Wall Thermostat: Wall-mounted thermostat shall consist of SPDT sealed mercurycontacts, operating temperature range of 50 to 90°F (10 to 32°C), switch rating of 24 Vac (30Vac max.), and both manual and automatic fan operation in both the heat and cool modes.

G. Control Relays: All control relays shall be UL listed, with contacts rated for the application, andmounted in minimum NEMA-1 enclosure for indoor locations, NEMA-4 for outdoor locations.1. Control relays for use on electrical systems of 120 volts or less shall have, as a minimum,

the following:a. AC coil pull-in voltage range of +10%, -15% or nominal voltage.b. Coil sealed volt-amperes (VA) not greater than four (4) VA.c. Silver cadmium Form C (SPDT) contacts in a dustproof enclosure, with 8 or 11 pin

type plug.d. Pilot light indication of power-to-coil and coil retainer clips.e. Coil rated for 50 and 60 Hz service.f. Acceptable Manufacturers: Relays shall be Potter Brumfield, Model KRPA.

Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.g. Relays used for across-the-line control (start/stop) of 120V motors, 1/4 HP, and 1/3

HP, shall be rated to break minimum 10 Amps inductive load. Relays shall be IDEC.Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.

h. Relays used for stop/start control shall have low voltage coils (30 VAC or less), andshall be provided with transient and surge suppression devices at the controllerinterface.

H. General Purpose Power Contactors: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose magnetic contactor.ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, NEMA type 1enclosure. Manufacturer shall be Square 'D', Cutler-Hammeror Westinghouse.

I. Control Transformers: Furnish and install control transformers as required. Controltransformers shall be machine tool type, and shall be US and CSA listed. Primary andsecondary sides shall be fused in accordance with the NEC. Transformer shall be proper sizefor application, and mounted in minimum NEMA-1 enclosure.1. Transformers shall be manufactured by Westinghouse, Square 'D', or Jefferson.

Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.J. Time Delay Relays (TDR): TDRs shall be capable of on or off delayed functions, with

adjustable timing periods, and cycle timing light. Contacts shall be rated for the application witha minimum of two (2) sets of Form C contacts, enclosed in a dustproof enclosure.



23 0951 - 13

1. TDRs shall have silver cadmium contacts with a minimum life span rating of one millionoperations. TDRs shall have solid state, plug-in type coils with transient suppressiondevices.

2. TDRs shall be UL and CSA listed, Crouzet type. Substitutions shall be allowed perDivision 1.

K. Electric Push Button Switch: Switch shall be momentary contact, oil tight, push button, withnumber of N.O. and/or N.C. contacts as required. Contacts shall be snap-action type, and ratedfor minimum 120 Vac operation. Switch shall be 800T type, as manufactured by Allen Bradley. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.

L. Pilot Light: Panel-mounted pilot light shall be NEMA ICS 2 oil tight, transformer type, with screwterminals, push-to-test unit, LED type, rated for 120 VAC. Unit shall be 800T type, asmanufactured by Allen-Bradley. Substitutions shall be allowed per Division 1.

M. Alarm Horn: Panel-mounted audible alarm horn shall be continuous tone, 120 Vac Sonalertsolid-state electronic signal, as manufactured by Mallory. Substitutions shall be allowed perDivision 1.

N. Electric Selector Switch (SS): Switch shall be maintained contact, NEMA ICS 2, oil-tightselector switch with contact arrangement, as required. Contacts shall be rated for minimum 120Vac operation. Switch shall be 800T type, as manufactured by Allen-Bradley. Substitutionsshall be allowed per Division 1.

2.22 NAMEPLATESA. Provide engraved phenolic or micarta nameplates for all equipment, components, and field

devices furnished. Nameplates shall be 1/8 thick, black, with white center core, and shall beminimum 1" x 3", with minimum 1/4" high block lettering. Nameplates for devices smaller than1" x 3" shall be attached to adjacent surface.

B. Each nameplate shall identify the function for each device.2.23 TESTING EQUIPMENT

A. Contractor shall test and calibrate all signaling circuits of all field devices to ascertain thatrequired digital and accurate analog signals are transmitted, received, and displayed at systemoperator terminals, and make all repairs and recalibrations required to complete test. Contractor shall be responsible for test equipment required to perform these tests andcalibrations. Test equipment used for testing and calibration of field devices shall be at leasttwice as accurate as respective field device (e.g., if field device is +/-0.5% accurate, testequipment shall be +/-0.25% accurate over same range).

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 INSPECTION


3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEMSA. General: Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,

roughing-in drawings and details shown on drawings. Install electrical components and useelectrical products complying with requirements of National Electric Code and all local codes.

B. Control Wiring: The term "control wiring" is defined to include providing of wire, conduit andmiscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connection of electric control devices.1. Wiring System: Install complete wiring system for electric control systems. Conceal wiring

except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. Installation of wiring shall generally follow building lines. Install in accordance with NationalElectrical Code and Division 16 of this Specification. Fasten flexible conductors bridgingcabinets and doors, neatly along hinge side, and protect against abrasion. Tie and supportconductors neatly.



23 0951 - 14

2. Control Wiring Conductors: Install control wiring conductors, without splices betweenterminal points, color-coded. Install in neat workmanlike manner, securely fastened. Install in accordance with National Electrical Code and Division 16 of this Specification.

3. Communication wiring, signal wiring and low voltage control wiring shall be installedseparate from any wiring over thirty (30) volts. Signal wiring shield shall be grounded atcontroller end only, unless otherwise recommended by the controller manufacturer.

4. All WAN and LAN Communication wiring shield shall be terminated as recommended bycontroller manufacturer. All WAN and LAN Communication wiring shall be labeled with anetwork number, device ID at each termination and shall correspond with the WAN andLAN system architecture and floor plan submittals.

5. Install all control wiring external to panels in electric metallic tubing or raceway. However,communication wiring, signal wiring and low voltage control wiring may be run withoutconduit in concealed, accessible locations if noise immunity is ensured. Contractor will befully responsible for noise immunity and rewire in conduit if electrical or RF noise affectsperformance. Accessible locations are defined as areas inside mechanical equipmentenclosures, such as heating and cooling units, instrument panels etc.; in accessible pipechases with easy access, or suspended ceilings with easy access. Installation of wiringshall generally follow building lines. Run in a neat and orderly fashion, bundled whereapplicable, and completely suspended (strapped to rigid elements or routed through wiringrings) away from areas of normal access. Tie and support conductors neatly with suitablenylon ties. Conductors shall not be supported by the ceiling system or ceiling supportsystem. Conductors shall be pulled tight and be installed as high as practically possible inceiling cavities. Wiring shall not be laid on the ceiling or duct. Conductors shall not beinstalled between the top cord of a joist or beam and the bottom of roof decking. Contractor shall be fully responsible for noise immunity and rewire in conduit if electrical orRF noise affects performance.

6. Number-code or color-code conductors appropriately for future identification and servicingof control system. Code shall be as indicated on approved installation drawings.

C. Control Valves: Install so that actuators, wiring, and tubing connections are accessible formaintenance. Where possible, install with valve stem axis vertical, with operator side up. Where vertical stem position is not possible, or would result in poor access, valves may beinstalled with stem horizontal. Do not install valves with stem below horizontal, or down.

D. Freezestats: Install freezestats in a serpentine fashion where shown on drawing. Provide onefoot of element for each square foot of coil face area. Where coil face area exceeds requiredlength of element, provide multiple devices, wired in parallel for normally open close on tripapplication, wired in series for normally closed, open on trip application. Adequately supportwith coil clips.

E. Averaging Temperature Sensors: Cover no more than two square feet per linear foot of sensorlength except where indicated. Generally where flow is sufficiently homogeneous/adequatelymixed at sensing location, consult AE for requirements.

F. Airflow Measuring Stations: Install per manufacturer's recommendations in an unobstructedstraight length of duct (except those installations specifically designed for installation in faninlet). For installations in fan inlets, provide on both inlets of double inlet fans and provide inletcone adapter as recommended by AFM station manufacturer.

G. Fluid Flow Sensors: Install per manufacturer's recommendations in an unobstructed straightlength of pipe.

H. Relative Humidity Sensors: Provide element guard as recommended by manufacturer for highvelocity installations. For high limit sensors, position remote enough to allow full moistureabsorption into the air stream before reaching the sensor.

I. Differential Pressure Transmitters: Provide valve bypass arrangement to protect against overpressure damaging the transmitter.

J. Flow Switches: Where possible, install in a straight run of pipe at least 15 diameters in length tominimize false indications.



23 0951 - 15

K. Current Switches for Motor Status Monitoring: Adjust so that setpoint is below minimumoperating current and above motor no load current.

L. Supply Duct Pressure Transmitters:1. General: Install pressure tips with at least 4 'round equivalent' duct diameters of straight

duct with no takeoffs upstream. Install pressure tips securely fastened with tip facingupstream in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Locate thetransmitter at an accessible location to facilitate calibration.

2. VAV System 'Down-Duct' Transmitters: Locate pressure tips approximately 2/3 of thehydraulic distance to the most remote terminal in the air system.

M. Cutting and Patching Insulation: Repair insulation to maintain integrity of insulation and vaporbarrier jacket. Use hydraulic insulating cement to fill voids and finish with material matching orcompatible with adjacent jacket material.

END OF SECTION



23 0951 - 16


BAS OPERATOR INTERFACES 23 0952 - 1

SECTION 23 0952BAS OPERATOR INTERFACES


A. Operator WorkstationsB. Control System Servers

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTSA. 23 0950 - Building Automation System (BAS) General (Refer to this Section also for Definitions

and Abbreviations)B. 23 0951 - BAS Basic Materials, and DevicesC. 23 0953 - BAS Field PanelD. 23 0954 - BAS Communications DevicesE. 23 0955 - BAS Software and ProgrammingF. 23 0958 – BAS Sequence of OperationG. 23 0959 – BAS Commissioning

1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORKA. Furnish and install all Operator Interfaces and Control System Servers as required for the BAS

functions specified. All computers shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of oneyear after Substantial Completion.

B. Refer to Section 23 0950 for general requirements.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 OPERATOR WORKSTATION (OWS)

A. Provide detachable keyboard with standard typewriter layout, function keys, and separatenumeric keypad. Provide a USB mouse and mouse pad with the system. Provide one openserial port after configuration of the workstation to meet the requirements of the rest of thesespecifications.

B. Workstation PC shall have the capability of changing serial port interrupt vectors and IOBASEaddresses through software.

C. Provide software, graphics and programming as specified in Section 23 0955.D. Provide network card approved by BAS manufacturer to support Supervisory LAN

communications (100/1000 Mbps Ethernet TCP/IP) for OWSs connected to the LocalSupervisory LAN and network card or LANID where connected to the Primary Controller LAN.

E. Provide additional hardware, video drivers, etc., to facilitate all control functions and softwarerequirements specified for the BAS.

F. It is important that the CSS and OWSs be positioned on the drawings and or their locationclearly defined. Edit the following as applicable.

G. Operator Workstations shall be placed at owners direction. Contractor shall coordinate finallocation with owner.

2.02 CONTROL SYSTEM SERVER (CSS)A. Provide detachable keyboard with standard typewriter layout, function keys, and separate

numeric keypad. Provide a USB mouse and mouse pad with the system. Provide one openserial port after configuration of the workstation to meet the requirements of the rest of thesespecifications.

B. Workstation PC shall have the capability of changing serial port interrupt vectors and IOBASEaddresses through software.


BAS OPERATOR INTERFACES 23 0952 - 2

C. Provide network configuration tool, all programming applications, graphic creation tools and allother software required to configure and operate the system.

D. For CSSs that provide web services for presentation of data across the Internet, all Webcomponents and services shall be installed with required licensing. CSS shall be configured tosecure it to the extent practical inside the Local Supervisory LAN. CSS shall always functionfrom behind a firewall provided either by the owner network administrators in the case wherethey provide the LAN infrastructure, or by this contractor where the LAN is provided under thisDivision of the specifications.

E. Provide network card approved by BAS manufacturer to support Supervisory LANcommunications (100/1000 Mbps Ethernet TCP/IP)

F. Provide additional hardware, video drivers, etc., to facilitate all control functions and softwarerequirements specified for the BAS.

G. It is important that the CSS and OWSs be positioned on the drawings and or their locationclearly defined. Edit the following as applicable

H. Control System Server shall be placed in the bulding data room.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. No license, software component, key, etc or any piece of information required to install,configure, operate, diagnose and maintain the system shall be withheld from the owner.

B. Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.END OF SECTION


BAS FIELD PANELS 23 0953 - 1

SECTION 23 0953BAS FIELD PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Building Controller (BC)B. Advance Application Specific Controller (AAC)C. Application Specific Controller (ASC)

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS:A. Section 23 09 50 - Building Automation System (BAS) General - Refer to this section for

definitions of terminologyB. Section 23 09 51 - BAS Basic Materials, Interface Devices, and SensorsC. Section 23 09 54 - BAS Communications DevicesD. Section 23 09 55 - BAS SoftwareE. Section 23 09 58 - Sequence of OperationF. Section 23 09 59 - BAS Commissioning

1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:A. Furnish and install DDC Control units and/or Smart Devices required to support specified

building automation system functions.B. Refer to Section 23 09 50 for general requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 STAND-ALONE FUNCTIONALITY

A. General: These requirements clarify the requirement for stand-alone functionality relative topackaging I/O devices with a controller. Stand-alone functionality is specified with the controllerand for each Application Category specified in Part 3. This item refers to acceptable paradigmsfor associating the points with the processor.

B. Functional Boundary: Provide controllers so that all points associated with and common to oneunit or other complete system/equipment shall reside within a single control unit. Theboundaries of a standalone system shall be as dictated in the contract documents. Generallysystems specified for the Application Category will dictate the boundary of the standalonecontrol functionality. See related restrictions below. When referring to the controller as pertainsto the standalone functionality, reference is specifically made to the processor. One processorshall execute all the related I/O control logic via one operating system that uses a commonprogramming and configuration tool.

C. The following configurations are considered acceptable with reference to a controller'sstandalone functionality:1. Points packaged as integral to the controller such that the point configuration is listed as

an essential piece of information for ordering the controller (having a unique orderingnumber).

2. Controllers with processors and modular back planes that allow plug in point modules asan integral part of the controller.

3. I/O point expander boards, plugged directly into the main controller board to expand thepoint capacity of the controller.

4. I/O point expansion devices connected to the main controller board via wiring and as suchmay be remote from the controller and that communicate via a sub LAN protocol. Thesearrangements to be considered standalone shall have a sub LAN that is dedicated to thatcontroller and include no other controller devices (AACs or ASCs). All wiring tointerconnect the I/O expander board shall be:a. Contained in the control panel enclosure;



b. Or run in conduit. Wiring shall only be accessible at the terminations.D. The following configurations are considered unacceptable with reference to a controller's

standalone functionality:1. Multiple controllers enclosed in the same control panel to accomplish the point

requirement.2.02 BUILDING CONTROLLER (BC)

A. General Requirements:1. The BC(s) shall provide fully distributed control independent of the operational status of the

OWSs and CSS. All necessary calculations required to achieve control shall be executedwithin the BC independent of any other device. All control strategies performed by theBC(s) shall be both operator definable and modifiable through the Operator Interfaces.

2. BCs shall perform overall system coordination, accept control programs, performautomated HVAC functions, control peripheral devices and perform all necessarymathematical and logical functions. BCs shall share information with the entire network ofBCs and AACs/ASCs for full global control. Each controller shall be accessed through theCSS in normal operations. In the event that the CSS is not available, the controller shallpermit multi-user operation from multiple OWS and mobile computers connected eitherlocally or over the network. Each unit shall have its own internal RAM, non-volatilememory, microprocessor, battery backup, regulated power supply, power conditioningequipment, ports for connection of operating interface devices, and control enclosure. BCs shall be programmable from the CSS, OWS, mobile computer, or hand held device. BC shall contain sufficient memory for all specified global control strategies, user definedreports and trending, communication programs, and central alarming.

3. BCs shall be connected to a controller network that qualifies as a controlling LAN.4. All BCs shall be provided with a UPS to protect against memory loss and allow for

continuous communication with the CSS in the event of a loss of power.a. The UPS shall be a 500 VA UPS equal to APC Back-UPS CS, 300 Watts / 500 VA,

Input 120V / Output 120V, Interface Port DB-9 RS-232, USB5. In addition BCs may provide intelligent, standalone control of BAS functions. Each BC

may be capable of standalone direct digital operation utilizing its own processor,non-volatile memory, input/output, wiring terminal strips, A/D converters, real-timeclock/calendar and voltage transient and lightning protection devices. Refer to standalonefunctionality specified above.

6. The BC may provide for point mix flexibility and expandability. This requirement may bemet via either a family of expander boards, modular input/output configuration, or acombination thereof. Refer to stand alone functionality specified above.

7. All BC point data, algorithms and application software shall be modifiable from the CSSand OWS.

8. Each BC shall execute application programs, calculations, and commands via amicroprocessor resident in the BC. The database and all application programs for eachBC shall be stored in non-volatile or battery backed volatile memory within the BC and willbe able to upload/download to/from the CSS.

9. BC shall provide buffer for holding alarms, messages, trends etc.10. Each BC shall include self-test diagnostics, which allow the BC to automatically alarm any

malfunctions, or alarm conditions that exceed desired parameters as determined byprogramming input.

11. Each BC shall contain software to perform full DDC/PID control loops.12. For systems requiring end-of-line resistors those resistors shall be located in the BC.13. Input-Output Processing

a. Digital Outputs (DO): Outputs shall be rated for a minimum 24 Vac or Vdc, 1 ampmaximum current. Each shall be configurable as normally open or normally closed. Each output shall have an LED to indicate the operating mode of the output and amanual hand off or auto switch to allow for override. Each DO shall be discreteoutputs from the BC's board (multiplexing to a separate manufacturer's board isunacceptable). Provide suppression to limit transients to acceptable levels.



b. Analog Inputs (AI): AI shall be 0-5 Vdc, 0-10 Vdc, 0-20 Vdc, and 0-20 mA. Providesignal conditioning, and zero and span calibration for each input. Each input shall be adiscrete input to the BC's board (multiplexing to a separate manufacturers board isunacceptable unless specifically indicated otherwise). A/D converters shall have aminimum resolution of 12 bits.

c. Digital Inputs (DI): Monitor dry contact closures. Accept pulsed inputs of at least oneper second. Source voltage for sensing shall be supplied by the BC and shall beisolated from the main board. Software multiplexing of an AI and resistors may onlybe done in non-critical applications and only with prior approval of Architect/Engineer.

d. Universal Inputs (UI-AI or DI): To serve as either AI or DI as specified above.e. Electronic Analog Outputs (AO): Voltage mode: 0-5 Vdc and 0-10 Vdc; Current mode:

4-20 mA. Provide zero and span calibration and circuit protection. Pulse WidthModulated (PWM) analog via a DO [and transducer] is acceptable only with ownerapproval (Generally these will not be allowed on loops with a short time constant suchas discharge temperature loops, economizer loops, pressure control loops and thelike. They are generally acceptable for standard room temperature control loops.). Where these are allowed, transducer/actuator shall be programmable for normallyopen, normally closed, or hold last position and shall allow adjustable timing. Each DOshall be discrete outputs from the BC's board (multiplexing to a separatemanufacturers board is unacceptable). D/A converters shall have a minimumresolution of 10 bits.

f. Pulsed Inputs: Capable of counting up to 8 pulses per second with buffer toaccumulate pulse count. Pulses shall be counted at all times.

14. A communication port for operator interface through a mobile computer shall be providedin each BC. It shall be possible to perform all program and database back-up, systemmonitoring, control functions, and BC diagnostics through this port. Standalone BC panelsshall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting its normal operation.

15. Each BC shall be equipped with loop tuning algorithm for precise proportional, integral,derivative (PID) control. Loop tuning tools provided with the CSS software is acceptable. In any case, tools to support loop tuning must be provided such that P, I, and D gains areautomatically calculated.

16. All analog output points shall have a selectable failure setpoint. The BC shall be capableof maintaining this failure setpoint in the event of a system malfunction, which causes lossof BC control, or loss of output signal, as long as power is available at the BC. The failuresetpoint shall be selectable on a per point basis.

17. Slope intercepts and gain adjustments shall be available on a per-point basis.18. BC Power Loss:

a. Upon a loss of power to any BC, the other units on the controlling LAN shall not in anyway be affected.

b. Upon a loss of power to any BC, the battery backup shall ensure that the energymanagement control software, the Direct Digital Control software, the databaseparameters, and all other programs and data stored in the RAM are retained for aminimum of fifty (50) hours. An alarm diagnostic message shall indicate that the BCis under battery power.

c. Upon restoration of power within the specified battery backup period, the BC shallresume full operation without operator intervention. The BC shall automatically resetits clock such that proper operation of any time dependent function is possible withoutmanual reset of the clock. All monitored functions shall be updated.

d. Should the duration of a loss of power exceed the specified battery back-up period orBC panel memory be lost for any reason, the panel shall automatically report thecondition (upon resumption of power) and be capable of receiving a download via thenetwork from the CSS or a mobile computer. In addition, the owner shall be able toupload the most current versions of all energy management control programs, DirectDigital Control programs, database parameters, and all other data and programs in



the memory of each BC to the CSS or a mobile computer via the network or the localUSB or RS-232C port.

19. BC Failure:a. Building Controller LAN Data Transmission Failure: BC shall continue to operate in

stand-alone mode. BC shall store loss of communication alarm along with the time ofthe event. All control functions shall continue with the global values programmable toeither the last value or a specified value. Peer BCs shall recognize the loss andreport alarm.

b. BC Hardware Failure: BC shall cease operation and terminate communication withother devices. All outputs shall go to their specified fail position.

20. Each BC shall be equipped with firmware resident self-diagnostics for sensors and becapable of assessing an open or shorted sensor circuit and taking an appropriate controlaction (close valve, damper, etc.).

21. BCs may include network communications interface functions for controlling secondarycontrolling LANs Refer to Section 23 09 54 - BAS System Communications Devices forrequirements if this function is packaged with the BC.

22. A minimum of four levels of privileges shall be provided at each BC.23. All local user accounts shall be password protected. Strong password shall be used and

complies with the owner security standard.24. BCs shall be mounted on equipment, in packaged equipment enclosures, or locking wall

mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure, as specified elsewhere.B. BACnet Building Controller Requirements:

1. The BC(s) shall support all BIBBs defined in the BACnet-IP (B-BC) device profile asdefined in the BACnet standard.

2. BCs shall communicate over the BACnet-IP LAN.3. Each BC shall be connected to the BACnet-IP LAN communicating to/from other BCs.

2.03 ADVANCED APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLER (AAC) AND APPLICATION SPECIFICCONTROLLER (ASC)A. General Requirements:

1. AACs and ASCs shall provide intelligent, standalone control of HVAC equipment. Eachunit shall have its own internal RAM, non-volatile memory and will continue to operate alllocal control functions in the event of a loss of communications on the ASC LAN orsub-LAN. Refer to standalone requirements by application specified in Part 3 of thissection. In addition, it shall be able to share information with every other BC and AAC/ASC on the entire network.

2. Each AAC and ASC shall include self-test diagnostics that allow the AAC /ASC toautomatically relay to the BC, or LAN Interface Device, any malfunctions or abnormalconditions within the AAC /ASC or alarm conditions of inputs that exceed desiredparameters as determined by programming input.

3. AACs and ASCs shall include sufficient memory to perform the specific control functionsrequired for its application and to communicate with other devices.

4. Each AAC and ASC must be capable of stand-alone direct digital operation utilizing its ownprocessor, non-volatile memory, input/output, minimum 8 bit A to D conversion, voltagetransient and lightning protection devices. All volatile memory shall have a battery backupof at least fifty- (50) hrs with a battery life of (5) five years.

5. All point data; algorithms and application software within an AAC /ASC shall be modifiablefrom the OWS.

6. AAC and ASC Input-Output Processinga. Digital Outputs (DO): Outputs shall be rated for a minimum 24 VAC or VDC, 1 amp

maximum current. Each shall be configurable as normally open or normally closed. Each output shall have an LED to indicate the operating mode of the output and amanual hand off or auto switch to allow for override (Only AAC requires HOA). EachDO shall be discrete outputs from the AAC/ASC's board (multiplexing to a separate



manufacturer's board is unacceptable). Provide suppression to limit transients toacceptable levels.

b. Analog Inputs (AI): AI shall be O-5 Vdc, 0-10Vdc, 0-20Vdc, and 0-20 mA. Providesignal conditioning, and zero and span calibration for each input. Each input shall be adiscrete input to the BC's board (multiplexing to a separate manufacturers board isunacceptable unless specifically indicated otherwise). A/D converters shall have aminimum resolution of 8-10 bits depending on application.

c. Digital Inputs (DI): Monitor dry contact closures. Accept pulsed inputs of at least oneper second. Source voltage for sensing shall be supplied by the BC and shall beisolated from the main board. Software multiplexing of an AI and resistors may onlybe done in non-critical applications and only with prior approval of Architect/Engineer

d. Universal Inputs (UI-AI or DI): To serve as either AI or DI as specified above.e. Electronic Analog Outputs (AO) as required by application: voltage mode, 0-5VDC

and 0-10VDC; current mode (4-20 mA). Provide zero and span calibration and circuitprotection. Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) analog via a DO [and transducer] isacceptable only with owner approval (Generally, PWM will not be allowed on loopswith a short time constant such as discharge temperature loops, economizer loops,pressure control loops and the like. They are generally acceptable for standard roomtemperature control loops.). Where PWM is allowed, transducer/actuator shall beprogrammable for normally open, normally closed, or hold last position and shall allowadjustable timing. Each DO shall be discrete outputs from the BC's board(multiplexing to a separate manufacturers board is unacceptable). D/A convertersshall have a minimum resolution of 8 bits.

B. BACnet AAC(s) and ASC(s) Requirements:1. The AAC(s) and ASC(s) shall support all BIBBs defined in the BACnet Building Controller

(B-AAC and B-ASC) device profile as defined in the BACnet standard.2. AAC(s) and ASC(s) shall communicate over the BACnet Building Controller LAN or the

ASC LAN or sub-LAN.3. Each BC shall be connected to the BACnet Building Controller LAN communicating to/from

other BCs.C. Terminal Box Controllers:

1. Terminal box controllers controlling damper positions to maintain a quantity of supply orexhaust air serving a space shall have an automatically initiated function that resets thevolume regulator damper to the fully closed position on a scheduled basis. The controllersshall initially be set up to perform this function once every 24 hours. The purpose of thisrequired function is to reset and synchronize the actual damper position with the calculateddamper position and to assure the damper will completely close when commanded. Thesoftware shall select scheduled boxes randomly and shall not allow more than 5% of thetotal quantity of controllers in a building to perform this function at the same time. Thisreset shall be performed while the AHU is operating. The BAS shall send an alarm for anyterminal box that has been reset and does not indicate 0 cfm flow with the dampercommanded closed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 INSPECTION:


3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEMS:A. General: Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,

specifications roughing-in drawings and details shown on drawings. Contractor shall install allcontrollers in accordance with manufacturer's installation procedures and practices.



3.03 HARDWARE APPLICATION REQUIREMENTSA. General: The functional intent of this specification is to allow cost effective application of

manufacturers standard products while maintain the integrity and reliability of the controlfunctions. A BC as specified above is generally fully featured and customizable whereas theAAC/ASC refers to a more cost-effective unit designed for lower-end applications. Specificrequirements indicated below are required for the respective application. Manufacturer mayapply the most cost-effective unit that meets the requirement of that application.

B. Standalone Capability: Each Control Unit shall be capable of performing the required sequenceof operation for the associated equipment. All physical point data and calculated valuesrequired to accomplish the sequence of operation shall originate within the associated CU withonly the exceptions enumerated below. Refer to Item 2.01 above for physical limitations ofstandalone functionality. Listed below are functional point data and calculated values that shallbe allowed to be obtained from or stored by other CUs or SDs via LAN.

C. Where associated control functions involve functions from different categories identified below,the requirements for the most restrictive category shall be met.

D. Application Category 0 (Distributed monitoring)1. Applications in this category include the following:

a. Monitoring of variables that are not used in a control loop, sequence logic, or safety.2. Points on BCs, AACs, and ASCs may be used in these applications as well as SDs and/or

general-purpose I/O modules.3. Where these points are trended, contractor shall verify and document that the network

bandwidth is acceptable for such trends and is still capable of acceptable and timelycontrol function.

E. Application Category 1 (Application Specific Controller):1. Applications in this category include the following:

a. Fan Coil Unitsb. Airflow Control Boxes (VAV and Constant Volume Terminal Units)c. Misc. Heatersd. Unitary equipment <15 tons (Package Terminal AC Units, Package Terminal Heat

Pumps, Split-System AC Units, Split-System Heat Pumps, Water-Source HeatPumps)

e. Induction Unitsf. Variable Speed Drive (VSD) controllers not requiring safety shutdowns of the

controlled device.2. ASCs may be used in these applications.3. Standalone Capability: Provide capability to execute control functions for the application

for a given setpoint or mode, which shall generally be occupied mode control. Only thefollowing data (as applicable) may be acquired from other controllers via LANs. In theevent of a loss of communications with any other controller, or any fault in any systemhardware that interrupts the acquisition of any of these values, the ASC shall use the lastvalue obtained before the fault occurred. If such fault has not been corrected after thespecified default delay time, specified default value(s) shall then be substituted until suchfault has been corrected.

Physical/Virtual PointDefault ValueScheduling PeriodNormalMorning Warm-UpOff (cold discharge air)Load ShedOff (no shedding)Summer/WinterWinter

4. Mounting:a. ASCs that control equipment located above accessible ceilings shall be mounted on

the equipment in an accessible enclosure that does not hinder maintenance ofmechanical equipment and shall be rated for plenum use.



b. ASCs that control equipment mounted in a mechanical room may either be mountedin, on the equipment, or on the wall of the mechanical room at an adjacent, accessiblelocation.

c. ASCs that control equipment located in occupied spaces or outside shall either bemounted within the equipment enclosure (responsibility for physical fit remains withthe contractor) or in a nearby mechanical/utility room in which case it shall beenclosed in a NEMA 1, locking enclosure.

d. Section 23 09 53 contractor may furnish ASCs to the terminal unit manufacturer forfactory mounting.

5. Programmability: Operator shall be able to modify all setpoints (temperature and airflow),scheduling parameters associated with the unit, tuning and set up parameters, interstagetiming parameters, and mode settings. Application-specific block control algorithms maybe used to meet the sequence of operations. The ability to customize the control algorithmis not required unless specifically indicated otherwise.

6. LAN Restrictions: Limit the number of nodes on the network to the maximumrecommended by the manufacturer.

F. Application Category 2 (General Purpose Terminal Controller)1. Applications in this category include the following:

a. Unitary Equipment >= 15 tons (Air Conditioners, Heat Pumps, PackagedHeating/Cooling Units, and the like)

b. Small, Constant Volume Single Zone Air Handling Unitsc. Constant Volume Pump Start/Stopd. Misc. Equipment (Exhaust Fan) Start/Stope. Misc. Monitoring (not directly associated with a control sequence and where trending

is not critical)f. Steam Converter Control

2. BCs may be used in these applications.3. ASC's may be used in these applications provided the ASC meets all requirements

specified below. This category requires a general-purpose ASC to whichapplication-specific control algorithms can be attached.

4. Standalone Capability: Only the following data (as applicable) may be acquired from otherASCs via LANs. In the event of a loss of communications with any other ASCs, or anyfault in any system hardware that interrupts the acquisition of any of these values, theAAC/ASC shall use the last value obtained before the fault occurred. If such fault has notbeen corrected after the specified default delay time, specified default value(s) shall thenbe substituted until such fault has been corrected.

Physical/Virtual PointDefault Delay TimeDefault ValueOutside Air Temperature3 minutes80°FOutside Air Humidity3 minutes60%RHOutside Air Enthalpy3 minutes30 Btu/lbTrend DataN/ACooling/Heating Requests3 minutesNoneSmoke Pressurization Mode3 minutesNormal ModeSmoke Exhaust Command3 minutesNormal Mode

5. Mounting:a. ASCs that control equipment located above accessible ceilings shall be mounted on

the equipment so as not to hinder mechanical maintenance and shall be rated forplenum use.

b. ASCs that control equipment located in occupied spaces or outside shall either bemounted within the equipment enclosure (responsibility for physical fit remains withthe contractor) or in a nearby mechanical/utility room in which case it shall beenclosed in a NEMA 1, locking enclosure.

6. Programmability: Operator shall be able to modify all setpoints (temperature and airflow),scheduling parameters associated with the unit, tuning and set up parameters, interstage



timing parameters, and mode settings. Operator shall be able to address and configurespare inputs for monitoring. [Operator shall be able to address and configure spare outputsfor simple single loop control actions or event initiated actions.] Application-specific blockcontrol algorithms shall used to meet the sequence of operations. The ability to customizethe control algorithm is not required unless specifically indicated otherwise.

7. LAN Restrictions: Limit the number of nodes servicing any one of these applications onthe AAC/ASC LAN to 32.

G. Application Category 3 (Advanced Application Controller)1. Applications in this category include the following:

a. Large Constant Volume Air Handlersb. VAV Air Handlers generally >5,000 and <10,000cfmc. Dual Duct Air Handlers generally >5000 and < 10,000 cfmd. Multizone Air Handlerse. Self-Contained VAV Units

2. BCs may be used in these applications.3. AAC's may be used in these applications provided:

a. The AAC's meets all requirements specified below.b. All control functions and physical I/O associated with a given unit resides in one AAC.c. Input A/D is 10-bit. Exception: 8-bit input A/D can be used when matched with high

accuracy sensors, the range of which meets the resolution requirements specified forthe applicable sensor in Section 23 09 51.

d. Pulsed inputs required for the application can be monitored and accumulatedeffectively.

4. Standalone Capability: Only the following data (as applicable) may be acquired from otherAACs via LANs. In the event of a loss of communications with any other AACs, or any faultin any system hardware that interrupts the acquisition of any of these values, the AAC shalluse the last value obtained before the fault occurred. If such fault has not been correctedafter the specified default delay time, specified default value(s) shall then be substituteduntil such fault has been corrected.

physical/virtual pointdefault delay timedefault valueOutside Air Temperature3 minutes80°FOutside Air Humidity3 minutes60%RHOutside Air Enthalpy3 minutes30 Btu/lbEnable Local OperationLast ValueCooling/Heating Requests3 minutesNoneSmoke Pressurization Mode3 minutesNormal ModeSmoke Exhaust Command3 minutesNormal Mode

5. Mounting:a. AACs that control equipment located above accessible ceilings shall be mounted on

the equipment so as not to hinder mechanical maintenance and shall be rated forplenum use.

b. AACs that control equipment located in occupied spaces or outside shall either bemounted within the equipment enclosure (responsibility for physical fit remains withthe contractor) or in a near by mechanical/utility room in which case it shall beenclosed in a NEMA 1, locking enclosure.

6. Programmability: Operator shall be able to modify all setpoints (temperature and airflow),scheduling parameters associated with the unit, tuning and set up parameters, interstagetiming parameters, and mode settings. Operator shall be able to address and configurespare inputs for monitoring. Operator shall be able to program custom DDC controlalgorithms and specify trending parameters, which will be retained in memory in the eventof a loss of communications. Application-specific block control algorithms may be usedprovided they meet the sequence of operations. The control algorithms shall becompletely customizable.

7. LAN Restrictions: Each LAN which participates in the transfer of data between the CU andthe local operator workstation shall be subject to the following criteria:



a. Limit the number of nodes servicing any one of these applications on the AAC/ASCLAN to 16.

b. The Building Controller LAN shall be subject only to manufacturer's published LANlimitations.

H. Application Category 41. Applications in this category include the following:

a. Central Cooling Plantb. Central Heating Plantc. Cooling Towersd. Sequenced or Variable Speed Pump Controle. Local Chiller Control (unit specific)f. Local Free Cooling Heat Exchanger Controlg. Air Handlers over 10,000 cfm or serving critical areas

2. BCs shall be used in these applications.3.04 CONTROL UNIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Section 23 09 50 for requirements pertaining to control unit quantity and location.END OF SECTION


BAS COMMUNICATIONDEVICES

23 0954 - 1

SECTION 23 0954BAS COMMUNICATION DEVICES


A. Network Integration Devices1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Section 23 09 50 - Building Automation System (BAS) GeneralB. Section 23 09 51 - BAS Basic Materials, Interface Devices, and SensorsC. Section 23 09 53 - BAS Field PanelsD. Section 23 09 55 - BAS SoftwareE. Section 23 09 58 - Sequences of OperationF. Section 23 09 59 - BAS Commissioning

1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORKA. Contractor shall provide all interface devices and software to provide an integrated system

connecting BCs, AACs, ASCs and Gateways to the owner network (if appicable).PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 NETWORK CONNECTION

A. owner WAN: Refer Section 23 09 50 Part 1.11.C.1 - Building Automation System (BAS)General for description of System Architecture.

B. The following BIBBs must be supported on the Local Supervisory LAN using Ethernet eitherdirectly or through a gateway:1. BACnet Data Sharing Objects (DS-):

a. Read Property (RP-A) Initiateb. Read Property (RP-B) Executec. Read Property Multiple (RPM-A) Initiated. Read Property Multiple (RPM-B) Executee. Write Property (WP-A) Initiatef. Write Property (WP-B) Executeg. Write Property Multiple (WPM-A) Initiateh. Write Property Multiple (WPM-B) Executei. COV Unsubscribed (COVU-A) Initiatej. COV Unsubscribed (COVU-B) Execute

2. BACnet Alarm and Event Object (AE-)a. Confirmed Event Notification (N-B) Initiateb. Unconfirmed Event Notification (N-B) Initiate

C. Refer to Section 23 09 55 Part III for the BACnet Object naming convention.2.02 BACNET GATEWAYS

A. Gateways shall be provided to link non-BACnet control products to the BACnet inter-network. All of the functionality described in this section is to be provided by using the BACnetcapabilities. Each Gateway shall have the ability to expand the number of BACnet objects ofeach type supported by 20% to accommodate future system changes.

B. Each Gateway shall provide values for all points on the non-BACnet side of the Gateway toBACnet devices as if the values were originating from BACnet objects. The Gateway shall alsoprovide a way for BACnet devices to modify (write) all points specified by the AOC usingstandard BACnet services. All points are required to be writable for each site.

C. The Gateway shall implement BACnet schedule objects and permit both read and write accessto the schedules from the BC.



23 0954 - 2

D. Each Gateway shall provide a way to collect and archive or trend (time, value) data pairs.E. Each Gateway and any devices that the Gateway represents which have time-of-day

information shall respond to workstation requests to synchronize the date and time. EachGateway and any devices that the Gateway represents shall support dynamic device bindingand dynamic object binding.

F. All points in the system shall be made network visible through the use of standard BACnetobjects or through proprietary BACnet extensions that the workstation also supports. All pointsshall be writable using standard BACnet services.

G. All devices have a Device Object instance number that is unique throughout the entireinter-network. All BACnet devices shall be configured with a Device Object instance numberthat is based on the format specified (shown in decimal notation). This includes all physicaldevices as well as any logical BACnet devices that are physically represented by Gateways.

H. All BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBs) are required to be supported for each trueBACnet device or Gateway. The Gateway shall support all BIBBs defined in the BACnetGateway's device profile as defined in the BACnet standard.

2.03 CONTROLLER LOCAL AREA NETWORK INTERFACE DEVICES (LANID)A. The LANID shall be a microprocessor-based communications device which acts as a

gateway/router between the Primary Controlling LAN and the Secondary Controlling LAN. Itprovides an operator interface. These may be provided within a BC or as a separate device.

B. The LANID shall perform information translation between the Primary Controlling LAN and theSecondary Controlling LAN, supervise communications on a polling Secondary Controlling LAN,and be applicable to systems in which the same functionality is not provided in the BC. Insystems where the LANID is a separate device, it shall contain its own microprocessor, RAM,battery, real-time clock, communication ports, and power supply as specified for a BC in Section23 09 53. Each LANID shall be mounted in a lockable enclosure.

C. Each LANID shall support interrogation, full control, and all utilities associated with all BCs onthe Primary Controlling LAN, all AACs and ASCs connected to all Secondary Controlling LANsunder the Primary Controlling LAN, and all points connected to those PCUs and SCUs.

D. Upon loss of power to a LANID, the battery shall provide for minimum 100-hour backup of allprograms and data in RAM. The battery shall be sealed and self-charging.

E. The LANID shall be transparent to control functions and shall not be required to controlinformation routing on the Primary Controlling LANControlling LANControlling LANControllingLANControlling LAN

F. All BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBs) are required to be supported for each trueBACnet device or Gateway. The Gateway shall support all BIBBs defined in the BACnetGateway's device profile as defined in the BACnet standard.

2.04 LOCAL SUPERVISORY LAN GATEWAYS/ROUTERSA. The gateway/router shall be a microprocessor-based communications device that acts as a

gateway/router between the Supervisory LAN CSSs or OWS and the Controlling LAN.B. The gateway/router shall perform information translation between the Controlling LAN and the

Local Supervisory LAN, and shall use BACnet over IP. When BACnet is used, refer to therequirements of the BACnet Gateways specified herein.

C. The gateway/router shall contain its own microprocessor, RAM, battery, real-time clock,communication ports, and power supply as specified for a BC in Section 23 09 53. Eachgateway/router shall be mounted in a lockable enclosure.

D. The gateway/router shall allow centralized overall system supervision, operator interface,management report generation, alarm annunciation, acquisition of trend data, andcommunication with control units. It shall allow system operators to perform the followingfunctions from the CSS, and OWSs:1. Configure systems.



23 0954 - 3

2. Monitor and supervise control of all points.3. Change control setpoints.4. Override input values.5. Override output values6. Enter programmed start/stop time schedules.7. View and acknowledge alarms and messages.8. Receive, store and display trend logs and management reports.9. Upload/Download programs, databases, etc. as specified.

E. Upon loss of power to the gateway/router, the battery shall provide for minimum 100 hourbackup of all programs and data in RAM. The battery shall be sealed and self-charging.

F. The gateway/router shall be transparent to control functions and shall not be required to controlinformation routing on the Controlling LAN

2.05 CHILLER CONTROLS INTERFACE DEVICE (CID)A. The CID shall be a microprocessor-based communications device that acts as a gateway

between the control protocol and the applicable chiller controller.B. The CID shall contain its own microprocessor, RAM, battery, communication ports and, power

supply.C. Each CID shall support full bi-directional communications translation as more fully specified in

Section 23 09 55.D. See drawings for required list of mapped points.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 INSPECTION:


3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEMS:A. General: Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,

roughing-in drawings and details shown on drawings.B. Contractor shall provide all interface devices and software to provide an integrated system.C. Contractor shall closely coordinate with the owner, or designated representative, to establish IP

addresses and communications to assure proper operation of the building control system on theowner network.

END OF SECTION



23 0954 - 4


BAS SOFTWARE ANDPROGRAMMING

23 0955 - 1

SECTION 23 0955BAS SOFTWARE AND PROGRAMMING


A. System SoftwareB. Programming DescriptionC. Control AlgorithmsD. Energy Management ApplicationsE. Password ProtectionF. Alarm ReportingG. TrendingH. Data Acquisition and StorageI. Point StructuringJ. Dynamic Color Graphics

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS:A. Section 23 09 50 - Building Automation System (BAS) GeneralB. Section 23 09 51 - BAS Basic Materials, Interface Devices, and SensorsC. Section 23 09 53 - BAS Field PanelsD. Section 23 09 54 - BAS Communications DevicesE. Section 23 09 58 - Sequences of OperationF. Section 23 09 59 - BAS Commissioning

1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:A. Fully configure systems and furnish and install all software, programming and dynamic color

graphics for a complete and fully functioning system as specified.B. Refer to Section 23 09 50 - Building Automation System (BAS) for general requirementsC. Refer to 23 09 58 - Sequence of Operation for specific sequences of operation for controlled

equipment.1.04 LICENSING

A. Include licensing for all software packages at all required workstations.B. All operator interface, programming environment, networking, database management and any

other software used by the Contractor to install the system or needed to operate the system toits full capabilities shall be licensed and provided to the owner.

C. All BAS software should be available on CSS(s) provided, and on all Portable OperatorTerminals. All software keys to provide all rights shall be installed on CSS. At least 2 sets ofmedia (CD or DVD) shall be provided with backup software and configurations for all softwareprovided, so that the owner may reinstall any software as necessary

D. Provide licensing and original software media for each device. Include all BAS softwarelicenses and all required third party software licenses.

E. Upgrade all software packages to the release (version) in effect at the end of the WarrantyPeriod.

F. Refer to Section 23 09 50 - Building Automation System (BAS) General for furtherrequirements.



23 0955 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 SYSTEM SOFTWARE-GENERAL

A. Functionality and Completeness: The Contractor shall furnish and install all software andprogramming necessary to provide a complete and functioning system as specified. TheContractor shall include all software and programming not specifically itemized in theseSpecifications, which is necessary to implement, maintain, operate, and diagnose the system incompliance with these Specifications.

B. Configuration: The software shall support the system as a distributed processing networkconfiguration.

2.02 CONTROLLER SOFTWAREA. BC Software Residency: Each BC as defined below shall be capable of controlling and

monitoring of all points physically connected to it. All software including the following shallreside and execute at the BC:1. Real-Time Operating System software2. Real-Time Clock/Calendar and network time synchronization3. BC diagnostic software4. LAN Communication software/firmware5. Direct Digital Control software6. Alarm Processing and Buffering software7. Energy Management software8. Data Trending, Reporting, and Buffering software9. I/O (physical and virtual) database10. Remote Communications software

B. AAC/ASC Software Residency: Each AAC/ASC as defined below shall be capable of controllingand monitoring of all points physically connected to it. As a minimum, software including thefollowing shall reside and execute at the AAC/ASC. Other software to support other requiredfunctions of the AAC/ASC may reside at the BC or LAN interface device (specified in Section 2309 54) with the restrictions/exceptions per application provided in Section 23 09 53:1. Real-Time Operating System software2. AAC/ASC diagnostic software3. LAN Communications software4. Control software applicable to the unit it serves that will support a single mode of operation5. I/O (physical and virtual) database to support one mode of operation

C. Standalone Capability: BC shall continue to perform all functions independent of a failure inother BC/AAC/ASC, CSS, or other communication links to other BCs/AACs/ASCs or CSSs. Trends and runtime totalization shall be retained in memory. Runtime totalization shall beavailable on all digital input points that monitor electric motor status. Refer also to Section 2309 53 for other aspects of standalone functionality.

D. Operating System: Controllers shall include a real-time operating system resident in ROM. This software shall execute independently from any other devices in the system. It shall supportall specified functions. It shall provide a command prioritization scheme to allow functionaloverride of control functions. Refer also to Section 23 09 53 for other aspects of the controller'soperating system.

E. Network Communications: Each controller shall include software/firmware that supports thenetworking of CUs on a common communications trunk that forms the respective LAN. Network support shall include the following:1. Controller communication software shall include error detection, correction, and

re-transmission to ensure data integrity.2. Operator/System communication software shall facilitate communications between other

BCs, all subordinate AACs/ASCs, Gateways and LAN Interface Devices or CSS. Softwareshall allow point interrogation, adjustment, addition/deletion, and programming while thecontroller is online and functioning without disruption to unaffected points. The software



23 0955 - 3

architecture shall allow networked controllers to share selected physical and virtual pointinformation throughout the entire system.

F. Diagnostic Software: Controller software shall include diagnostic software that checks memoryand communications and reports any malfunctions.

G. Alarm/Messaging Software: Controller software shall support alarm/message processing andbuffering software as more fully specified below.

H. Application Programs: CUs shall support and execute application programs as more fullyspecified below:1. All Direct Digital Control software, Energy Management Control software, and functional

block application programming software templates shall be provided in a 'ready-to-use'state, and shall not require (but shall allow) user programming.

I. Security: Controller software shall support multiple level privileges access restriction as morefully specified below.

J. Direct Digital Control: Controller shall support application of Direct Digital Control Logic. Alllogic modules shall be provided pre-programmed with written documentation to support theirapplication. Provide the following logic modules as a minimum:1. Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) control with analog, PWM and floating output2. Two Position control (Hi or Low crossing with deadband)3. Single-Pole Double-Throw relay4. Delay Timer (delay-on-make, delay-on-break, and interval)5. Hi/Low Selection6. Reset or Scaling Module7. Logical Operators (AND, OR, NOT, XOR)

K. Psychrometric Parameters: Controller software shall provide preprogrammed functions tocalculated and present psychrometric parameters (given temperature and relative humidity)including the following as a minimum: Enthalpy, Wet Bulb Temperature.

L. Updating/Storing Application Data: Site-specific programming residing in volatile memory shallbe uploadable/downloadable from an OWS or CSS using BACnet services connected locally orthrough the network. Initiation of an upload or download shall include all of the followingmethods: Manual, Scheduled, and Automatic upon detection of a loss or change.

M. Restart: System software shall provide for orderly shutdown upon loss of power and automaticrestart upon power restoration. Volatile memory shall be retained; outputs shall go toprogrammed fail-safe (open, closed, or last) position. Equipment restart shall include a userdefinable time delay on each piece of equipment to stagger the restart. Loss of power shall bealarmed at operator interface indicating date and time.

N. Time Synchronization: Automatic time synchronization shall be provided using BACnetservices. Operators shall be able to set the time and date in any device on the network thatsupports time-of-day functionality. The operator shall be able to select to set the time and datefor an individual device, devices on a single network, or all devices simultaneously.

O. Misc. Calculations: System software shall automate calculation of psychometric functions,calendar functions, kWh/kW, and flow determination and totalization from pulsed or analoginputs, curve-fitting, look-up table, input/output scaling, time averaging of inputs and A/Dconversion coefficients.

2.03 APPLICATION PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTIONA. The application software shall be user programmable.B. This specification generally requires a programming convention that is logical, easy to learn,

use, and diagnose. General approaches to application programming shall be provided by one,or a combination, of the following conventions:1. Point Definition: Provide templates customized for point type, to support input of individual

point information. Use standard BACnet Objects as applicable.



23 0955 - 4

2. Graphical Block Programming: Manipulation of graphic icon 'blocks', each of whichrepresents a subroutine, in a functional/logical manner forming a control logic diagram. Blocks shall allow entry of adjustable settings and parameters via pop-up windows. Provide a utility that shall allow the graphic logic diagrams to be directly compiled intoapplication programs. Logic diagrams shall be viewable either off-line, or on-line withreal-time block output values.

3. Functional Application Programming: Pre-programmed application specific programs thatallow/require limited customization via 'fill-in-the-blanks' edit fields. Typical values wouldbe setpoints gains, associated point names, alarm limits, etc.

C. Provide a means for testing and/or debugging the control programs both off-line and on-line.2.04 ENERGY MANAGEMENT APPLICATIONS

A. System shall have the ability to perform all of the following energy management routines viapreprogrammed function blocks or template programs. As a minimum provide the followingwhether or not required in the software:1. Time-of-Day Scheduling2. Calendar-Based Scheduling3. Holiday Scheduling4. Temporary Schedule Overrides5. Optimal Start / Optimal Stop based on space temperature offset, outdoor air temperature,

and building heating and cooling capacitance factors as a minimum6. Night Setback and Morning Recovery Control, with ventilation only during occupancy7. Economizer Control (enthalpy or dry-bulb)8. Peak Demand Limiting / Load Shedding9. Dead Band Control

B. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention, andshall be flexible enough to allow operator customization. Programs shall be applied to buildingequipment as described in Section 23 09 58 - Sequence of Operation.

2.05 ACCESS PRIVILEGESA. Multiple-level access privileges shall be provided. A minimum of four (4) levels of access shall

be supported.B. The highest level of access, Administrator Level access, shall allow the BAS administrator to

perform application, database, and user management functions.C. Each login credentials shall be assigned to a pre-defined level of access. Alternately, a

comprehensive list of accessibility/functionality items shall be provided, to be enabled ordisabled for each user according to the level of access granted.

D. Operators shall be able to perform only those commands available for the access levelassigned to their login credentials.

E. Login credentials are stored in the BC's local database. A minimum of 20 user names shall besupported and programmed per the owner's direction.

F. Login credentials can be looked up using the Lightweight Directory Access (LDAP) through theBAS server.

G. Strong password shall be used on all login credentials.H. User-definable, automatic log-off timers from 1 to 60 minutes shall be provided to prevent users

from inadvertently leaving interface device unattended.I. At system handover, all default and Contractor created login credentials for the system shall be

provided to the owner and all temporary login credentials shall be removed.2.06 ALARM AND EVENT MANAGEMENT REPORTING

A. Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarms and messages tooperator devices and memory files. Each BC shall perform distributed, independent alarmanalysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize



23 0955 - 5

network traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall a BCs ability to reportalarms be affected by either operator activity at an OWS or local handheld device, or bycommunications with other panels on the network.1. Alarm Descriptor: Each alarm or point change shall include that point's English language

description, and the time and date of occurrence. In addition to the alarm's descriptor andthe time and date, the user shall be able to print, display and store an alarm message tomore fully describe the alarm condition or direct operator response.

2. Alarm Prioritization: The software shall allow users to define the handling and routing ofeach alarm by their assignment to discrete priority levels. A minimum of five (5) prioritylevels shall be provided - Level 1 Life Safety (i.e. smoke detector), Level 2 Critical (i.e.controller failure), Level 3 Abnormal (i.e. out-of-range temperature), Level 4 Energy Waste(i.e. fighting valves), Level 5 Maintenance Message (i.e. runtime monitor, filter status). Foreach priority level, users shall have the ability to enable or disable an audible tonewhenever an alarm is reported and whenever an alarm returns to normal condition. Usersshall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each individual alarm and foreach priority level. Contractor shall coordinate with the owner on establishing alarm prioritydefinitions.

3. Alarm Report Routing: Each alarm priority level shall be associated with a uniqueuser-defined list of operator devices including any combination of local or remoteworkstations, printers and workstation disk files. All alarms associated with a given prioritylevel shall be routed to all operator devices on the user-defined list and/or email todesignated owner email address (mailbox resource) associated with that priority level. Foreach priority level, alarms shall be automatically routed to a default operator device in theevent that alarms are unable to be routed to any operator device assigned to the prioritylevel.

4. Auto-Dial Alarm Routing: For alarm priority levels that include a mobile device as one ofthe listed reporting destinations, the BC shall initiate a call to report the alarm, and shallterminate the call after alarm reporting is complete. System shall be capable of multipleretries and buffer alarms until a connection is made. If no connection is made, systemshall attempt connection to an alternate mobile device. System shall also be able to dialmultiple mobile devices upon alarm activation.

5. Alarm Acknowledgment: For alarm priority levels that are directed to a OWS, an indicationof alarm receipt shall be displayed immediately regardless of the application is in use atthe OWS, and shall remain on the screen until acknowledged by a user having a privilegethat allows alarm acknowledgment. Upon acknowledgment, the complete alarm messagestring (including date, time, and user name of acknowledging operator) shall be stored in aselected file on the BC or CSS.

B. It shall be possible for any operator to receive a summary of all alarms regardless ofacknowledgement status; for which a particular recipient is enrolled for notification; based oncurrent event state; based on the particular BACnet event algorithm (e.g., change of value,change of state, out of range, and so on); alarm priority; and notification class.

C. BACnet Alarming Services: All alarms and events shall be implemented using standard BACnetevent detection and notification mechanisms. The workstation shall receive BACnet alarm andevent notifications from any gateway or BACnet controller in the system and display them to anoperator. Either intrinsic reporting or algorithmic change reporting may be used but the intrinsicreporting method is preferred. The workstation shall also log alarms and events, provide a wayfor an operator with sufficient privilege to acknowledge alarms, and log acknowledgements ofalarms. It shall be possible for an operator to receive, at any time, a summary of all alarms thatare currently in effect at any site whether or not they have been acknowledged. Operators shallalso be able to view and change alarm limits for any alarm at the appropriate access level.

D. Alarm Historical Database: The database shall store all alarms and events object occurrencesin an ODBC or an OLE database-compliant relational database. Provide a commerciallyavailable ODBC driver or OLE database data provider, which would allow applications to accessthe data using standard Microsoft Windows data access services.



23 0955 - 6

2.07 TRENDINGA. The software shall display historical data in both a tabular and graphical format. The

requirements of this trending shall include the following:1. Provide trends for all physical points, virtual points and calculated variables.2. BACnet Trend Objects are preferred but where not possible trend data shall be stored in

relational database format as specified in herein under Data Acquisition and Storage.3. In the graphical format, the trend shall plot at least 4 different values for a given time

period superimposed on the same graph. The 4 values shall be distinguishable by usingunique colors. In printed form the 4 lines shall be distinguishable by different linesymbology. Displayed trend graphs shall indicate the engineering units for each trendedvalue.

4. The sample rate and data selection shall be selectable by the operator.5. The trended value range shall be selectable by the operator.6. Where trended values on one table/graph are COV, software shall automatically fill the

trend samples between COV entries.B. Control Loop Performance Trends: Controllers incorporating PID control loops shall also

provide high resolution sampling in less than six second increments for verification of controlloop performance.

C. Data Buffering and Archiving: Trend data shall be buffered at the BC, and uploaded to harddisk storage when archival is desired. All archived trends shall be transmitted to the CSS. Uploads shall occur based upon a user-defined interval, manual command, or automaticallywhen the trend buffers become full.

D. Time Synchronization: Provide a time master that is installed and configured to synchronize theclocks of all BACnet devices supporting time synchronization. Synchronization shall be doneusing Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). All trend sample times shall be able to besynchronized. The frequency of time synchronization message transmission shall be selectableby the operator.

2.08 DYNAMIC PLOTTINGA. Provide a utility to dynamically plot in real-time at least four (4) values on a given 2-dimensional

dynamic plot/graph with at least two Y-axes. At least five (5) dynamic plots shall be allowedsimultaneously.

2.09 DATA ACQUISITION AND STORAGEA. All points included in the typical equipment point list must be represented in a common, open or

accessible format. All points should be provided as BACnet standard analog, binary, schedule,or trend objects when possible. Naming conventions for these points and network addressingare discussed in the 'Point Naming Conventions' paragraph below.

B. Non-BACnet data from the BAS shall be stored in relational database format. The format andthe naming convention used for storing the database files shall remain consistent across thedatabase and across time. The relational structure shall allow for storage of any additional datapoints, which are added to the BAS in future. The metadata/schema or formal descriptions ofthe tables, columns, domains, and constraints shall be provided for each database.

C. The database shall allow applications to access the data while the database is running. Thedatabase shall not require shutting down in order to provide read-write access to the data. Datashall be able to be read from the database without interrupting the continuous storage of trenddata being carried by the BAS.

D. The database shall be ODBC or OLE database compliant. Provide a commercially-availableODBC driver or OLE database data provider, which would allow applications to access the datausing standard Microsoft Windows data access services.

2.10 TOTALIZATIONA. The software shall support totalizing analog, digital, and pulsed inputs and be capable of

accumulating, storing, and converting these totals to engineering units used in the documents.



23 0955 - 7

These values shall generally be accessible to the Operator Interfaces to supportmanagement-reporting functions.

B. Totalization of electricity use/demand shall allow application of totals to different rate periods,which shall be user definable.

C. When specified to provide electrical or utility Use/Demand, the Contractor shall obtain from thelocal utility all information required to obtain meter data, including k factors, conversionconstants, and the like.

2.11 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULINGA. Provide a graphic utility for user-friendly operator interface to adjust equipment-operating

schedules.B. All schedules shall be implemented using BACnet objects and messages. All building systems

with date and time scheduling requirements shall have schedules represented by the BACnetSchedule object. All operators shall be able to view the entries for a schedule. Operators withsufficient privilege shall be able to modify schedule entries from any BACnet workstation.

C. Scheduling feature shall include multiple seven-day master schedules, plus holiday schedule,each with start time and stop time. Master schedules shall be individually editable for each dayand holiday.

D. Scheduling feature shall allow for each individual equipment unit to be assigned to one of themaster schedules.

E. Timed override feature shall allow an operator to temporarily change the state of scheduledequipment. An override command shall be selectable to apply to an individual unit, all unitsassigned to a given master schedule, or to all units in a building. Timed override shall terminateat the end of an operator selectable time, or at the end of the scheduled occupied/unoccupiedperiod, whichever comes first. A privilege level that does not allow assignment of masterschedules shall allow a timed override feature.

F. A yearly calendar feature shall allow assignment of holidays, and automatic reset of system realtime clocks for transitions between daylight savings time and standard time.

2.12 POINT STRUCTURING AND NAMINGA. General: The intent of this section is to require a consistent means of naming points across all

owner facilities. Contractor shall configure the systems from the perspective of the Enterprise,not solely the local project. The following requirement establishes a standard for naming pointsand addressing Buildings, Networks, Devices, Instances, and the like. The convention istailored towards the BACnet-based format and as such, the interface shall always use thisnaming convention. true BACnet systems shall also use this naming convention. Fornon-BACnet systems, the naming convention shall be implemented as much as practical, andany deviations from this naming convention shall be approved by the owner. The Contractorshall contact the owner to determine the Building number and abbreviation.

B. Point Summary Table1. The term 'Point' is a generic description for the class of object represented by analog and

binary inputs, outputs, and values in accordance with ASHARE 135 standard.2. With each schematic, Contractor shall provide a Point Summary Table listing:

a. Building number and abbreviationb. System typec. Equipment typed. Point suffixe. Full point name (see Point Naming Convention paragraph)f. Point descriptiong. Ethernet backbone network numberh. Network numberi. Device IDj. Device MAC address



23 0955 - 8

k. Object ID (object type, instance number)l. Engineering units.

3. Additional fields for non-BACnet systems shall be appended to each row. Point SummaryTable shall be provided in both hard copy and in electronic format (ODBC-compliant).

4. Point Summary Table shall also illustrate Network Variables/BACnet Data Links Bindings.5. The Contractor shall coordinate with the owner's representative and compile and submit a

proposed Point Summary Table for review prior to any object programming or projectstartup.

6. The Point Summary Table shall be kept current throughout the duration of the project bythe Contractor as the Master List of all points for the project. Project closeout documentsshall include an up-to-date accurate Point Summary Table. The Contractor shall deliver tothe owner the final Point Summary Table prior to Substantial Completion of the system. The Point Summary Table shall be used as a reference and guide during thecommissioning process.

7. The Point Summary Table shall contain all data fields on a single row per point. The PointSummary Table is to have a single master source for all point information in the buildingthat is easily sorted and kept up-to-date. Although a relational database of DeviceID-to-point information would be more efficient, the single line format is required as asingle master table that will reflect all point information for the building. The pointdescription shall be an easily understandable English-language description of the point.Point Summary Table ExampleRow Headers and Examples(Transpose for a single point per row format)

Campus RKBuilding Number 006Building Association ZZ = no association (default to ZZ)System Type CoolingEquipment Type ChillerPoint Suffix CHLR1KW*Point Name (Object Name) CA0006ZZ.COOLING.CHILLER.CHLR1KW*Point Description (Object Description) Chiller 1 kWEthernet Network Number 600Network Number 610Device ID 1024006Device MAC address 24Object Type AIInstance Number 4Engineering Units KWNetwork Variable? TrueServer Device 1024006Client Devices 1028006Included with Functional

*Represents information that shall reside in the relevant BACnet property for the objectC. Point Naming Convention

1. All point names shall adhere to the format as established below. Said objects shall includeall physical I/O points, calculated points used for standard reports, and all applicationprogram parameters. For each BAS object, a specific and unique BACnet object nameshall be required.



23 0955 - 9

2. For each point, four (4) distinct descriptors shall be linked to form each unique objectname: Building, System, Equipment, and Point. Use alphanumeric characters. Space andspecial characters are not allowed. Each of the four descriptors must be bound by aperiod to form the entire object name. Reference the paragraphs below for an example ofthese descriptors.

3. The contractor shall designate the Building descriptor. The System descriptor shall furtherdefine the object in terms of air handling, cooling, heating, or other system. TheEquipment descriptor shall define the equipment category; e.g., Chiller, Air Handler, orother equipment. The Point descriptor shall define the hardware or software type orfunction associated with the equipment; e.g., supply temperature, water pressure, alarm,mixed air temperature setpoint, etc. and shall contain any numbering conventions formultiples of equipment; e.g., CHLR1KW, CHLR2KW, BLR2AL (Boiler 2 Alarm), HWP1ST(Hot Water Pump 1 Status).

4. A consistent object (point) naming convention shall be utilized to facilitate familiarity andoperational ease across the BAS network. Inter-facility consistency shall be maintained toensure transparent operability to the greatest degree possible. The table below details theobject naming convention and general format of the descriptor string.BACnet Object Name Requirements

Descriptors CommentCampus, Building Number &Building Association

RK0006ZZ AZ0134ZZ The Master Building List alsohas the correct abbreviationsfor each building.

System AIRHANDLING - EXHAUST- HEATING - COOLING -UTILITY - ENDUSE - MISC

Boilers and ancillaryequipment Chillers andancillary equipment Mainelectrical and gas metersSpecific building loads bytype

Equipment BOILERS - CHILLERS -FACILITY - TOWERS -WEATHER

Non-specific boiler systempoints - Non-specific chillersystem points

Point Suffix See Input/Output pointsummary table forconventions

5. Examples: Within each object name, the descriptors shall be bound by a period. Withineach descriptor, words shall not be separated by dashes, spaces, or other separators asfollows:a. RK0006ZZ.COOLING.CHILLERS.CHWP1STb. RK0006ZZ.HEATING.BOILERS.BLR1CFH

D. Device Addressing Convention:1. BACnet network numbers and Device Object IDs shall be unique throughout the network.2. All assignment of network numbers and Device Object IDs shall be coordinated with the

owner.3. Each Network number shall be unique throughout all facilities and shall be assigned in the

following manner unless specified otherwise:a. BBBFF, where: BBB = 1-655 assigned to each building, FF = 00 for building

backbone network, 1-35 indicating floors or separate systems in the building.4. Each Device Object Identifier property shall be unique throughout the system and shall be

assigned in the following manner unless specified otherwise:a. XXFFBBB, where: XX = number 0 to 40, FF = 00 for building backbone network, 1-35

indicating floors or separate systems in the building. BBB = 1-655 assigned to eachbuilding.



23 0955 - 10

5. The BAS Contractor shall coordinate with designated owner representative to ensure thatno duplicate Device Object IDs occur.

6. Alternative Device ID schemes or cross project Device ID duplication if allowed shall beapproved before project commencement by the owner.

2.13 OPERATOR INTERFACE GRAPHIC SOFTWAREA. Graphic software shall facilitate user-friendly interface to all aspects of the System Software

specified above. The intent of this specification is to require a graphic package that provides forintuitive operation of the systems without extensive training and experience. It shall facilitatelogical and simple system interrogation, modification, configuration, and diagnosis.

B. Graphic software shall support multiple simultaneous screens to be displayed and resizable in aweb-based environment. All functions excepting text entry functions shall be executable with amouse.

C. Graphic software shall display current operating mode (i.e. warm-up, dehumidification, et al) forequipment with multiple modes of operation.

D. Graphic software shall provide for multitasking such that other application can be used while theoperator is accessing the BAS. Software shall provide the ability to alarm graphically even whenoperator is in another software package.

E. The software shall be compatible to the current and current minus one versions of MicrosoftWindows operating system. The software shall allow for the owner's creation of user-defined,color graphic displays of geographic maps, building plans, floor plans, and mechanical andelectrical system schematics. These graphics shall be capable of displaying all pointinformation from the database including any attributes associated with each point (i.e.,engineering units, etc.). In addition, operators shall be able to command equipment or changesetpoints from a graphic through the use of a pointing device; e.g. mouse and touch screen.

F. Screen Penetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access the various systemgraphic screens via a graphical penetration scheme by using the pointing device to select frommenus or 'button' icons. Each graphic screen shall be capable of having a unique list of othergraphic screens that are directly linked through the selection of a menu item or button icon.

G. Dynamic Data Displays: Dynamic physical point values shall automatically updated at aminimum frequency of 6 updates per minute without operator intervention. Point value fieldsshall be displayed with a color code depicting normal, abnormal, override and alarm conditions.

H. Point Override Feature: Each displayed point shall be individually enabled/disabled to allowpointing device driven override of digital points or changing of analog points. Such overrides orchanges shall occur in the control unit, not just in the BAS software. The graphic point overridefeature shall be subject to privilege level protection. Points that are overridden shall be reportedas an alarm, and shall be displayed in a coded color. The alarm message shall include theoperator's login name. A list of points that are currently in an override state shall be availablethrough menu selection and include the time/date of the override along with the operator's loginname that initiated that override.

I. Dynamic Symbols: Provide a selection of standard symbols that change in appearance basedon the value of an associated point.1. Analog symbol: Provide a symbol that represents the value of an analog point as the

length of a line or linear bar.2. Digital symbol: Provide symbols such as switches, pilot lights, rotating fan wheels, etc. to

represent the value of digital input and output points.3. Point Status Color: Graphic presentations shall indicate different colors for different point

statuses. (For instance, green = normal, red = alarm, gray (or '???') for non-response.J. Graphics Development Package: Graphic development and generation software shall be

provided to allow the user to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays.1. The Contractor shall provide libraries of pre-engineered screens and symbols depicting

standard air handling unit components (e.g. fans, cooling coils, filters, dampers, etc.),mechanical system components (e.g., pumps, chillers, cooling towers, boilers, etc.),



23 0955 - 11

complete mechanical systems (e.g. constant volume-terminal reheat, VAV, etc.) andelectrical symbols.

2. The Graphic Development Package shall use a pointing device to allow the user toperform the following:a. Define symbolsb. Position items on graphic screensc. Attach physical or virtual points to a graphicd. Define background screense. Define connecting lines and curvesf. Locate, orient and size descriptive textg. Define and display colors for all elementsh. Establish correlation between symbols or text and associated system points or other

displaysi. Create hot spots or link triggers to other graphic displays or other functions in the

softwareK. Graphic images shall reside on the CSS.L. The software shall be capable of initiating communication between the BC and the CSS:

1. Upon user command, to perform all specified functions.2. In accordance with user-programmed time schedules to report alarms and upload trend

and report data to the CSS.M. The software shall automatically terminate the communication when all specified functions are

completed.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly and completely configure BAS system software, supplementalsoftware, network communications, BC and CSS, if necessary .

3.02 SITE-SPECIFIC APPLICATION PROGRAMMINGA. Provide all database creation and site-specific application control programming as required by

these Specifications, national and local standards and for a fully functioning system. Contractorshall provide all initial site-specific application programming and thoroughly documentprogramming. Generally meet the intent of the written sequences of operation. It is theContractor's responsibility to request clarification on sequence issues that require suchclarification.

B. All site-specific programming shall be fully documented and submitted for review and approval,both prior to downloading into the panel, at the completion of functional performance testing,and at the end of the warranty period.

C. All programming, graphics and data files must be maintained in a logical system of directorieswith self-explanatory file names. All files developed for the project will be the property of theowner and shall remain on the BC and CSS at the completion of the project.

3.03 PRIVILEGE LEVELS SETUPA. Set up the following privilege levels to include the specified capabilities:

1. Level 1: (owner's BAS Administrator)a. Level 2 capabilitiesb. Configure system softwarec. Modify graphic softwared. View, add, change and delete user login credentials and privilege levelse. All unrestricted system capabilities including all network management functions.

2. Level 1a (Contractor Technician)a. Level 2 capabilitiesb. Configure system softwarec. Modify graphic software



23 0955 - 12

3. Level 2: (Maintenance Manager)a. Level 3 capabilitiesb. Modify control unit programs

4. Level 3: (Senior BAS Technician)a. Level 4 capabilitiesb. Override output pointsc. Change setpointsd. Change equipment schedules

5. Level 4: (Junior BAS Technician and Trainee)a. Level 5 capabilitiesb. Acknowledge alarmsc. Temporarily override equipment schedules

6. Level 5: (Read Only)a. Display all graphic datab. Trend point data

B. Contractor shall assist:1. owner's BAS Administrator with assigning user login credentials and privilege levels,

configure system software and modify graphic software.2. Maintenance Manger with modifying control unit programs.

3.04 POINT PARAMETERSA. Provide the following minimum programming for each analog input:

1. Name2. Address3. Scanning frequency or COV threshold4. Engineering units5. Offset calibration and scaling factor for engineering units6. High and low alarm values and alarm differentials for return to normal condition7. High and low value reporting limits (reasonableness values), which shall prevent control

logic from using shorted or open circuit values.8. Default value to be used when the actual measured value is not reporting. This is required

only for points that are transferred across the primary and/or secondary controllingnetworks and used in control programs residing in control units other than the one in whichthe point resides. Events causing the default value to be used shall include failure of thecontrol unit in which the point resides, or failure of any network over which the point valueis transferred.

9. Selectable averaging function that shall average the measured value over a user selectednumber of scans for reporting.

B. Provide the following minimum programming for each analog output:1. Name2. Address3. Output updating frequency4. Engineering units5. Offset calibration and scaling factor for engineering units6. Output Range7. Default value to be used when the normal controlling value is not reporting.

C. Provide the following minimum programming for each digital input:1. Name2. Address3. Engineering units (on/off, open/closed, freeze/normal, etc.)4. Debounce time delay5. Message and alarm reporting as specified6. Reporting of each change of state, and memory storage of the time of the last change of

state



23 0955 - 13

7. Totalization of on-time (for all motorized equipment status points), and accumulatednumber of off-to-on transitions.

D. Provide the following minimum programming for each digital output:1. Name2. Address3. Output updating frequency4. Engineering units (on/off, open/closed, freeze/normal, etc.)5. Direct or Reverse action selection6. Minimum on-time7. Minimum off-time8. Status association with a DI and failure alarming (as applicable)9. Reporting of each change of state, and memory storage of the time of the last change of

state.10. Totalization of on-time (for all motorized equipment status points), and accumulated

number of off-to-on transitions.11. Default value to be used when the normal controlling value is not reporting.

3.05 TRENDSA. Contractor shall establish and store trend logs. Trend logs shall be prepared for each physical

input and output point, and all dynamic virtual points such as setpoints subject to a resetschedule, intermediate setpoint values for cascaded control loops, and the like as directed bytheowner.

B. The owner will analyze trend logs of the system operating parameters to evaluate normalsystem functionality. Contractor shall establish these trends and ensure they are being storedproperly.1. Data shall include a single row of field headings and the data thereafter shall be

contiguous. Each record shall include a date and time field or single date stamp. Recorded parameters for a given piece of equipment or component shall be trended at thesame intervals and be presented in a maximum of two separate 2-dimensional formatswith time being the row heading and field name being the column heading.

C. Sample times indicated as COV (±) or change-of-value mean that the changed parameter onlyneeds to be recorded after the value changes by the amount listed. When output to thetrending file, the latest recorded value shall be listed with any given time increment record. Thesamples shall be filled with the latest values also if the points include different time intervals. Ifthe BAS does not have the capability to record based on COV, the parameter shall be recordedbased on the interval common to the unit.

D. Trending intervals or COV thresholds shall be dictated by the owner upon system start-up.E. The Contractor shall demonstrate functional trends as specified for a period of 30 days after

successful system demonstration before Substantial Completion of the system.3.06 TREND GRAPHS

A. Prepare controller and graphic software to display graphical format trends. Trended values andintervals shall be the same as those specified.

B. Lines shall be labeled and shall be distinguishable from each other by using either different linetypes, or different line colors.

C. Indicate engineering units of the y-axis values; e.g. degrees F., inches w.g., Btu/lb, percentopen, etc.

D. The y-axis scale shall be chosen so that all trended values are in a readable range. Do not mixtrended values on one graph if their unit ranges are incompatible.

E. Trend outside air temperature, humidity, and enthalpy during each period in which any otherpoints are trended.



23 0955 - 14

F. All points trended for one subsystem (e.g. air handling unit, chilled water system, etc.) shall betrended during the same trend period.

G. Each graph shall be clearly labeled with the subsystem title, date, and times.3.07 ALARMS

A. Override Alarms: Any point that is overridden through the override feature of the graphicsoftware shall be reported as a Level 3 alarm.

B. Analog Input Alarms: For each analog input, program an alarm message for reportingwhenever the analog value is outside of the programmed alarm limits. Report a'Return-to-Normal' message after the analog value returns to the normal range, using aprogrammed alarm differential. The alarm limits shall be individually selected by the Contractorbased on the following criteria:1. Space temperature, except as otherwise stated in sequence of operation: Level 3

a. Low alarm: 64°Fb. Low return-to-normal: 68°Fc. High alarm: 85°Fd. High return-to-normal: 80°F

2. Controlled media temperature other than space temperature (e.g. AHU discharge airtemperature, steam converter leaving water temperature, condenser water supply, chilledwater supply, etc.): Level 3 (If controlled media temperature setpoint is reset, alarmsetpoints shall be programmed to follow setpoint)a. Low alarm: 3°F below setpointb. Low return-to-normal: 2°F below setpointc. High alarm: 3°F above setpointd. High return-to-normal: 2°F above setpoint.

3. AHU mixed air temperature: Level 4a. Low alarm: 45°Fb. Low return-to-normal: 46°Fc. High alarm: 90°Fd. High return-to-normal: 89°F

4. Duct Pressure:a. Low alarm: 0.5”w.g. below setpointb. Low return-to-normal: 0.25”w.g. below setpointc. High alarm: 0.5”w.g. above setpointd. High return-to-normal: 0.25”w.g. above setpoint

5. Space humidity:a. Low alarm: 35%b. Low return-to-normal: 40%c. High alarm: 75%d. High return-to-normal: 70%

C. HOA Switch Tampering Alarms: The Sequences of Operation are based on the presumptionthat motor starter Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) switches are in the 'Auto' position. [If a motorizedequipment unit starts without a prior start command from the FMS, (as sensed by statussensing device), then FMS shall perform the remaining sequence as specified.] BAS shall alsoenunciate the following Level 5 alarm message if status indicates a unit is operational when therun command is not present:1. DEVICE FAILURE: Status is indicated on the device even though it has been commanded

to stop. Check the HOA switch, control relay, status sensing device, contactors, and othercomponents involved in starting the unit. Acknowledge this alarm when the problem hasbeen corrected.

D. Maintenance Alarms: Enunciate Level 5 alarms when runtime accumulation exceeds a valuespecified by the operator1. DEVICE REQUIRES MAINTENANCE. Runtime has exceeded specified value since last

reset.



23 0955 - 15

E. See requirements for additional equipment-specific alarms specified in Section 23 09 59 -Sequences of Operation.

3.08 GRAPHIC SCREENSA. Floor Plan Screens: The contract document drawings will be made available to the Contractor in

AutoCAD (current version) format upon request. These drawings may be used only fordeveloping backgrounds for specified graphic screens; however the owner does not guaranteethe suitability of these drawings for the Contractor's purpose.1. Provide graphic floor plan screens for each [floor] [wing] [tower] [other] of the building.

Indicate the location of all equipment that is not located on the equipment room screens. Indicate the location of temperature sensors associated with each temperature-controlledzone (i.e., VAV terminals, fan-coils, single-zone AHUs, etc.) on the floor plan screens.[Zone background color shall change based on the temperature offset from setpoint].Display the space temperature point adjacent to each temperature sensor symbol. Use adistinct line symbol to demarcate each terminal unit zone boundary. Use distinct colors todemarcate each air handling unit zone. [Mechanical floor plan drawings will be madeavailable to the contractor upon request for the purpose of determining zone boundaries.] Indicate room numbers as provided by the owner. Provide a drawing link from each spacetemperature sensor symbol and equipment symbol shown on the graphic floor planscreens to each corresponding equipment schematic graphic screen.

2. Provide graphic floor plan screens for each mechanical equipment room and a plan screenof the roof. Indicate the location of each item of mechanical equipment. Provide adrawing link from each equipment symbol shown on the graphic plan view screen to eachcorresponding mechanical system schematic graphic screen.

3. If multiple floor plans are necessary to show all areas, provide a graphic building key plan. Use elevation views and/or plan views as necessary to graphically indicate the location ofall of the larger scale floor plans. Link graphic building key plan to larger scale partial floorplans. Provide links from each larger scale graphic floor plan screen to the building keyplan and to each of the other graphic floor plan screens.

4. Provide a graphic site plan with links to and from each building plan.B. System Schematic Screens: Provide graphic system schematic screen for each subsystem

controlled with each I/O point in the project appearing on at least one graphic screen. Systemgraphics shall include flow diagrams with status, setpoints, current analog input and outputvalues, operator commands, etc. as applicable. General layout of the system shall beschematically correct. Input/output devices shall be shown in their schematically correctlocations. Include appropriate engineering units for each displayed point value. Verbosenames (English language descriptors) shall be included for each point on all graphics; this maybe accomplished by the use of a hover box when the operator moves the cursor over thedisplayed point. Indicate all adjustable setpoints on the applicable system schematic graphicscreen or, if space does not allow, on a supplemental linked-setpoint screen.1. Provide graphic screens for each air handling system. Indicate outside air temperature and

enthalpy, and mode of operation as applicable (i.e., occupied, unoccupied, warm-up,cool-down). Link screens for air handlers to the heating system and cooling systemgraphics. Link screens for supply and exhaust systems if they are not combined onto onescreen.

2. Provide a graphic screen for each zone. Provide links to graphic system schematicscreens of air handling units that serve the corresponding zone.

3. Provide a cooling system graphic screen showing all points associated with the chillers,cooling towers and pumps. Indicate outside air dry-bulb temperature and calculatedwet-bulb temperature. Link screens for chilled water and condenser water systems if theycannot fit onto one cooling plant graphic screen.

4. Link screens for heating and cooling system graphics to utility history reports showingcurrent and monthly electric uses, demands, peak values, and other pertinent values.

C. Bar Chart Screens: On each graphic Bar Chart Screen, provide drawing links to the graphic airhandling unit schematic screens.



23 0955 - 16

1. Provide a graphic chilled water valve screen showing the analog output signal of all chilledwater valves in a bar chart format, with signals expressed as percentage of fully openvalve (percentage of full cooling). Indicate the discharge air temperature and setpoint ofeach air handling unit, cooling system chilled water supply and return temperatures andthe outside air temperature and humidity on this graphic. Provide drawing links betweenthe graphic cooling plant screen and this graphic screen.

2. Provide a graphic heating water valve screen showing the analog output signal of all airhandling unit heating water valves in a bar chart format, with signals expressed aspercentage of fully open valve (percentage of full heating). Indicate the temperature of thecontrolled medium (such as AHU discharge air temperature or zone hot water supplytemperature) and the associated setpoint and the outside air temperature and humidity.

D. Alarms: Each programmed alarm shall appear on at least one graphic screen. In general,alarms shall be displayed on the graphic system schematic screen for the system that the alarmis associated with (for example, chiller alarm shall be shown on graphic cooling systemschematic screen). For all graphic screens, display analog values that are in a 'high alarm'condition in a red color, 'low alarm' condition in a blue color. Indicate digital values that are inalarm condition in a red color.

END OF SECTION


SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 23 0958 - 1

SECTION 23 0958SEQUENCE OF OPERATION


A. Air Handling UnitsB. Terminal UnitsC. Exhaust Fans

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS:A. Section 23 09 50 - Building Automation System (BAS) GeneralB. Section 23 09 51 - BAS Basic Materials, Interface Devices, and SensorsC. Section 23 09 53 - BAS Field PanelsD. Section 23 09 54 - BAS Communications DevicesE. Section 23 09 55 - BAS SoftwareF. Section 23 09 59 - BAS Commissioning

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONA. The systems to be controlled under work of this section basically comprise (describe the scope

of the project). The systems being controlled are (describe the configuration of and the type ofsystems included in the project).

B. This Section defines the manner and method by which controls function.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 23 09 50 and Division 1 for requirements for control shop drawings, productdata, User Manual, etc.

B. Programming Manual: Provide BAS system programming manual as well as documentation ofsite-specific programming prior to the start of Acceptance Phase.

1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTSA. Within two weeks of the completion of commissioning, provide record documents to represent

the final control configuration with actual setpoints and tuning parameters as existed atacceptance.

B. Record documents shall be modified control drawings with the actual installed information. Drawings shall be delivered in both reproducible hard copy and electronic format in AutoCAD(current version) drawing files. Provide all supporting files, blocks, fonts, etc. required by thedrawings.

C. Provide final points list as described above.D. Provide final detailed wiring diagrams with all wire numbers and termination points indicated.E. Accurately record final sequences and control logic made after submission of shop drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 GENERAL

A. Sequences specified herein indicate the functional intent of the systems operation and may notfully detail every aspect of the programming that may be required to obtain the indicatedoperation. Contractor shall provide all programming necessary to obtain the sequences/systemoperation indicated.

B. When an air handling unit is not in operation, control devices shall remain in their “off” positions.“Off” positions may differ from the “normal” (meaning failed) position. Except as specifiedotherwise, “off” and “normal” positions of control devices shall be as follows:



Device "Off Position" "Normal Position"Heating coil valves closed openCooling coil valves closed closedOutside air damper closed closedReturn air damper open open

Exhaust/relief air damper closed closedVar. Freq. Drive off Min. speed

C. Except as specified otherwise, throttling ranges, proportional bands, and cycle differentials shallbe centered on the associated setpoint. All modulating feedback control loops shall include thecapability of having proportional, integral, and derivative action. Unless the loop is specified“proportional only” or “P+I”, Contractor shall apply appropriate elements of integral andderivative gain to each control loop which shall result in stable operation, minimum settling time,and shall maintain the primary variable within the specified maximum allowable variance.

D. Scheduling Terminology: When air handlers are scheduled throughout the day, the followingdefines the terminology used (Designer coordinate with The owner regarding actual occupancyschedules and initial setpoints):1. Occupied Period: Period of time when the building is in use and occupied. Building is

open 24 hours a day, seven days a week. Generally systems will be fully operationalthroughout this period and ventilation air shall be continuously introduced. Spacetemperature setpoints will generally be in the “normal” range of 69-77°F.

2. Unoccupied period: Period of time when the building or zone is not in use and unoccupied.Ventilation air shall not be introduced.

3. Preoccupancy Period: Time prior to the Occupied period when the systems are returningthe space temperatures from setback to “normal” or occupied setpoints (warm-up andcool-down). Ventilation air shall not be introduced unless outside air conditions permitfree-cooling. Time period shall be determined by an optimum start strategy unlessotherwise specified.

4. Setback Period: Setback will typically coincide start with the end of the occupied periodand end with the start of the preoccupancy period, however it shall be provided with its ownschedule. Generally systems will be off except to maintain a “setback” temperature.

E. Where any sequence or occupancy schedule calls for more than one motorized unit to startsimultaneously, the BAS start commands shall be staggered by 5 second (adj.) intervals tominimize inrush current.

F. Alarm messages specified throughout the sequences are assigned to discrete priority levels. Priority levels dictate the handling and destination of alarm reports, and are defined in Section23 09 55 - ATC System Software and Programming.

G. Wherever a value is indicated as adjustable (adj.), it shall be modifiable, with the properprivilege level, from the operator interface or via a function block menu. For these points, it isunacceptable to have to modify programming statements to change the setpoint.

H. When a power failure is detected in any phase, the BAS start commands shall be retractedimmediately from all electrically powered units served by the failed power source. If theassociated primary control unit (PCU) is powered by normal or emergency power, it maymonitor its own power source as an indication of power status. If the PCU is powered byuninterruptable power supply (UPS), or if PCU is not capable of monitoring its own power foruse in sequences, Contractor shall provide at least one voltage monitor (three phase whenapplicable) per building. When the BAS detects that power has been restored, all equipment forwhich the BAS start command had been retracted shall be automatically restarted on staggered5 second intervals to minimize inrush current. When loss of equipment status coincides with a



power failure, system shall not alarm individual equipment failures. Instead, only a single Level2 alarm shall be enunciated as follows:1. BUILDING XXXX POWER FAILURE: Notify electric shop. Acknowledge alarm when

power is restored.I. Where reset action is specified in a sequence of operation, but a reset schedule is not indicated

on the drawings, one of the following methods shall be employed:1. Contractor shall determine a fixed reset schedule which shall result in stable operation and

shall maintain the primary variable within the specified maximum allowable variance.2. A floating reset algorithm shall be used which increments the secondary variable setpoint

(setpoint of control loop being reset) on a periodic basis to maintain primary variablesetpoint. The recalculation time and reset increment shall be chosen to maintain theprimary variable within the specified maximum allowable variance.

3. Primary variable shall control the devices directly using a PID feedback control loopwithout resetting the secondary variable. However, the control devices shall still modulateas necessary to maintain upper and lower limits on the secondary variable. Proportionalband, integral gain, and derivative term shall be selected to maintain the primary variablewithin the specified maximum allowable tolerance while minimizing overshoot and settlingtime. Contractor shall gain prior approval for implementing this method of reset.

J. Where a supply air temperature or duct pressure setpoint is specified to be reset by the spacetemperature of the zones calling for the most cooling/heating, the following method shall beemployed:1. A floating reset algorithm shall be used which increments the secondary variable (e.g.,

supply air temperature or duct pressure) setpoint on a periodic basis to maintain primaryvariable (e.g. space temperature) setpoint. The reset increment shall be determined bythe quantity of “need heat” or “need cool” requests from individual SCU's. A SCU's “needheat” virtual point shall activate whenever the zone's space temperature falls below thecurrently applicable (occupied or unoccupied) heating setpoint throttling range. A SCU's“need cool” virtual point shall activate whenever the zone's space temperature rises abovethe currently applicable (occupied, unoccupied, or economy) cooling setpoint throttlingrange. The recalculation time and reset increment shall be chosen to maintain the primaryvariable within the specified maximum allowable variance while minimizing overshoot andsettling time. Reset range maximum and minimum values shall limit the setpoint range.

K. Where “prove operation” of a device (generally controlled by a digital output) is indicated in thesequence, it shall require that the BAS shall, after an adjustable time delay after the device iscommanded to operate (feedback delay) , confirm that the device is operational via the statusinput. If the status point does not confirm operation after the time delay or anytime thereafter foran adjustable time delay (debounce delay) while the device is commanded to run, an alarmshall be enunciated audibly and via an alarm message at the operator interface and print at thealarm printers. A descriptive message shall be attached to the alarm message indicating thenature of the alarm and actions to be taken. Contractor shall provide messages to meet thisintent. [Upon failure of equipment with redundant backup, run command shall be removed fromequipment and the device shall be locked out until the alarm is manually acknowledged. Uponfailure of equipment without redundant backup, run command shall remain energized and thealarm shall be latched until reset by an operator.BAS shall provide for adjustable maximumrates of change for increasing and decreasing output from the following analog output points:1. Speed control of variable speed drives2. Chiller supply water temperature setpoint reset3. Chiller demand limit4. Travel rate of tower isolation and chiller isolation valves

L. Wherever a value is indicated to be dependent on another value (i.e.: setpoint plus 5°F) BASshall use that equation to determine the value. Simply providing a virtual point that the operatormust set is unacceptable. In this case three virtual points shall be provided. One to store theparameter (5°F), one to store the setpoint, and one to store the value which is the result of theequation.



M. The following chilled water sequence applies to the classic primary/secondary chilled watersystem where the bypass is positioned for equal percent unloading of all chillers, constantspeed primary pumps one per chiller, multiple secondary chilled water pumps controlled from avariable speed drive. Various staging scenarios are included and the designer should select themost optimal method for the applicable job.

3.02 AIR HANDLING UNITS - GENERALA. Logic Strategies: The BAS shall fully control the air handlers. Generally the BAS shall energize

the AH (start the fans and activate control loops) as dictated for each air handle. The followingindicates when and how the BAS shall energize the AHs and control various common aspectsof them. The following “logic strategies” shall be included by reference with each air handlerwith any specific clarifications required:1. Scheduled Occupancy: BAS shall determine the occupancy periods (occupied,

unoccupied, preoccupancy, and setback) as defined above. The following details thecommon control aspects related to the scheduled occupancy.a. Occupied Period: BAS shall energize the AH during all occupied periods. Note that

the beginning of the occupancy period shall be set sufficiently before the actual startof occupancy to obtain the required building component of ventilation per ASHREA62. Specific times shall be as directed by the A/E. Minimum OA flow setpoint shall beas scheduled on the drawings. “Normal” setpoints shall apply.

b. Unoccupied Period: Minimum OA flow shall be 0 CFM or the minimum OA damperposition shall be 0%. If during the unoccupied period there is a request for occupancyoverride, the occupancy mode shall become active for an adjustable period. Theunoccupied period and the preoccupancy period will typically overlap.

c. Setback Period: BAS shall deenergize the unit except as required to maintain asetback temperature as indicated in the individual sequences with a 5°F cycledifferential. Generally, where setback temperatures apply in multiple zones, the worstzone shall control the system. Setback setpoints generally apply except duringpreoccupancy [and night purge]. If during the unoccupied period there is a request foroccupancy override, the occupancy mode shall become active for an adjustableperiod.

d. Preoccupancy: BAS shall energize the AH continuously during the preoccupancyperiod. Minimum OA flow shall be 0 CFM or the minimum OA damper position shallbe 0%. “Normal” setpoints shall apply. Preoccupancy duration shall be one of thefollowing as specified by reference:1) Fixed: The duration of the preoccupancy period shall be fixed as scheduled by

the operator.2) Optimum: The duration of the morning warm-up period shall vary according to

outside air temperature and space temperature such that the space temperaturerises to occupied period heating setpoint at the beginning of, but not before, thescheduled occupied period. The duration of the cool-down period shall varyaccording to outside air temperature and space temperature such that the spacetemperature falls to the occupied period cooling setpoint at the beginning of, butnot before, the scheduled occupied period.

2. Minimum OA Control: BAS shall maintain minimum ventilation during the occupied period.The following strategies may apply:a. Balanced Position: During the occupied period, applicable mixing and OA dampers

shall never be positioned less than the position set for the required minimum OAventilation rate. If the air handler has a single OA damper that is capable ofeconomizer, the minimum position output shall be determined by the balancer. If theAH has a two position minimum OA damper, that position shall be fully open to itsbalanced position. This logic strategy is only applicable to constant volume Ahs.

b. Reset Balanced Position: During the occupied period, applicable mixing and OAdampers shall never be positioned less than the minimum position. Minimum positionshall be reset between limits of a position delivering system exhaust make-up air CFMand the design minimum position delivering design minimum CFM to maintain a CO2



setpoint of 900 ppm (adj.). Loop shall be a “sample and bump” or dynamicproportional only loop tuned for the slow response. The balancer shall determine theminimum position outputs at both extreme points. This logic strategy is onlyapplicable to constant volume AHs.

c. Damper Controlled Fixed: During the occupied period, applicable mixing dampersshall be modulated to maintain an OA flow rate of no less than the MVR as dictated inthe design and required by ASHRAE 62. Setpoint flow rates shall be provided by theA/E. Flow rate shall be determined in any of the following ways as specified for theparticular AH:1) Measured directly by an OA flow station2) As determined by CO2 mixing equations using the SA, OA, and RA CO2

sensorsd. Damper Controlled Reset: During the occupied period, applicable mixing dampers

shall be modulated to maintain an OA flow rate setpoint. Setpoint shall be resetbetween limits of system exhaust make-up air CFM and the design minimum CFM tomaintain an RA CO2 setpoint of 900 ppm (adj.). Loop shall be a “sample and bump”or dynamic proportional only loop tuned for the slow response. Setpoint flow ratesshall be provided by the A/E. Flow rate shall be determined in any of the followingways as specified for the particular AH:1) Measured directly by an OA flow station2) As determined by CO2 mixing equations using the SA, OA, RA, and/or Space

CO2 sensorse. Mixed Air Plenum Pressure Control: Minimum position of the OA damper shall be set

to obtain the design required minimum OA. This balanced position shall remain fixedwhenever to minimum loop is active BAS shall control the return air damper tomaintain a mixed air plenum pressure (relative to outside) setpoint which will bespecified by the balancer (-.5”). Ensure the OA reference pressure is adequatelydampened against wind fluctuations using a wind resistance static tip, restrictors, andair volume capacitance.

3. Airside Economizer: BAS shall modulate the mixing dampers to provide “free cooling”when conditions merit. The free cooling shall generally be staged before any mechanicalcooling. While conditions merit, dampers shall be modulated in a DA PID loop to maintainmixed air temperature at a setpoint as specified for the individual unit. Economizer logicshall remain enabled during setback cooling where applicable. One of the followingstrategies shall be used to enable the economizer mode:a. Dry Bulb Comparison: Economizer mode shall be active while the unit is energized

AND when OA enthalpy fall below 28 btu/# AND outside air temperature falls belowreturn air temperature (with 2°F cycle differential). Economizer mode shall be inactivewhen OA enthalpy rises above 29 btu/# ORoutside air temperature rises above returnair temperature (with 2°F cycle differential), dampers shall return to their scheduledminimum positions as specified above. Economizer shall remain enabled duringsetback cooling.

b. Dry Bulb Switch: Economizer mode shall be active while the unit is energized ANDwhen OA enthalpy fall below 28 btu/# AND outside air temperature falls below theswitching setpoint of 70°F (adj.) (with 5°F cycle differential). Economizer mode shallbe inactive when OA enthalpy rises above 29 btu/# OR outside air temperature risesabove switching setpoint, dampers shall return to their scheduled minimum positionsas specified above.

c. Enthalpy Comparison: Economizer mode shall be active while the unit is energizedAND when outside air enthalpy falls below return air enthalpy (with 2btu/# cycledifferential). Economizer mode shall be inactive when outside air enthalpy risesabove return air enthalpy, dampers shall return to their scheduled minimum positionsas specified above.

4. Sequenced Heating and Cooling: BAS shall control the heating and cooling coils and airside economizer as detailed for the particular AH. Program logic shall directly prohibit the



heating and cooling valves as well as the heating valve and economizer damper to beopen (or above minimum) simultaneously. This does not apply to cooling and reheatvalves that are used simultaneously for dehumidification.

5. Mixed Air Low Limit Override: BAS shall override the signal to the OA damper via aproportional only loop to maintain a minimum mixed air temperature of 45°F (adj.) (loopshall output 0% at 45°F which shall be passed to the output via a low selector).

6. Freeze Safety: Upon operation of a freezestat, unit shall be deenergized with theexception of the heating loops. Typically supply and return fans where applicable shall bedeenergized via a hardwired interlock, [, and an indication of the operation shall be sensedby the BAS. BAS shall enunciate appropriate alarm and remove and lock out the startcommand], [which shall initiate "fan failure" alarms]. OA dampers shall close and heatingloops shall remain active.

7. Smoke Safety: Upon indication of smoke by a smoke detector, FAC shall deenergize theAH. Smoke detector shall notify the fire alarm system and BAS, shut down the fans, andclose the smoke dampers via hard-wired interlock.

8. High or Low Pressure Safety: Upon activation of a high or low pressure safety switch, AHshall be deenergized, fans shall be deenergized via a hard wired interlock [, and anindication of the operation shall be sensed by the BAS. BAS shall enunciate appropriatealarm and remove and lock out the start command], [which shall initiate "fan failure"alarms].

9. Vibration Safety (Applicable To Units >50,000 cfm): Upon activation of a vibration safetyswitch, respective fan shall be deenergized, fan shall be deenergized via a hard wiredinterlock and an indication of the operation shall be sensed by the BAS]. BAS shallenunciate appropriate alarm and remove and lock out the start command.

B. The detailed “logic strategies” above shall be required by reference to them in each of theindividual sequences specified below.

3.03 AIR HANDLING UNIT DIAGNOSTICS - GENERALA. Diagnostic Strategies: In addition to the standard alarm limits specified for all sensed variables

the BAS monitor and diagnose anomalies in the operation of the air handlers. The following“diagnostic strategies” shall be included by reference with each air handler with any specificclarifications required:1. Run Time Limit: BAS shall accumulate the runtime of the status of associated rotating

equipment and enunciate a level 5 alarm to indicate that the unit is in need of service.2. Filter Monitoring: BAS shall monitor the differential pressure transmitter across the filter

bank(s). A level 5 alarm shall be reported when pressure drop exceeds the transmitter'ssetting.

3. Start Monitoring: BAS shall accumulate the starts of cycling equipment. BAS shall furtherenunciate a level 5 alarm when the number of starts exceeds the specified value within thespecified time period. (ie: more than 3 starts in a 30 min period)

4. Heating Valve Leak: While heating valve is closed, if the temperature increase across theheating coil exceeds 2°F continuously for 30 minutes; or if the discharge temperature ismore than 5°F above setpoint for more than 30 minutes continuously, enunciate thefollowing alarm at level 3 and 4 priority:a. ENERGY WASTE: An unexpected temperature rise is occurring across the heating

coil. Please check for leaking valve or faulty controls.5. Cooling Valve Leak: While cooling valve is closed, if the temperature drop across the

cooling coil exceeds 2°F continuously for 30 minutes; or if the discharge temperature ismore than 5°F below setpoint for more than 30 minutes continuously, enunciate thefollowing alarm at level 3 and 4 priority:a. ENERGY WASTE: An unexpected temperature drop is occurring across the cooling

coil. Please check for leaking valve or faulty controls.6. Cooling Capacity Shortage: BAS shall monitor the output to the valve. If the output

exceeds 99% open for 1 hour continuously, enunciate the following alarma. Lack of Capacity: The cooling valve of XXX has been commanded to the full open

position for an extended time period. Ensure that the setpoint for the control loop is at



a reasonable value and that flow to the coil has not been obstructed as in a pluggedstrainer, throttled balancing valve, debris in the control valve, etc.

7. Economizer Anomaly: If mixed air temperature is less than low limit mixed air temperature°F or greater than [85]; or if the outside air temperature is between 55°F and 65°F and themixed air temperature is more than 2°F different from the outside air temperature for morethan 30 minutes continuously, enunciate the following alarm at level 3 and 4 priority:a. ENERGY WASTE: An unexpected mixed air temperature indicates a possible

problem with the economizer damper controls. Please check for faulty dampers orcontrols.

8. Fighting Valves: BAS shall monitor the valve positions of the preheat and cooling coils andshall enunciate the following level 3 alarm if the valve positions are both over 10% open.a. Fighting Valves: The preheat and the cooling valves are opening simultaneously on

XXX. Coordinate the control loops.9. Fighting Thermal Zones: BAS shall monitor the mode of multiple terminal zones within a

thermal zone and enunciate the following level 3 alarm if some are in heating mode, andothers are in cooling mode:a. FIGHTING TERMINAL UNITS: Simultaneous heating and cooling exists in XXX.

Coordinate the setpoints.10. Fighting Humidity Zones: BAS shall monitor the mode of multiple terminal zones within a

humidity zone and enunciate the following level 3 alarm if some are in heating mode, andothers are in cooling mode:a. FIGHTING TERMINAL UNITS: simultaneous humidification and dehumidification

exists in XXX. Coordinate the setpoints.11. Unstable Control: BAS shall monitor the output to the actuator. BAS shall calculate the

average change in output per second over a 30-min. period. The average change inoutput signal shall be calculated as follows: å [(Abs(Current Output(%)-Last Output(%)) /(Scan Interval(s)) ] / ( # of Scans in 30 min ). The program shall execute the check onceevery 14 hours (start the 30-min. interval change accumulation, after 30 min. perform thecheck and clear the sum). BAS shall enunciate the following alarm if the average rate ofchange exceeds 1%/sec or one half of the maximum rate of change programmed for thepoint.a. Unstable Control: The control loop on XXX appears to be unstable. Establish a plot of

the valve output to validate this. If the damper is hunting unacceptably, tune the loop.END OF SECTION


VARIABLE FREQUENCYCONTROLLERS

23 0969 - 1

SECTION 23 0969VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARYA. This Section includes solid-state, PWM, VFCs for speed control of three-phase motors.

1.03 DEFINITIONSA. BMS: Building management system.B. IGBT: Integrated gate bipolar transistor.C. LAN: Local area network.D. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.E. PWM: Pulse-width modulated.F. VFC: Variable frequency controller.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of VFC, provide dimensions; mounting arrangements; location for

conduit entries; shipping and operating weights; and manufacturer's technical data on features,performance, electrical ratings, characteristics, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings (for each VFC):1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances

and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipmentfeatures, and ratings. Include the following:a. Each installed unit's type and details.b. Nameplate legends.c. Short-circuit current ratings of integrated unit.d. UL listing for series rating of overcurrent protective devices in combination controllers.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for VFC. Provide schematic wiringdiagram for each type of VFC.

C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances,and required area above and around VFCs where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show VFClayout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanicalelements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate fieldmeasurements.

D. Qualification Data: For testing agency and manufacturer.E. Field Test Reports: Written reports specified in Part 3.F. Manufacturer's field service report.G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFCs, all installed devices, and components to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1Section " Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:1. Routine maintenance requirements for VFCs and all installed components.2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

H. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed andarrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.

I. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors havebeen installed and arrange to demonstrate that dip switch settings for motor running overloadprotection suit actual motor to be protected.



23 0969 - 2

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain, within 100 miles of Project site, a service center capable

of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs.B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documentedaccording to ASTM E 548.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain VFCs of a single type through one source from a singlemanufacturer.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked forintended use.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store VFCs indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.Protect VFCs from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

1.07 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate layout and installation of VFCs with other construction including conduit, piping,

equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and requiredclearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate features of VFCs, installed units, and accessory devices with pilot devices andcontrol circuits to which they connect.

C. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each VFC and each installed unit withratings and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle ofmotor and load.

1.08 EXTRA MATERIALSA. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents:1. Spare Fuses: Furnish one spare for every five installed, but not less than one set of three

of each type and rating2. Indicating Lights: Two of each type installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offeringproducts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:1. ABB Power Distribution, Inc.; ABB Control, Inc. Subsidiary.2. Yaskawa, Inc.3. Danfoss

2.02 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERSA. Unit and options shall be UL508 Listed as a complete assembly.B. Unit shall be listed for minimum 100 KA SCCR without the need for external input fuses.C. Microprocessor based Bypass Controller - Manual or automatic (selectable) transfer to line

power via contactors. A keypad to control the bypass controller is to be mounted on theenclosure door. The bypass keypad shall include a one line diagram and status LEDs toindicate the mode of operation and “External Fault” conditions. When in the “Normal” mode,the bypass contactor is open and the drive output contactor is closed. In the “Test” position,both contactors are open, in the “Bypass” position, the drive output contactor is open, and the



23 0969 - 3

bypass contactor is closed. Start/stop via customer supplied maintained contact shall be 24V or115V compatible and shall function in both the “Normal” and “Bypass” modes. The voltagetolerance of the bypass power supply shall be ± 35% to eliminate the problem of contactor coilburnout. The design shall include single-phase protection in both the AFD and bypass modes.

D. Customer Interlock Terminal Strip – provide a separate terminal strip for connection of freeze,fire, smoke contacts, and external start command. Include fireman’s override and dampercontrol circuit as standard. All external safety interlocks shall remain fully functional whether thesystem is in Hand, Auto, or Bypass modes.

E. Automatic bypass operation shall be selectable in the standard microprocessor based bypassdesign.

F. Door / cover interlocked circuit breaker disconnect switch which will disconnect all input powerfrom the drive and all internally mounted options. The disconnect handle shall be through thedoor, and be padlockable in the “Off” position.

G. Fast acting semi-conductor fuses exclusive to the AFD – fast acting semi-conductor fuses allowthe AFD to disconnect from the line prior to clearing upstream branch circuit protection,maintaining bypass capability. Bypass designs which have no such fuses, or that incorporatefuses common to both the AFD and the bypass will not be accepted. In such designs, a fuseclearing failure would render the bypass unusable.

H. Class 10 or 20 (selectable) electronic motor overload protection shall be included in themicroprocessor bypass to protect the motor in bypass mode.

I. 3% DC line reactorJ. Input AC Line ReactorK. The following operating information displays shall be standard on the AFD digital display. All

applicable operating values shall be capable of being displayed in engineering (user) units. Aminimum of two operating values from the list below shall be capable of being displayed at alltimes. The display shall be in complete English words (alpha-numeric codes are notacceptable):1. Output Frequency2. Motor Speed (RPM, %, or Engineering units)3. Motor Current4. Calculated Motor Torque5. Calculated Motor Power (kW)6. DC Bus Voltag7. Output Voltage8. Heatsink Temperature (0F)9. Analog Input Values10. Analog Output Value11. Keypad Reference Values12. Elapsed Time Meter (resettable)13. kWh meter (resettable)14. mWh meter15. Digital input status16. Digital output status

L. Communications: Provide an ethernet interface allowing VFC to be used with an externalsystem within a multidrop LAN configuration. Interface shall allow all parameter settings of VFCto be programmed via a BACNet IP BMS. Provide capability for VFC to retain these settingswithin the nonvolatile memory.

2.03 ENCLOSURESA. Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type I, with hinged full front access.



23 0969 - 4

2.04 FACTORY FINISHESA. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested VFCs before

shipping.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs for compliance with requirements,installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections beforeVFC installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Anchor each VFC assembly to steel-channel sills arranged and sized according tomanufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and grout sills flush with VFCmounting surface.

B. Controller Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch. Comply with requirements in Division 26Section "Fuses."

3.03 IDENTIFICATIONA. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical

identification."B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFCs, including control

sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and coverinstructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFC units.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

field-assembled components and equipment installation, including pretesting and adjustingVFCs.

B. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:1. Test procedures used.2. Test results that comply with requirements.3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.3.05 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.06 CLEANINGA. Clean VFCs internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.3.07 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel toadjust, operate, and maintain VFCs.

END OF SECTION


HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113 - 1

SECTION 23 2113HYDRONIC PIPING


A. Hydronic system requirements.B. Heating water and glycol piping, above grade.C. Pipe and pipe fittings for:

1. Heating water piping system.2. Equipment drains and overflows.

D. Pipe hangers and supports.E. Unions, flanges, mechanical couplings, and dielectric connections.F. Valves:

1. Gate valves.2. Globe or angle valves.3. Ball valves.4. Manual Calibrated Balancing Valves5. Butterfly valves.6. Check valves.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.B. Section 23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.C. Section 23 0719 - HVAC Piping Insulation.D. Section 23 2114 - Hydronic Specialties.E. Section 23 2500 - HVAC Water Treatment: Pipe cleaning.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing, and Fusing

Qualifications; 2015.B. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2012.C. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; 2013.D. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2014.E. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The

American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005).F. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2008

(ANSI/ASME B31.9).G. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless; 2012.H. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and

Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2015.I. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014).J. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2014.K. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2013.L. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers; 1992

(Reapproved 2008).M. ASTM F1476 - Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed Mechanical Couplings for

Use in Piping Applications; 2007 (Reapproved 2013).



N. AWS A5.8M/A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; 2011-AMD 1.O. AWS A5.8/A5.8M - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; American

Welding Society; 2011 and errata.P. AWS A5.8/A5.8M - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; American

Welding Society; 2004 and errata.Q. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015.R. AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; 2011.S. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,

Application, and Installation; 2009.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 00 1300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide

manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.C. Welders Certificate: Include welders certification of compliance with ASME BPVC-IX.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type

specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.B. Welder Qualifications: Certify in accordance with ASME BPVC-IX.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until

installation.D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections

of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 HYDRONIC SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with ASME B31.9 and applicable federal, state, and local regulations.B. Piping: Provide piping, fittings, hangers and supports as required, as indicated, and as follows:

1. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide joining fittings that arecompatible with piping materials and ensure that the integrity of the system is notjeopardized.

2. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals. Provideshut off valve to allow for replacement of the fitting without draining the entire system. Theshut off valve shall be constructed of the material matching the pipe it's on.

3. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9 or MSS SP-58 unlessindicated otherwise.

4. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9 unless indicatedotherwise.

C. Pipe-to-Valve and Pipe-to-Equipment Connections: Use flanges, unions, or grooved couplingsto allow disconnection of components for servicing; do not use direct welded, soldered, orthreaded connections.

D. Valves: Provide valves where indicated:



1. Provide drain valves where indicated, and if not indicated provide at least at main shut-off,low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. Use 3/4 inch gate valveswith cap; pipe to nearest floor drain.

2. Isolate equipment using butterfly valves with lug end flanges or grooved mechanicalcouplings.

3. For throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services, use globe valves.4. For throttling and isolation service in chilled and condenser water systems, use only

butterfly valves.5. In heating water or chilled water systems, butterfly valves may be used interchangeably

with gate and globe valves.6. For shut-off and to isolate parts of systems or vertical risers, use gate, ball, or butterfly

valves.E. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC-IX.

2.02 HEATING WATER AND GLYCOL PIPING, ABOVE GRADEA. The intent is to provide Copper Tube up to 2" and Steel piping for larger than 2". However we

would like to minimize the change in materials therefore, should a condition be found thatmaintaining one piping material for a short length in a size not listed for that material wouldreduce the amount of dielectric fitings, this condition shall be presented to the engineer forreview.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, black, using one of the following joint types:1. Welded Joints: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type fittings; AWS D1.1/D1.1M

welded.C. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), drawn, using one of the following joint

types:1. Solder Joints: ASME B16.18 cast brass/bronze or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper

fittings.a. Solder: ASTM B32 lead-free solder, HB alloy (95-5 tin-antimony) or tin and silver.b. Braze: AWS A5.8M/A5.8 BCuP copper/silver alloy.c. Braze: 1 BCuP copper/silver alloy.

2. Tee Connections: Mechanically extracted collars with notched and dimpled branch tube.2.03 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), drawn; using one of the following jointtypes:

2.04 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTSA. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.

1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriatetype using MSS SP-58 recommendations.

B. Conform to ASME B31.9.C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.D. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.E. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.F. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double

hanger.G. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.H. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.I. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.J. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.K. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.



L. In grooved installations, use rigid couplings with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads or with wedgeshaped grooves in header piping to permit support and hanging in accordance with ASMEB31.9.

2.05 UNIONS, FLANGES, MECHANICAL COUPLINGS, AND DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONSA. Unions for Pipe 2 Inches and Under:

1. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints.B. Flanges for Pipe Over 2 Inches:

1. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene.C. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved and Shouldered Joints: Two or more curved housing

segments with continuous key to engage pipe groove, circular C-profile gasket, and bolts tosecure and compress gasket.1. Dimensions and Testing: In accordance with AWWA C606.2. Mechanical Couplings: Comply with ASTM F1476.3. Housing Material: Malleable iron or ductile iron, galvanized.4. Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc-electroplated steel.5. When pipe is field grooved, provide coupling manufacturer's grooving tools.6. Manufacturers:

a. Grinnell Products, a Tyco Business: www.grinnell.com/#sle.b. Shurjoint Piping Products, Inc., a Tyco Business: www.shurjoint.com.c. Victaulic Company: www.victaulic.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

2.06 GATE VALVESA. Manufacturers:

1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.2. Conbraco Industries: www.apollovalves.com.3. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.4. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.

B. Up To and Including 2 Inches:1. Bronze body, bronze trim, screwed bonnet, non-rising stem, lockshield stem, inside screw

with backseating stem, solid wedge disc, alloy seat rings, solder ends.C. Over 2 Inches:

1. Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, rising stem, handwheel, outside screw and yoke,solid wedge disc with bronze seat rings, flanged ends.

2.07 GLOBE OR ANGLE VALVESA. Manufacturers:

1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.2. Conbraco Industries: www.apollovalves.com.3. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.4. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.

B. Up To and Including 2 Inches:1. Bronze body, bronze trim, screwed bonnet, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw with

backseating stem, renewable composition disc and bronze seat, solder ends.2. Balancing ports and caps must be provided with globe or angle valves used for balancing.

C. Over 2 Inches:1. Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, rising stem, handwheel, outside screw and yoke,

rotating plug-type disc with renewable seat ring and disc, flanged ends.2. Balancing ports and caps must be provided with globe or angle valves used for balancing.

2.08 BALL VALVESA. Manufacturers:

1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASME%20B31.9


















































2. Conbraco Industries: www.apollovalves.com.3. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.4. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.

B. Up To and Including 2 Inches:1. Bronze one piece body, chrome plated brass ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever

handle with balancing stops, solder ends with union.2.09 MANUAL CALIBRATED BALANCING VALVES

A. Valve Characteristics ½” to 2” “Y” Pattern Globe1. 300 psi/2065 kPa, y-pattern, globe type with soldered or threaded ends, non-ferrous

Ametal® brass copper alloy body, EPDM o-ring seals. 4-turn digital readout handwheel forbalancing, hidden memory feature with locking tamper-proof setting, and connections forportable differential meter. Tour and Andersson TA Series 786-STAS or 787-STAD orequal by Armstrong or Wheatley.

B. Valve Characteristics 2 ½ to 16” “Y” Pattern Globe1. 300 psi/2065 kPa, y-pattern, globe type with flanged or grooved ends, ASTM A536 ductile

iron body, all other metal parts of Ametal® brass copper alloy, EPDM O-ring seals. 8, 12,16, 20 or 22 turn digital readout handwheel for balancing, hidden memory feature withlocking tamper-proof setting, and connections for portable differential meter. Tour andAndersson TA Series 788-STAF or 789-STAG or equal by Armstrong or Wheatley.

C. Balancing Meter1. A balancing meter is required to be left with the owner after commissioning, the balancing

meter shall be from the same provider as the balancing valves, Victaulic. The Series 734TA-Scope, or TA Series 73M CMI Pressure Differential Meter are acceptable and aremanufactured by Tour and Andersson and provided by Victaulic. Needle gauge typemeters will not be allowed.

2.10 BUTTERFLY VALVESA. Manufacturers:

1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.2. Hammond Valve: www.hammondvalve.com.3. Crane Co.: www.cranevalve.com.4. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.

B. Body: Cast or ductile iron with resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer, lug, or grooved ends,extended neck.

C. Disc: Construct of aluminum bronze, chrome plated ductile iron, stainless steel, ductile iron withEPDM enscapsulation, or Buna-N enscapsulation.

D. Body: Cast or ductile iron with resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer or lug ends, extendedneck.

E. Disc: Stainless steel.F. Operator: Infinite position lever handle with memory stop.

2.11 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVESA. Manufacturers:

1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.2. Hammond Valve: www.hammondvalve.com.3. Crane Co.: www.cranevalve.com.4. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.

B. Iron body, bronze trim, split plate, hinged with stainless steel spring, resilient seal bonded tobody, wafer or threaded lug ends.





















































A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.B. Prepare pipe for grooved mechanical joints as required by coupling manufacturer.C. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.D. Prepare piping connections to equipment using jointing system specified.E. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or

caps.F. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. Refer to Section 23 2500 for additional

requirements.G. Comply with Radiant heating pipping manufacturer's product data, installation instructions, and

design drawings.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.C. Install piping to conserve building space and to avoid interfere with use of space.D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.E. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors.F. Slope piping and arrange to drain at low points.G. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, or MSS SP-58.2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent

work.4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe

movement without disengagement of supported pipe.6. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of

connected horizontal piping.7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or

trapeze hangers.8. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09 9123. Hangers and

supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are notconsidered exposed.

H. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation ofinsulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 23 0719.

I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean,and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.

J. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.3.03 SCHEDULES

A. Hanger Spacing for Copper Tubing.1. 1/2 inch and 3/4 inch: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.2. 1 inch: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.3. 1-1/2 inch and 2 inch: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

B. Hanger Spacing for Steel Piping.1. 2-1/2 inches: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.2. 3 inches: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.3. 4 inches: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.





















































4. 6 inches: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.5. 8 inches: Maximum span, 19 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.6. 10 inches: Maximum span, 20 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch.7. 12 inches: Maximum span, 23 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch.

END OF SECTION









HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 23 2114 - 1

SECTION 23 2114HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES


A. Expansion tanks.B. Expansion tanks.C. Air vents.D. Air separators.E. Strainers.F. Flexible Pump ConnectorsG. Relief valves.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping.B. Section 23 2500 - HVAC Water Treatment: Pipe Cleaning .

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASME BPVC-VIII-1 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for

Construction of Pressure Vessels; 2015.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of thework of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

B. Sequencing: Ensure that utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 00 1300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide product data for manufactured products and assemblies required for this

project. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. Includeproduct description, model and dimensions.

C. Certificates: Inspection certificates for pressure vessels from authority having jurisdiction.D. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions,

and replacement parts list.E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's use in

maintenance of project.1. See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Glycol Solution: One container, 55 gallon size.


specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until

installation.C. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections

of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.



PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 EXPANSION TANKS

A. Manufacturers:1. Amtrol Inc: www.amtrol.com.2. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com.3. Taco, Inc: www.taco-hvac.com.

B. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME BPVC-VIII-1;supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 125 psi, with flexibleEPDM diaphragm or bladder sealed into tank, and steel support stand.

C. Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting, tank drain; precharge to 12 psi.D. Automatic Cold Water Fill Assembly: Pressure reducing valve, reduced pressure double check

back flow preventer, test cocks, strainer, vacuum breaker, and valved by-pass.2.02 AIR VENTS

A. Manufacturers:1. Armstrong International, Inc: www.armstronginternational.com.2. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com.3. Taco, Inc: www.taco-hvac.com.

B. Manual Type: Short vertical sections of 2 inch diameter pipe to form air chamber, with 1/8 inchbrass needle valve at top of chamber.

2.03 AIR SEPARATORSA. In-line Air Separators:

1. Manufacturers:a. Armstrong International, Inc: www.armstronginternational.com.b. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com.c. Taco, Inc: www.taco-hvac.com.

2. Cast iron for sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller, or steel for sizes 2 inch and larger; tested andstamped in accordance with ASME BPVC-VIII-1; for 125 psi operating pressure.

2.04 STRAINERSA. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong International, Inc: www.armstronginternational.com.2. Green Country Filtration: greencountryfiltration.com.3. WEAMCO: www.weamco.com.

B. Size 2 inch and Under:1. Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psi working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless

steel perforated screen.C. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch:

1. Flanged iron body for 175 psi working pressure, Y pattern with 3/64 inch stainless steelperforated screen.

D. Size 5 inch and Larger:1. Flanged iron body for 175 psi working pressure, basket pattern with 1/8 inch stainless steel

perforated screen.2.05 FLEXIBLE PUMP CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers:1. Metraflex: www.metraflex.com.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Size 2 inch (50 mm) and Under:1. Flexible connectors shall be of the braided stainless steel type. Flexible hose section to be

321 stainless steel, close pitch, annular corrugated hose with a braided outer covering oftype 304 stainless steel. End connections to be carbon steel, male pipe thread. Overall



length to allow for a minimum of ¼" intermittent flexing, or per manufacturer'srecommendations for additional motion.

C. Size 2-1/2 inch (65 mm) and Larger:1. Flexible connectors shall be of the braided stainless steel type. Flexible hose section to be

321 stainless steel, close pitch, annular corrugated hose with a braided outer covering oftype 304 stainless steel. End connections to be ANSI class 150 carbon steel plate flanges.Overall length to allow for a minimum of 3/8" intermittent flexing or per manufacturer'srecommendations for additional motion.

2.06 RELIEF VALVESA. Manufacturers:

1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.2. Armstrong International, Inc: www.armstronginternational.com.3. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com.4. Conbraco Industries: www.apollovalves.com.

B. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated,capacities ASME certified and labelled.


A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Where large air quantities can accumulate, provide enlarged air collection standpipes.C. Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated.D. For automatic air vents in ceiling spaces or other concealed locations, provide vent tubing to

nearest drain.E. Provide air separator on suction side of system circulation pump and connect to expansion tank.F. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection.G. Provide pump suction fitting on suction side of base mounted centrifugal pumps where

indicated. Remove temporary strainers after cleaning systems.H. Support pump fittings with floor mounted pipe and flange supports.I. Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain.

END OF SECTION


HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 2123 - 1

SECTION 23 2123HYDRONIC PUMPS


A. In-line circulators.B. Vertical in-line pumps.C. Base mounted pumps.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.B. Section 23 0513 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment.C. Section 23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.D. Section 23 0719 - HVAC Piping Insulation.E. Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. UL 778 - Standard for Motor-Operated Water Pumps; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide certified pump curves showing performance characteristics with pump

and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. Include electricalcharacteristics and connection requirements.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support requirements andrecommendations.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubricationinstructions, and replacement parts list.


A. Goulds Pumps: www.goulds.comB. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com/#sle.C. Patterson Pumps: www.pattersonpumps.com.

2.02 HVAC PUMPS - GENERALA. Provide pumps that operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and

cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percentof midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

B. Minimum Quality Standard: UL 778.C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL or testing agency

acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.2.03 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS

A. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, with resiliently mounted motor for in-linemounting, oil lubricated, for 125 psi maximum working pressure.

B. Casing: Cast iron, with flanged pump connections.C. Impeller: Non-ferrous keyed to shaft.D. Bearings: Oil-lubricated bronze sleeve.E. Shaft: Alloy steel with bronze sleeve, integral thrust collar.


HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 2123 - 2

F. Seal: Mechanical seal, 225 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature.G. Drive: Flexible coupling.

2.04 VERTICAL IN-LINE PUMPSA. Type: Vertical, single stage, close coupled, radially or horizontally split casing, for in-line

mounting, for 175 psi working pressure.B. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage port, casing wear ring, seal flush

connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge.C. Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed directly to motor shaft or extension.D. Shaft: Carbon steel with stainless steel impeller cap screw or nut and bronze sleeve.E. Seal: Mechanical seal, 225 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature.

2.05 BASE MOUNTED PUMPSA. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, radially or horizontally split casing, for

125 psi maximum working pressure.B. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage ports, renewable bronze casing wearing

rings, seal flush connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge.C. Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed to shaft.D. Bearings: Oil lubricated roller or ball bearings.E. Shaft: Alloy steel with copper, bronze, or stainless steel shaft sleeve.F. Seal: Mechanical seal, 225 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature.G. Drive: Flexible coupling with coupling guard.H. Baseplate: Cast iron or fabricated steel with integral drain rim.


A. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less than minimum space

recommended by manufacturer.C. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent

to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. For close coupled or base mountedpumps, provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches andover. Refer to Section 23 0548.

D. Provide line sized shut-off valve and strainer on pump suction, and line sized soft seat checkvalve and balancing valve on pump discharge.

E. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.F. Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into floor drains.G. Check, align, and certify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up.H. Install close coupled and base mounted pumps on concrete housekeeping base, with anchor

bolts, set and level, and grout in place. Refer to Section 03 3000.I. Lubricate pumps before start-up.

END OF SECTION


REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 2300 - 1

SECTION 23 2300REFRIGERANT PIPING


A. Piping.B. Refrigerant.C. Moisture and liquid indicators.D. Valves.E. Strainers.F. Check valves.G. Filter-driers.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 8413 - Penetration Firestopping.B. Section 23 0716 - HVAC Equipment Insulation.C. Section 23 0719 - HVAC Piping Insulation.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AHRI 710 - Performance Rating of Liquid-Line Driers; 2009.B. ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; 2013.C. ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing, and Fusing

Qualifications; 2015.D. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; 2013.E. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes; 2013.F. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components; 2013.G. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2014.H. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2014.I. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2013.J. ASTM B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and

Refrigeration Field Service; 2013.K. AWS A5.8M/A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; 2011-AMD 1.L. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,

Application, and Installation; 2009.1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Where more than one piping system material is specified ensure system components arecompatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Providenecessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistentlyprovided.

B. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.5 unless indicated otherwise.C. Liquid Indicators:

1. Use line size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving condenser.2. If receiver is provided, install in liquid line leaving receiver.3. Use line size on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.

D. Valves:1. Use service valves on suction and discharge of compressors.2. Use gauge taps at compressor inlet and outlet.



3. Use gauge taps at hot gas bypass regulators, inlet and outlet.4. Use check valves on compressor discharge.5. Use check valves on condenser liquid lines on multiple condenser systems.

E. Refrigerant Charging (Packed Angle) Valve: Use in liquid line between receiver shut-off valveand expansion valve.

F. Filter-Driers:1. Use a filter-drier immediately ahead of liquid-line controls, such as thermostatic expansion

valves, solenoid valves, and moisture indicators.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide general assembly of specialties, including manufacturers catalogue

information. Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.C. Sustainable Design Documentation: Submit manufacturer's product data on refrigerant used,

showing compliance with specified requirements.D. Shop Drawings: Indicate schematic layout of system, including equipment, critical dimensions,

and sizes.E. Design Data: Submit design data indicating pipe sizing. Indicate load carrying capacity of

trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers.F. Test Reports: Indicate results of leak test, acid test.G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate support, connection requirements, and

isolation for servicing.H. Submit welders certification of compliance with ASME BPVC-IX.I. Project Record Documents: Record exact locations of equipment and refrigeration accessories

on record drawings.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in thissection, with minimum 3 years of documented experience.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place.B. Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps and

plugs in place until installation.C. Dehydrate and charge components such as piping and receivers, seal prior to shipment, until

connected into system.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 PIPING

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B280, H58 hard drawn or O60 soft annealed.1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper.2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8M/A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy.

B. Copper Tube to 7/8 inch OD: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), annealed.1. Fittings: ASME B16.26 cast copper.2. Joints: Flared.

C. Pipe Supports and Anchors:1. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.

a. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, selectappropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Malleable iron adjustable swivel, split ring.3. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.



5. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.6. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.7. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.8. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded

connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms;size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.

2.02 REFRIGERANTA. Refrigerant: Use only refrigerants that have ozone depletion potential (ODP) of zero and global

warming potential (GWP) of less than 50.2.03 MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS

A. Indicators: Single port type, UL listed, with copper or brass body, flared or solder ends, sightglass, color coded paper moisture indicator with removable element cartridge and plastic cap;for maximum temperature of 200 degrees F and maximum working pressure of 500 psi.

2.04 VALVESA. Ball Valves:

1. Two piece bolted forged brass body with teflon ball seals and copper tube extensions,brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ring stem seals; formaximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 300 degrees F.

B. Service Valves:1. Forged brass body with copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball

check valve, flared or solder ends, for maximum pressure of 500 psi.2.05 STRAINERS

A. Straight Line or Angle Line Type:1. Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable cartridge, with screen of

stainless steel wire or monel reinforced with brass; for maximum working pressure of 430psi.

2.06 CHECK VALVESA. Globe Type:

1. Cast bronze or forged brass body, forged brass cap with neoprene seal, brass guide anddisc holder, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, teflon seat disc; for maximumtemperature of 300 degrees F and maximum working pressure of 425 psi.

2.07 FILTER-DRIERSA. Performance:

1. Flow Capacity - Liquid Line: As indicated in schedule, minimum, rated in accordance withAHRI 710.

2. Pressure Drop: 2 psi, maximum, when operating at full connected evaporator capacity.3. Design Working Pressure: 350 psi, minimum.

B. Cores: Molded or loose-fill molecular sieve desiccant compatible with refrigerant, activatedalumina, activated charcoal, and filtration to 40 microns, with secondary filtration to 20 microns;of construction that will not pass into refrigerant lines.

C. Construction: UL listed.1. Connections: As specified for applicable pipe type.


A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=AHRI%20710%20I-P















3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and maintain

gradient.C. Install piping to conserve building space and avoid interference with use of space.D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected

equipment.E. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.5.2. Support horizontal piping as indicated.3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent

work.4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

F. Follow ASHRAE Std 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal ofrefrigerant.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 00 1400 - Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC), for additional requirements.B. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5.C. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psi. Perform final tests at 27 inches vacuum and

200 psi using halide torch. Test to no leakage.END OF SECTION

























HVAC WATER TREATMENT 23 2500 - 1

SECTION 23 2500HVAC WATER TREATMENT


A. Materials.1. System cleaner.2. Closed system treatment (water).

B. By-pass (pot) feeder.C. Liquid level switch.D. Conductivity controller.E. Water meter.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements: Delaware Solid Waste Authority furnished treatment

equipment.B. Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping.C. Section 23 2114 - Hydronic Specialties.D. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide chemical treatment materials, chemicals, and equipment including

electrical characteristics and connection requirements.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system schematic, equipment locations, and controls schematics,

electrical characteristics and connection requirements.D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate placement of equipment in systems, piping

configuration, and connection requirements.E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate start-up of treatment systems when completed and

operating properly. Indicate analysis of system water after cleaning and after treatment.F. Certificate: Submit certificate of compliance from Authority Having Jurisdiction indicating

approval of chemicals and their proposed disposal.G. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and piping, including

sampling points and location of chemical injectors.H. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include data on chemical feed pumps, agitators, and other

equipment including spare parts lists, procedures, and treatment programs. Include step bystep instructions on test procedures including target concentrations.

I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's use inmaintenance of project.1. See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.


specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. Company shallhave local representatives with water analysis laboratories and full time service personnel.


A. AmSolv-Amrep, Inc: www.amsolv.com.B. GE Water & Process Technologies: www.gewater.com.



C. Nalco, an Ecolab Company: www.nalco.com.D. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALSA. System Cleaner:

1. Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease andpetroleum products; sodiumtripoly phosphate and sodium molybdate.

2. Biocide chlorine release agents such as sodium hypochlorite or calcium hypochlorite,microbiocides such as quarternary ammonia compounds, tributyltin oxide, methylene bis(thiocyanate), or isothiazolones.

B. Closed System Treatment (Water):1. Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust pH; polyphosphate.2. Corrosion inhibitors; liquid boron-nitrite, sodium nitrite and borax, sodium totyltriazole, low

molecular weight polymers, phosphonates, sodium molybdate, or sulphites.3. Conductivity enhancers; phosphates or phosphonates.

2.03 BY-PASS (POT) FEEDERA. Manufacturers:

1. Griswold Controls: www.griswoldcontrols.com.2. J. L. Wingert Company: www.jlwingert.com.3. Neptune, a brand of the Dover Company: www.neptune1.com.

B. 6.0 gal quick opening cap for working pressure of 175 psi.2.04 SOLUTION METERING PUMP

A. Positive displacement, diaphragm pump with adjustable flow rate, thermoplastic construction,continuous-duty fully enclosed electric motor and drive, and built-in relief valve.

2.05 SOLUTION TANKSA. 30 gallon capacity, polyethylene, self-supporting, 1 gallon graduated markings; molded

fiberglass cover with recess for mounting pump, agitator, and liquid level switch.2.06 AGITATOR

A. Totally enclosed electric motor, cast iron clamp and motor mount, 1/2 inch diameter coatedType 316 stainless steel propeller.

2.07 LIQUID LEVEL SWITCHA. Polypropylene housing with integrally mounted PVC air trap, receptacles for connection to

metering pump, and low level alarm.2.08 CONDUCTIVITY CONTROLLER

A. Packaged monitor controller with solid state circuiting, five percent accuracy, linear dialadjustment, built-in calibration switch, on-off switch and light, control function light, output tocontrol circuit and recorder.

2.09 WATER METERA. Displacement type cold water meter with sealed, tamper-proof magnetic drive, impulse contact

register, single pole, double throw dry contact switch.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Systems shall be operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning. Use water meter torecord capacity in each system.

B. Place terminal control valves in open position during cleaning.C. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.



3.02 CLEANING SEQUENCEA. Concentration:

1. As recommended by manufacturer.B. Hot Water Heating Systems:

1. Apply heat while circulating, slowly raising temperature to 160 degrees F and maintain for12 hours minimum.

2. Remove heat and circulate to 100 degrees F or less; drain systems as quickly as possibleand refill with clean water.

3. Circulate for 6 hours at design temperatures, then drain.4. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed.

C. Chilled Water Systems:1. Circulate for 48 hours, then drain systems as quickly as possible.2. Refill with clean water, circulate for 24 hours, then drain.3. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed.

D. Use neutralizer agents on recommendation of system cleaner supplier and approval ofArchitect.

E. Flush open systems with clean water for one hour minimum. Drain completely and refill.F. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens.G. Inspect, remove sludge, and flush low points with clean water after cleaning process is

completed. Include disassembly of components as required.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.3.04 CLOSED SYSTEM TREATMENT

A. Provide one bypass feeder on each system. Install isolating and drain valves and necessarypiping. Install around balancing valve downstream of circulating pumps unless indicatedotherwise.

B. Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by test.C. Provide 3/4 inch water coupon rack around circulating pumps with space for 4 test specimens.

3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIESA. Training: Train Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's personnel on operation and maintenance of

chemical treatment system.1. Provide minimum of two hours of instruction for two people.2. Have operation and maintenance data prepared and available for review during training.3. Conduct training using actual equipment after treated system has been put into full

operation.3.06 MAINTENANCE

A. See Section 00 1730 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating tomaintenance service.

B. Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under the supervision andin the direct employ of the equipment manufacturer or original installer.

C. Provide service and maintenance of treatment systems for one year from Date of SubstantialCompletion.

D. Provide monthly technical service visits to perform field inspections and make water analysison-site. Detail findings in writing on proper practices, chemical treating requirements, andcorrective actions needed. Submit two copies of field service report after each visit.

E. Provide laboratory and technical assistance services during this maintenance period.



F. Provide on-site inspections of equipment during scheduled or emergency shutdown to properlyevaluate success of water treatment program, and make recommendations in writing basedupon these inspections.

END OF SECTION


HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 3100 - 1

SECTION 23 3100HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS


A. Metal ductwork.B. Casing and plenums.C. Duct cleaning.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 23 0713 - Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner.B. Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories.C. Section 23 3700 - Air Outlets and Inlets.D. Section 23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.D. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2012.E. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry

Elements; 2012.F. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2013.G. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete

Elements; 2013.H. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2015.I. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems;

2015.J. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking

Operations; 2014.K. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005.L. SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual; 2012, 2nd Edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration

prior to start of work for Low pressure class and higher systems.D. Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure,

and leakage rate, following SMACNA (LEAK).E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes

in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.1.05 LEED SUBMITTALS: COMPLY WITH SECTION 018113.

A. MR Credit 3: BPDO - Sourcing of Raw Materials1. For recycled content ductwork: Documentation indicating percentages by weight of

pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content. Include material cost value.



B. EQ Credit 2: Low-Emitting Materials1. For interior wet-applied mastics: Certificate stating compliance with California Department



specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience, and approved bymanufacturer.

1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTSA. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B, and NFPA 96 standards.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant

manufacturers.B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 DUCT ASSEMBLIES

A. Regulatory Requirements: Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.B. All Ducts: Galvanized steel, or Manufactured Non-Metallic Ductwork.C. Low Pressure Supply (System with Cooling Coils): 1 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.D. Medium and High Pressure Supply: 2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.E. Return and Relief: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.F. General Exhaust: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M FS Type B,

with G90/Z275 coating.B. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant.

1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration andcompatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class ofducts.

2. VOC Content: Not more than 250 g/L, excluding water.3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero, when

tested in accordance with ASTM E84.4. For Use With Flexible Ducts: UL labeled.5. Manufacturers:

a. Carlisle HVAC Products; Hardcast Iron-Grip 601 Water Based Duct Sealant: www.carlislehvac.com/#sle.

b. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.C. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or

continuously threaded.D. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:

1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.



2.03 DUCTWORK FABRICATIONA. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.B. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on

centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foilturning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.

D. Provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation when acoustical lining isindicated.

E. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergencedownstream.

F. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).G. Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver frame,

provide blank-out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use same material as duct, paintedblack on exterior side; seal to louver frame and duct.

2.04 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGSA. Manufactured Non-Metallic Ductwork:

1. Products:a. Ductwork system materials including panels, adhesives, tapes, sealants, flanges and

gaskets to be as a matched system listed by Underwriter's Laboratory to the UL-181standard as a Class 1 air duct.

b. Duct air leakage rates to be in compliance with SMACNA Class 3 HVAC DuctConstruction Standards, latest version per applicable leakage class based onpressure.

c. The panel shall be manufactured of CFC/HCFC-free rigid material thermobonded onboth sides to a factory-applied .001"(25 micron) aluminum foil facing reinforced with afiberglass scrim. The thermal conductivity shall be no greater than 0.13BTU in/hr xsq.ft x degree F(.018W/m x deg. C), and the density of the material shall not be lessthan 3.5 pcf(56 Kg/sq.m) with a minimum compressive strength of 28 psi (.2 MPa).

d. The standard thermal rating to be a minimum of an R-6.0 (1.2 RSI)e. Installed ducting system must be warranted for a minimum of ten years from

installation.2. Application:

a. All fabricated duct segment fittings shall be designed in accordance with SMACNAHVAC Duct Construction Standards, latest edition.

3. Duct Installation:a. All exterior mounted ductwork shall be protected against the elements with a non-duct

penetrating weatherproof finish. Duct segments shall incorporate 6.0 mils thickness5-ply aluminum, zero permeability, absolute vapor barrier self-adhesive jacketing. Allexternal seams and joints shall be fully sealed with joint and seam tape during theinstallation process.

4. Manufacturers:a. KoolDuct; www.ptmmanufacturing.comb. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Flexible Ducts: Black polymer film supported by helically wound spring steel wire.1. UL labeled.2. Insulation: Fiberglass insulation with aluminized vapor barrier film.3. Pressure Rating: 4 inches WG positive and 1" inches WG negative.4. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.5. Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees F to 175 degrees F.6. Manufacturers:



a. Thermaflex Model M-KE.b. Hart and Cooley Model F216.c. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

2.05 CASINGSA. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and construct for operating pressures

indicated.B. Mount floor mounted casings on 4 inch high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet panels on 8 inch

centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide liner of galvanized 18 gage,0.0478 inch expanded metal mesh supported at 12 inch centers, turned up 12 inches at sideswith sheet metal shields.

C. Reinforce door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supportingangles. Install hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to equipment forcleaning and inspection.


A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open

ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.D. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.E. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers.

Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can withspring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulatedductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.

F. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating andmaintenance activities.

G. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimpin direction of air flow.

H. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.I. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with one foot maximum length of flexible duct.

Do not use flexible duct to change direction.J. At exterior wall louvers, seal duct to louver frame and install blank-out panels.K. Interior wet-applied mastics: Comply with low-emitting requirements in Division 01 Section

“Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED.”3.02 CLEANING

A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. Toobtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment that could be harmed byexcessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.

3.03 PRESSURE TESTINGA. Prior to the balancing of the duct system by the AABC certified balancing contractor all ductwork

shall be tested by the mechanical contractor for duct leakage in accordance with SMACNAStandards and AABC Standards Chapter 23. Duct leakage shall not exceed 1% for a durationof (10) ten minutes. Test pressures shall be as per SMACNA, however, not less than thefollowing:1. Low Pressure Duct:

a. 25% above system operating pressure, but not less than 2" w.c. (500 Pa).2. High Pressure Supply Duct:

a. 25% above system operating pressure, but not less than 6" w.c. (1500 Pa).



3. High Pressure Exhaust Duct:a. 25% above system operating pressure, but not less than 8" w.c. (2000 Pa).

B. Insulation materials shall not be applied until systems have been witnessed to meet the abovetesting requirements.

C. The testing and balancing contractor shall witness and certify all duct pressure tests.D. Additional leak testing requirements:

1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of duct systems to accomodate leakagetesting and for compliance with test requirements.

2. If static pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system designpressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

3. Provide seven (7) days advance notice for testing.3.04 SCHEDULES

A. Ductwork Pressure Class:1. Supply (Heating Systems): 2 inch (500 Pa2. Supply (System with Cooling Coils): 2 inch.3. Return Ductwork: 1 inch.4. General Exhaust: 1 inch.5. Outside Air Intake: 1 inch.6. Combustion Air: 1 inch (250 Pa)

END OF SECTION


AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3300 - 1

SECTION 23 3300AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES


A. Air turning devices/extractors.B. Backdraft dampers.C. Combination fire and smoke dampers.D. Duct access doors.E. Duct test holes.F. Fire dampers.G. Flexible duct connections.H. Smoke dampers.I. Volume control dampers.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.B. Section 23 3600 - Air Terminal Units: Pressure regulating damper assemblies.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2015.B. NFPA 92 - Standard for Smoke Control Systems; 2015.C. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005.D. UL 33 - Safety Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.E. UL 555 - Standard for Fire Dampers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.F. UL 555S - Standard for Smoke Dampers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers.

Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide instructions for fire dampers.D. Project Record Drawings: Record actual locations of access doors and test holes.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS

A. Manufacturers:1. Krueger: www.krueger-hvac.com.2. PCI Industries, Inc; Pottorff Brand : www.portorff.com.3. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com.4. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com.5. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction; with individuallyadjustable blades, mounting straps.



2.02 BACKDRAFT DAMPERSA. Manufacturers:

1. Louvers & Dampers, Inc: www.louvers-dampers.com.2. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com.3. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Multi-Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: Galvanized steel, with centerpivoted blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked togetherin rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin;adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

2.03 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERSA. Manufacturers:

1. Louvers & Dampers, Inc: www.louvers-dampers.com.2. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com.3. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL 555, UL 555S, and as indicated.C. Provide factory sleeve and collar for each damper.D. Multiple Blade Dampers: Fabricate with 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades,

oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, stainless steeljamb seals, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, bladestops, and lock, and 1/2 inch actuator shaft.

E. Operators: UL listed and labelled spring return electric type suitable for 120 volts, single phase,60 Hz. Provide end switches to indicate damper position. Locate damper operator on interior ofduct and link to damper operating shaft.

F. Electro Thermal Link: Fusible link melting at 165 degrees F; 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz; ULlisted and labeled.

2.04 DUCT ACCESS DOORSA. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.B. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.

2.05 DUCT TEST HOLESA. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene

plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide

extended neck fittings to clear insulation.1. Manufacturers:2. Carlisle HVAC Products; Dynair Test Port with Red Cap with O-Ring Seal:

www.carlislehvac.com/#sle.2.06 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated.B. Horizontal Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage frame, stainless steel closure spring, and

lightweight, heat retardant non-asbestos fabric blanket.C. Curtain Type Dampers: Galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel

closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air streamexcept for 1.0 inch pressure class ducts up to 12 inches in height.

D. Fusible Links: UL 33, separate at 160 degrees F with adjustable link straps for combinationfire/balancing dampers.



2.07 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONSA. Manufacturers:

1. Carlisle HVAC Products; Dynair Connector Plus G90 Steel Offset Seam Neoprene Fabric: www.carlislehvac.com/#sle.

2. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.C. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.

1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A,minimum density 30 oz per sq yd.a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches wide.

2. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gage, 0.0239 inch thick galvanized steel.2.08 SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555S, and as indicated.B. Electro Thermal Link: Fusible link melting at 165 degrees F; 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz; UL

listed and labeled.2.09 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Louvers & Dampers, Inc: www.louvers-dampers.com.2. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com.3. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.C. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch.D. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72

inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel framewith suitable hardware.

E. End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multipleblade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon, thermoplastic elastomer, or sintered bronzebearings.

F. Quadrants:1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or

adapters.3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.


A. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and followSMACNA (DCS). Refer to Section 23 3100 for duct construction and pressure class.

B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and whereindicated.

C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans,automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere asindicated. Provide for cleaning kitchen exhaust ducts in accordance with NFPA 96. Provideminimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and asindicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication.

D. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=SMACNA%20HVAC%20DUCT%20CONSTR











E. Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and smoke dampers at locationsindicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required byAuthorities Having Jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves,breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.

F. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 92.G. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's representative.H. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections

immediately adjacent to the equipment.I. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches

are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths fromduct take-off.

J. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless ofwhether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly.

K. Provide air turning devices within duct whenever long radius elbows are not utilized.END OF SECTION



















POWER VENTILATORS 23 3423 - 1

SECTION 23 3423POWER VENTILATORS


A. Roof exhausters.B. Ceiling exhaust fans.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories: Backdraft dampers.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AMCA (DIR) - [Directory of] Products Licensed Under AMCA International Certified Ratings

Program; http://www.amca.org/certified/search/company.aspx.B. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; 2010.C. AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans; 2005.D. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance

Rating; 2007.E. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; 2014.F. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; 2014.G. UL 705 - Power Ventilators; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified

operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels at rated capacity, and electricalcharacteristics and connection requirements.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions.D. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare

parts list, and wiring diagrams.E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's use in

maintenance of project.1. See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Fan Belts: One set for each individual fan.


specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Permanent ventilators may be used for ventilation during construction only after ductwork isclean, filters are in place, bearings have been lubricated, and fan has been test run underobservation.


A. Greenheck: www.greenheck.com.B. Loren Cook Company: www.lorencook.com.C. PennBarry: www.pennbarry.com.D. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.


POWER VENTILATORS 23 3423 - 2

2.02 POWER VENTILATORS - GENERALA. Static and Dynamically Balanced: AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans.B. Performance Ratings: Determined in accordance with AMCA 210 and bearing the AMCA

Certified Rating Seal.C. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300 and bearing AMCA Certified Sound Rating

Seal.D. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.E. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with

UL 705.F. Electrical Components: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for

the purpose specified and indicated.2.03 ROOF EXHAUSTERS (GENERAL PURPOSE)

A. Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven as indicated, with spun aluminum housing; resilient mountedmotor; 1/2 inch mesh, 0.62 inch thick aluminum wire birdscreen; square base to suit roof curbwith continuous curb gaskets.

B. Roof Curb: 12 inch high self-flashing of galvanized steel with continuously welded seams,built-in cant strips and interior baffle with acoustic insulation, curb bottom.

C. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non-fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected motor.

D. Motor Operated Damper: 24v motor actuated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edgedwith offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked. Controls contractor shall provide an actuatorfor this damper.

E. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable andadjustable pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set atmid-position; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings. Provide adjustable sheaveduring balancing, and permanent sheave once balancing is complete.

2.04 CEILING EXHAUST FANSA. Centrifugal Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven with galvanized steel housing lined with acoustic

insulation, resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraft damper in discharge.B. Disconnect Switch: Cord and plug in housing for thermal overload protected motor.C. Grille: Aluminum with baked white enamel finish.D. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and

adjustable pitch motor sheaves selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set atmid-position; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings.Provide adjustable sheaveduring balancing, and permanent sheave once balancing is complete.

E. Provide adjustable speed control for direct drive fans.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Secure roof exhausters with stainless steel lag screws to roof curb.C. Extend ducts to roof exhausters into roof curb. Counterflash duct to roof opening.D. Provide sheaves required for final air balance.E. Install backdraft dampers on inlet to roof and wall exhausters.F. Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling exhauster fans and as indicated.

END OF SECTION

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20705






































AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 3600 - 1

SECTION 23 3600AIR TERMINAL UNITS


A. Variable volume terminal units.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 22 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.B. Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping: Connections to heating coils.C. Section 23 2114 - Hydronic Specialties: Connections to heating coils.D. Section 23 8200 - Convection Heating and Cooling Units: Air Coils.E. Section 23 8216 - Air Coils.F. Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.G. Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories.H. Section 23 8200 - Convection Heating and Cooling Units: Air coils.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A492 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Rope Wire; 1995 (Reapproved 2013).B. ASTM A603 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Structural Wire Rope; 1998

(Reapproved 2014).C. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2015.D. SMACNA (SRM) - Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems; Sheet Metal

and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2008.E. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; current edition, including all

revisions.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data indicating configuration, general assembly, and materials used in

fabrication. Include catalog performance ratings that indicate air flow, static pressure, and NCdesignation. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration, general assembly, and materials used in fabrication,and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.1. Include schedules listing discharge and radiated sound power level for each of second

through sixth octave bands at inlet static pressures of 1 to 4 inch wg.D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate support and hanging details, installation

instructions, recommendations, and service clearances required.E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of units and locations of access doors

required for access of valving.F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating

instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts lists. Include directions for resettingconstant volume regulators.

G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in DelawareSolid Waste Authority 's name and registered with manufacturer.


specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.



B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters LaboratoriesInc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.06 WARRANTYA. See Section 00 1720 - Project Record Documents, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for air terminal units.


A. TraneB. MetalaireC. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 SINGLE DUCT VARIABLE VOLUME UNITSA. Basic Assembly:

1. Casings: Minimum 22 gage, 0.0299 inch galvanized steel.2. Lining: Minimum 1/2 inch thick neoprene or vinyl coated fibrous glass insulation, 1.5 lb/cu

ft density, meeting NFPA 90A requirements and UL 181 erosion requirements. Face liningwith mylar film.

3. Plenum Air Inlets: Round stub connections for duct attachment.4. Plenum Air Outlets: S slip and drive connections.

B. Basic Unit:1. Configuration: Air volume damper assembly inside unit casing. Locate control

components inside protective metal shroud.2. Volume Damper: Construct of galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self lubricating

bearings; maximum damper leakage: 2 percent of design air flow at 1 inches rated inletstatic pressure.

3. Mount damper operator to position damper normally open.C. Round Outlet: Discharge collar matching inlet size.D. Hot Water Heating Coil:

1. Construction: 1/2 inch copper tube mechanically expanded into aluminum plate fins, leaktested under water to 200 psig pressure, factory installed.

2. See drawing schedule for capacityE. Automatic Damper Operator:

1. Electric Actuator: 24 volt with high limit.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install the inlets of air terminal units and air flow sensors a minimum of four duct diameters from

elbows, transitions, and duct takeoffs.C. Provide ceiling access doors or locate units above easily removable ceiling components.D. Support units individually from structure with wire rope complying with ASTM A492 and ASTM

A603 in accordance with SMACNA (SRM). See Section 22 0548.E. Do not support from ductwork.F. Connect to ductwork in accordance with Section 23 3100.G. Install heating coils in accordance with Section 23 8200.



3.02 ADJUSTINGA. Reset volume with damper operator attached to assembly allowing flow range modulation from

100 percent of design flow to zero percent full flow. Set units with heating coils for minimum 50percent full flow.

END OF SECTION


AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 3700 - 1

SECTION 23 3700AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS


A. Diffusers. 1. Perforated ceiling diffusers.

B. Rectangular ceiling diffusers.C. Slot ceiling diffusers.D. Registers/grilles.

1. Ceiling-mounted, egg crate exhaust and return register/grilles.2. Ceiling-mounted, exhaust and return register/grilles.

E. Goosenecks. F. Gravity ventilators.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices; 2010.B. AMCA 550 - Test Method for High Velocity Wind Driven Rain Resistant Louvers; 2015.C. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets; 2006 (R2011).D. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.E. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.F. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012.G. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as

to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inletsshowing type, size, location, application, and noise level.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE



A. Krueger-HVAC, Division of Air System Components: www.krueger-hvac.com.B. Price Industries: www.price-hvac.com.C. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com.D. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

2.02 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERSA. Type: Square, stamped, multi-core diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern with

sectorizing baffles where indicated.B. Frame: Inverted T-bar type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame.



C. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel finish.D. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.E. Accessories: Radial opposed blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid with damper

adjustable from diffuser face.2.03 PERFORATED FACE CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Type: Perforated face with fully adjustable pattern and removable face.B. Frame: Inverted T-bar type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame.C. Fabrication: Steel with steel frame and baked enamel finish.D. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.E. Accessories: Radial opposed blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid with damper

adjustable from diffuser face.2.04 CEILING SLOT DIFFUSERS

A. Type: Continuous 2" wide slot, 1 slots wide, with adjustable vanes for left, right, or verticaldischarge.

B. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory baked enamel finish.C. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.D. Plenum: Integral, galvanized steel, insulated.

2.05 MAXIMUM SECURITY PERFORATED FACE REGISTERS/GRILLESA. Frame: Provide 4 sided mounting frameB. Construction: Made of welded steel with factory acrylic finish.C. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

2.06 CEILING SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLESA. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air along face of

grille, two-way deflection.B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.C. Construction: Made of aluminum extrusions with factory enamel finish.D. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable

from face.2.07 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES

A. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with blades setat 45 degrees, vertical face.

B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.C. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frames and 22 gage, 0.0299 inch

minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frame, or aluminumextrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.

D. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable

from face where not individually connected to exhaust fans.2.08 CEILING EGG CRATE EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES

A. Type: Egg crate style face consisting of 1/2 by 1/2 by 1/2 inch grid core.B. Fabrication: Grid core consists of aluminum with mill aluminum finish.C. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.D. Frame: Channel lay-in frame for suspended grid ceilings.



2.09 GOOSENECKS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) of minimum 18 gage, 0.0598 inch galvanized

steel.B. Mount on minimum 12 inch high curb base where size exceeds 9 x 9 inch.

2.10 GRAVITY VENTILATORSA. Hood Relief Gravity Ventilator:

1. Manufacturers:a. Greenheck Fan Corporation: www.greenheck.com.b. Loren Cook Company: www.lorencook.com.c. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

2. General:a. Low silhouette for relief applications with natural gravity or negative pressure

system(s).b. Performance ratings and factory testing to be in accordance with AMCA 511 and

AMCA 550.c. Equipment to bear permanently affixed manufacturer's nameplate listing model and

serial number.3. Hood and Base:

a. Material: Aluminum.b. Hood Construction: Precision formed, arched panels with interlocking seams.c. Vertical End Panels: Fully locked into hood end panels.d. Curb Cap: Pre-punched mounting holes for installation.

4. Birdscreen:a. Fabricate in accordance with ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).b. Construction: 1/2 inch Galvanized mesh.c. Horizontally mounted across hood intake area.

5. Hood Support: Galvanized steel construction and fastened so hood can be removedcompletely from the base or hinged open.

6. Options/Accessories:a. Roof Curbs:

1) Pitched Roofs: Welded, straight side curb with flashing flange and wood nailer.b. Provide extended base minimum 7 inch extension to base height making overall base

12 inches in height to prevent snow or moisture intake.c. Dampers:

1) Type: Gravity.2) Factory designed to prevents outside air from entering back into building when

fan is off.3) Balanced for minimal resistance to flow.4) Galvanized frames with pre-punched mounting holes.

d. Factory Finish: Thermo-setting polyester urethane.e. Insect Screen:

1) Fabricate in accordance with ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).2) Construct of fine mesh aluminum.3) Fitted to top of the throat to prevent entry of insects.4) Coating: Thermo-setting polyester urethane.


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Comply with SMACNA (ASMM) for flashing/counter-flashing of roof penetrations and supports

for roof curbs and roof mounted equipment.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=AMCA%20550






































C. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conformwith architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.

D. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.E. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite

whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.F. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black.

END OF SECTION











HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES 23 4000 - 1

SECTION 23 4000HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES


A. Disposable, extended area panel filters.B. Filter gages.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 00 1510 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Filters for temporary heating and

ventilating.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AHRI 850 - Performance Rating of Commercial and Industrial Air Filter Equipment; 2004.B. ASHRAE Std 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal

Efficiency by Particle Size; 2012, with 2015 amendments.C. UL 900 - Standard for Air Filter Units; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Conform to 1 Section 7.4.

1. Dust Spot Efficiency: Plus or minus 5 percent.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 00 1300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly and filter

frames, dimensions, motor locations and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's use in

maintenance of project.1. See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Filters: One set of each type and size.

1.06 LEED SUBMITTALS: COMPLY WITH SECTION 018113.A. EQ Credit 3: Construction Indoor Air Quality Management

1. For filter media installed during construction and prior to occupancy, documentationindicating MERV rating or filter class.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories

Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FILTER MANUFACTURERS

A. American Filtration Inc: www.americanfiltration.com/#sle.B. AAF International/American Air Filter: www.aafintl.com/#sle.C. Camfil Farr Company: www.camfilfarr.com/#sle.D. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

2.02 DISPOSABLE, EXTENDED AREA PANEL FILTERSA. Media: UL 900 Class 1, pleated, lofted, non-woven, reinforced cotton and synthetic fabric;

supported and bonded to welded wire grid by corrugated aluminum separators.1. Frame: Non-flammable.2. Nominal size and thickness: Per equipment manufacturer.

B. Rating, per ASHRAE Std 52.2:1. Weight arrestance: 85 percent.


HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES 23 4000 - 2

2. Initial resistance at 500 FPM face velocity: 0.20 inch WG.3. Recommended final resistance: 0.9 inch WG.

C. Filter media installed during construction: Minimum MERV 8 (or Class F5).D. Filter media installed prior to occupancy: Minimum MERV 13 (or Class F7).

2.03 FILTER GAGESA. Manufacturers:

1. Dwyer Instruments, Inc: www.dwyer-inst.com/#sle.2. H.O. Trerice Co: www.trerice.com/#sle.3. Weiss Instruments: www.weissinstruments.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Direct Reading Dial: 3-1/2 inch diameter diaphragm actuated dial in metal case, vent valves,black figures on white background, front recalibration adjustment, range 0-0.5 inch WG, 2percent of full scale accuracy.


A. Install air cleaning devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt, rubber, or neoprene gaskets.C. Install filter gage static pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gages on

outside of filter housing or filter plenum, in accessible position. Adjust and level.D. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace

temporary filters used during construction and testing, with clean set.E. Provide filter gages on filter banks, installed with separate static pressure tips upstream and

downstream of filters.END OF SECTION


BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, ANDSTACKS

23 5100 - 1

SECTION 23 5100BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS


A. Catagory IV appliance venting1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 23 52 16 - Condensing Boilers1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; 2015.B. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005.

1.04 DEFINITIONSA. Breeching: Vent Connector.B. Vent: That portion of a venting system designed to convey flue gases directly outdoors from a

vent connector or from an appliance when a vent connector is not used.C. Vent Connector: That part of a venting system that conducts the flue gases from the flue collar

of an appliance to a chimney or vent, and may include a draft control device.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data indicating factory built chimneys, including dimensional details of

components and flue caps, dimensions and weights, electrical characteristics and connectionrequirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate general construction, dimensions, weights, support and layout ofbreechings. Submit layout drawings indicating plan view and elevations where factory built unitsare used.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include installation instructions, and indicate assembly, supportdetails, and connection requirements.


specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to NFPA 54 for installation of natural gas burning appliances and equipment.B. Conform to applicable code for installation of oil burning appliances and equipment.


A. AMPCO by Hart & Cooley, Inc: www.ampcostacks.com.B. DuraVent: www.duravent.com/#sle.C. Metal-Fab, Inc: www.mtlfab.com.D. Selkirk Corporation; Model PS: www.selkirkcommercial.com/#sle.E. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

2.02 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTSA. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Conform to NFPA 54 for installation of natural gas burning appliances and equipment.2. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters

Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.



23 5100 - 2

2.03 FIELD FABRICATED BREECHINGSA. AL29-4C stainless steel for venting category IV appliances shall be:

1. Vent shall be constructed with an inner conduit constructed of AL29-4C® superferriticstainless steel with a minimum thickness that shall meet or exceed the requirements of UL1738.

2. Products furnished under this section shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 54 andNFPA 211, and shall comply with UL 1738, Standard for Venting Systems for Category II,III, and IV Gas-Burning Appliances, and all other applicable standards.

3. All inner wall conduit components shall be manufactured from AL29-4C®. The closuresystem shall be a Ring-and-Tab mechanical closure system that is integral to the system.

4. Joints to be sealed with factory supplied sealant. Joints shall be designed to minimizecollection of condensate in both horizontal and vertical runs. Joints shall not use screws orother lesser alloy fasteners that penetrate the inner conduit.

5. The outer wall casing shall be constructed of 430 stainless steel that shall not requireadditional surface preparation, such as painting, in order to withstand the outdoors or highhumidity environments.

6. Inner conduit and outer wall casing shall be constructed in a fashion which preventscross-alloy contamination and allows free movement between the two, allowing for varyingrates of expansion and contraction to occur.

7. System is to be sized in accordance with the appliance manufacturer's specifications.B. PVC for make up air to catagory IV appliances shall be:

1. PVC Schedule 40 pipe manufactured from a Type I, Grade I Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)compound with a Cell Classification of 12454 per ASTM D1784. The pipe shall bemanufactured in strict compliance to ASTM D1785 and D2665, consistently meetingand/or exceeding the Quality Assurance test requirements of these standards with regardto material, workmanship, burst pressure, flattening, and extrusion quality. The pipe shallbe manufactured in the USA, using domestic materials, by an ISO 9001 certifiedmanufacturer.

2. Joined with PVC solvent - IPS Weld-On 724.3. The plastic components, primers and glues of the vent system must be from a single

system manufacturer and not inter-mixed with other manufacturers vent system parts.4. Painted with a water based paint to protect the piping exposed to UV rays (outside).

C. PVC for venting and make up air of catagory IV appliances (when approved by boilermanufacturer at design temperatures) shall be:1. PVC Schedule 40 pipe manufactured from a Type I, Grade I Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)

compound with a Cell Classification of 12454 per ASTM D1784. The pipe shall bemanufactured in strict compliance to ASTM D1785 and D2665, consistently meetingand/or exceeding the Quality Assurance test requirements of these standards with regardto material, workmanship, burst pressure, flattening, and extrusion quality. The pipe shallbe manufactured in the USA, using domestic materials, by an ISO 9001 certifiedmanufacturer.

2. Joined with PVC solvent - IPS Weld-On 724.3. The plastic components, primers and glues of the vent system must be from a single

system manufacturer and not inter-mixed with other manufacturers vent system parts.4. Painted with a water based paint to protect the piping exposed to UV rays (outside).

D. Minimum Metal Thicknesses based on SMACNA (DCS):E. Provide adjustable self-actuating barometric draft dampers, where indicated on drawings, full

size of breeching.F. Provide cleanout doors of same gage as breeching where indicated on drawings.G. Reinforcing: Provide angle frames for rectangular breeching and flanged girth joints or angle

frames for round breeching in accordance with SMACNA (DCS), at following intervals:



23 5100 - 3


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install in accordance with NFPA 54.C. Install breechings with minimum of joints. Align accurately at connections, with internal surfaces

smooth.D. Support breechings from building structure, rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and

anchors to hold to shape and prevent buckling. Support vertical breechings, chimneys, andstacks at 12 foot spacing, to adjacent structural surfaces, or at floor penetrations. Refer toSMACNA (DCS) for equivalent duct support configuration and size.

E. Pitch breechings with positive slope up from fuel-fired equipment to chimney or stack.F. Level and plumb chimney and stacks.G. Clean breechings, chimneys, and stacks during installation, removing dust and debris.

3.02 SCHEDULESA. Breechings, Chimneys and Stacks.

1. Boiler: PVC or AL29-4C for venting of catagory IV appliances2. Unit Heater: AL29-4C for venting of catagory IV appliances (or as required by unit

manufacturer).3. Water Heater: PVC or AL29-4C for venting of catagory IV appliances.

END OF SECTION














23 5100 - 4






CONDENSING BOILERS 23 5216 - 1

SECTION 23 5216CONDENSING BOILERS

PART 1 - GENERAL1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to this Section, including General andSupplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections.

1.02 SUMMARYA. This Section includes packaged, factory-fabricated and -assembled, gas-fired, fire-tube

condensing Boilers, trim and accessories for generating hot water.1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.B. Section 23 2114 - Hydronic Specialties.C. Section 23 2214 - Steam and Condensate Heating Specialties.D. Section 23 5100 - Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks.E. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI Z21.13 - American National Standard for Gas-Fired Low-Pressure Steam and Hot Water

Boilers; 2012.B. ASME BPVC-IV - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV - Rules for Construction of

Heating Boilers; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013.C. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition

Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments andSupplements.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties and

accessories.1. Prior to flue vent installation, engineered calculations and drawings must be submitted to

Engineer to thoroughly demonstrate that size and configuration conform to recommendedsize, length and footprint for each submitted Boiler.

B. Efficiency Curves: At a minimum, submit efficiency curves for 100%, 50%, and 5% input firingrates at incoming water temperatures ranging from 60°F to 180°F. Test protocols shall conformto industry standards and shall be witnessed and reviewed by an independent, third-party group.

C. Shop Drawings: For Boilers, Boiler trim and accessories, include:1. Plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work2. Wiring Diagrams for power, signal and control wiring

D. Source Quality Control Test Reports: Reports shall be included in submittals.E. Field Quality Control Test Reports: Reports shall be included in submittals.F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Data to be included in Boiler emergency, operation and

maintenance manuals.G. Warranty: The complete heat exchanger assembly shall carry a ten (10) year limited warranty.H. Other Informational Submittals

1. The Boiler shall bear the ASME "H" stamp for 160 psi working pressure and shall beNational Board listed.



1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Boilers must be listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, andmarked for intended use.

B. I=B=R Performance Compliance: Condensing Boilers must be rated in accordance withapplicable federal testing methods and verified by AHRI as capable of achieving the energyefficiency and performance ratings as tested within prescribed tolerances.

C. ASME Compliance: Condensing Boilers must be constructed in accordance with ASME Boilerand Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV “Heating Boilers”.

D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to "Gas andOil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements."

E. DOE Compliance. Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Subpart B, Appendix N,"Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers."

F. UL Compliance. Boilers must be tested for compliance with UL 795, "Commercial-Industrial GasHeating Equipment." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction.

G. The BOILER shall operate at a minimum of 93% thermal efficiency at full fire, and shall operateup to 98% thermal efficiency with return water temperatures at 100°F or below. The BOILERshall be certified for indoor installation. The BOILER’s Thermal Efficiency shall be verifiedthrough third party testing by the Hydronics Institute Division of AHRI and listed in the AHRICertification Directory.

1.07 WARRANTYA. Standard Warranty: Boilers shall include manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair or replace components of Boilers that fail in materials or workmanship withinspecified warranty period.1. Warranty Period for Condensing Boilers

a. The pressure vessel/heat exchanger shall carry a 10-year from shipment,non-prorated, limited warranty against any failure due to condensate corrosion,thermal stress, mechanical defects or workmanship.

b. Manufacturer labeled control panels are conditionally warranted against failure for (2)two years from date of final acceptance.

c. All other components, with the exception of the igniter and flame detector, areconditionally guaranteed against any failure for 24 months from acceptance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Lockinvar KnightXL Series (KBN 400 - 800 MBH)B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 CONSTRUCTIONA. Heat Exchanger: The heat exchanger shall be a fully welded 316L stainless steel, water tube

heat exchanger. The Water Tube shall be welded to the tube sheets. The heat exchanger shallbe designed for a counter water flow. There shall be no banding material, bolts, gaskets or "O"rings in the heat exchanger construction. The condensate collection basin shall be constructedof welded 316L stainless steel.

B. Pressure Vessel: The Boiler water pressure drop shall not exceed than 2.4 psi at 180 gpm. TheBoiler water connections shall be flanged 150-pound, ANSI rated. The pressure vessel shall beconstructed of SA53 carbon steel, with a 0.25-inch thick wall and 0.50-inch thick upper head.Inspection openings in the pressure vessel shall be in accordance with ASME Section IVpressure vessel code. The Boiler shall be designed so that the thermal efficiency increases asthe Boiler firing rate decreases.



C. The Boiler shall be constructed with a heavy gauge steel jacket assembly, primed andpre-painted on both sides. The combustion chamber shall be sealed and completely enclosed,independent of the outer jacket assembly, so that integrity of the outer jacket does not affect aproper seal. Two burner/flame observation ports shall be provided. The single burner shall be apremix design with an upper and a lower chamber supplied by individual combustion systemsand constructed of high temperature stainless steel with a woven Fecralloy outer covering toprovide modulating firing rates. The Boiler shall be supplied with two gas valves designed withnegative pressure regulation and be equipped with a pulse width modulation blower system, toprecisely control the fuel/air mixture to provide modulating Boiler firing rates for maximumefficiency. The Boiler shall operate in a safe condition with gas supply pressures as low as 4inches of water column. The burner flame shall be ignited by direct spark ignition with flamemonitoring via a flame sensor.

D. The Boiler shall utilize a 24 VAC control circuit and components. The control system shall havea display for Boiler set-up, Boiler status, and Boiler diagnostics. All components shall be easilyaccessed and serviceable from the front and top of the jacket. The Boiler shall be equipped witha temperature/pressure gauge; high limit temperature control with manual reset; ASME certifiedpressure relief valve set for 50 psi (standard); outlet water temperature sensor (dual thermistor);return water temperature sensor; outdoor air sensor, flue temperature sensor (dual thermistor);high and low gas pressure switches, low water cut off with manual reset, blocked drain switchand a condensate trap for the heat exchanger condensate drain.

E. Modulating Air/Fuel Valve and Burner: The Boiler burner shall be capable of a 25 to 1 turndownratio of the firing rate without loss of combustion efficiency or staging of gas valves. The burnershall produce less than 20 ppm of NOx corrected to 3% excess oxygen.

F. Ignition: Ignition shall be via regulated staged spark ignition with 100 percent main-valve shutoffand electronic flame supervision.

2.03 CONTROLSA. The Boiler shall be equiped with an 8” liquid crystal touch screen display, outdoor air reset,

pump delay with freeze protection, pump exercise, ramp delay, and PC port connection. Asecondary control that is field mounted outside or inside the appliance is not acceptable. TheBoiler shall have alarm contacts for any failure, runtime contacts and data logging of runtime atgiven modulation rates, ignition attempts and ignition failures. The Boiler shall have a built-in“Cascade” to sequence and rotate while maintaining modulation of up to eight Boilers ofdifferent Btu inputs without utilization of an external controller. The internal “Cascade” functionshall be capable of lead-lag, efficiency optimization, front-end loading, and rotation of lead Boilerevery 24 hours. The control must be equipped with standard Modbus communication protocolwith a minimum 55 readable points. The Boiler shall have a gateway device which will allowintegration with BacNet (MSTP) protocols.

B. This application shall utilize BacNet MSTP to communicate with the BAS system.C. The Boiler controler shall increase fan speed to boost flame signal when a weak flame signal is

detected during normal operation.D. The Boiler shall be equipped with two terminal strips for electrical connection. A low voltage

connection board with 30 data points for safety and operating controls, i.e., Alarm Contacts,Runtime Contacts, Tank Thermostat, System Supply Sensor, Outdoor Sensor, Tank Sensor,Modbus Building Management System signal and Cascade control circuit. A high voltageterminal strip shall be provided for Supply voltage. Supply voltage shall be 120 volt / 60 hertz /single phase on models up to 3,500,000 Btu’s/Hr. The high voltage terminal strip plus integralrelays are provided for independent pump control of the System pump, the Boiler pump and theDomestic Hot Water pump.

2.04 ELECTRICAL POWERA. Controllers, Electrical Devices and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in

Division 26 sections.



B. Single-Point Field Power Connection: Factory-installed and factory-wired switches, motorcontrollers, transformers and other electrical devices shall provide a single-point field powerconnection to the Boiler.

C. Electrical Characteristics:1. Voltage: 120 V2. Phase: Single3. Frequency: 60 Hz4. Full-Load Current 16 Amps (Maximum)

2.05 VENTINGA. Direct Vent system with vertical roof top termination of both the exhaust vent and combustion

air. The flue shall be Category IV approved Stainless Steel sealed vent material terminating atthe rooftop with the manufacturer’s specified vent termination. A separate pipe shall supplycombustion air directly to the boiler from the outside. The air inlet pipe must be sealed and maybe other materials listed in the Installation manual. The boiler’s total combined air intake lengthshall not exceed 100 equivalent feet. The boiler’s total combined exhaust venting length shallnot exceed 100 equivalent feet. The air inlet must terminate on the rooftop with the exhaust.

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROLA. Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide,

oxides of nitrogen emissions and carbon monoxide in flue gas, and to achieve combustionefficiency. Perform hydrostatic testing.

B. Test and inspect factory-assembled Boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler andPressure Vessel Code.1. If Boilers are not factory assembled and fire-tested, the local vendor is responsible for all

field assembly and testing.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Before Boiler installation, examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-bolt sizesand locations. Examine piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes andother conditions affecting Boiler performance, maintenance and operations.1. Final Boiler locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations

before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.B. Examine mechanical spaces for suitable conditions where Boilers will be installed.C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 BOILER INSTALLATIONA. Install Boilers level on concrete bases. Concrete materials and installation requirements are

specified in Division 03, Section 03 30 00 Cast in Place Concrete.B. Install gas-fired Boilers according to NFPA 54.C. Assemble and install Boiler trim.D. Install electrical devices furnished with Boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.E. Install control wiring to field-mounted electrical devices.F. Install with manufacturers supplied condensate neutralization kit per manufactuers instructions.

Slope to nearest floor drain.3.03 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 sections. Drawings indicategeneral arrangement of piping, fittings and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to Boiler to permit service and maintenance.C. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least full

size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required.



D. Connect gas piping to Boiler gas-train inlet with unions. Piping shall be at least full size of gastrain connection. Provide a reducer if required.

E. Connect hot-water piping to supply and return Boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union orflange at each connection.

F. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.G. Boiler Venting

1. Install flue venting kit and combustion-air intake.2. Connect venting full size to Boiler connections. Comply with requirements in Division 23,

Section 23 51 31 "Breechings, Chimneys and Stacks."H. Ground equipment according to Division 26, Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for

Electrical Systems."I. Connect wiring according to Division 26, Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables."3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies and equipment installations, including connections, andto assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections1. Installation and Startup Test: Perform installation and startup checks according to

manufacturer's written instructions.2. Leak Test: Perform hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.3. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust

air-fuel ratio and combustion.4. Controls and Safeties: Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment.a. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety set points

of fuel supply, water level and water temperature.b. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning parts and retest as specified above.D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 2 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to twovisits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

E. Performance Tests1. The Boiler manufacturer is expected to provide partial load thermal efficiency curves.

These thermal efficiency curves must include at least three separate curves at variousBTU input levels. If these curves are not available, it is the responsibility of the Boilermanufacturer to complete the following performance tests:a. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect component assemblies

and equipment installations, including connections, and to conduct performancetesting.

b. Boilers shall comply with performance requirements indicated, as determined by fieldperformance tests. Adjust, modify, or replace equipment to comply.

c. Repeat tests until results comply with requirements indicated.d. Provide analysis equipment required to determine performance.e. Provide temporary equipment and system modifications necessary to dissipate the

heat produced during tests if building systems are not adequate.f. Notify Project Manager, Commissioner, and Engineer in advance of test dates.g. Document test results in a report and submit to Project Manager and Engineer.

F. Training: Train State of Delaware OMB - Division of Facilities Management's personnel onoperation and maintenance of system.



1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented withadditional training materials as required.

2. Provide minimum of one day of training.3. Instructor: Manufacturer's training personnel.4. Location: At project site.

END OF SECTION


PACKAGED OUTDOORCENTRAL-STATIONAIR-HANDLING UNITS

23 7413 - 1

SECTION 23 7413PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 THIS SECTION INCLUDES UNITS WITH INTEGRAL HEATING AND COOLING FOR OUTDOOR

INSTALLATION. INTEGRAL HEAT SOURCE SHALL BE NATURAL GAS INDIRECT GAS-FIREDFURNACE. INTEGRAL COOLING SOURCE SHALL BE PACKAGED DX WITH HOT GASREHEAT COIL FOR SINGLE ZONE/CONSTANT VOLUME UNITS. AIRFLOW ARRANGEMENTSHALL BE OUTDOOR AIR WITH RETURN AIR RECIRCULATION.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDESA. Packaged roof top unit.B. Maintenance service.

1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.B. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.C. Section 23 09 69 - Variable Frequency Controllers.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AHRI 210/240 - Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source

Heat Pump Equipment; 2008.B. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2015.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide capacity and dimensions of manufactured products and assemblies

required for this project. Indicate electrical service with electrical characteristics and connectionrequirements, duct connections, clearance space/service requirements.

C. Sustainable Design Documentation: Submit manufacturer's product data on refrigerant used,showing compliance with specified requirements.

D. Shop Drawings: Indicate capacity and dimensions of manufactured products and assembliesrequired for this project. Indicate electrical service with electrical characteristics and connectionrequirements, and duct connections.

E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate assembly, support details, connection requirements, andinclude start-up instructions.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operatinginstructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing.

G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in DelawareSolid Waste Authority 's name and registered with manufacturer.

H. Complete fan performance curves for Supply Air.I. Sound performance data for Supply Air.J. Performance ratings for all DX coils.K. Weight of each installed unit.L. Microprocessor Controller (DDC) specifications to include available options and operating

protocols. Include complete data on all factory-supplied input devices. Equipment to becontrolled via a building automation system.

M. AHRI Certified coil performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated. Ratingsshall be in accordance with Standard 410.



23 7413 - 2

1.06 LEED SUBMITTALSA. EQ Credit 3: Construction Indoor Air Quality Management

1. For filter media installed during construction and prior to occupancy, documentationindicating MERV rating or filter class.


specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.B. For the actual fabrication, installations, and testing of work under this section, use only

thoroughly trained and experienced workers completely familiar with the items required and withthe manufacturer's current recommended methods of installation.

C. Certifications1. Blowers shall be AMCA Certified for airflow.2. Entire unit shall be ETL Certified per U.L. 1995 and bear an ETL sticker.3. Coils shall be Recognized Components for ANSI/UL 1995, CAN / CSA C22.2 No 236.05.

DX.4. Indirect gas-fired furnace shall be ETL certified as a component of the unit.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect units from physical damage by storing off site until roof mounting curbs are in place,

ready for immediate installation of units.1.09 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of all building penetrations required for installation of each unit andassociated plumbing and electrical systems.

B. Coordinate location of water system fittings to ensure correct positioning for connection to thegas coil and condensate drain pipe.

1.10 WARRANTYA. See Section 00 1720 - Project Record Documents, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide a five year warranty to include coverage for refrigeration compressors.


A. Valent Air, www.valent.com (Basis of Design)B. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITSA. Unit shall be fully assembled at the factory and consist of an insulated metal cabinet, downturn

outdoor air intake hood with 2” aluminum mesh filter assembly on outside air intake, evaporatorcoil, condensate drain pan, hot gas reheat coil for single zone & constant volume units, indirectgas furnace, packaged DX system, phase and brownout protection, motorized dampers,motorized recirculating damper, sensors, curb assembly, filter assembly for intake air, MERV 13filter assembly for supply air, supply air blower assembly and an electrical control center. Allspecified components and internal accessories factory installed are tested and prepared forsingle-point high voltage connection.

2.03 CABINETA. Materials: Formed, 2 inch double wall closed cell foam insulated metal panels and 2” double

wall closed cell foam insulated metal door construction, fabricated to permit access to internalcomponents for maintenance.1. Outside casing: 18 gauge, galvanized (G90) steel meeting ASTM A653 for components

that do not receive a painted finish. Unit’s exterior shall be supplied from the manufacturerusing G60 galvaneal steel with a baked enamel finish. Color to be selected by architectduring construction.



23 7413 - 3

2. Internal assemblies: 22 gauge, galvanized (G90) steel except for motor supports whichshall be minimum14 gauge galvanized (G90) steel.

B. Cabinet Insulation: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B and erosion requirements of UL 181.1. Materials: Rigid urethane foam

a. Thickness: 2 inch (50.8 mm)1) Thermal Resistance: R132) Meets UL94HF-1 flame requirements3) Location and application: Full coverage of entire exterior to include walls, roof of

unit, unit base and doorsC. Access panels / doors: Unit shall be equipped with insulated, hinged doors or removable access

panels to provide easy access to all major components. Doors and access panels shall befabricated of 22 gauge galvanized G90 steel or painted galvannealed steel with 2 inch closedcell foam insulation.

D. Supply Air blower assemblies: Blower assembly shall consist of an electric motor direct-drivefan(s). Assembly shall be mounted on heavy gauge galvanized steel rails and further mountedon 1.125 inch thick neoprene vibration isolators. Blower motor(s) shall be capable of continuousspeed modulation and controlled by a VFD.

E. Evaporator Coil: Evaporator coil shall be AHRI Certified and shall be (silver) soldered or brazedinto the compressed refrigerant system. Coil shall be constructed of copper tubing, permanentlybonded to aluminum fins and enclosed in a stainless steel frame. If two compressors are usedas components of the unit, then the evaporator coil shall be of “interlaced” configuration,permitting independent operation of either compressor without conflict with the othercompressor. The evaporator and condenser coils are coated with ElectroFin coil coating.

F. Control panel / connections: Rooftop Ventilator units shall have an electrical control centerwhere all high and low voltage connections are made. Control center shall be constructed topermit single-point high voltage power supply connections. RTU shall be equipped with a UnitDisconnect Switch.

G. Condensate drain pan: Drain Pan shall be an integral part of the unit whenever a cooling optionis included. Pan shall be formed of welded austenitic stainless steel sheet material and providedwith a drain connection at the front (access side) for connection to a P trap. Drain pan shall besloped in two directions to provide positive draining and drain connector shall be sealed atpenetration through cabinet wall.

H. Reheat Coil with factory installed modulating hot gas reheat valve. This coil is coated withElectroFin coil coating. Hot gas reheat coil shall be provide on single zone and constant volumeunits only. Variable volume units shall not have a hot gas reheat coil.

I. Indirect gas furnace:1. Shall be ETL Certified as a component of the unit.2. Shall have an integral combustion gas blower.3. Shall be ETL Certified for installation downstream of a cooling coil.4. Shall have fault sensors to provide fault conditions to optional digital controller or building

controls.5. Shall have 4-pass tubular heat exchangers, constructed of type 409 stainless steel. Heat

exchanger tubes shall be installed on the vest. Heat exchanger tubes shall be supportedand also permit expansion and contraction of the tubes].

6. Heat exchanger shall have a 10 year extended warranty.7. Furnace control shall be 16:1 Modulating.8. Shall be encased in a weather-tight metal housing with intake air vents. Large, metal door

shall provide easy access to the enclosed vest plate, control circuitry, gas train, burnerassembly, and exhaust blower.

9. Shall have solid state controls permitting stand-alone operation or control by buildingcontrollers.



23 7413 - 4

J. Packaged DX System: Unit shall have an integral compressor(s) and evaporator coil locatedwithin the weather-tight unit housing. The evaporator and condenser coils are coated withElectroFin coil coating. Condenser coils and appurtenant condenser fan assemblies shall befactory installed as integral subassemblies of the unit and mounted on the exterior of the unit.Unit condenser fans shall feature swept owlet blade design resulting in reduced sound levels.Condenser fan motors shall be three phase, external rotor, type 56 frame, open air over andshaft up. Each condenser fan motor shall have a vented frame, rated for continuous duty and beequipped with an automatic reset thermal protector. Lead condenser fan will have anelectronically commutated (EC) motor that will modulate to maintain a head pressure set point.Motors shall be UL Recognized and CSA Certified. The refrigerant compressor(s) shall bedigital hermetic scroll-type for modulation and shall be equipped with liquid line filter drier,thermostatic expansion valves TXV(s), manual reset high pressure and low pressure cutoutsand all appurtenant sensors, service ports and safety devices. Compressed refrigerant systemshall be fully charged with R-410A refrigerant. Each non-inverter scroll compressor shall befactory-equipped with an electric crankcase heater to boil off liquid refrigerant from the oil.

K. Packaged DX Control and Diagnostics: The Packaged DX system shall be controlled by anonboard digital controller (DDC) that indicates both owner-supplied settings and fault conditionsthat may occur. The DDC shall be programmed to indicate the following faults:1. Global alarm condition (active when there is at least one alarm)2. Supply Air Proving alarm3. Dirty Filter alarm4. Compressor Trip alarm5. Compressor Locked Out alarm6. Supply Air Temperature Low Limit alarm

a. Sensor #1 Out of Range (outside air temperature)b. Sensor #2 Out of Range (supply air temperature)c. Sensor #3 Out of Range (cold coil leaving air temperature)

L. Phase and brownout protection: RTU shall have a factory-installed phase monitor to detectelectric supply phase loss and voltage brown-out conditions. Upon detection of a fault, themonitor shall disconnect supply voltage to all motors.

M. Motorized Outdoor Air & Return Air dampers: Damper shall be of insulated low leakage AMCAClass 1A certified construction. Leakage rate shall not exceed 3 CFM/ft2 @ 1 in. wg. and shallbe factory installed.

N. AMCA Class 1A motorized recirculating air damper designed to permit 100% maximumrecirculation of return air shall be factory installed.

O. Sensors are considered to be part of various operational modes or device controllers and are tobe factory supplied and installed.

P. Curb Assembly: A curb assembly made of 14 gauge galvanized steel shall be provided by thefactory for assembly and installation as part of this division. The curb assembly shall provideperimeter support of the entire unit and shall have duct adapter(s) for supply air and return air.Curb assembly shall enclose the underside of the unit and shall be sized to fit into a recess inthe bottom of the unit. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with roofing contractor toensure curb unit is properly flashed to provide protection against weather/moisture penetration.Contractor shall provide and install appropriate insulation for the curb assembly.

Q. Hail guards: Protects the condensing unit from damage due to extreme weather conditions suchas hail and flying debris.

R. 24V/120V Smoke detector - Duct smoke detector is shipped loose for field mounting and wiring. One smoke detector shall be for the supply, and on shall be for the return. The air duct smokedetector housing shall be UL listed per UL 268A specifically for use in air handling systems. Theair duct smoke detector housing shall be suitable for mounting indoors. The detector shalloperate at air velocities of 100 feet per minute to 4000 feet per minute (0.5 to 20.32meters/second). The power supply voltage shall be 20-29 VDC, 24 VAC 50-60 Hz, and 120VAC 50-60 Hz. The detector shall consist of an alarm initiation contact & two DPDT auxiliary



23 7413 - 5

contact closures. Coordinate with fire alarm contractor for installation, and connection to firealarm system.

2.04 BLOWERA. Blower section construction Supply Air: direct drive motor(s) and blower(s) shall be assembled

on a 14 gauge galvanized steel platform and shall be equipped with 1.125 inch thick neoprenevibration isolation devices.

B. Blower assemblies: Shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuousoperation at maximum rated fan speed and horsepower.

C. Fan: Direct drive, airfoil plenum fan with painted steel wheels statically and dynamicallybalanced and AMCA certified for air and sound performance.

D. Blower section motor source quality control: Blower performance shall be factory tested for flowrate, pressure, power, air density, rotation speed and efficiency. Ratings are to be established inaccordance with AMCA 210, “Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.”

2.05 MOTORA. Blower motors greater than ¾ horsepower shall be NEMA Premium unless otherwise indicated.

NEMA Premium is defined as greater efficiency then compliance with EPAct minimumenergy-efficiency standards for single speed ODP and TE enclosures is not acceptable. Motorsshall be heavy-duty, permanently lubricated type to match the fan load and furnished at thespecified voltage, phase and enclosure.

2.06 CONTROLSA. This unit shall be controlled by a building automation system. Provide unit with

refrigeration/heating safety controller and terminal strip for controls contractor to land wires. Unit shall control refrigeration and heating safeties, etc. BAS shall control unit and writesetpoints (air temp, humidity, etc) to refrigeration/heating cycle.

B. RTU supply fan shall be configured for BAS control of single zone VAV and modulating fromduct differential pressure for variable air volume system.

C. Outside Air / Return Air damper control shall be modulating for BAS control.D. Dirty filter sensor shall be factory-installed.E. Operating protocol: The unit shall be factory-programmed for BACnet protocol. Coordinate with

controls contractor for final selection.F. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) unit shall have factory installed variable frequency drive for

modulation of the supply air blower assembly. Refer to specification section 23 09 69 VariableFrequency Drive for manufacturers and requirements.

G. Airflow monitoring required in the Outdoor & Supply Air.H. Embedded web page with complete web user interface to allow full remote control and

monitoring of unit.I. Alarm Recording: Controller shall store all alarm events for download.J. Alarm Operating Snapshot: Controller shall store operating inputs and outputs at time of alarm.

2.07 FILTERSA. A. Unit shall have supply final air filter shall be of type MERV 13 disposable pleated type, and

outdoor air intake hood with 2” aluminum mesh filter.B. For LEED EQ Credit 3: Construction Indoor Air Quality Management

1. Filter media installed during construction: Minimum MERV 8 (or Class F5).2. Filter media installed prior to occupancy: Minimum MERV 13 (or Class F7).


A. Verify that proper power supply is available.



23 7413 - 6

B. Prior to start of installation, examine area and conditions to verify correct location forcompliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting unit performance. See unitIOM.

C. Examine roughing-in of plumbing, electrical and HVAC services to verify actual location andcompliance with unit requirements. See unit IOM.

D. Proceed with installation only after all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.3.03 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Prepare and start equipment. Adjust for proper operation.B. Provide factory start up, and coordination with commissioning authority. Clean entire unit, comb

coil fins as necessary, and install clean filters. Measure and record electrical values for voltageand amperage.

C. Provide all start up paperwork/check list, and complete to submit.D. For EQ Credit 3: Construction Indoor Air Quality Management. Filter media installed prior to

occupancy: Minimum MERV 13 (or Class F7).3.04 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide service and maintenance of packaged roof top units for 2 years year from Date ofSubstantial Completion.

B. Provide routine maintenance service with a two month interval as maximum time periodbetween calls.

C. Include maintenance items as outlined in manufacturer's operating and maintenance data,including minimum of six filter replacements, minimum of one fan belt replacement, andcontrols check-out, adjustments, and recalibration.

D. After each service call, submit copy of service call work order or report that includes descriptionof work performed.

END OF SECTION


TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFERUNITS

23 8101 - 1

SECTION 23 8101TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS


A. Unit heaters.B. Cabinet unit heaters.C. Electric heaters.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 23 0513 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment.B. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.

Installation of room thermostats. Electrical supply to units.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 00 1300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide typical catalog of information including arrangements.C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions and recommendations.D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturers descriptive literature, operating

instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listings.E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been completed in

Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's name and registered with manufacturer.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified inthis section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters LaboratoriesInc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.05 WARRANTYA. See Section 00 1720 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 UNIT HEATERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Slant/Fin Corporation: www.slantfin.com/#sle.2. Sterling Hydronics/Mestek Technology, Inc: www.sterlingheat.com/#sle.3. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Coils: Seamless copper tubing, silver brazed to steel headers, and with evenly spacedaluminum fins mechanically bonded to tubing.

C. Casing: 0.0478 inch steel with threaded pipe connections for hanger rods.D. Finish: Factory applied baked primer coat.E. Fan: Direct drive propeller type, statically and dynamically balanced, with fan guard; horizontal

models with permanently lubricated sleeve bearings; vertical models with grease lubricated ballbearings.

F. Air Outlet: Adjustable pattern diffuser on projection models and two way louvers on horizontalthrow models.

G. Motor: Permanently lubricated sleeve bearings on horizontal models, grease lubricated ballbearings on vertical models. Refer to Section 23 0513.

H. Control: Local disconnect switch.I. Provide thermostat compatibel with bacnet building automation system.



23 8101 - 2

2.02 CABINET UNIT HEATERSA. Manufacturers:

1. Slant/Fin Corporation: www.slantfin.com/#sle.2. Sterling Hydronics/Mestek Technology, Inc: www.sterlingheat.com/#sle.3. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Coils: Evenly spaced aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes, designed for 100 psiand 220 degrees F.

C. Cabinet: 0.0598 inch steel with exposed corners and edges rounded, easily removed panels,glass fiber insulation and integral air outlet.

D. Finish: Factory applied baked enamel of color on visible surfaces of enclosure or cabinet. Color selected by architect.

E. Fans: Centrifugal forward-curved double-width wheels, statically and dynamically balanced,direct driven.

F. Motor: Tap wound multiple speed permanent split capacitor with sleeve bearings, resilientlymounted.

G. Control: Multiple speed switch, factory wired, located in cabinet.H. Filter: Easily removed 1 inch thick glass fiber throw-away type, located to filter air before coil.I. Provide intgral thermostat compatable with bacnet building automation system.

2.03 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERSA. Manufacturers:

1. INDEECO (Industrial Engineering and Equipment Company): www.indeeco.com.2. Marley Engineered Products: www.marleymep.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Assembly: UL listed and labelled assembly with terminal box and cover, and built-in controls.C. Heating Elements: Exposed helical coil of nickel-chrome resistance wire with refractory ceramic

support bushings.D. Cabinet: 0.0478 inch steel with easily removed front panel with integral air outlet and inlet

grilles.E. Element Hangers: Quiet operating, ball bearing cradle type providing unrestricted longitudinal

movement, on enclosure brackets.F. Fan: Direct drive propeller type, statically and dynamically balanced, with fan guard.G. Motor: Permanently lubricated, sleeve bearings for horizontal models, ball bearings for vertical

models.H. Control: Separate fan speed switch and thermostat heat selector switch, factory wired, with

switches built-in behind cover. Provide thermal overload.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install equipment exposed to finished areas after walls and ceiling are finished and painted. Do

not damage equipment or finishes.C. Unit Heaters: Hang from building structure, with pipe hangers anchored to building, not from

piping. Mount as high as possible to maintain greatest headroom unless otherwise indicated.D. Cabinet Unit Heaters: Install as indicated. Coordinate to assure correct recess size for

recessed units.E. Install electric heating equipment including devices furnished by manufacturer but not

factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal. Install electricalwiring in accordance with manufacturer's submittals and Section 26 2717.



23 8101 - 3

3.02 CLEANINGA. After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of units. Vacuum

clean coils and inside of cabinets.B. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish materials

furnished by manufacturer.3.03 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. See Section 00 1720 - Project Record Documents, for closeout submittals.B. Demonstrate proper operation of equipment to Delaware Solid Waste Authority's designated

representative.C. Demonstration: Demonstrate operation of system to Delaware Solid Waste Authority's

personnel.1. Briefly describe function, operation, and maintenance of each component.2. Use operation and maintenance data as reference during demonstration.

D. Training: Train Delaware Solid Waste Authority's personnel on operation and maintenance ofsystem.1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with

additional training materials as required.2. Provide minimum of one day of training.3. Instructor: Manufacturer's training personnel.4. Location: At project site.



23 8101 - 4


SMALL SPLIT-SYSTEMHEATING AND COOLING

23 8127 - 1

SECTION 23 8127SMALL SPLIT-SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING


A. Air-source heat pumps.B. Indoor ductless fan & coil units.C. Controls.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.B. Section 23 0913 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC: Thermostats, humidistats,

time clocks.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AHRI 210/240 - Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-SourceHeat Pump Equipment; 2008.

B. AHRI 520 - Performance Rating of Positive Displacement Condensing Units; 2004.C. ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; 2013.D. ASHRAE Std 23.1 - Methods of Testing for Rating the Performance of Positive Displacement

Refrigerant Compressors and Condensing Units that Operate at Subcritical Temperatures of theRefrigerant; 2010.

E. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; 2015.F. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2015.G. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems;

2015.H. NFPA 211 - Guide for Smoke and Heat Venting; 2013, Including All Amendments.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 00 1300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical nameplate data, and

wiring diagrams.C. Design Data: Indicate refrigerant pipe sizing.D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate rigging, assembly, and installation instructions.E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating

instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing.F. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Delaware

Solid Waste Authority s name and registered with manufacturer.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE


B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section withminimum 5 years of experience and approved by manufacturer.

1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 00 1720 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.


A. LG Electronics: www.lg.com



23 8127 - 2

B. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.2.02 SYSTEM DESIGN

A. Split-System Heating and Cooling Units: Self-contained, packaged, matchedfactory-engineered and assembled, pre-wired indoor and outdoor units; UL listed. 1. Heating and Cooling: Air-source electric heat pump located in outdoor unit with

evaporator; auxiliary electric heat.2. Provide refrigerant lines internal to units and between indoor and outdoor units, factory

cleaned, dried, pressurized and sealed, with insulated suction line.2.03 INDOOR UNITS FOR DUCTLESS SYSTEMS

A. Indoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet,supply fan, evaporator coil, and controls; wired for single power connection with controltransformer.1. Location: Wall or ceiling.2. Cabinet: Galvanized steel.

a. Finish: White.3. Fan: Line-flow fan direct driven by a single motor.4. Filter return air with washable, antioxidant pre-filter and a pleated anti-allergy enzyme filter.5. Ceiling mounted shall have built in condensate pump.

B. Evaporator Coils: Copper tube aluminum fin assembly, galvanized or polymer drain pan slopedin all directions to drain, drain connection, refrigerant piping connections, restricted distributor orthermostatic expansion valve.1. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 and UL listed.2. Manufacturer: System manufacturer.

2.04 OUTDOOR UNITSA. Outdoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, with modulating

compressor and condenser.1. Refrigerant: R-410A.2. Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access

doors with safety interlock switches, glass fiber insulation with reflective liner.3. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 with testing in accordance

with ASHRAE Std 23 and UL listed.B. Air Cooled Condenser: ARI 520; Aluminum fin and copper tube coil, with direct drive axial

propeller fan resiliently mounted, galvanized fan guard.C. Accessories: Filter drier, high pressure switch (manual reset), low pressure switch (automatic

reset), service valves and gage ports, thermometer well (in liquid line). 1. Provide thermostatic expansion valves.2. Provide heat pump reversing valves.

D. Operating Controls:1. Control by room thermostat to maintain room temperature setting. Provide unit

manufacturer thermostat with bacnet interface. Provide gateway if needed for connectionto BAS. Thermostat shall have 7 day programmable abilities, and auto switching fromheating to cooling.

2. Low ambient kit: Provide full cooling and heating down to 0 degrees F.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrates are ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated on shopdrawings.

B. Verify that proper power supply is available and in correct location.



23 8127 - 3

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of local authorities

having jurisdiction.B. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.C. Install gas fired furnaces in accordance with NFPA 54.D. Provide vent connections in accordance with NFPA 211.E. Install refrigeration systems in accordance with ASHRAE Std 15.

END OF SECTION



23 8127 - 4


LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICALPOWER CONDUCTORS ANDCABLES

26 0519 - 1

SECTION 26 0519LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


A. Single conductor building wire.B. Metal-clad cable.C. Wire and cable for 600 volts and less.D. Wiring connectors.E. Electrical tape.F. Wire pulling lubricant.G. Cable ties.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 8413 - Penetration Firestopping.B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding: Additional requirements for grounding conductors

and grounding connectors.C. Section 26 0536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems: Additional installation requirements for

cables installed in cable tray systems.D. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.E. Section 26 2100 - Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance: Additional requirements for

electrical service conductors.F. Section 28 4600 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm system conductors and cables.G. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013.B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,

Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011.C. ASTM D4388 - Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and Electrically

Insulating Rubber Tapes; 2013.D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.E. NECA 120 - Standard for Installing Armored Cable (AC) and Metal-Clad Cable (MC); 2012.F. NEMA WC 70 - Nonshielded Power Cable 2000 V or Less for the Distribution of Electrical

Energy; 2009.G. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

2013.H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.I. UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.J. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.K. UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.L. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.M. UL 1569 - Metal-Clad Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.



26 0519 - 2

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordination:

1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under othersections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductorsizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminationssuitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtaindirection before proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors

and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, andavailable sizes, configurations, and stranding.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements. Record actualrouting for underground circuits.

D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's use inmaintenance of project.1. See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution

requirements.C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a

Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 andproduct listing.

B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated,permitted, or required.

C. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted.D. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable is not permitted.E. Service entrance cable is not permitted.F. Armored cable is not permitted.G. Metal-clad cable is not permitted.

1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:a. Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction boxes

to luminaires.1) Maximum Length: 6 feet.

b. Where concealed in hollow stud walls, above accessible ceilings, and under raisedfloors for branch circuits up to 20 A.1) Exception: Provide single conductor building wire in raceway for circuit homerun

from first outlet to panelboard.2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used:



26 0519 - 3

a. Unless approved by Delaware Solid Waste Authority .b. Where not approved for use by the authority having jurisdiction.c. Where exposed to view.d. Where exposed to damage.e. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations.

H. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway or metal clad cable.I. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.J. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire in raceway or metal clad cable.K. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.L. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.

2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE MANUFACTURERSA. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com.B. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com.C. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com.

2.03 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTSA. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.C. Provide products with insulation and temperature ratings as required per equipment installation

instructions where such ratings differ from those indicated herein.D. Provide new conductors and cables manufactured not more than one year prior to installation.E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,

connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.F. Comply with NEMA WC 70.G. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.H. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.I. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 0526.J. Conductors and Cables Installed Where Exposed to Direct Rays of Sun: Listed and labeled as

sunlight resistant.K. Conductors and Cables Installed Exposed in Spaces Used for Environmental Air (only where

specifically permitted): Plenum rated, listed and labeled as suitable for use in return airplenums.

L. Conductor Material:1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project.

Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper

conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B787M unless otherwiseindicated.

M. Minimum Conductor Size:1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.

a. Exceptions: Size homerun branch circuit conductors from power source to first outletin accordance with the following maximum circuit limits, using center of load servedas basis for computing circuit lengths:1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop.3) 20 A, 277 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.

2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG.



26 0519 - 4

N. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicableminimum size requirements specified.

O. Conductor Color Coding:1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having

jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.

a. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black insulation color coded using vinylcolor coding electrical tape.

3. Color Code:a. 480Y/277 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:

1) Phase A: Brown.2) Phase B: Orange.3) Phase C: Yellow.4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray.

b. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B: Red.3) Phase C: Blue.4) Neutral/Grounded: White.

c. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.d. Travelers for 3-Way and 4-Way Switching: Pink.e. For control circuits, comply with manufacturer's recommended color code.

2.04 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIREA. Manufacturers:

1. Copper Building Wire:a. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com/#sle.b. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle.c. General Cable Technologies Corporation: www.generalcable.com/#sle.d. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.

B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.C. Conductor Stranding:

1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

2. Control Circuits: Stranded.D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.E. Insulation:

1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN.F. Conductor: Copper.G. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.H. Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THHN/THWN unless otherwise indicated on plans.

2.05 METAL-CLAD CABLEA. Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems Inc: www.afcweb.com/#sle.2. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle.3. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569, and listedfor use in classified firestop systems to be used.

C. Conductor Stranding:



26 0519 - 5

1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.E. Insulation: Type THHN/THWN.F. Provide dedicated neutral conductor for each phase conductor where indicated or required.G. Grounding: Full-size integral green insulated copper equipment grounding conductor.H. Armor: Aluminum or steel, interlocked tape.I. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC.J. Conductor: Copper.K. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.L. Insulation Temperature Rating: 75 degrees C.M. Insulation Material: Thermoplastic.N. Armor Material: Steel.O. Armor Design: Interlocked metal tape.

2.06 WIRING CONNECTORSA. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the

conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C asapplicable.

B. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: Comply with Section 26 0526.C. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:

1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors.2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression

connectors. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape or insulatewith heat shrink tubing to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.

D. Wiring Connectors for Non-Motor Terminations:1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations

designed for terminal lugs.2. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with

mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified.3. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can

accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not lessthan required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device.

4. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compressionconnectors where connectors are required.

5. Stranded Conductors Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Use crimped terminals for connectionsto terminal screws.

6. Conductors for Control Circuits: Use crimped terminals for all connections.E. Wiring Connectors for Motor Terminations: Use motor lead disconnects with slip-on insulating

boot, pin and silicone gel. Boot sealant shall be used with all insulating boots.F. Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for use with

conductors without stripping insulation.G. Do not use push-in wire connectors as a substitute for twist-on insulated spring connectors.H. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications

and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed ascomplying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations.1. Manufacturers:

a. 3M: www.3m.com/#sle.b. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com/#sle.



26 0519 - 6

c. NSI Industries LLC: www.nsiindustries.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

I. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.1. Manufacturers:

a. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com.b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com/#sle.c. Thomas & Betts Corporation; Blackburn Products: www.tnb.com/#sle.d. Polaris: www.polarisconnectors.com.

J. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.1. Manufacturers:

a. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com.b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com/#sle.c. Thomas & Betts Corporation; Blackburn Products: www.tnb.com/#sle.

K. Crimped Terminals: Nylon-insulated, with insulation grip and terminal configuration suitable forconnection to be made.1. Manufacturers:

a. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com.b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com/#sle.c. Thomas & Betts Corporation; Sta-Kon Products: www.tnb.com/#sle.

L. Motor Lead Disconnects: Color-keyed compression-type with slip-on insulating boot, pin,silicone gel and boot sealant.1. Manufacturers:

a. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.1) Motor Lead Disconnects: M2D Series.2) Boot Sealant: MDBOOT-SEAL.

b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Electrical Tape:1. Manufacturers:

a. 3M: www.3m.com/#sle.b. Plymouth Rubber Europa: www.plymouthrubber.com/#sle.

2. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated; listedas complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion,and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.

3. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying withUL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight;conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperatureenvironment up to 221 degrees F.

4. Rubber Splicing Electrical Tape: Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) tape, complying withASTM D4388; minimum thickness of 30 mil; suitable for continuous temperatureenvironment up to 194 degrees F and short-term 266 degrees F overload service.

5. Moisture Sealing Electrical Tape: Insulating mastic compound laminated to flexible,all-weather vinyl backing; minimum thickness of 90 mil.

B. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed andsuitable for use at the installation temperature.1. Manufacturers:

a. 3M: www.3m.com/#sle.b. American Polywater Corporation: www.polywater.com/#sle.c. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com/#sle.

C. Cable Ties: Material and tensile strength rating suitable for application.1. Manufacturers:

a. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com.





http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20D4388















26 0519 - 7

D. Sealing Systems for Roof Penetrations: Premanufactured components and accessories asrequired to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty; suitable for cablesand roofing system to be installed; designed to accommodate existing penetrations whereapplicable.1. Products:

a. Menzies Metal Products; Electrical Roof Stack and Cap: www.menzies-metal.com/#sle.

b. Menzies Metal Products; Electrical Retro Box: www.menzies-metal.com/#sle.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to

accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.D. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Circuiting Requirements:

1. All exposed raceway shall be run in a neat organized fashion and shall be parrallel withother building systems.

2. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.3. When circuit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing

required.4. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.5. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location

indicated.6. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and

power-limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.7. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70.8. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are indicated as

separate, combining them together in a single raceway is not permitted.9. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors

among single phase branch circuits is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/groundedconductor for each individual branch circuit.

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).D. Installation in Raceway:

1. Remove existing conductors and cables from raceway before pulling in new (whereapplicable).

2. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and othercontaminants.

3. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.4. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum

pulling tension and sidewall pressure.5. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not

recommended by the manufacturer.E. Installation in Cable Tray: Also comply with Section 26 0536.

























































26 0519 - 8

F. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the samemanner.

G. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supportsand methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support frombuilding structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems.1. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support

system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay onceiling tiles. Support at 6 foot maximum intervals using type MC cable supports designedand listed for the purpose.

2. Installation in Vertical Raceways: Provide supports where vertical rise exceedspermissible limits.

H. Terminate cables using suitable fittings.1. Metal-Clad Cable (Type MC):

a. Fittings used for connecting type MC cable to boxes, cabinets or other equipmentshall be listed and identified for such use. Snap-in connectors or internal box clampsshall not be permitted. All connectors shall be locknut type, designed to secure typeMC cable to boxes or enclosures.

b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors orinsulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor.

c. Do not use direct-bearing set-screw type fittings for cables with aluminum armor.d. Provide plastic anti-short bushings on ends of all type MC cable.

I. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet.J. Where conductors are installed in enclosures for future termination by others, provide a

minimum of 5 feet of slack.K. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment

enclosures.L. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded

conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.M. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.

1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or makesplices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.

2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections withoutcutting, nicking or damaging conductors.

3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion,

oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended

torque settings.6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools

and dies.N. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for

the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unsplicedconductors.1. Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical

tape, or heat shrink tubing.a. For taped connections, first apply adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical tape

or electrical filler tape, followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical tape.b. For taped connections likely to require re-entering first apply varnished cambric

electrical tape, followed by adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical tape,followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical tape.

2. Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electricaltape, or heat shrink tubing.




























































26 0519 - 9

a. For connections with insulating covers, apply outer covering of moisture sealingelectrical tape.

b. For taped connections, follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply outercovering of moisture sealing electrical tape.

3. Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing.O. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.P. Field-Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of integrally

colored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under "Color Coding", apply half overlapping turns oftape at each termination and at each location conductors are accessible.

Q. Identify conductors and cables in accordance with Section 26 0553.R. Color Code Legend: Provide identification label identifying color code for ungrounded

conductors at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises hasfeeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system.

S. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, usingmaterials and methods specified in Section 07 8413.

T. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment anddevices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.

U. Install wire and cable securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.V. Protect exposed cable from damage.W. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.X. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible

temperature rise.3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 00 1400 - Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC), for additional requirements.B. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 40 00.C. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.D. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance test

is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is notrequired.1. Disconnect surge protective devices (SPDs) prior to performing any high potential testing.

Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs connected.E. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.F. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.3.2.

END OF SECTION










































26 0519 - 10







GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 0526 - 1

SECTION 26 0526GROUNDING AND BONDING


A. Grounding and bonding requirements.B. Conductors for grounding and bonding.C. Connectors for grounding and bonding.D. Ground bars.E. Ground rod electrodes.F. Grounding and bonding components.G. Provide all components necessary to complete the grounding system(s) consisting of:

1. Metal underground water pipe.2. Metal frame of the building.3. Rod electrodes.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional

requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding.B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.C. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.D. Section 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting: Additional grounding and bonding requirements for

pole-mounted luminaires.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. IEEE 81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth SurfacePotentials of a Grounding System; 2012.

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.C. NEMA GR 1 - Grounding Rod Electrodes and Grounding Rod Electrode Couplings; 2007.D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

2013.E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.F. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Verify exact locations of underground metal water service pipe entrances to building.2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide steel reinforcement complying with

specified requirements for concrete-encased electrode.3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain

direction before proceeding with work.B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install ground rod electrodes until final backfill and compaction is complete.1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms.1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals for submittals procedures.



B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for groundingand bonding system components.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of grounding electrode systemcomponents and connections.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution




PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors,

connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a completegrounding and bonding system.

C. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicableminimum size requirements specified.

D. Grounding System Resistance:1. Achieve specified grounding system resistance under normally dry conditions unless

otherwise approved by Architect. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does notconstitute normally dry conditions.

2. Grounding Electrode System: Not greater than 5 ohms to ground, when tested accordingto IEEE 81 using "fall-of-potential" method.

3. Between Grounding Electrode System and Major Electrical Equipment Frames, SystemNeutral, and Derived Neutral Points: Not greater than 0.5 ohms, when tested using"point-to-point" methods.

E. Grounding Electrode System:1. Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to form

grounding electrode system.a. Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint.b. Install grounding electrode conductors in raceway where exposed to physical

damage. Bond grounding electrode conductor to metallic raceways at each end withbonding jumper.

2. Metal Underground Water Pipe(s):a. Provide connection to underground metal domestic and fire protection (where

present) water service pipe(s) that are in direct contact with earth for at least 10 feetat an accessible location not more than 5 feet from the point of entrance to thebuilding.

b. Provide bonding jumper(s) around insulating joints/pipes as required to make pipeelectrically continuous.

c. Provide bonding jumper around water meter of sufficient length to permit removal ofmeter without disconnecting jumper.

3. Metal In-Ground Support Structure:a. Provide connection to metal in-ground support structure that is in direct contact with

earth in accordance with NFPA 70.4. Ground Rod Electrode(s):

a. Provide single electrode unless otherwise indicated or required.



b. Space electrodes not less than 10 feet from each other and any other groundelectrode.

c. Where location is not indicated, locate electrode(s) at least 5 feet outside buildingperimeter foundation as near as possible to electrical service entrance; wherepossible, locate in softscape (uncovered) area.

d. Provide ground enhancement material around electrode where required to reduce soilresistivity.

e. Provide ground access well for each electrode.5. Provide additional ground electrode(s) as required to achieve specified grounding

electrode system resistance.6. Common Grounding Busbar: Provide ground bar, separate from service equipment

enclosure, for common connection point of grounding electrode system bonding jumpersas permitted in NFPA 70. Connect grounding electrode conductor provided forservice-supplied system grounding to this ground bar.a. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches unless otherwise indicated or required.b. Where ground bar location is not indicated, locate in accessible location as near as

possible to service disconnect enclosure.c. Ground Bar Mounting Height: 18 inches above finished floor unless otherwise

indicated.F. Service-Supplied System Grounding:

1. For each service disconnect, provide grounding electrode conductor to connect neutral(grounded) service conductor to grounding electrode system. Unless otherwise indicated,make connection at neutral (grounded) bus in service disconnect enclosure.

2. For each service disconnect, provide main bonding jumper to connect neutral (grounded)bus to equipment ground bus where not factory-installed. Do not make any otherconnections between neutral (grounded) conductors and ground on load side of servicedisconnect.

G. Separately Derived System Grounding:1. Separately derived systems include, but are not limited to:

a. Transformers (except autotransformers such as buck-boost transformers).b. Generators, when neutral is switched in the transfer switch.

2. Provide grounding electrode conductor to connect derived system grounded conductor tonearest effectively grounded metal building frame. Unless otherwise indicated, makeconnection at neutral (grounded) bus in source enclosure.

3. Provide bonding jumper to connect derived system grounded conductor to nearest metalbuilding frame and nearest metal water piping in the area served by the derived system,where not already used as a grounding electrode for the derived system. Make connectionat same location as grounding electrode conductor connection.

4. Outdoor Source: Where the source of the separately derived system is located outside thebuilding or structure supplied, provide connection to grounding electrode at source inaccordance with NFPA 70.

5. Provide system bonding jumper to connect system grounded conductor to equipmentground bus. Make connection at same location as grounding electrode conductorconnection. Do not make any other connections between neutral (grounded) conductorsand ground on load side of separately derived system disconnect.

6. Where the source and first disconnecting means are in separate enclosures, providesupply-side bonding jumper between source and first disconnecting means.

H. Bonding and Equipment Grounding:1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic

equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, andother normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electricalconductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance withNFPA 70.




2. Provide green insulated copper equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branchcircuit raceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor.

3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipmentgrounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuitequipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

5. All electrical equipment, devices and raceways shall form continuously grounded systems. Neutral and equipment grounding conductors shall be bonded together only at serviceentrances or at secondary sides of separately derived systems.

6. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipmentground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus.

7. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided toaccommodate conduit movement.

8. Provide bonding for interior metal piping systems in accordance with NFPA 70. Thisincludes, but is not limited to:a. Metal water piping where not already effectively bonded to metal underground water

piping used as a grounding electrode.b. Metal gas piping. NOTE: Contractor shall ensure that interior metal gas piping is

electrically isolated from underground metal gas piping in order to preventunderground gas piping from inadvertently becoming a grounding electrode, as isprohibited by NFPA 70.

9. Provide bonding for interior metal air ducts.10. Provide bonding for metal building frame.11. Provide bonding for metal siding not effectively bonded through attachment to metal

building frame.I. Communications Systems Grounding and Bonding:

1. Provide intersystem bonding termination at service equipment or metering equipmentenclosure and at disconnecting means for any additional buildings or structures inaccordance with NFPA 70.

2. Provide bonding jumper in raceway from common grounding busbar totelecommunications equipment backboard and provide ground bar for termination.a. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches unless otherwise indicated or required.b. Ground Bar Mounting Height: 18 inches above finished floor unless otherwise

indicated.J. Pole-Mounted Luminaires: Also comply with Section 26 5600.

2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTSA. General Requirements:

1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.

B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 0526:1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated.

a. Exceptions:1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with

earth.2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in

raceway).C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding:

1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductorsand items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground,concealed and other inaccessible connections.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors or compression connectors foraccessible connections.


























































a. Exceptions:1) Use exothermic welded connections for connections to metal building frame.

4. Manufacturers - Mechanical and Compression Connectors:a. Advanced Lightning Technology (ALT): www.altfab.com/#sle.b. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com.c. Harger Lightning & Grounding: www.harger.com/#sle.d. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.

5. Manufacturers - Exothermic Welded Connections:a. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com.b. Cadweld, a brand of Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com/#sle.c. thermOweld, subsidiary of Continental Industries; division of Burndy LLC:

www.thermoweld.com/#sle.D. Ground Bars:

1. Description: Copper rectangular ground bars with mounting brackets and insulators.2. Size: As indicated.3. Holes for Connections: As indicated or as required for connections to be made.4. Manufacturers:

a. Advanced Lightning Technology (ALT): www.altfab.com/#sle.b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com/#sle.c. Harger Lightning & Grounding: www.harger.com/#sle.d. thermOweld, subsidiary of Continental Industries; division of Burndy LLC:

www.thermoweld.com/#sle.E. Ground Rod Electrodes:

1. Comply with NEMA GR 1.2. Material: Copper-bonded (copper-clad) steel.3. Size: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet length, unless otherwise indicated.4. Manufacturers:

a. Advanced Lightning Technology (ALT): www.altfab.com/#sle.b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com/#sle.c. Galvan Industries, Inc: www.galvanelectrical.com/#sle.d. Harger Lightning & Grounding: www.harger.com/#sle.

F. Ground Access Wells:1. Description: Open bottom round or rectangular well with access cover for testing and

inspection; suitable for the expected load at the installed location.2. Size: As required to provide adequate access for testing and inspection, but not less than

minimum size requirements specified.a. Round Wells: Not less than 8 inches in diameter.

3. Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less than10 inches.

4. Cover: Factory-identified by permanent means with word "GROUND".5. Manufacturers:

a. Advanced Lightning Technology (ALT): www.altfab.com/#sle.b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com/#sle.c. Harger Lightning & Grounding: www.harger.com/#sle.d. thermOweld, subsidiary of Continental Industries; division of Burndy LLC:

www.thermoweld.com/#sle.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has beencompleted.

B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
























































C. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.D. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Ground Rod Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated, install ground rod electrodes vertically.

Where encountered rock prohibits vertical installation, install at 45 degree angle or buryhorizontally in trench at least 30 inches (750 mm) deep in accordance with NFPA 70 or provideground plates.1. Outdoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with top of rod 12 inches (300

mm) below finished grade.2. Indoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with 4 inches of top of rod

exposed.D. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.

1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections withoutcutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitateinsertion into connector.

2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, andcontact surfaces.

3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for theitems to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommendedtorque settings.

5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended toolsand dies.

E. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 0553.F. Install ground electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to

achieve specified resistance to ground.G. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing

where indicated. Bond steel together.H. Provide bonding to meet requirements described in Quality Assurance.I. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, green insulated copper equipment

grounding conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end onsuitable lug, bus, or bushing.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4.B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.C. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation within the

previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.D. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with

specified requirements.END OF SECTION














































HANGERS AND SUPPORTSFOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0529 - 1

SECTION 26 0529HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


A. Support and attachment requirements and components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes,and other electrical work.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment

requirements for conduits.B. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment

requirements for boxes.C. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for interior

luminaires.D. Conduit and equipment supports.E. Anchors and fasteners.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products; 2015.B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.C. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel;

2013.D. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; 2004.E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.G. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; 2015.H. UL 5B - Strut-Type Channel Raceways and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment andcomponents to be installed.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials requiredfor installation.

3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces atthe installed locations.

4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and otherpotential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.


B. Sequencing:1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete has

fully cured in accordance with Section 03 3000.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for metal

channel (strut) framing systems and post-installed concrete and masonry anchors.



26 0529 - 2

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated byproduct testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,preparation, and installation of product.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with NFPA 70.B. Comply with applicable building code.C. Installer Qualifications for Powder-Actuated Fasteners (when specified): Certified by fastener

system manufacturer with current operator's license.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. General Requirements:1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and

hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work.2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) as

suitable for the purpose indicated, where applicable.3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in

accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to besupported with a minimum safety factor of 2. Include consideration for vibration, equipmentoperation, and shock loads where applicable.

4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and productlisting.

5. Do not use wire, chain, perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supports unlessspecifically indicated or permitted.

6. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment whereinstalled.a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless otherwise

indicated.b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use stainless steel unless otherwise

indicated.B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be

supported.1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.3. Manufacturers:

a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.

b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com/#sle.c. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle.d. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.

C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.1. Manufacturers:


b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com/#sle.c. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle.d. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.

D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel(strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly ofsupports.1. Comply with MFMA-4.



26 0529 - 3

2. Channel (Strut) Used as Raceway (only where specifically indicated): Listed and labeledas complying with UL 5B.

3. Channel Material:a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use galvanized steel.b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use 304 Stainless Steel.

4. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gage, 0.1046 inch.5. Minimum Channel Dimensions: 1-5/8 inch width by 1-5/8 inch height.6. Manufacturers:

a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.b. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.c. Unistrut, a brand of Atkore International Inc: www.unistrut.com/#sle.d. Source Limitations: Furnish channels (struts) and associated fittings, accessories,

and hardware produced by a single manufacturer.1) All associated fittings, accessories, and hardware shall be Stainless Steel.

E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.1. Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:

a. Equipment Supports: 1/2 inch diameter.b. Busway Supports: 1/2 inch diameter.c. Single Conduit up to 1 inch (27 mm) trade size: 1/4 inch diameter.d. Single Conduit larger than 1 inch (27 mm) trade size: 3/8 inch diameter.e. Trapeze Support for Multiple Conduits: 3/8 inch diameter.f. Outlet Boxes: 1/4 inch diameter.g. Light Fixtures: 1/4 inch diameter.

F. Anchors and Fasteners:1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and

fastener types indicated for the specified applications.2. Concrete: Use expansion anchors.3. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors.4. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts.5. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts.6. Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts, or welded threaded studs.7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.8. Plastic and lead anchors are not permitted.9. Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Evaluated and recognized by ICC

Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES) for compliance with applicable building code.10. Manufacturers - Mechanical Anchors:

a. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com/#sle.b. ITW Red Head, a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc: www.itwredhead.com/#sle.c. Powers Fasteners, Inc: www.powers.com/#sle.d. Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc: www.strongtie.com/#sle.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size

and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire inconduit.

B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized.C. Formed Steel Channel:

1. Product: Steel "U" shaped with in-turned clamping ridges manufactured by Unitstrut,Power Wtrut, B-Line Strut or Kindorf.


A. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.



26 0529 - 4

B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,

ductwork, or other systems.D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended

ceiling support system or ceiling grid.E. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural

Engineer.F. Equipment Support and Attachment:

1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) tosupport equipment as required.

2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted onhollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.

3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locationsto provide space between equipment and mounting surface.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted equipment on properly sized 3 inch highconcrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000.

5. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on itsown weight for support.

G. Conduit Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 0533.13.H. Box Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 0533.16.I. Interior Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 5100.J. Exterior Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 5600.K. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.L. Remove temporary supports.M. Identify independent electrical component support wires above accessible ceilings (only where

specifically indicated or permitted) with color distinguishable from ceiling support wires inaccordance with NFPA 70.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.B. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components.C. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system

components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.2. Do not drill or cut structural members.

D. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance withadequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.

E. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.F. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1-5/8"

off wall.G. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed

in hollow partitions.END OF SECTION


CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICALSYSTEMS

26 0533.13 - 1

SECTION 26 0533.13CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).B. Aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC).C. Flexible metal conduit (FMC).D. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).E. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).F. Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit.G. Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC).H. Conduit fittings.I. Accessories.J. Conduit, fittings and conduit bodies.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 8413 - Penetration Firestopping.B. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Metal clad cable

(Type MC) and armored cable (Type AC), including uses permitted.C. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding.D. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.E. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.F. Section 26 0533.23 - Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems.G. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.H. Section 33 7119 - Electrical Underground Ducts, Ductbanks, and Manholes.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005.B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 2005.C. ANSI C80.5 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit (ERAC); 2005.D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.E. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); 2013.F. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic

Tubing, and Cable; 2012.G. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; 2013.H. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing;

2015.I. NEMA TC 14 (SERIES) - Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit and Fittings Series; 2015.J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.K. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.L. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.M. UL 6A - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel; Current

Edition, Including All Revisions.



26 0533.13 - 2

N. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.O. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.P. UL 651 - Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.Q. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed, includingadjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping,equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipmentinstalled under other sections or by others.

4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve theintegrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.


B. Sequencing:1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is complete

between outlet, junction and splicing points.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Sections 00 1300 and 01 81 13 for submittals procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conduits and

fittings.C. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underground, conduits

embedded within concrete slabs, conduits 3/4" trade size and larger, and 3/4".1.06 LEED SUBMITTALS: COMPLY WITH SECTION 01 81 13.

A. MR Credit 3: BPDO - Sourcing of Raw Materials1. For recycled content conduit: Documentation indicating percentages by weight of

pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content.1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose

specified and shown.1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions.

B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide

appropriate covering.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70and product listing.

B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicatedfor the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the



26 0533.13 - 3

most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified,use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

C. Underground:1. Under Slab on Grade: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit

(IMC), PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, rigid PVC conduit, or reinforcedthermosetting resin conduit (RTRC).

2. Exterior, Direct-Buried: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or rigid PVC conduit.3. Exterior, Embedded Within Concrete: Use rigid PVC conduit.4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal

conduit where emerging from underground.5. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 3/4" trade size is provided, use galvanized

steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends.6. Where steel conduit is installed in direct contact with earth where soil has a resistivity of

less than 2000 ohm-centimeters or is characterized as severely corrosive based on soilsreport or local experience, use corrosion protection tape to provide supplementarycorrosion protection.

7. Where steel conduit emerges from concrete into soil, use corrosion protection tape toprovide supplementary corrosion protection for a minimum of 4 inches on either side ofwhere conduit emerges.

D. Embedded Within Concrete:1. Within Slab on Grade: Not permitted.2. Within Slab Above Ground: Not permitted.3. Within Concrete Walls Above Ground: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal

conduit where emerging from concrete.E. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal

conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).F. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate

metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).G. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate

metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).H. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.I. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or

electrical metallic tubing (EMT).J. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or

intermediate metal conduit (IMC).1. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to:

a. Where exposed below 8 feet, except within electrical and communication rooms orclosets.

K. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC),or PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

L. Concealed, Exterior, Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized steelrigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

M. Connections to Light Fixtures Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit.1. Maximum Length: 6 feet.

N. Connections to Vibrating Equipment:1. Dry Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.3. Maximum Length: 3 feet unless otherwise indicated.4. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to:

a. Transformers.



26 0533.13 - 4

b. Motors.c. Generators.d. Chillers

2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTSA. Fittings for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 0526.B. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.D. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

1. Branch Circuits: 3/4 inch trade size.2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch trade size.3. Control Circuits: 3/4 inch trade size.4. Flexible Connections to Light Fixtures: 3/8 inch trade size.5. Underground, Interior: 3/4 inch trade size.6. Underground, Exterior: 1 inch trade size.

E. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicableminimum size requirements specified.

2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)A. Manufacturers:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com/#sle.2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com/#sle.3. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSIC80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

C. Fittings:1. Manufacturers:

a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com/#sle.b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle.c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.

2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeledas complying with UL 514B.

3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.

4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw andcompression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

2.04 ALUMINUM RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)A. Manufacturers:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com/#sle.2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com/#sle.3. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC aluminum rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.5and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6A.



2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeledas complying with UL 514B.

3. Material: Use aluminum.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20C80.1




















26 0533.13 - 5

4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw andcompression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

2.05 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)A. Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc; ______: www.afcweb.com/#sle.2. Electri-Flex Company; ______: www.electriflex.com/#sle.3. International Metal Hose; ______: www.metalhose.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeledas complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.



2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying withUL 514B.

3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. Use insulated throat type.a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.

D. Description: Interlocked steel construction.E. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.

2.06 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)A. Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc; ______: www.afcweb.com/#sle.2. Electri-Flex Company; ______: www.electriflex.com/#sle.3. International Metal Hose; ______: www.metalhose.com/#sle.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduitlisted and labeled as complying with UL 360.




3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. Use insulate throat type.a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.

D. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.E. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.

2.07 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)A. Manufacturers:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit; ______: www.alliedeg.com/#sle.2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com/#sle.3. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries; ______: www.wheatland.com/#sle.4. Triangle

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797.


http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20514B
































26 0533.13 - 6



3. Material: Use steel.a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.

4. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) type.a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.b. Do not use set-screw type connectors and couplings.

D. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.E. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel compression type.

2.08 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUITA. Manufacturers:

1. Cantex Inc: www.cantexinc.com/#sle.2. Carlon, a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.carlon.com/#sle.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated,Schedule 80 where subject to physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degreesC.

C. Fittings:1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with

UL 651; material to match conduit.2.09 REINFORCED THERMOSETTING RESIN CONDUIT (RTRC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RTRC reinforced thermosetting resin conduit complying withNEMA TC 14 (SERIES).

B. Supports: Per manufacturer's recommendations.C. Fittings: Same type and manufacturer as conduit to be connected.

2.10 ACCESSORIESA. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 20 mil.B. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the

conduit to be installed.C. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit

and fittings to be installed.D. Epoxy Adhesive for RTRC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit

and fittings to be installed.E. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force.


A. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.C. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as

required to complete wiring system.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

















http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20TC%2014%20SERIES























26 0533.13 - 7

C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.D. Install aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 102.E. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111.F. Conduit Routing:

1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.2. When conduit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing

required.3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.4. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Electrical rooms.b. Mechanical equipment rooms.c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.

5. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed:a. Across floors.b. Across roofs.c. Across top of parapet walls.d. Across building exterior surfaces.

6. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortestpossible manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel orperpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours wherepractical.

7. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of three 90 degree bends betweenpull points.

8. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet between pull points.9. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible.10. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces. This

includes, but is not limited to:a. Heaters.b. Hot water piping.

11. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack.G. Conduit Support:

1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 usingsuitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,ductwork, or other systems.

3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling supportsystem. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles.

4. Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit.a. Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to provide

space between conduit and mounting surface.5. Use metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel

surface-mounted conduits.6. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod.7. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) with

accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits.8. Use of spring steel conduit clips for support of conduits is not permitted.9. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted.

H. Connections and Terminations:1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized

steel conduits prior to making connections.2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece

couplings. Do not use running threads.



























































26 0533.13 - 8

3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid

into connectors.5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock

nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.6. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect

conductors.7. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical

continuity.I. Penetrations:

1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings andgrade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.

2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set

sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to

prevent entry of moisture and gases.6. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and

curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations arenecessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system andmaintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealingwith submittals.

7. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, usingmaterials and methods specified in Section 07 8413.

J. Underground Installation:1. Minimum Cover, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:

a. Underground, Exterior: 36 inches.b. Under Slab on Grade: 12 inches to bottom of slab.

2. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 26 0553 along entireconduit length for service entrance where not concrete-encased.

K. Concrete Encasement: Where conduits not otherwise embedded within concrete are indicatedto be concrete-encased, provide concrete in accordance with Section 03 3000 with minimumconcrete cover of 3 inches on all sides unless otherwise indicated.

L. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansionand expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connectedequipment. This includes, but is not limited to:1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.2. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit

installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction.3. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for reinforced thermosetting resin conduit

(RTRC) conduit installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion andcontraction.

4. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.M. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial

temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessiblepoint near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to:1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces.

N. Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to beinstalled by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end.

O. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.P. Identify conduits in accordance with Section 26 0553.




























































26 0533.13 - 9

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.B. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection

from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation ofconductors.

B. Install conduit securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.C. Install steel conduit as specified in NECA 101.D. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.E. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis

hangers, and split hangers.F. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel .G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary

supports.H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.J. Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.L. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.M. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.N. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104

degrees F.O. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.P. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.Q. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations.R. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to

make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one shot bender to fabricatebends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.

S. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crossescontrol and expansion joints.

T. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.U. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.V. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 26 0526.W. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 26 0553.

3.06 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTSA. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials

and methods specified in Section 07 8400.
















































26 0533.13 - 10

B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork wherever possible. Whereseparate roofing penetration is required, coordinate location and installation method with roofinginstallation specified in Section 01700.

END OF SECTION










BOXES FOR ELECTRICALSYSTEMS

26 0533.16 - 1

SECTION 26 0533.16BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pullboxes.

B. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches.C. Boxes and enclosures for integrated power, data, and audio/video.D. Floor boxes.E. Underground boxes/enclosures.F. Accessories.G. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.H. Pull and junction boxes.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.B. Section 07 8413 - Penetration Firestopping.C. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding.D. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.E. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems:

1. Conduit bodies and other fittings.2. Additional requirements for locating boxes to limit conduit length and/or number of bends

between pulling points.F. Section 26 0533.23 - Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems:

1. Accessory boxes designed specifically for surface raceway systems.2. Lay-in wireways and wiring troughs with removable covers.

G. Section 26 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.H. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.I. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices:

1. Wall plates.2. Floor box service fittings.3. Access floor boxes.4. Additional requirements for locating boxes for wiring devices.

J. Section 27 1000 - Structured Cabling: Additional requirements for communications systemsoutlet boxes.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2010.C. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic

Tubing, and Cable; 2012.D. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; 2013.E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.G. SCTE 77 - Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity; 2013.



26 0533.16 - 2

H. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; CurrentEdition, Including All Revisions.

I. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.

J. UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment,

or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and workingclearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearancerequirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors,clamps, support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70.

4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement ofconnected conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70.

5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc.installed under other sections or by others.

6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity.7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of

flush-mounted boxes where indicated.8. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain

direction before proceeding with work.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for cabinets andenclosures, boxes for hazardous (classified) locations, floor boxes, and underground handholeenclosures.1. Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Include reports for load testing in accordance with SCTE

77 certified by a professional engineer or an independent testing agency upon request.B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,examination, preparation, and installation of product.

C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's use inmaintenance of project.1. See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Keys for Lockable Enclosures: Two of each different key.

1.06 LEED SUBMITTALS: COMPLY WITH SECTION 018113A. MR Credit 3: BPDO - Sourcing of Raw Materials

1. For recycled content metal boxes: Documentation indicating percentages by weight ofpre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable

for the purpose specified and indicated.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 BOXES

A. General Requirements:

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org



26 0533.16 - 3

1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted byNFPA 70 and product listing.

2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete racewaysystem and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.

3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable

minimum size requirements specified.5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors

terminate.B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull

Boxes:1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise

indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers.3. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes where exposed galvanized steel rigid metal

conduit is used.4. Use cast aluminum boxes where aluminum rigid metal conduit is used.5. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete.6. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls.7. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where

required.8. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.9. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.10. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL

514A.11. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL

514A; furnish with threaded hubs.12. Boxes for Supporting Light Fixtures and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and

weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting ofluminaire where required.

13. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not usefield-connected gangable boxes unless specifically indicated or permitted.

14. Minimum Box Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:a. Wiring Devices: 4 inch square by 2-1/8 inch deep (100 by 54 mm) trade size.b. Communications Systems Outlets: 4 inch square by 2-1/8 inch (100 by 54 mm) trade

size.c. Ceiling Outlets: 4 inch octagonal or square by 2-1/8 inch deep (100 by 54 mm) trade

size.15. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 2726.16. Manufacturers:


b. Hubbell Incorporated; Bell Products: www.hubbell-rtb.com/#sle.c. Hubbell Incorporated; RACO Products: www.hubbell-rtb.com/#sle.d. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle.e. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.

C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL

508A.2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1, painted steel.b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R, painted steel.

3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated.

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org
























http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20514A
































26 0533.16 - 4

4. Cabinets and Hinged-Cover Enclosures, Other Than Junction and Pull Boxes:a. Provide lockable hinged covers, all locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.b. Back Panels: Painted steel, removable.c. Terminal Blocks: Provide voltage/current ratings and terminal quantity suitable for

purpose indicated, with 25 percent spare terminal capacity.5. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise

indicated.6. Manufacturers:

a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.b. Hoffman, a brand of Pentair Technical Products: www.hoffmanonline.com/#sle.c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiegmann Products: www.hubbell-wiegmann.com/#sle.

D. Boxes and Enclosures for Integrated Power, Data, and Audio/Video: Size and configuration asindicated or as required with partitions to separate services; field-connected gangable boxesmay be used.1. Manufacturers:

a. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle.E. Floor Boxes:

1. Description: Floor boxes compatible with floor box service fittings provided in accordancewith Section 26 2726; with partitions to separate multiple services; furnished with allcomponents, adapters, and trims required for complete installation.

2. Use cast iron floor boxes within slab on grade.3. Metallic Floor Boxes: Fully adjustable (with integral means for leveling adjustment prior to

and after concrete pour).4. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of floor box service fittings.

F. Underground Boxes/Enclosures:1. Description: In-ground, open bottom boxes furnished with flush, non-skid covers with

legend indicating type of service and stainless steel tamper resistant cover bolts.2. Size: As indicated on drawings.3. Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less than

30 inches.4. Provide logo on cover to indicate type of service.5. Applications:

a. Sidewalks and Landscaped Areas Subject Only to Occasional NondeliberateVehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77, Tier 8load rating.

b. Parking Lots, in Areas Subject Only To Occasional Nondeliberate Vehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77, Tier 15 load rating.

c. Do not use polymer concrete enclosures in areas subject to deliberate vehiculartraffic.

6. Polymer Concrete Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Comply with SCTE 77.a. Manufacturers:

1) Hubbell Incorporated; Quazite Products: www.hubbellpowersystems.com/#sle.2) MacLean Highline: www.macleanhighline.com/#sle.3) Oldcastle Precast, Inc: www.oldcastleprecast.com/#sle.4) Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

b. Combination fiberglass/polymer concrete boxes/enclosures are acceptable.2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Appleton Electric: www.appletonelec.com.B. Hoffman: www.hoffman.nvent.comC. Steel City: www.tnb.comD. Crouse-Hinds: www.cooperindustries.com


























































26 0533.16 - 5

2.03 OUTLET BOXESA. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.

1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported;include 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required.

B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs.

C. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 2726.2.04 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.B. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction

box:1. Material: Galvanized cast iron.2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.


A. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes.B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install boxes in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA

130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are notindicated.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions and NFPA 70.

D. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems.E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems.F. Box Locations:

1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels as required.2. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate.3. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others.

a. Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 26 2726.b. Communications Systems Outlets: Comply with Section 27 1000.

4. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes.5. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints.6. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location

at different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line.7. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide

minimum 6 inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated.8. Acoustic-Rated Walls: Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls

back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches horizontal separation.9. Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire

resistance will not be reduced.a. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide

minimum 24 inches separation where wall is constructed with individualnoncommunicating stud cavities or protect both boxes with listed putty pads.

b. Do not install flush-mounted boxes with area larger than 16 square inches or suchthat the total aggregate area of openings exceeds 100 square inches for any 100square feet of wall area.

























http://www.necanet.org/store/products/index.cfm/NECA%20130-10






























26 0533.16 - 6

10. Locate junction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation ofconductors, and to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points inaccordance with Section 26 0533.13.

11. Locate junction and pull boxes in the following areas, unless otherwise indicated orapproved by the Architect:a. Concealed above accessible suspended ceilings.b. Electrical rooms.c. Mechanical equipment rooms.

G. Box Supports:1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using

suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.2. Provide required seismic controls in accordance with Section 26 0548.3. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other

than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections inaccordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or othersystems.

4. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or ceilingsupport system.

H. Install boxes plumb and level.I. Flush-Mounted Boxes:

1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. sothat front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surfacemore than 1/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface.

2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box orassociated raised cover is flush with finished surface.

3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile,gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at theedge of the box.

J. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.K. Metallic Floor Boxes: Install box level at the proper elevation to be flush with finished floor.L. Underground Boxes/Enclosures:

1. Install enclosure on gravel base, minimum 6 inches deep.2. Flush-mount enclosures located in concrete or paved areas.3. Mount enclosures located in landscaped areas with top at flush with finished grade.4. Install additional bracing inside enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions

to minimize box sidewall deflections during backfilling. Backfill with cover bolted in place.M. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent

devices exceeds 300 V.N. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using

materials and methods specified in Section 07 8413.O. Close unused box openings.P. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment

installed or designated for future use.Q. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.R. Identify boxes in accordance with Section 26 0553.S. Install boxes securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.T. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling,

equipment connections, and as required by NFPA 70.U. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated.V. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.

























































26 0533.16 - 7

1. Adjust box locations up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose.W. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 2726.X. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance.Y. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.Z. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials

and methods specified in Section 07 8400.AA. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.AB. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.AC. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only.

Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.AD. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation.

Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.AE. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for

surface finish thickness.AF. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.AG. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal

conduits both supported within 12 inches of box.AH. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.AI. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.AJ. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for

other installations.3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.B. Install knockout closures in unused box openings.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until

ready for installation of conductors.B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.

END OF SECTION






































26 0533.16 - 8






SURFACE RACEWAYS FORELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0533.23 - 1

SECTION 26 0533.23SURFACE RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


A. Surface raceway systems.B. Wireways.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding.B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

1. Includes metal channel (strut) used as raceway.C. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems.D. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.F. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Receptacles.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.D. NEMA PRP 5 - Installation Guidelines for Surface Nonmetallic Raceway; 2015.E. UL 5A - Nonmetallic Surface Raceways and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.F. UL 111 - Outline of Investigation for Multioutlet Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.G. UL 870 - Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:1. Coordinate the placement of raceways with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed

under other sections or by others.2. Coordinate rough-in locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 and

conduit provided under Section 26 0533.13 as required for installation of racewaysprovided under this section.

3. Verify minimum sizes of raceways with the actual conductors and components to beinstalled.


B. Sequencing:1. Do not install raceways until final surface finishes and painting are complete.2. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of raceways is complete

between outlet, junction and splicing points.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets includingdimensions, knockout sizes and locations, materials, fabrication details, finishes, servicecondition requirements, and accessories.1. Surface Raceway Systems: Include information on fill capacities for conductors and

cables.



26 0533.23 - 2

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated byproduct testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,preparation, and installation of product.

1.06 LEED SUBMITTALS: COMPLY WITH SECTION 018113A. MR Credit 3: BPDO - Sourcing of Raw Materials

1. For recycled content metal raceways: Documentation indicating percentages by weight ofpre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content.


PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 RACEWAY REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide all components, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete racewaysystem.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) assuitable for the purpose indicated.

C. Do not use raceways for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.2.02 SURFACE RACEWAY SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturers:1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle.2. MonoSystems, Inc: www.monosystems.com/#sle.3. Wiremold, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle.

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 5.C. Multioutlet Assemblies: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 111.D. Surface Raceway System:

1. Raceway Type: Two channel, anodized aluminum.2. Length: As required for wall length.3. Color: To be selected by Architect.4. Accessory Device Boxes: Suitable for the devices to be installed; color to match raceway.5. Integrated Device Provisions:

a. Receptacles:1) Comply with Section 26 2726, except for finishes.2) Configuration: As indicated on the drawings.3) Color: Match raceway.4) Spacing: As indicated on the drawings.

b. Communications Outlets:1) Voice and Data Jacks: As specified in Section 27 1000.2) Configuration: As indicated on the drawings.3) Spacing: As indicated on the drawings.

2.03 WIREWAYSA. Manufacturers:

1. Cooper B-Line, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.2. Hoffman, a brand of Pentair Technical Products: www.hoffmanonline.com/#sle.3. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.

B. Description: Lay-in wireways and wiring troughs with removable covers; listed and labeled ascomplying with UL 870.

C. Wireway Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:1. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1, painted steel with screw-cover.

D. Finish for Painted Steel Wireways: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated.



26 0533.23 - 3

E. Minimum Wireway Size: 6 by 6 inches unless otherwise indicated.F. Where wireway size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable

minimum size requirements specified.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that outlet boxes and conduit terminations are installed in proper locations and areproperly sized in accordance with NFPA 70 to accommodate raceways.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive raceways and that final surface finishes arecomplete, including painting.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Install raceways plumb and level.D. Arrange wireways and associated raceway connections to comply with NFPA 70, including but

not limited to requirements for deflected conductors and wireways used as pullboxes. Increasesize of wireway where necessary.

E. Secure and support raceways in accordance with Section 26 0529 at intervals complying withNFPA 70 and manufacturer's requirements.

F. Close unused raceway openings.G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Inspect raceways for damage and defects.B. Surface Raceway Systems with Integrated Devices: Test each wiring device to verify operation

and proper polarity.C. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective raceways.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match

original factory finish.3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed raceways from subsequent construction operations.END OF SECTION

















26 0533.23 - 4






IDENTIFICATION FORELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0553 - 1

SECTION 26 0553IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


A. Electrical identification requirements.B. Large Device Identification.C. Nameplates and Labels.D. Wire and cable markers.E. Voltage markers.F. Underground warning tape.G. Floor marking tape.H. Warning signs and labels.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting.B. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for

power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape.C. Section 26 0573 - Power System Studies: Arc flash hazard warning labels.D. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices - Lutron: Device and wallplate finishes; factory pre-marked

wallplates.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI Z535.2 - American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs; 2011.B. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011.C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.D. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace; 2015.E. UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified prior tofabrication of identification products.

B. Sequencing:1. Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended ceilings, until

identification products have been installed.2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each

product.B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by

product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,preparation and installation of product.




26 0553 - 2

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by

manufacturer.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Identification for Equipment:1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control

equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.a. Switchboards:

1) Identify ampere rating.2) Identify voltage and phase.3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location.4) Use identification label to identify main overcurrent protective device.

b. Motor Control Centers:1) Identify ampere rating.2) Identify voltage and phase.3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location.4) Use identification nameplate to identify main overcurrent protective device.5) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device.

Do not identify spares and spaces.c. Panelboards:

1) Identify ampere rating.2) Identify voltage and phase.3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location.4) Identify main overcurrent protective device. Use identification label for

panelboards with a door. For power distribution panelboards without a door, useidentification nameplate.

5) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with adoor. Identify spares and spaces using pencil.

6) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to identifyload(s) served for each branch device. Do not identify spares and spaces.

d. Transformers:1) Identify kVA rating.2) Identify voltage and phase for primary and secondary.3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location.4) Identify load(s) served. Include location.

e. Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers:1) Identify voltage and phase.2) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location.3) Identify fuse type, and ampere rating.4) Identify load(s) served. Include location.

f. Time Switches:1) Identify load(s) served and associated circuits controlled. Include location.

g. Enclosed Contactors:1) Identify ampere rating.2) Identify voltage and phase.3) Identify configuration, e.g., E.O.E.H. (electrically operated, electrically held) or

E.O.M.H. (electrically operated, mechanically held).4) Identify coil voltage.5) Identify load(s) and associated circuits controlled. Include location.

h. Transfer Switches:1) Identify voltage and phase.



26 0553 - 3

2) Identify power source and circuit number for both normal power source andstandby power source. Include location.

3) Identify load(s) served. Include location.4) Identify short circuit current rating based on the specific overcurrent protective

device type and settings protecting the transfer switch.2. Service Equipment:

a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means.3. Emergency System Equipment:

a. Use identification nameplate or voltage marker to identify emergency systemequipment in accordance with NFPA 70.

b. Use identification nameplate at each piece of service equipment to identify type andlocation of on-site emergency power sources.

c. Use identification nameplate to identify emergency operating instructions foremergency system equipment.

4. Use voltage marker to identify highest voltage present for each piece of electricalequipment.

5. Use identification nameplate to identify disconnect location for equipment with remotedisconnecting means.

6. Use identification label on inside of door at each fused switch to identify required NEMAfuse class and size.

7. Use identification label on inside of door at each motor controller to identify nameplatehorsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, voltage, and phase of motor(s)controlled.

8. Use identification label to identify overcurrent protective devices for branch circuits servingfire alarm circuits. Identify with text "FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT".

9. Use floor marking tape to identify required equipment working clearances where indicatedor where required by the authority having jurisdiction.

10. Available Fault Current Documentation: Use identification label to identify the availablefault current and date calculations were performed at locations requiring documentation byNFPA 70, including but not limited to the following.a. Service equipment.b. Industrial control panels.c. Motor control centers.d. Elevator control panels.e. Industrial machinery.

11. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Comply with Section 26 0573.B. Identification for Conductors and Cables:

1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 0519.2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded

and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder orbranch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits servedby more than one nominal voltage system.

3. Use wire and cable markers to identify circuit number or other designation indicated forpower, control, and instrumentation conductors and cables at the following locations:

C. Identification for Raceways:1. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present for accessible conduits at

maximum intervals of 20 feet.2. Use voltage markers or color-coded bands to identify systems other than normal power

system for accessible conduits at maximum intervals of 20 feet.a. Color-Coded Bands: Use vinyl color coding electrical tape to mark bands 3 inches

wide.1) Color Code:

(a) Emergency Power System: Red.(b) Fire Alarm System: Red.



26 0553 - 4

2) Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Comply with Section 26 0519.3. Use identification labels or plastic marker tags to identify circuits enclosed for accessible

conduits at wall penetrations, at floor penetrations, at roof penetrations, and at equipmentterminations when source is not within sight.

4. Use underground warning tape to identify underground raceways.D. Identification for Boxes:

1. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present.2. Use voltage markers or color coded boxes to identify systems other than normal power

system.a. Color-Coded Boxes: Field-painted in accordance with Section 09 9123 and 09 9113

per the same color code used for raceways.3. Use warning labels to identify electrical hazards for boxes containing exposed live parts or

exposed conductors operating at over 600 V nominal with the word message "DANGER;HIGH VOLTAGE; KEEP OUT".

E. Identification for Devices:1. Wiring Device and Wallplate Finishes: Comply with Section 26 2726.2. Use identification label to identify fire alarm system devices.

a. For devices concealed above suspended ceilings, provide additional identification onceiling tile below device location.

3. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify serving branch circuit for allreceptacles.

4. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify load controlled for wall-mountedcontrol devices controlling loads that are not visible from the control location and formultiple wall-mounted control devices installed at one location.

5. Use identification label to identify receptacles protected by upstream GFI protection, wherepermitted.

2.02 MANUFACTURERSA. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com.B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 LARGE DEVICE IDENTIFICATIONA. Identify all disconnect switches, pull boxes, junction boxes (larger than 4" X 4") finished with

black engraved lamicoid self-adhesive labels, 1" X 4". The label shall state the power feed,circuit or section number, and the equipment identification number that the large device serves.

2.04 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELSA. Identification Nameplates:

1. Manufacturers:a. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com/#sle.b. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/#sle.

2. Materials:a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates.b. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic or stainless steel nameplates suitable for exterior use.

3. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electricallynon-conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engravedtext.a. Exception: Provide minimum thickness of 1/8 inch when any dimension is greater

than 4 inches.4. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched

text.5. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch

high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes.B. Identification Labels:

1. Manufacturers:



26 0553 - 5

a. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com/#sle.b. Panduit Corp: www.panduit.com/#sle.

2. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, andabrasion resistant.a. Use only for indoor locations.

3. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unlessotherwise indicated.

C. Format for Equipment Identification:1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches.2. Legend:

a. System designation where applicable:1) Emergency Power System: Identify with text "EMERGENCY".2) Fire Alarm System: Identify with text "FIRE ALARM".

b. Equipment designation or other approved description.3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.4. Minimum Text Height:

a. System Designation: 1 inch.b. Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch.

5. Color:a. Normal Power System: White text on black background.

1) 480Y/277 V, 3 Phase Equipment: Black text on White background.2) 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase Equipment: Black text on White background.

b. Emergency Power System: White text on red background.D. Format for Receptacle Identification:

1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches.2. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.

a. Include voltage and phase for other than 120 V, single phase circuits.3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch.5. Color: Black text on clear background.

E. Format for Control Device Identification:1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches.2. Legend: Load controlled or other designation indicated.3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch.5. Color: Black text on clear background.

F. Format for Fire Alarm Device Identification:1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches.2. Legend: Designation indicated and device zone or address.3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch.5. Color: Red text on white background.

2.05 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERSA. Manufacturers:

1. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com/#sle.2. Panduit Corp: www.panduit.com/#sle.

B. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap-aroundself-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on, or vinyl splitsleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified.

C. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cableties.



26 0553 - 6

D. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.E. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use handwritten text.F. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch.G. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.H. Locations: Each conductor at pull boxes, junction boxes, and Termination or connection points

including each load connection.I. Legend:

1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings.2.06 VOLTAGE MARKERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com.2. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com.

B. Markers for Conduits: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl or self-adhesive vinyl clothtype markers.

C. Markers for Boxes and Equipment Enclosures: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl orself-adhesive vinyl cloth type markers.

D. Minimum Size:1. Markers for Equipment: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches.2. Markers for Conduits: As recommended by manufacturer for conduit size to be identified.3. Markers for Pull Boxes: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches.4. Markers for Junction Boxes: 1/2 by 2 1/4 inches.

E. Legend:1. Markers for Voltage Identification: Highest voltage present.2. Markers for System Identification:

a. Emergency Power System: Text "EMERGENCY".F. Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated.G. Location: Furnish markers for each conduit longer than 6 feet.H. Spacing: 20 feet on center.

2.07 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPEA. Manufacturers:

1. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com/#sle.2. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/#sle.

B. Materials: Use foil-backed detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial, unlessotherwise indicated.

C. Foil-backed Detectable Type Tape: 6 inches wide, with minimum thickness of 5 mil, unlessotherwise required for proper detection.

D. Legend: Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape.E. Color:

1. Tape for Buried Power Lines: Black text on red background.2. Tape for Buried Communication, Alarm, and Signal Lines: Black text on orange

background.2.08 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. Manufacturers:1. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com/#sle.2. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/#sle.



26 0553 - 7

B. Floor Marking Tape for Equipment Working Clearance Identification: Self-adhesive vinyl orpolyester tape with overlaminate, 3 inches wide, with alternating black and white stripes.

2.09 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELSA. Manufacturers:

1. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/#sle.B. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable.C. Warning Signs:

1. Materials:a. Indoor Dry, Clean Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid plastic or self-adhesive

vinyl signs.b. Outdoor Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid aluminum signs.

2. Rigid Signs: Provide four mounting holes at corners for mechanical fasteners.3. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated.

D. Warning Labels:1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or

self-adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; producedusing materials recognized to UL 969.

2. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and

maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear

access.4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.7. Conduits: Legible from the floor.8. Boxes: Outside face of cover.9. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.10. Devices: Outside face of cover.

C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to

interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or

wrinkles and edges properly sealed.F. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 3 inches below

finished grade.G. Secure rigid signs using stainless steel screws.H. Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 00 1400 - Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC), for additional requirements.



26 0553 - 8

B. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signsof improper adhesion.

END OF SECTION


POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 0573 - 1

SECTION 26 0573POWER SYSTEM STUDIES


A. Short-circuit study.B. Protective device coordination study.C. Arc flash and shock risk assessment.

1. Includes arc flash hazard warning labels.D. Criteria for the selection and adjustment of equipment and associated protective devices not

specified in this section, as determined by studies to be performed.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for arc flashhazard warning labels.

B. Section 26 2100 - Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance.1. Includes Utility Company contact information.

C. Section 26 2413 - Switchboards.D. Section 26 2416 - Panelboards.E. Section 26 2419 - Motor-Control Centers.F. Section 26 2813 - Fuses.G. Section 26 2817 - Enclosed Circuit Breakers.H. Section 26 2818 - Enclosed Switches.I. Section 26 2913 - Enclosed Controllers.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011.B. IEEE 141 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Electrical Power Distribution for Industrial Plants;

1993 (Reaff 1999).C. IEEE 242 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and

Commercial Power Systems; 2001.D. IEEE 399 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power Systems

Analysis; 1997.E. IEEE 551 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Calculating Short-Circuit Currents in Industrial and

Commercial Power Systems; 2006.F. IEEE 1584 - IEEE Guide for Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations; 2002, including 1584a

(2004) and 1584b (2011) amendments.G. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2014.H. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

2013.I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.J. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace; 2015.


1. Coordinate the work to provide equipment and associated protective devices complyingwith criteria for selection and adjustment, as determined by studies to be performed.




B. Pre-Study Meeting: Conduct meeting with Owner to discuss system operating modes andconditions to be considered in studies.

C. Sequencing:1. Submit study reports prior to or concurrent with product submittals.2. Do not order equipment until matching study reports and product submittals have both

been evaluated by Architect.3. Verify naming convention for equipment identification prior to creation of final drawings,

reports, and arc flash hazard warning labels (where applicable).D. Scheduling:

1. Arrange access to existing facility for data collection with Delaware Solid Waste Authority .1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Study preparer's qualifications.C. Study reports, stamped or sealed and signed by study preparer.D. Product Data: In addition to submittal requirements specified in other sections, include

manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for equipment and protective devicesindicating information relevant to studies.1. Include characteristic time-current trip curves for protective devices.2. Include impedance data for engine generators.3. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or, where

acceptable, series rated systems.4. Identify modifications made in accordance with studies that:

a. Can be made at no additional cost to Delaware Solid Waste Authority .b. As submitted will involve a change to the contract sum.

E. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Label Samples: One of each type and legend specified.F. Field quality control reports.G. Certification that field adjustable protective devices have been set in accordance with

requirements of studies.H. Project Record Documents: Revise studies as required to reflect as-built conditions.

1. Include hard copies with operation and maintenance data submittals.2. Include computer software files used to prepare studies with file name(s) cross-referenced

to specific pieces of equipment and systems.1.06 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

A. Scope of Studies:1. Perform analysis of new electrical distribution system as indicated on drawings.2. Except where study descriptions below indicate exclusions, analyze system at each bus

from primary protective devices of utility source down to each piece of equipment involved,including parts of system affecting calculations being performed (e.g. fault currentcontribution from motors).

3. Include in analysis alternate sources and operating modes (including known futureconfigurations) to determine worst case conditions.a. Known Operating Modes:

1) Utility as source.2) Generator as source.3) Utility/generator in parallel.4) Maintenance settings.

B. General Study Requirements:1. Comply with NFPA 70.



2. Perform studies utilizing computer software complying with specified requirements; manualcalculations are not permitted.

C. Data Collection:1. Compile information on project-specific characteristics of actual installed equipment,

protective devices, feeders, etc. as necessary to develop single-line diagram of electricaldistribution system and associated input data for use in system modeling.a. Utility Source Data: Include primary voltage, maximum and minimum three-phase

and line-to-ground fault currents, impedance, X/R ratio, and primary protective deviceinformation.1) Obtain up-to-date information from Utility Company.2) Utility Company: To be determined by Contractor.

b. Generators: Include manufacturer/model, kW and voltage ratings, and impedance.c. Motors: Include manufacturer/model, type (e.g. induction, synchronous), horsepower

rating, voltage rating, full load amps, and locked rotor current or NEMA MG 1 codeletter designation.

d. Transformers: Include primary and secondary voltage ratings, kVA rating, windingconfiguration, percent impedance, and X/R ratio.

e. Protective Devices:1) Circuit Breakers: Include manufacturer/model, type (e.g. thermal magnetic,

electronic trip), frame size, trip rating, voltage rating, interrupting rating, availablefield-adjustable trip response settings, and features (e.g. zone selectiveinterlocking).

2) Fuses: Include manufacturer/model, type/class (e.g. Class J), size/rating, andspeed (e.g. time delay, fast acting).

f. Conductors: Include feeder size, material (e.g. copper, aluminum), insulation type,voltage rating, number per phase, raceway type, and actual length.

D. Short-Circuit Study:1. Comply with IEEE 551 and applicable portions of IEEE 141, IEEE 242, and IEEE 399.2. For purposes of determining equipment short circuit current ratings, consider conditions

that may result in maximum available fault current, including but not limited to:a. Maximum utility fault currents.b. Maximum motor contribution.c. Known operating modes (e.g. utility as source, generator as source, utility/generator in

parallel, solar system).3. For each bus location, calculate the maximum available three-phase bolted symmetrical

and asymmetrical fault currents. For grounded systems, also calculate the maximumavailable line-to-ground bolted fault currents.

E. Protective Device Coordination Study:1. Comply with applicable portions of IEEE 242 and IEEE 399.2. Analyze alternate scenarios considering known operating modes (e.g. utility as source,

generator as source, utility/generator in parallel, solar contribution).3. Analyze protective devices and associated settings for suitable margins between

time-current curves to achieve best possible coordination while providing adequateprotection for equipment and conductors.

F. Arc Flash and Shock Risk Assessment:1. Comply with NFPA 70E.2. Perform incident energy and arc flash boundary calculations in accordance with IEEE 1584

(as referenced in NFPA 70E Annex D), where applicable.a. To clarify IEEE 1584 statement that "equipment below 240 V need not be considered

unless it involves at least one 125 kVA or larger low-impedance transformer in itsimmediate power supply" for purposes of studies, study preparer may use NFPA 70EPPE category method for equipment rated less than 240 V fed by transformers lessthan 125 kVA.



b. For single-phase systems, study preparer to perform calculations assumingthree-phase system in accordance with IEEE 1584 using single phase bolted faultcurrent, yielding conservative results.

3. For equipment with main devices mounted in separate compartmentalized sections,perform calculations on both the line and load side of the main device.

4. Analyze alternate scenarios considering conditions that may result in maximum incidentenergy, including but not limited to:a. Maximum and minimum utility fault currents.b. Maximum and minimum motor contribution.c. Known operating modes (e.g. utility as source, generator as source, utility/generator in

parallel, solar contribution).G. Study Reports:

1. General Requirements:a. Identify date of study and study preparer.b. Identify study methodology and software product(s) used.c. Identify scope of studies, assumptions made, implications of possible alternate

scenarios, and any exclusions from studies.d. Identify base used for per unit values.e. Include single-line diagram and associated input data used for studies; identify buses

on single-line diagram as referenced in reports, and indicate bus voltage.f. Include conclusions and recommendations.

2. Short-Circuit Study:a. For each scenario, identify at each bus location:

1) Calculated maximum available symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents(both three-phase and line-to-ground where applicable).

2) Fault point X/R ratio.3) Associated equipment short circuit current ratings.

b. Identify locations where the available fault current exceeds the equipment short circuitcurrent rating, along with recommendations.

3. Protective Device Coordination Study:a. For each scenario, include time-current coordination curves plotted on log-log scale

graphs.b. For each graph include (where applicable):

1) Partial single-line diagram identifying the portion of the system illustrated.2) Protective Devices: Time-current curves with applicable tolerance bands for

each protective device in series back to the source, plotted up to the maximumavailable fault current at the associated bus.

3) Conductors: Damage curves.4) Transformers: Inrush points and damage curves.5) Generators/Solar Systems: Full load current, overload curves, decrement

curves, and short circuit withstand points.6) Motors: Full load current, starting curves, and damage curves.7) Capacitors: Full load current and damage curves.

c. For each protective device, identify fixed and adjustable characteristics with availableranges and recommended settings.1) Circuit Breakers: Include long time pickup and delay, short time pickup and

delay, and instantaneous pickup.2) Include ground fault pickup and delay.3) Include fuse ratings.

d. Identify cases where either full selective coordination or adequate protection is notachieved, along with recommendations.

4. Arc Flash and Shock Risk Assessment:a. For the worst case for each scenario, identify at each bus location:

1) Calculated incident energy and associated working distance.



2) Calculated arc flash boundary.3) Bolted fault current.4) Arcing fault current.5) Clearing time.6) Arc gap distance.

b. For purposes of producing arc flash hazard warning labels, summarize the maximumincident energy and associated data reflecting the worst case condition of allscenarios at each bus location.

c. Include recommendations for reducing the incident energy at locations where thecalculated maximum incident energy exceeds 8 calories per sq cm.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Study Preparer Qualifications: Professional electrical engineer licensed in Delaware and with

minimum five years experience in the preparation of studies of similar type and complexity usingspecified computer software.1. Study preparer may be employed by the manufacturer of the electrical distribution

equipment.B. Computer Software for Study Preparation: Use the latest edition of commercially available

software utilizing specified methodologies.1. Acceptable Software Products:

a. EasyPower LLC: www.easypower.com/#sle.b. ETAP/Operation Technology, Inc: www.etap.com/#sle.c. Power Analytics Corporation: www.poweranalytics.com/#sle.d. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc: www.skm.com/#sle.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ARC FLASH HAZARD WARNING LABELS

A. Provide warning labels complying with ANSI Z535.4 to identify arc flash hazards for each worklocation analyzed by the arc flash and shock risk assessment.1. Materials: Comply with Section 26 0553.2. Minimum Size: 4 by 6 inches.3. Legend: Provide custom legend in accordance with NFPA 70E based on

equipment-specific data as determined by arc flash and shock risk assessment.a. Include orange header that reads "WARNING" unless otherwise indicated.b. Include the text "Arc Flash and Shock Hazard; Appropriate PPE Required" or

approved equivalent.c. Include the following information:

1) Arc flash boundary.2) Available incident energy and corresponding working distance.3) Site-specific PPE (personnel protective equipment) requirements.4) Nominal system voltage.5) Limited approach boundary.6) Restricted approach boundary.7) Equipment identification.8) Date calculations were performed.


A. Install arc flash warning labels in accordance with Section 26 0553.3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Provide the services of equipment manufacturer's representative to perform inspection, testing,and adjusting.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.



C. Adjust equipment and protective devices for compliance with studies and recommendedsettings.

D. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from studies. Obtain direction beforeproceeding.

E. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results, and final adjusted settings.3.03 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. See Section 00 1720 - Project Record Documents, for closeout submittals.B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.C. Training: Include as part of the base bid training for Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's

personnel on electrical safety pertaining to arc flash and shock hazards.1. Use site-specific arc flash and shock risk assessment report as training reference,

supplemented with additional training materials as required.2. Provide minimum of four hours of training.3. Instructor: Representative of entity performing study.4. Location: At project site.

END OF SECTION


ENCLOSED CONTACTORS 26 0919 - 1

SECTION 26 0919ENCLOSED CONTACTORS


A. General purpose contactors.B. Lighting contactors.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.C. Section 26 2813 - Fuses.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays

Rated 600 Volts; 2000 (R2005), with errata, 2008.B. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices; 2000 (R2010).C. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures; 1993 (R2011).D. NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum); 2013.E. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

2013.F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide dimensions, size, voltage ratings and current ratings.B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for replacing and maintaining coil and contacts.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience and with service facilities within100 miles of Project.

C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purposespecified and indicated.


A. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation; ______: ab.rockwellautomation.com/#sle.B. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com.C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.

2.02 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORSA. Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose magnetic contactor.B. Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz.C. Poles: As required to match circuit configuration and control function.D. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1.E. Accessories:

1. Selector Switch: ON/OFF/AUTOMATIC.2. Indicating Light: RED.


ENCLOSED CONTACTORS 26 0919 - 2

3. Auxiliary Contacts: One, normally open.2.03 LIGHTING CONTACTORS

A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor.B. Configuration: Electrically held.C. Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz.D. Poles: As required to match circuit configuration and control function.E. Contact Rating: Match branch circuit overcurrent protection, considering derating for

continuous loads.F. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1.G. Accessories:

1. Selector Switch: ON/OFF/AUTOMATIC.2. Indicating Light: RED.3. Auxiliary Contacts: One, normally open.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 2 normally open contacts in addition to seal-in contact.B. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5, standard type.C. Indicating Lights: Push-To-Test, LED type.D. Selector Switches: Rotary type.E. Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary, 50 VA minimum, in each enclosed contactor.

Provide fused primary and secondary, and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install enclosed contactors where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install enclosed contactors plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 26 0529.C. Identify enclosed contactors in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 00 1400.B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.C. Perform applicable inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.1.

END OF SECTION


LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 0923 - 1

SECTION 26 0923LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES


A. Occupancy sensors.B. Time switches.C. Outdoor photo controls.D. Daylighting controls.E. Lighting contactors.F. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding.B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes.D. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.E. Section 26 0573 - Power System Studies.F. Section 26 0919 - Enclosed Contactors: Lighting contactors.G. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Devices for manual control of lighting, including wall

switches, wall dimmers, fan speed controllers, and wall plates.1. Includes finish requirements for wall controls specified in this section.

H. Section 26 2913 - Enclosed Controllers : General purpose contactors.I. Section 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI C136.10 - American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment -

Locking-Type Photocontrol Devices and Mating Receptacles - Physical and ElectricalInterchangeability and Testing; 2010.

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.C. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2010.D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.E. NEMA 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic

Drivers and Discharge Ballasts; 2011.F. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays

Rated 600 Volts; 2000 (R2005), with errata, 2008.G. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices; 2000 (R2010).H. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures; 1993 (R2011).I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.J. UL 773 - Plug-in, Locking Type Photocontrols for Use with Area Lighting; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.K. UL 773A - Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control; Current Edition, Including

All Revisions.L. UL 916 - Energy Management Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.M. UL 917 - Clock-Operated Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.



N. UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.O. UL 60947-1 - Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 1: General Rules; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.P. UL 60947-4-1 - Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 4-1: Contactors and

Motor-starters - Electromechanical Contactors and Motor-starters; Current Edition, Including AllRevisions.


1. Coordinate the placement of lighting control devices with millwork, furniture, equipment,etc. installed under other sections or by others.

2. Coordinate the placement of wall switch occupancy sensors with actual installed doorswings.

3. Coordinate the placement of occupancy sensors with millwork, furniture, equipment orother potential obstructions to motion detection coverage installed under other sections orby others.

4. Coordinate the placement of photo sensors for daylighting controls with windows, skylights,and luminaires to achieve optimum operation. Coordinate placement with ductwork,piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions to light level measurement installedunder other sections or by others.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtaindirection prior to proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:1. Do not install lighting control devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors,

service condition requirements, and installed features.1. Occupancy Sensors: Include detailed motion detection coverage range diagrams.

B. Shop Drawings:1. Occupancy Sensors: Provide lighting plan indicating location, model number, and

orientation of each occupancy sensor and associated system component.2. Daylighting Controls: Provide lighting plan indicating location, model number, and

orientation of each photo sensor and associated system component.C. Samples:

1. Occupancy Sensors: One for each type and color specified.2. Daylighting Control Photo Sensors: One for each type and color specified.

D. Field Quality Control Reports.E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include application conditions and limitations of use


F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on device programming andsetup.

G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's use inmaintenance of project.1. See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

H. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations and settings for lighting controldevices.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.



B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes executionrequirements.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified inthis section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.07 WARRANTYA. See Section 00 1720 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for all occupancy sensors.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ALL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for thepurpose specified and indicated.

B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, wiring, connectors,hardware, components, accessories, etc. as required for a complete operating system.

2.02 OCCUPANCY SENSORSA. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle.2. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com/#sle.3. WattStopper: www.wattstopper.com/#sle.4. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained

from a single supplier.B. All Occupancy Sensors:

1. Description: Factory-assembled commercial specification grade devices for indoor usecapable of sensing both major motion, such as walking, and minor motion, such as smalldesktop level movements, according to published coverage areas, for automatic control ofload indicated.

2. Sensor Technology:a. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors: Designed to

detect occupancy using a combination of both passive infrared and ultrasonictechnologies.

3. Provide LED to visually indicate motion detection with separate color LEDs for each sensortype in dual technology units.

4. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, occupancy sensor to turn load on when occupantpresence is detected and to turn load off when no occupant presence is detected during anadjustable turn-off delay time interval.

5. Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors: Field configurable turn-on and hold-on activationwith settings for activation by either or both sensing technologies.

6. Passive Infrared Lens Field of View: Field customizable by addition of factory maskingmaterial, adjustment of integral blinders, or similar means to block motion detection inselected areas.

7. Turn-Off Delay: Field adjustable, with time delay settings up to 30 minutes.8. Sensitivity: Field adjustable.9. Adaptive Technology: Field selectable; capable of self-adjusting sensitivity and time delay

according to conditions.10. Compatibility (Non-Dimming Sensors): Suitable for controlling incandescent lighting,

low-voltage lighting with electronic and magnetic transformers, fluorescent lighting withelectronic and magnetic ballasts, and fractional motor loads, with no minimum loadrequirements.

11. Load Rating for Line Voltage Occupancy Sensors: As required to control the loadindicated on drawings.

12. Isolated Relay for Low Voltage Occupancy Sensors: SPDT dry contacts, ratings asrequired for interface with system indicated.



C. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors:1. All Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors:

a. Description: Occupancy sensors designed for installation in standard wall box atstandard wall switch mounting height with a field of view of 180 degrees, integratedmanual control capability, and no leakage current to load in off mode.

b. Manual-Off Override Control: When used to turn off load while in automatic-on mode,unit to revert back to automatic mode after no occupant presence is detected duringthe delayed-off time interval.

c. Finish: Color to be selected.2. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: Capable of

detecting motion within an area of 900 square feet.a. Products:

1) Hubbell Cat. # AD1277W1N.D. Wall Dimmer Occupancy Sensors:

1. General Requirements:a. Description: Occupancy sensors designed for installation in standard wall box at

standard wall switch mounting height with a field of view of 180 degrees, integrateddimming control capability , and no leakage current to load in off mode.

b. Operation: Field selectable to operate either as occupancy sensor (automatic on/off)or as vacancy sensor (manual-on/automatic off).

c. Dimmer: Solid-state with continuous full-range even control following square lawdimming curve, integral radio frequency interference filtering, power failure presetmemory, air gap switch accessible without removing wall plate, and listed ascomplying with UL 1472; type and rating suitable for load controlled.

d. Finish: Match finishes specified for wiring devices in Section 26 2726, unlessotherwise indicated.

E. Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:1. All Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:

a. Description: Low profile occupancy sensors designed for ceiling installation.b. Unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on drawings,

provide low voltage units, for use with separate compatible accessory power packs.c. Finish: White unless otherwise indicated.

2. Ultrasonic Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 500 square

feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees.1) Products:

(a) Hubbell Cat. # ATU2000CRP.3. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:

a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 450 squarefeet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees.1) Products:

(a) Lutron LOS-CDT Series(b) Watt Stopper.

F. Directional Occupancy Sensors:1. All Directional Occupancy Sensors: Designed for wall or ceiling mounting, with integral

swivel for field adjustment of motion detection coverage.2. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Directional Occupancy Sensors: Capable of

detecting motion within a distance of 40 feet at a mounting height of 10 feet.a. Products:

1) Lutron LOS-WDT SeriesG. Luminaire Mounted Occupancy Sensors: Designed for direct luminaire installation and control,

suitable for use with specified luminaires.H. Power Packs for Low Voltage Occupancy Sensors:



1. Description: Plenum rated, self-contained low voltage class 2 transformer and relaycompatible with specified low voltage occupancy sensors for switching of line voltageloads.

2. Provide quantity and configuration of power and slave packs with all associated wiring andaccessories as required to control the load indicated on drawings.

3. Input Supply Voltage: Dual rated for 120/277 V ac.4. Load Rating: As required to control the load indicated on drawings.

2.03 TIME SWITCHESA. Manufacturers:

1. Intermatic, Inc: www.intermatic.com/#sle.2. Tork, a division of NSI Industries LLC: www.tork.com/#sle.

B. Digital Electronic Time Switches:1. Description: Factory-assembled solid state programmable controller with LCD display,

listed and labeled as complying with UL 916 or UL 917.2. Program Capability:

a. Astronomic Time Switches: Single channel, capable of different schedule for eachday of the week with additional holiday schedule available to override normal schedulefor selected days and field-configurable astronomic feature to automatically adjust forseasonal changes in sunrise and sunset times.

3. Schedule Capacity: Not less than 16 programmable on/off operations.4. Provide automatic daylight savings time and leap year compensation.5. Provide power outage backup to retain programming and maintain clock.6. Manual override: Capable of overriding current schedule both permanently and

temporarily until next scheduled event.7. Input Supply Voltage: As indicated on the drawings.8. Output Switch Contact Ratings:

a. Resistive Load: Not less than 30 A at 120-277 V ac.9. Provide lockable enclosure; environmental type per NEMA 250 as specified for the

following installation locations:a. Indoor clean, dry locations: Type 1.

2.04 OUTDOOR PHOTO CONTROLSA. Manufacturers:

1. Intermatic, Inc: www.intermatic.com/#sle.2. Tork, a division of NSI Industries LLC: www.tork.com/#sle.3. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained

from a single supplier.B. Stem-Mounted Outdoor Photo Controls:

1. Description: Direct-wired photo control unit with threaded conduit mounting stem andfield-adjustable swivel base, listed and labeled as complying with UL 773A.

2. Housing: Weatherproof, impact resistant polycarbonate.3. Photo Sensor: Cadmium sulfide.4. Provide external sliding shield for field adjustment of light level activation.5. Light Level Activation: 1 to 5 footcandles turn-on and 3 to 1 turn-off to turn-on ratio with

delayed turn-off.6. Voltage: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings.7. Failure Mode: Fails to the on position.8. Load Rating: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings.9. Provide accessory wall-mounting bracket where indicated or as required to complete

installation.2.05 DAYLIGHTING CONTROLS

A. Manufacturers:



1. Hubbell Control Solutions; __________: www.hubbell.com/hubbellcontrolsolutions/en/#sle.

2. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; __________: www.lutron.com/#sle.3. Sensor Switch Inc: www.sensorswitch.com/#sle.4. WattStopper: www.wattstopper.com/#sle.

B. System Description: Control system consisting of photo sensors and compatible controlmodules and power packs, contactors, or relays as required for automatic control of loadindicated according to available natural light; capable of integrating with occupancy sensors andmanual override controls.

C. Daylighting Control Photo Sensors: Low voltage class 2 photo sensor units with output signalproportional to the measured light level and provision for zero or offset based signal.1. Sensor Type: Filtered silicon photo diode.2. Sensor Range:

a. Indoor Photo Sensors: 5 to 100 footcandles.3. Finish: White unless otherwise indicated.

D. Dimming Photo Sensors: Photo sensor units with integral controller compatible with specifieddimming ballasts, for direct continuous dimming of up to 50 ballasts.

E. Daylighting Control Switching Modules for Low Voltage Sensors: Low voltage class 2 controlunit compatible with specified photo sensors, for switching of compatible power packs,contactors, or relays in response to changes in measured light levels according to selectedsettings.1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, load to be turned on when light level is below

selected low set point and load to be turned off when light level is above selected high setpoint, with a no switching dead band between set points to prevent unwanted cycling.

2. Input Delay: To prevent unwanted cycling due to intermittent light level fluctuations.3. Control Capability:

a. Single Zone Switching Modules: Capable of controlling one programmable channel.F. Daylighting Control Dimming Modules for Low Voltage Sensors: Low voltage class 2 control

unit compatible with specified photo sensors and with specified dimming ballasts, for bothcontinuous dimming of compatible dimming ballasts and switching of compatible power packs,contactors, or relays in response to changes in measured light levels according to selectedsettings.1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, specified load to be continuously brightened as not

enough daylight becomes available and continuously dimmed as enough daylight becomesavailable.

2. Dimming and Fade Rates: Adjustable from 5 to 60 seconds.3. Cut-Off Delay: Selectable and adjustable from 0 to 20 minutes.

G. Power Packs for Low Voltage Daylighting Control Modules:1. Description: Plenum rated, self-contained low voltage class 2 transformer and relay

compatible with specified low voltage daylighting control modules for switching of linevoltage loads. Provide quantity and configuration of power and slave packs with allassociated wiring and accessories as required to control the load indicated on drawings.

2. Input Supply Voltage: Dual rated for 120/277 V ac.3. Load Ratings: As required to control the load indicated on drawings.

H. Accessories:1. Where indicated, provide compatible accessory wall switches for manual override control.2. Where indicated, provide compatible accessory wireless controls for manual override

control.2.06 LIGHTING CONTACTORS

A. Manufacturers:1. ABB/GE; ______: www.geindustrial.com/#sle.2. Eaton Corporation; ______: www.eaton.com/#sle.



3. Rockwell Automation Inc; Allen-Bradley Products; _______: ab.rockwellautomation.com/#sle.

4. Schneider Electric; Square D Products; ______: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.5. Siemens Industry, Inc; ______: www.usa.siemens.com/#sle.

B. Description: Magnetic lighting contactors complying with NEMA ICS 2, and listed and labeledas complying with UL 60947-1 and UL 60947-4-1; noncombination type unless otherwiseindicated; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings.

C. Short Circuit Current Rating:1. Provide contactors with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault

current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.D. Enclosures:

1. Comply with NEMA ICS 6.2. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the

following installation locations:a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1 or Type 12.

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Pilot Devices:1. Comply with NEMA ICS 5; heavy-duty type.2. Nominal Size: 30 mm.3. Pushbuttons: Unless otherwise indicated, provide momentary, non-illuminated type with

flush button operator; normally open or normally closed as indicated or as required.4. Selector Switches: Unless otherwise indicated, provide maintained, non-illuminated type

with knob operator; number of switch positions as indicated or as required.5. Indicating Lights: Push-to-test type unless otherwise indicated.6. Provide LED lamp source for indicating lights and illuminated devices.


A. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and areproperly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

B. Verify that openings for outlet boxes are neatly cut and will be completely covered by devices orwall plates.

C. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to

lighting control devices.E. Verify that the service voltage and ratings of lighting control devices are appropriate for the

service voltage and load requirements at the location to be installed.F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where

applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unlessotherwise indicated.

B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required forinstallation of lighting control devices provided under this section.1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:



a. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: 48 inches above finished floor.2. Locate wall switch occupancy sensors on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3

inches from edge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architectto obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

C. Install lighting control devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.D. Unless otherwise indicated, connect lighting control device grounding terminal or conductor to

branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.E. Install lighting control devices plumb and level, and held securely in place.F. Where required and not furnished with lighting control device, provide wall plate in accordance

with Section 26 2726.G. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529.H. Where applicable, install lighting control devices and associated wall plates to fit completely

flush to mounting surface with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain onwall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized roughopenings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.

I. Identify lighting control devices in accordance with Section 26 0553.J. Occupancy Sensor Locations:

1. Location Adjustments: Within the design intent, reasonably minor adjustments to locationsmay be made in order to optimize coverage and avoid conflicts or problems affectingcoverage.

2. Locate ultrasonic and dual technology passive infrared/ultrasonic occupancy sensors aminimum of 4 feet from air supply ducts or other sources of heavy air flow and as permanufacturer's recommendations, in order to minimize false triggers.

K. Outdoor Photo Control Locations:1. Where possible, locate outdoor photo controls with photo sensor facing north. If north

facing photo sensor is not possible, install with photo sensor facing east, west, or down.2. Locate outdoor photo controls so that photo sensors do not face artificial light sources,

including light sources controlled by the photo control itself.L. Install outdoor photo controls so that connections are weatherproof. Do not install photo controls

with conduit stem facing up in order to prevent infiltration of water into the photo control.M. Daylighting Control Photo Sensor Locations:

1. Location Adjustments: Locations indicated are diagrammatic and only intended to indicatewhich rooms or areas require devices. Provide quantity and locations as required forproper control of respective room or area based on manufacturer's recommendations forinstalled devices.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, locate photo sensors for closed loop systems to accuratelymeasure the light level controlled at the designated task location, while minimizing themeasured amount of direct light from natural or artificial sources such as windows orpendant luminaires.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, locate photo sensors for open loop systems to accuratelymeasure the level of daylight coming into the space, while minimizing the measuredamount of lighting from artificial sources.

N. Lamp Burn-In: Operate lamps at full output for minimum of 100 hours or prescribed period permanufacturer's recommendations prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps thatfail prematurely due to improper lamp burn-in.

O. Unless otherwise indicated, install power packs for lighting control devices above accessibleceiling or above access panel in inaccessible ceiling near the sensor location.

P. Where indicated, install separate compatible wall switches for manual control interface withlighting control devices or associated power packs.

Q. Unless otherwise indicated, install switches on load side of power packs so that switch does notturn off power pack.



3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Inspect each lighting control device for damage and defects.B. Test occupancy sensors to verify proper operation, including time delays and ambient light

thresholds where applicable. Verify optimal coverage for entire room or area. Record testresults in written report to be included with submittals.

C. Test time switches to verify proper operation.D. Test outdoor photo controls to verify proper operation, including time delays where applicable.E. Test daylighting controls to verify proper operation, including light level measurements and time

delays where applicable. Record test results in written report to be included with submittals.F. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective lighting control devices.

3.05 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.B. Adjust occupancy sensor settings to minimize undesired activations while optimizing energy

savings, and to achieve desired function as indicated or as directed by Architect.C. Adjust position of directional occupancy sensors and outdoor motion sensors to achieve optimal

coverage as required.D. Where indicated or as directed by Architect, install factory masking material or adjust integral

blinders on passive infrared (PIR) and dual technology occupancy sensor lenses to blockundesired motion detection.

E. Adjust time switch settings to achieve desired operation schedule as indicated or as directed byArchitect.

F. Adjust external sliding shields on outdoor photo controls under optimum lighting conditions toachieve desired turn-on and turn-off activation as indicated or as directed by Architect.

G. Adjust daylighting controls under optimum lighting conditions after all room finishes, furniture,and window treatments have been installed to achieve desired operation as indicated or asdirected by Architect. Readjust controls calibrated prior to installation of final room finishes,furniture, and window treatments that do not function properly as determined by Architect.


original factory finish.3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. See Section 00 1720 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of lighting control devices to Architect, and

correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.D. Training: Train Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's personnel on operation, adjustment,

programming, and maintenance of lighting control devices.1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with

additional training materials as required.2. Provide minimum of two hours of training.3. Instructor: Qualified contractor familiar with the project and with sufficient knowledge of

the installed lighting control devices.4. Location: At project site.

END OF SECTION


LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICALSERVICE ENTRANCE

26 2100 - 1

SECTION 26 2100LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE


A. Electrical service requirements.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Materials and installation requirements forcast-in-place concrete equipment pads.

B. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.C. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding.D. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.E. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems.F. Section 26 0533.23 - Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems: Wireways.G. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.H. Section 26 2416 - Panelboards: Service entrance equipment.I. Section 26 2818 - Enclosed Switches: Service entrance equipment.J. Section 26 3213 - Engine Generators: Emergency/standby power systems for interconnection

with normal utility electrical supply.K. Section 26 3600 - Transfer Switches: Service entrance equipment.

1.03 DEFINITIONSA. Service Point: The point of connection between the facilities of the serving utility and the

premises wiring as defined in NFPA 70, and as designated by the Utility Company.1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code; 2012.B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:1. Verify the following with Utility Company representative:

a. Utility Company requirements, including division of responsibility.b. Exact location and details of utility point of connection.c. Utility easement requirements.d. Utility Company charges associated with providing service.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of other utilities or obstructionswithin the spaces dedicated for electrical service and associated equipment.

3. Coordinate arrangement of service entrance equipment with the dimensions and clearancerequirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

4. Coordinate the work with other installers to provide communication lines required for UtilityCompany meters.


B. Arrange for Utility Company to provide permanent electrical service. Prepare and submitdocumentation required by Utility Company.

C. Utility Company charges associated with providing permanent service to be paid by Contractor..



26 2100 - 2

D. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section to reviewservice requirements and details with Utility Company representative.

1.06 SUBMITTALSA. Utility Company letter of availability for providing electrical service to project.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each

product. Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, outline and support pointdimensions, finishes, weights, service condition requirements, and installed features.

C. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating locations andarrangement of Utility Company and service entrance equipment, metering provisions, requiredclearances, and proposed service routing.1. Obtain Utility company approval of shop drawings prior to submittal.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and installed service routing.1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with the following:1. IEEE C2 (National Electrical Safety Code).2. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code).3. The requirements of the Utility Company.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ELECTRICAL SERVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide new electrical service consisting of all required conduits, conductors, equipment,metering provisions, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for connection between UtilityCompany point of supply and service entrance equipment.

B. Electrical Service Characteristics:1. Service Type: Underground.2. Service Voltage: 480Y/277 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz.3. Service Size: 600 Amps.

C. Division of Responsibility:1. Pad-Mounted Utility Transformers:

a. Transformer Pads: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility Companyrequirements.

b. Transformers: Furnished and installed by Utility Company.c. Transformer Grounding Provisions: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility

Company requirements.d. Primary:

1) Trenching and Backfilling: Provided by Contractor.2) Conduits: Furnished and installed by Contractor.3) Conductors: Furnished and installed by the Utility.

e. Secondary:1) Trenching and Backfilling: Provided by Contractor.2) Conduits: Furnished and installed by Contractor.3) Conductors: Furnished and installed by Contractor (Service Point at

transformer).2. Terminations at Service Point: Provided by Utility Company.3. Metering Provisions:

a. Meter Bases: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility Companyrequirements.

b. Metering Transformer Cabinets: Furnished and installed by Contractor per UtilityCompany requirements.

c. Metering Transformers: Furnished and installed by Utility Company.d. Conduits Between Metering Transformers and Meters: Furnished and installed by

Contractor per Utility Company requirements.



26 2100 - 3

e. Wiring Between Metering Transformers and Meters: Furnished and installed by UtilityCompany.

D. Products Furnished by Contractor: Comply with Utility Company requirements.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify that ratings and configurations of service entrance equipment are consistent with the

indicated requirements.C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Utility Company

requirements.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access.D. Provide required trenching and backfilling in accordance with Section 31 2316.13.E. Provide required support and attachment components in accordance with Section 26 0529.F. Provide grounding and bonding for service entrance equipment in accordance with Section 26

0526.G. Identify service entrance equipment, including main service disconnect(s) in accordance with

Section 26 0553.END OF SECTION



26 2100 - 4


LOW-VOLTAGETRANSFORMERS

26 2200 - 1

SECTION 26 2200LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS


A. General purpose transformers.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding.C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.D. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems: Flexible conduit connections.E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.F. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems: Flexible conduit connections.G. Section 26 2416 - Panelboards.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 10 CFR 431, Subpart K - Energy Efficiency Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial

Equipment - Distribution Transformers; Current Edition.B. IEEE C57.94 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Installation, Application, Operation, and

Maintenance of Dry-Type General Purpose Distribution and Power Transformers; 1982(R2006).

C. IEEE C57.96 - Guide for Loading Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers; 2013.D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.E. NECA 409 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Dry-Type Transformers; 2009.F. NEMA ST 20 - Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications; 2014.G. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.I. UL 1561 - Standard for Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment,

or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and workingclearances required by NFPA 70.


3. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting.4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the

conductors to be installed.5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain

direction before proceeding with work.B. Coordination: Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors required for

mounting of transformers.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include voltage, kVA, impedance, tap configurations, insulation system class andrated temperature rise, efficiency, sound level, enclosure ratings, outline and support pointdimensions, weight, required clearances, service condition requirements, and installed features.



26 2200 - 2

B. Shop Drawings: Provide dimensioned plan and elevation views of transformers and adjacentequipment with all required clearances indicated.

C. Product Data: Provide outline and support point dimensions of enclosures and accessories,unit weight, voltage, kVA, and impedance ratings and characteristics, tap configurations,insulation system type, and rated temperature rise.

D. Test Reports: Indicate loss data, efficiency at 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent rated load, and soundlevel.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of usestipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,examination, preparation, and installation of product.

F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of transformers.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas orheavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

B. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided forthe purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to transformer internal components, enclosure,and finish.

1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 00 1720 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.


A. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.B. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com.C. Eaton Electrical/Cutler-Hammer: www.eatonelectrical.com.D. GE Industrial: www.geindustrial.com.E. Source Limitations: Furnish transformers produced by the same manufacturer as the other

electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier.2.02 ALL TRANSFORMERS

A. Description: Factory-assembled, dry type transformers for 60 Hz operation designed andmanufactured in accordance with NEMA ST 20 and listed and labeled by UnderwritersLaboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

B. Unless noted otherwise, transformer ratings indicated are for continuous loading according toIEEE C57.96 under the following service conditions:1. Altitude: Less than 3,300 feet.2. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 86 degrees F average or 104 degrees F maximum

measured during any 24 hour period.C. Core: High grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability and low hysteresis

and eddy current losses. Keep magnetic flux densities substantially below saturation point, evenat 10 percent primary overvoltage. Tightly clamp core laminations to prevent plate movementand maintain consistent pressure throughout core length.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=IEEE%20C57.96










26 2200 - 3

D. Impregnate core and coil assembly with non-hydroscopic thermo-setting varnish to effectivelyseal out moisture and other contaminants.

E. Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV.F. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper grounding

strap.G. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.H. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data, ratings, wiring diagrams, and overload

capacity based on rated winding temperature rise.2.03 GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMERS

A. Description: Self-cooled, two winding transformers listed and labeled as complying with UL 506or UL 1561; ratings as indicated on the drawings.

B. Primary Voltage: 480 volts delta, 3 phase, 3 wire.C. Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire.D. Insulation System and Allowable Average Winding Temperature Rise:

1. Less than 15 kVA: Class 180 degrees C insulation system with 115 degrees C averagewinding temperature rise.

2. 15 kVA and Larger: Class 220 degrees C insulation system with 80 degrees C averagewinding temperature rise.

E. Coil Conductors: Continuous copper windings with terminations brazed or welded.F. Winding Taps:

1. Less than 3 kVA: None.2. 3 kVA through 15 kVA: Two 5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.3. 15 kVA through 300 kVA: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and four 2.5

percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.G. Energy Efficiency: Premium efficiency complying with NEMA Premium Efficiency Transformer

Program.H. Sound Levels: Standard sound levels complying with NEMA ST 20.I. Mounting Provisions:

1. Less than 15 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting.2. 15 kVA through 75 kVA: Suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting.

J. Transformer Enclosure: Comply with NEMA ST 20.1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the

following installation locations:a. Indoor clean, dry locations: Type 2.

2. Construction: Heavy gage stainless steel.a. Less than 15 kVA: Totally enclosed, non-ventilated.b. 15 kVA and Larger: Ventilated.

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard ANSI 49 gray, suitable for outdoor installations.4. Provide lifting eyes or brackets.

K. Accessories:1. Mounting Brackets: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets.2. Lug Kits: Sized as required for termination of conductors as indicated on the drawings.

L. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated kVA as follows:1. 16-500 kVA: Class 220 with 80 degrees C rise.

M. Winding Taps:1. Transformers Less than 15 kVA: Two 5 percent below rated voltage, full capacity taps on

primary winding.N. Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20.

















26 2200 - 4

O. Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV.P. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper grounding

strap.Q. Mounting:

1. Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting.R. Coil Conductors: Continuous windings with terminations brazed or welded.S. Transformer Enclosure: NEMA ST 20.

1. Provide lifting eyes or brackets.T. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data and overload capacity based on rated

allowable temperature rise.U. Energy Efficient Per NEMA TP-1


A. Verify that suitable support frames and anchors are installed where required and that mountingsurfaces are ready to receive transformers.

B. Perform pre-installation tests and inspections on transformers per manufacturer's instructionsand as specified in NECA 409. Correct deficiencies prior to installation.


A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.B. Install transformers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Install transformers in accordance with NECA 409 and IEEE C57.94.D. Use flexible conduit, under the provisions of Section 26 0533.13, 2 feet minimum length, for

connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.E. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances as specified on transformer nameplate and

in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70.F. Install transformers plumb and level.G. Transformer Support:

1. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529, where notfurnished by transformer manufacturer.

2. Use integral transformer flanges, accessory brackets furnished by manufacturer, orfield-fabricated supports to support wall-mounted transformers.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted transformers on properly sized 3 inchhigh concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000.

4. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) to supportsuspended transformers. Provide independent support from building structure. Do notprovide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

H. Set transformers plumb and level.I. Use flexible conduit, under the provisions of Section 26 0534, 2 feet minimum length, for

connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.J. Mount wall-mounted transformers using integral flanges or accessory brackets furnished by the

manufacturer.K. Mount floor-mounted transformers on properly sized 4 inch high concrete pad constructed in

accordance with Section 03 3000.L. Mount floor-mounted transformers on vibration isolating pads suitable for isolating the

transformer noise from the building structure.M. Provide seismic restraints.



26 2200 - 5

N. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.O. Remove shipping braces and adjust bolts that attach the core and coil mounting bracket to the

enclosure according to manufacturer's recommendations in order to reduce audible noisetransmission.

P. Where not factory-installed, install lugs sized as required for termination of conductors as shownon the drawings.

Q. Identify transformers in accordance with Section 26 0553.R. Install transformer identification nameplate in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 00 1400.B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4.C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.2.1.1. In addition to the basic

requirements of Section 7.2, include the following:1. Perform turns ratio tests at all tap positions.2. Verification that as-left tap connections are as specified.3. Perform excitation-current tests on each phase.4. Measure the resistance of each winding at each tap connection.5. Overpotential test on all high- and low-voltage windings-to-ground.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments.B. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended

torque settings.3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from transformer components according to manufacturer's instructions.B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION



26 2200 - 6


PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 1

SECTION 26 2416PANELBOARDS


A. Power distribution panelboards.B. Lighting and appliance panelboards.C. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding.B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.D. Section 26 0573 - Power System Studies: Additional criteria for the selection and adjustment of

equipment and associated protective devices specified in this section.E. Section 26 2200 - Low-Voltage Transformers: Small power centers with integral primary

breaker, transformer, and panelboard.F. Section 26 4300 - Surge Protective Devices.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Federal

Specification; Revision E, 2013.B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.C. NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; 2009.D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.E. NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum); 2013.F. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; 2011.G. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of

Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; 2013.H. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

2013.I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.J. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current

Edition, Including All Revisions.K. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.L. UL 67 - Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.M. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.N. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker

Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.O. UL 869A - Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.P. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.Q. UL 1053 - Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.




1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment,or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and workingclearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.


3. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation offlush-mounted panelboards where indicated.

4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with theconductors to be installed.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtaindirection before proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for

panelboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components andaccessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity,overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entrylocations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of usestipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,examination, preparation, and installation of product.


1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions

and NECA 407.B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or

heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to

panelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com.B. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.D. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com.E. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.F. Source Limitations: Furnish panelboards and associated components produced by the same

manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtainedfrom a single supplier.

2.02 ALL PANELBOARDSA. Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the

purpose indicated.B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the

following service conditions:1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.



2. Ambient Temperature:a. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

C. Short Circuit Current Rating:1. Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault

current at the installed location as determined by short circuit study performed inaccordance with Section 26 0573.

2. Label equipment utilizing series ratings as required by NFPA 70.D. Panelboards Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service

equipment according to UL 869A.E. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation.F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices.G. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements.

1. Provide fully rated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated, with a suitable lug for eachfeeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral connection.

2. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug foreach feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

H. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.I. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for thefollowing installation locations:a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1.

2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated.a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed.b. Increase gutter space as required where sub-feed lugs, feed-through lugs, gutter

taps, or oversized lugs are provided.c. Provide painted steel boxes for surface-mounted panelboards where indicated, finish

to match fronts.3. Fronts:

a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes.b. Fronts for Flush-Mounted Enclosures: Overlap boxes on all sides to conceal rough

opening.c. Finish for Painted Steel Fronts: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise

indicated.4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.

J. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices includingbussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.

K. Ground Fault Protection: Where ground-fault protection is indicated, provide system listed andlabeled as complying with UL 1053.1. Where electronic circuit breakers equipped with integral ground fault protection are used,

provide separate neutral current sensor where applicable.2. Where accessory ground fault sensing and relaying equipment is used, equip companion

overcurrent protective devices with ground-fault shunt trips.a. Use zero sequence ground fault detection method unless otherwise indicated.

L. Selectivity: Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated, furnish products as required toachieve selective coordination.

M. Load centers are not acceptable.2.03 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type,circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations andfeatures as indicated on the drawings.



B. Conductor Terminations:1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.

C. Bussing:1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.2. Ground Bus Material: Copper.

D. Circuit Breakers:1. Provide bolt-on type.2. Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated.3. Provide electronic trip circuit breakers where indicated.

E. Enclosures:1. Provide surface-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated.2. Fronts: Provide door-in-door trim with hinged cover for access to load terminals and wiring

gutters, and separate lockable hinged door with concealed hinges for access toovercurrent protective device handles without exposing live parts.

3. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.F. Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type.G. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard.H. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: (Or as indicated on drawings)

1. 240 Volt Panelboards: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical.2. 480 Volt Panelboards: 25,000 amperes rms symmetrical.

I. Series Rated panelboards are not acceptable.J. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: With integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each

pole; UL listed. For air conditioning equipment branch circuits provide circuit breakers UL listedas Type HACR.

K. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1, 5.75 inches deep, 20 inches wide, cabinet box.L. Cabinet Front: Surface type, fastened with concealed trim clamps, hinged door with flush lock,

metal directory frame, finished in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.2.04 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS

A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuittype, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings,configurations and features as indicated on the drawings.

B. Conductor Terminations:1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.

C. Bussing:1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective

devices.2. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.3. Ground Bus Material: Copper.

D. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated.E. Enclosures:

1. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated.2. Fronts: Provide door-in-door trim with hinged cover for access to load terminals and wiring

gutters, and separate lockable hinged door with concealed hinges for access toovercurrent protective device handles without exposing live parts.

3. Provide metal circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.F. Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard.



G. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard;provide insulated ground bus where scheduled.

H. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 1. 240 Volt Panelboards: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical.2. 480 Volt Panelboards: 25,000 amperes rms symmetrical.

I. Series Rated panelboards are not acceptable.J. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, bolt-on type, with

common trip handle for all poles; UL listed.1. Type SWD for lighting circuits.2. Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits.3. Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled.4. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.

K. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1.L. Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide for 240 volt and less panelboards, 20 inches wide

for 480 volt panelboards.M. Cabinet Front: Surface cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal

directory frame, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.2.05 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Fusible Switches:1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, dead-front fusible switch units complying with

NEMA KS 1, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 98; ratings, configurations, andfeatures as indicated on the drawings.

2. Fuse Clips: As required to accept indicated fuses.a. Where NEMA Class R fuses are installed, provide rejection feature to prevent

installation of fuses other than Class R.3. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position. Provide

means for locking switch cover in the closed position. Provide safety interlock to preventopening the cover with the switch in the ON position with capability of overriding interlockfor testing purposes.

4. Conductor Terminations:a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.b. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.

B. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit

breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

2. Interrupting Capacity:a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short

circuit current rating indicated, but not less than:1) 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 VAC or 208 VAC.2) 25,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480 VAC.

b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less thanthe short circuit current rating indicated.

3. Conductor Terminations:a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.b. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.

4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time trippingelement for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for shortcircuit protection.a. Provide field-adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting for circuit breaker frame

sizes 225 amperes and larger.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20KS%201

































5. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Furnish solid state, microprocessor-based, true rmssensing trip units.a. Provide the following field-adjustable trip response settings:

1) Long time pickup, adjustable by replacing interchangeable trip unit or by settingdial.

2) Long time delay.3) Short time pickup and delay.4) Instantaneous pickup.5) Ground fault pickup and delay where ground fault protection is indicated.

6. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.7. Provide the following circuit breaker types where indicated:

a. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Listed as complying with UL943, class A for protection of personnel.

8. Provide listed switching duty rated circuit breakers with SWD marking for all branch circuitsserving fluorescent lighting.

9. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.10. Do not use handle ties in lieu of multi-pole circuit breakers.11. Provide multi-pole circuit breakers for multi-wire branch circuits as required by NFPA 70.12. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to

complete installation:a. Shunt Trip: Provide coil voltage as required for connection to indicated trip actuator.b. Handle Pad-Lock Provision: For locking circuit breaker handle in OFF position.

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROLA. Factory test panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.


A. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components areconsistent with the indicated requirements.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards.C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Install panelboards securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1

(general workmanship), NECA 407 (panelboards), and NEMA PB 1.1.D. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and NFPA 70.E. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529.F. Install panelboards plumb.G. Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and

rough opening completely covered.H. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or

switches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform.I. Mount floor-mounted power distribution panelboards on properly sized 4 inch high concrete pad

constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000.J. Provide minimum of six spare 1 inch trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted panelboard

stubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor.K. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.





















































1. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipmentground bus only. Do not terminate on isolated/insulated ground bus.

2. Terminate branch circuit isolated grounding conductors on isolated/insulated ground busonly. Do not terminate on solidly bonded equipment ground bus.

L. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories.M. Provide fuses complying with Section 26 2813 for fusible switches as indicated.N. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker tripping function settings as determined by overcurrent

protective device coordination study performed according to Section 26 0573.O. Set field-adjustable ground fault protection pickup and time delay settings as indicated.P. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and NECA 1.Q. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.R. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more

than 4 inches above floor.S. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.T. Provide circuit breaker lock-on devices to prevent unauthorized personnel from de-energizing

essential loads where indicated. Also provide for the following:1. Emergency and night lighting circuits.2. Fire detection and alarm circuits.3. Communications equipment circuits.4. Intrusion detection and access control system circuits.5. Video surveillance system circuits.

U. Identify panelboards in accordance with Section 26 0553.V. Provide computer-generated circuit directory for each lighting and appliance panelboard and

each power distribution panelboard provided with a door, clearly and specifically indicating theloads served. Identify spares and spaces.

W. Provide identification nameplate for each panelboard in accordance with Section 26 0553.X. Provide arc flash warning labels in accordance with NFPA 70.Y. Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above

ceiling. Identify each as SPARE.Z. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 0526.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 00 1400.B. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000.C. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.D. Fusible Switches: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.1.1.E. Ground Fault Protection Systems: Test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as

required by NFPA 70.F. Test GFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation.G. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation.H. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components.I. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.5 for switches, Section 7.6 for

circuit breakers.3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommendedtorque settings.

B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.



















































C. Load Balancing: For each panelboard, rearrange circuits such that the difference between eachmeasured steady state phase load does not exceed 20 percent and adjust circuit directoriesaccordingly. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's

instructions.B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION












WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 1

SECTION 26 2726WIRING DEVICES


A. Wall switches.B. Wall dimmers.C. Receptacles.D. Wall plates.E. Floor box service fittings.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Manufactured wiring

systems for use with access floor boxes with compatible pre-wired connectors.B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding.C. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.D. Section 26 0533.23 - Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems: Surface raceway systems,

including multioutlet assemblies.E. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.F. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.G. Section 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices: Devices for automatic control of lighting, including

occupancy sensors, in-wall time switches, and in-wall interval timers.H. Section 26 2913 - Enclosed Controllers: Manual motor starters and horsepower rated

motor-starting switches without overload protection.I. Section 27 1000 - Structured Telecommunications Cabling and Enclosures: Voice and data

jacks.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification;Revision G, 2001.

B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification);Federal Specification; Revision F, 1999.

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.D. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2010.E. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; 1999 (R 2010).F. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications; 2012.G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.H. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.I. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.J. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.K. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.L. UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.




1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installedunder other sections or by others.

2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements ofactual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual installed doorswings.

4. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, toprovide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtaindirection prior to proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 00 1300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and

configurations.1. Wall Dimmers: Include derating information for ganged multiple devices.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation.B. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable

for the purpose specified and indicated.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.B. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com.C. Cooper Wiring Devices: www.cooperwiringdevices.com.D. Leviton Manufacturing, Inc: www.leviton.com.E. Watt Stopper

2.02 APPLICATIONSA. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served.B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere

rating not less than that of the branch circuit.C. Provide weather resistant GFI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for all receptacles

installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations.D. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks.E. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles serving electric drinking fountains.F. For flush floor service fittings, use tile rings for installations in tile floors.G. For flush floor service fittings, use carpet flanges for installations in carpeted floors.

2.03 WIRING DEVICE FINISHESA. Provide wiring device finishes as described below unless otherwise indicated.B. Wiring Devices Installed in Finished Spaces: White with white nylon wall plate.C. Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: Gray with galvanized steel wall plate.



2.04 ALL WIRING DEVICESA. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated.2.05 WALL SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle.

B. Wall Switches: Extra Heavy Duty Industrial Series, AC only general-use snap switch, complyingwith NEMA WD 6 and WD 1.1. Body and Handle: Ivory plastic with toggle handle.2. Ratings:

a. Voltage: 120 - 277 volts, AC.b. Current: 20 amperes.

C. Switch Types: Single pole, 3-way, and 4-way.2.06 WALL DIMMERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com/#sle.2. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com/#sle.3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

B. All Wall Dimmers: Solid-state with continuous full-range even control following square lawdimming curve, integral radio frequency interference filtering, power failure preset memory, airgap switch accessible without removing wall plate, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD6, and listed as complying with UL 1472; types and ratings suitable for load controlled asindicated on the drawings.

C. Control: Decorator rocker control type with preset slide adjustment.1. 0-10V control2. Suitable for use with LED drivers

D. Power Rating, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required to Control the Load Indicated on theDrawings:1. LED

2.07 RECEPTACLESA. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle.

B. All Receptacles: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed ascomplying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the drawings.1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for

back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.

C. Convenience Receptacles:1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA

5-20R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.2. Tamper Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V,

NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type; single or duplex as indicated onthe drawings.

D. GFI Receptacles:

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI/NEMA%20WD%206



























1. All GFI Receptacles: Provide with feed-through protection, light to indicate ground faulttripped condition and loss of protection, and list as complying with UL 943, class A.a. Provide test and reset buttons of same color as device.

2. Standard GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA5-20R, rectangular decorator style.

3. Weather Resistant GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V,NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant typecomplying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations.

4. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade,duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as tamperresistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SEsuitable for installation in damp or wet locations.

E. Receptacles: Extra Heavy Duty Industrial Series, complying with NEMA WD 6 and WD 1.1. Device Body: White plastic.2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated.

F. Convenience Receptacles: Type 5-20R.G. Single Convenience Receptacles.H. Duplex Convenience Receptacles.I. GFCI Receptacles: 5-20R Duplex Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit

interrupter to meet regulatory requirements.2.08 WALL PLATES

A. Manufacturers:1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle.

B. All Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D.1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring

devices.2. Size: Standard.3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish.

C. Nylon Wall Plates: Smooth finish, high-impact thermoplastic.D. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, Type 302 stainless steel.E. Weatherproof Covers for Damp Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with self-closing hinged

cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations with coverclosed.

F. Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable coverand corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use withattachment plugs connected.

G. Decorative Cover Plates: , Smooth stainless steel.H. Weatherproof Cover Plates: Gasketed cast metal with gasketed device cover.I. Surface Mounted Device Wall Plates: Stamped steel.

2.09 FLOOR BOX SERVICE FITTINGSA. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.2. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.3. Wiremold, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us

B. Description: Service fittings compatible with floor boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16with all components, adapters, and trims required for complete installation.

C. Flush Floor Service Fittings:






















































1. Dual Service Flush Combination Outlets:a. Cover: Rectangular.b. Configuration:

1) Power: One standard convenience duplex receptacle(s) with duplex flapopening(s).

2) Voice and Data Jacks: As specified in Section 27 1000.2. Dual Service Flush Furniture Feed:

a. Cover: Rectangular.b. Configuration:

1) Power: One 2-1/8 inch by 3/4 inch combination threaded opening(s).2) Communications: One 2-1/8 inch by 1 inch combination threaded opening(s).

3. Accessories:a. Tile Rings: Finish to match covers; configuration as required to accommodate

specified covers.b. Carpet Flanges: Finish to match covers; configuration as required to accommodate

specified covers.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and areproperly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

B. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.C. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.D. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly.E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to

wiring devices.F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where

applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unlessotherwise indicated.

B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1, includingmounting heights specified in that standard unless otherwise indicated.

C. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required forinstallation of wiring devices provided under this section.1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

a. Wall Switches: 48 inches above finished floor.b. Wall Dimmers: 48 inches above finished floor.c. Receptacles: 18 inches above finished floor or 6 inches above counter.

2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated.3. Where multiple receptacles, wall switches, or wall dimmers are installed at the same

location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wallplate.

4. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches from edge ofdoor frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to obtain directionprior to proceeding with work.

5. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountainaccording to manufacturer's instructions.























































D. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.E. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent

devices exceeds 300 V.F. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 8 inches long. Do not

connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals.G. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and

tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-inpressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.

H. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuitequipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

I. Provide GFI receptacles with integral GFI protection at each location indicated. Do not usefeed-through wiring to protect downstream devices.

J. Install securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.K. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.L. Install wall switches with OFF position down.M. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as

instructed by manufacturer.N. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers.O. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted

receptacles with grounding pole on left.P. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely

covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes orimproperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting thisrequirement.

Q. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed ordesignated for future use.

R. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom.S. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper.T. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.U. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.V. Install galvanized steel cover plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas,

above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted switches & outlets.3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 to obtain mounting heightsspecified.

B. Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor.C. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor.D. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above counter.E. Install telephone jack 18 inches above finished floor.F. Install telephone jack for side-reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 54 inches

above finished floor.G. Install telephone jack for forward-reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 48 inches

above finished floor.3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.


















































B. Operate each wall switch, wall dimmer, and fan speed controller with circuit energized to verifyproper operation.

C. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.D. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's

instructions.E. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.

3.06 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.


original factory finish.END OF SECTION
















FUSES 26 2813 - 1

SECTION 26 2813FUSES


A. Fuses.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products andrequirements.

B. Section 26 0573 - Power System Studies: Additional criteria for the selection of protectivedevices specified in this section.

C. Section 26 2416 - Panelboards: Fusible switches.D. Section 26 2818 - Enclosed Switches: Fusible switches.E. Section 26 2913 - Enclosed Controllers: Fusible switches.F. Section 26 3100 - Photovoltaic Collectors: Additional requirements for photovoltaic fuses.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; 2012.B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.C. UL 248-1 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 1: General Requirements; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.D. UL 248-4 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 4: Class CC Fuses; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.E. UL 248-12 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 12: Class R Fuses; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:1. Coordinate fuse clips furnished in equipment provided under other sections for

compatibility with indicated fuses.a. Fusible Enclosed Switches: See Section 26 2818.

2. Coordinate fuse requirements according to manufacturer's recommendations andnameplate data for actual equipment to be installed.


1.05 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data sheets including voltage and current

ratings, interrupting ratings, time-current curves, and current limitation curves.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Cooper Bussmann, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.B. Mersen (formerly Ferraz Shawmut): ferrazshawmut.mersen.com.C. Littelfuse, Inc: www.littelfuse.com/#sle.


FUSES 26 2813 - 2

2.02 APPLICATIONSA. General Purpose Branch Circuits: Class RK1, fast-acting, non-time-delay.B. Individual Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time-delay.C. In-Line Protection for Pole-Mounted Luminaires: Class CC, time-delay.

2.03 FUSESA. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the

purpose indicated.B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide fuses for all fusible equipment as required

for a complete operating system.C. Provide fuses of the same type, rating, and manufacturer within the same switch.D. Comply with UL 248-1.E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide cartridge type fuses complying with NEMA FU 1, Class and

ratings as indicated.F. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage.G. Class R Fuses: Comply with UL 248-12.

1. Class RK1, Fast-Acting, Non-Time-Delay Fuses:a. Products:

H. Class CC Fuses: Comply with UL 248-4.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that fuse ratings are consistent with circuit voltage and manufacturer's recommendationsand nameplate data for equipment.

B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install fuses until circuits are ready to be energized.B. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.

END OF SECTION


ENCLOSED CIRCUITBREAKERS

26 2817 - 1

SECTION 26 2817ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS


A. Enclosed circuit breakers.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding.B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and


equipment and associated protective devices specified in this section.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; FederalSpecification; Revision E, 2013.

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;


Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.F. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current

Edition, Including All Revisions.G. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.H. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker

Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:1. Coordinate work with other trades. Avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or

other potential obstructions within dedicated equipment spaces and within workingclearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.




1.05 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for circuit

breakers, enclosures, and other installed components and accessories.1. Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of circuit breaker upon request.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage and current ratings,short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installedfeatures and accessories.1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of enclosed circuit breakers and adjacent

equipment with all required clearances indicated.



26 2817 - 2

2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections.3. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or, where

acceptable, series rated systems.4. Include documentation of listed series ratings upon request.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of usestipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of enclosed circuit breakers.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com/#sle.B. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.D. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com.E. Source Limitations: Furnish enclosed circuit breakers and associated components produced by

the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project andobtained from a single supplier.

2.02 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERSA. Description: Units consisting of molded case circuit breakers individually mounted in

enclosures.B. Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the

purpose indicated.C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the

following service conditions:1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.2. Ambient Temperature: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

D. Short Circuit Current Rating:1. Provide enclosed circuit breakers with listed short circuit current rating not less than the

available fault current at the installed location as determined by short circuit studyperformed in accordance with Section 26 0573.

E. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.F. Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated.G. Provide electronic trip circuit breakers where indicated.H. Provide insulated, groundable fully rated solid neutral assembly where a neutral connection is

required, with a suitable lug for terminating each neutral conductor.I. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed circuit breaker, with a suitable

lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor.J. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for thefollowing installation locations:a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1.b. Outdoor Locations: Type 4X, stainless steel.



26 2817 - 3

2. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard, factory applied grey unlessotherwise indicated.

3. Provide surface-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated.K. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position.

2.03 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERSA. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit

breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 whereapplicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

B. Interrupting Capacity:1. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit

current rating indicated, but not less than:a. 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 VAC or 208 VAC.b. 25,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480 VAC.

2. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than theshort circuit current rating indicated.

C. Conductor Terminations:1. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.2. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.

D. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time trippingelement for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuitprotection.1. Provide field-adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting for circuit breaker frame sizes

225 amperes and larger.E. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.F. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: UL listed for the following service conditions:

2.04 TRIP UNITSA. Field-Adjustable Trip Circuit Breakers: Provide circuit breakers with frame sizes 600 amperes

and larger with mechanism for adjusting long time continuous current, short time pickup currentsetting for automatic operation.


A. Verify that the ratings of the enclosed circuit breakers are consistent with the indicatedrequirements.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed circuit breakers.C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install enclosed circuit breakers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.B. Install enclosed circuit breakers securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with

NECA 1.C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and NFPA 70.D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529.E. Install enclosed circuit breakers plumb.F. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount enclosed

circuit breakers such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79inches above the floor or working platform.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NECA%20NEIS%201










26 2817 - 4

G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.H. Provide identification nameplates for each enclosed circuit breaker in accordance with Section

26 0553.I. Provide arc flash warning labels in accordance with NFPA 70.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 00 1400.B. Inspect and test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NETA ATS, except Section

4.C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.1.1. Tests listed as optional are

not required.D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed circuit breakers.E. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000.F. Inspect and test each circuit breaker.G. Inspect each circuit breaker visually.H. Perform several mechanical ON-OFF operations on each circuit breaker.I. Verify circuit continuity on each pole in closed position.J. Determine that circuit breaker will trip on overcurrent condition, with tripping time to NEMA AB 1

requirements.3.04 ADJUSTING


3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean dirt and debris from circuit breaker enclosures and components according to

manufacturer's instructions.B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION
































ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 2818 - 1

SECTION 26 2818ENCLOSED SWITCHES


A. Enclosed safety switches.B. Fusible switches.


requirements.D. Section 26 0573 - Power System Studies: Additional criteria for the selection of equipment and

associated protective devices specified in this section.E. Section 26 2813 - Fuses.F. Section 26 2913 - Enclosed Controllers: Manual motor controllers.G. Section 26 3600 - Transfer Switches: Automatic and non-automatic switches listed for use as

transfer switch equipment.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.C. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002

(R2007).D. NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum); 2013.E. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

2013.F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.G. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current

Edition, Including All Revisions.H. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.I. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.J. UL 869A - Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Coordinate the work with other trades. Avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, orother potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and within workingclearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.






1.05 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for enclosed

switches and other installed components and accessories.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage and current ratings,

short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installedfeatures and accessories.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of usestipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product.



A. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com.B. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products; Model Class 3110, Catalog # H362DS:

www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.D. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com.

2.02 ENCLOSED SAFETY SWITCHESA. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, enclosed safety switches complying with NEMA KS 1,

type HD (heavy duty), and listed and labeled as complying with UL 98; ratings, configurations,and features as indicated on the drawings.

B. Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for thepurpose specified and indicated.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under thefollowing service conditions:1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.2. Ambient Temperature: Between -22 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

D. Horsepower Rating: Suitable for connected load.E. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage.F. Short Circuit Current Rating:

1. Provide enclosed safety switches, when protected by the fuses or supply side overcurrentprotective devices to be installed, with listed short circuit current rating not less than theavailable fault current at the installed location as determined by short circuit studyperformed in accordance with Section 26 0573.

2. Minimum Ratings:a. Heavy Duty Single Throw Switches Protected by Class R, Class J, Class L, or Class T

Fuses: 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes.G. Enclosed Safety Switches Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for use as

service equipment according to UL 869A.H. Provide with switch blade contact position that is visible when the cover is open.I. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.J. Provide insulated, groundable fully rated solid neutral assembly where a neutral connection is

required, with a suitable lug for terminating each neutral conductor.K. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed safety switch, with a suitable lug

for terminating each equipment grounding conductor.



L. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA KS 1 and NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL50 and UL 50E.1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the

following installation locations:a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1.b. Outdoor Locations: Type 4X, stainless steel.

M. Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the switch in the ON position withcapability of overriding interlock for testing purposes.

N. Heavy Duty Switches:1. Conductor Terminations:

a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.b. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.

2. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position, capable ofaccepting three padlocks.

2.03 COMPONENTSA. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch.

1. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ONposition.

2. Handle lockable in OFF position.3. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class R fuses. Provide rejection clips

to reject all other than Class R fuses.4. Fuse extenders where indicated on contract drawings.

B. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1.1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.2. Exterior Locations: Type NEMA 4X Stainless Steel.


A. Verify that the ratings of the enclosed switches are consistent with the indicated requirements.B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed safety switches.C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install enclosed switches in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install enclosed switches securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA

1.C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and NFPA 70.D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529.E. Install enclosed switches plumb.F. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount enclosed

switches such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79 inchesabove the floor or working platform.

G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.H. Provide identification nameplate for each enclosed switch in accordance with Section 26 0553.I. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.J. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size

installed.
















































3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Perform field inspection in accordance with Section 00 1400.B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.1.1.D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed safety switches or associated

components.3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from switch enclosures and components according to manufacturer'sinstructions.

B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.END OF SECTION















ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 26 2913 - 1

SECTION 26 2913ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS


A. Enclosed NEMA controllers for low-voltage (600 V and less) applications:1. Magnetic motor starters.2. Manual motor starters.3. Motor-starting switches without overload protection.

B. Overcurrent protective devices for motor controllers, including overload relays.C. Control accessories:

1. Auxiliary contacts.2. Pilot devices.3. Control and timing relays.4. Control power transformers.



equipment and associated protective devices specified in this section.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.C. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays

Rated 600 Volts; 2000 (R2005), with errata, 2008.D. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices; 2000 (R2010).E. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures; 1993 (R2011).F. NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum); 2013.G. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

2013.H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.I. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.J. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker

Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.K. UL 60947-1 - Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 1: General Rules; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.L. UL 60947-4-1 - Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 4-1: Contactors and

Motor-starters - Electromechanical Contactors and Motor-starters; Current Edition, Including AllRevisions.


1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment,or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and workingclearances required by NFPA 70.



2. Coordinate the work to provide motor controllers and associated overload relays suitablefor use with the actual motors to be installed.

3. Coordinate the work to provide controllers and associated wiring suitable for interface withcontrol devices to be installed.




1.05 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for motor

controllers, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components andaccessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, voltage, controller sizes, short circuit current ratings,conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories.1. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections.2. Include documentation demonstrating selective coordination upon request.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of controllers and final equipmentsettings.1. Include nameplate data of actual installed motors and associated overload relay selections

and settings.2. Motor Circuit Protectors: Include magnetic instantaneous trip settings.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution





A. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com.B. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.C. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley Products: ab.rockwellautomation.com.D. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.E. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com.F. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.G. Source Limitations: Furnish enclosed motor controllers and associated components produced

by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.1. Motor-starting switches without overload protection may be produced by the same

manufacturer as the wiring devices used for this project.2.02 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

A. Provide enclosed controller assemblies consisting of all required components, control powertransformers, instrumentation and control wiring, accessories, etc. as necessary for a completeoperating system.



B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.C. Description: Enclosed controllers complying with NEMA ICS 2, and listed and labeled as

complying with UL 60947-1 and UL 60947-4-1; ratings, configurations and features as indicatedon the drawings.

D. Service Conditions:1. Provide controllers and associated components suitable for operation under the following

service conditions without derating:a. Altitude:

1) Class 2 Km Equipment (electromagnetic and manual devices): Less than 6,600feet.

b. Ambient Temperature: Between 32 degrees F and 104 degrees F.E. Short Circuit Current Rating:

1. Provide controllers with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available faultcurrent at the installed location as determined by short circuit study performed inaccordance with Section 26 0573.

2. Listed series ratings are not acceptable.F. Selectivity: Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated, furnish products as required to

achieve selective coordination.G. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.H. Enclosures:

1. Comply with NEMA ICS 6.2. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the

following installation locations:a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1 or Type 12.b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R or Type 4.

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.I. Magnetic Motor Starters: Combination type unless otherwise indicated.

1. Combination Magnetic Motor Starters: NEMA ICS 2, Class A combination motorcontrollers with magnetic contactor(s), externally operable disconnect and overloadrelay(s).

2. Configuration: Full-voltage non-reversing unless otherwise inidcated.3. Minimum Starter Size: NEMA Size 0.4. Use of non-standard starter sizes smaller than specified standard NEMA sizes is not

permitted.5. Disconnects: Circuit breaker type.

a. Circuit Breakers: Motor circuit protectors (magnetic-only) unless otherwise indicatedor required.

b. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position.Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the disconnect in the ONposition with capability of overriding interlock for testing purposes.

c. Provide auxiliary interlock for disconnection of external control power sources whereapplicable.

6. Overload Relays: Solid-state type unless otherwise indicated.7. Pilot Devices Required:

a. Furnish local pilot devices for each unit as specified below unless otherwise indicatedon drawings.

b. Single-Speed, Non-Reversing Starters:1) Selector Switches: HAND/OFF/AUTO.2) Indicating Lights: Red ON, Green OFF.

J. Manual Motor Starters:1. Description: NEMA ICS 2, Class A manually-operated motor controllers with overload

relay(s).



2. Configuration: As indicated on drawings.3. Fractional-Horsepower Manual Motor Starters:

a. Furnish with toggle operator.b. Overload Relays: Bimetallic or melting alloy thermal type.

K. Motor-Starting Switches: Horsepower-rated switches without overload protection; toggleoperator.1. Configuration: As indicated on drawings.

2.03 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICESA. Overload Relays:

1. Provide overload relays and, where applicable, associated current elements/heaters,selected according to actual installed motor nameplate data, in accordance withmanufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 70; include consideration for motor servicefactor and ambient temperature correction, where applicable.

2. Inverse-Time Trip Class Rating: Class 20 unless otherwise indicated or required.3. Trip-free operation.4. Visible trip indication.5. Resettable.

a. Employ manual reset unless otherwise indicated.b. Employ automatic reset or remote reset where indicated.

6. Bimetallic Thermal Overload Relays:a. Interchangeable current elements/heaters.b. Adjustable trip; plus/minus 10 percent of nominal, minimum.c. Trip test function.

7. Melting Alloy Thermal Overload Relays:a. Interchangeable current elements/heaters.

8. Solid-State Overload Relays:a. Selectable inverse-time trip class rating.b. Adjustable full load current.c. Phase loss protection.d. Phase imbalance protection.e. Ambient temperature insensitive.f. Thermal memory.g. Trip test function.

B. Circuit Breakers:1. Motor Circuit Protectors:

a. Description: Instantaneous-trip circuit breakers furnished with magneticinstantaneous tripping elements for short circuit protection, but not with thermalinverse time tripping elements for overload protection; UL 489 recognized only for useas part of a listed combination motor controller with overload protection; ratings,configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

b. Provide field-adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting.c. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to

complete installation:1) Pad-Lock Provision: For locking circuit breaker handle in OFF position.

2.04 CONTROL ACCESSORIESA. Auxiliary Contacts:

1. Comply with NEMA ICS 5.2. Provide number and type of contacts indicated or required to perform necessary functions,

including holding (seal-in) circuit and interlocking, plus one normally open (NO) and onenormally closed (NC) spare contact for each magnetic motor starter, minimum.

B. Pilot Devices:1. Comply with NEMA ICS 5; heavy-duty type.



2. Selector Switches: Unless otherwise indicated, provide maintained, non-illuminated typewith knob operator; number of switch positions as indicated or as required.

3. Indicating Lights: Push-to-test type unless otherwise indicated.4. Provide LED lamp source for indicating lights and illuminated devices.

C. Control and Timing Relays:1. Comply with NEMA ICS 5.2. Provide number and type of relays indicated or required to perform necessary functions.

D. Control Power Transformers:1. Size to accommodate burden of contactor coil(s) and all connected auxiliary devices.2. Include primary and secondary fuses.


A. Verify that ratings of enclosed controllers are consistent with the indicated requirements.B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed controllers.C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install controllers in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and NFPA 70.D. Provide required support and attachment components in accordance with Section 26 0529.E. Install enclosed controllers plumb and level.F. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.G. Install all field-installed devices, components, and accessories.H. Set field-adjustable controllers and associated components according to installed motor

requirements, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 70.I. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker tripping function settings as directed.J. Identify enclosed controllers in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.B. Motor Starters: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.1.1. Tests

listed as optional are not required.C. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section

7.6.1.1. Tests listed as optional are not required.D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed controllers or associated

components.3.04 ADJUSTING


3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean dirt and debris from controller enclosures and components according to manufacturer's

instructions.B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIESA. See Section 00 1720 - Project Record Documents, for closeout submittals.



B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of controllers to Delaware Solid Waste Authority

, and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.D. Training: Train Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's personnel on operation, adjustment, and

maintenance of enclosed controllers and associated devices.1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with

additional training materials as required.2. Instructor: Manufacturer's authorized representative.3. Location: At project site.

3.07 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed enclosed controllers from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION


ENGINE GENERATORS 26 3213 - 1

SECTION 26 3213ENGINE GENERATORS


A. Packaged engine generator system and associated components and accessories:1. Engine and engine accessory equipment.2. Alternator (generator).3. Generator set control system.4. Generator set enclosure.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.B. Section 23 1123 - Facility Natural-Gas Piping.C. Section 23 5100 - Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks: Engine exhaust piping.

1. Includes installation of exhaust silencer specified in this section.D. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding.E. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.F. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.G. Section 26 3600 - Transfer Switches.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM D975 - Standard Specification for Diesel Fuel Oils; 2015b.B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.C. NECA/EGSA 404 - Standard for Installing Generator Sets; 2014.D. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2014.E. NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code; 2015.F. NFPA 37 - Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas

Turbines; 2015.G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.H. NFPA 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems; 2013.I. UL 1236 - Battery Chargers for Charging Engine-Starter Batteries; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.J. UL 2200 - Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Coordinate compatibility of generator sets to be installed with work provided under othersections or by others.a. Transfer Switches: See Section 26 3600.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipmentor other potential obstructions within the spaces dedicated for engine generator system.

3. Coordinate arrangement of equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements ofthe actual equipment to be installed.

4. Coordinate the work to provide electrical circuits suitable for the power requirements of theactual auxiliary equipment and accessories to be installed.





product, including ratings, configurations, dimensions, finishes, weights, service conditionrequirements, and installed features. Include alternator starting capabilities, engine fuelconsumption rates, and cooling, combustion air, and exhaust requirements.1. Include generator set sound level test data.2. Include characteristic trip curves for overcurrent protective devices upon request.

B. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating locations of systemcomponents, required clearances, and field connection locations. Include systeminterconnection schematic diagrams showing all factory and field connections.

C. Manufacturer's factory emissions certification.D. Manufacturer's certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.E. Source quality control test reports.F. Provide NFPA 110 required documentation from manufacturer where requested by authorities

having jurisdiction, including but not limited to:1. Certified prototype tests.2. Torsional vibration compatibility certification.3. NFPA 110 compliance certification.4. Certified rated load test at rated power factor.

G. Manufacturer’s detailed field testing procedures.H. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on system operation, equipment

programming and setup, replacement parts, and recommended maintenance procedures andintervals.1. Include contact information for entity that will be providing contract maintenance and

trouble call-back service.I. Executed Warranty: Submit documentation of final executed warranty completed in Delaware

Solid Waste Authority 's name and registered with manufacturer.J. Maintenance contracts.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with the following:

1. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code).2. NFPA 110 (Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems); meet requirements for

Level 1 system.3. NFPA 37 (Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and

Gas Turbines).4. NFPA 30 (Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code).

B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as aNationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.

1.07 WARRANTYA. See Section 00 1720 - Project Record Documents, for additional warranty requirements.


A. Packaged Engine Generator Set - Basis of Design: Kohler.B. Packaged Engine Generator Set - Other Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Cummins Power Generation Inc: www.cumminspower.com/#sle.2. Kohler Co: www.kohlerpower.com/#sle.3. MTU Onsite Energy, a Brand of Rolls-Royce Power Systems:

www.mtuonsiteenergy.com/#sle.



C. Products other than basis of design are subject to compliance with specified requirements andprior approval of Engineer. By using products other than basis of design, Contractor acceptsresponsibility for costs associated with any necessary modifications to related work, includingany design fees.

D. Source Limitations: Furnish engine generator sets and associated components andaccessories produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

2.02 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMA. Provide new engine generator system consisting of all required equipment, sensors, conduit,

boxes, wiring, piping, supports, accessories, system programming, etc. as necessary for acomplete operating system that provides the functional intent indicated.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.C. System Description:

1. Application: Emergency/standby.2. Configuration: Single packaged engine generator set operated independently (not in

parallel).D. Packaged Engine Generator Set:

1. Basis of Design: Kohler.2. Power Rating: 45 kW, standby.3. Voltage: 208Y/120 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz.4. Main Line Circuit Breaker:

a. Type: Thermal magnetic.b. Trip Rating: Select according to generator set rating.c. Features:

1) Shunt trip.2) Auxiliary contacts.3) Gas Trane for the generator size indicated.

E. Generator Set General Requirements:1. Prototype tested in accordance with NFPA 110 for Level 1 systems.2. Factory-assembled, with components mounted on suitable base.3. List and label engine generator assembly as complying with UL 2200.4. Power Factor: Unless otherwise indicated, specified power ratings are at 0.8 power factor

for three phase voltages and 1.0 power factor for single phase voltages.5. Provide suitable guards to protect personnel from accidental contact with rotating parts,

hot piping, and other potential sources of injury.6. Main Line Circuit Breakers: Provide factory-installed line side connections with suitable

lugs for load side connections.F. Service Conditions: Provide engine generator system and associated components suitable for

operation under the service conditions at the installed location.1. Altitude: 1000 feet.2. Ambient Temperature: Between 0 and 104 degrees F.3. Available Natural Gas Pressure: 7-11 inches water column.

G. Starting and Load Acceptance Requirements:1. Cranking Method: Cycle cranking complying with NFPA 110 (15 second crank period,

followed by 15 second rest period, with cranking limiter time-out after 3 cycles), unlessotherwise required.

2. Cranking Limiter Time-Out: If generator set fails to start after specified cranking period,indicate overcrank alarm condition and lock-out generator set from further cranking untilmanually reset.

3. Start Time: Capable of starting and achieving conditions necessary for load acceptancewithin 10 seconds (NFPA 110, Type 10).

4. Maximum Load Step: Supports 100 percent of rated load in one step.



H. Exhaust Emissions Requirements:1. Comply with federal (EPA), state, and local regulations applicable at the time of

commissioning; include factory emissions certification with submittals.2. Do not make modifications affecting generator set factory emissions certification without

approval of manufacturer and Engineer. Where such modifications are made, provide fieldemissions testing as necessary for certification.

I. Sound Level Requirements:1. Do not exceed 75 dBA when measured at 23 feet from generator set in free field (no

sound barriers) while operating at full load; include manufacturer's sound data withsubmittals.

2.03 ENGINE AND ENGINE ACCESSORY EQUIPMENTA. Provide engine with adequate horsepower to achieve specified power output at rated speed,

accounting for alternator efficiency and parasitic loads.B. Engine Fuel System - Gaseous (Spark Ignition):

1. Fuel Source: Natural gas.2. Engine Fuel Connections: Provide suitable, approved flexible fuel lines for coupling engine

to fuel source.3. Provide components/features indicated and as necessary for operation and/or required by

applicable codes, including but not limited to:a. Carburetor.b. Gas pressure regulators.c. Fuel shutoff control valves.d. Low gas pressure switches.

C. Engine Starting System:1. System Type: Electric, with DC solenoid-activated starting motor(s).2. Battery(s):

a. Battery Type: Lead-acid.b. Battery Capacity: Size according to manufacturer's recommendations for achieving

starting and load acceptance requirements under worst case ambient temperature;capable of providing cranking through two complete periods of cranking limitertime-outs without recharging.

c. Provide battery rack, cables, and connectors suitable for the supplied battery(s); sizebattery cables according to manufacturer's recommendations for cable length to beinstalled.

3. Battery-Charging Alternator: Engine-driven, with integral solid-state voltage regulation.4. Battery Charger:

a. Provide dual rate battery charger with automatic float and equalize charging modesand minimum rating of 10 amps; suitable for maintaining the supplied battery(s) at fullcharge without manual intervention.

b. Capable of returning supplied battery(s) from fully discharged to fully chargedcondition within 24 hours, as required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 applications whilecarrying normal loads.

c. Recognized as complying with UL 1236.d. Furnished with integral overcurrent protection; current limited to protect charger during

engine cranking; reverse polarity protection.e. Provide integral DC output ammeter and voltmeter with five percent accuracy.f. Provide alarm output contacts as necessary for alarm indications.

D. Engine Speed Control System (Governor):1. Single Engine Generator Sets (Not Operated in Parallel): Provide electronic isochronous

governor for controlling engine speed/alternator frequency.2. Frequency Regulation, Electronic Isochronous Governors: No change in frequency from

no load to full load; plus/minus 0.25 percent at steady state.



E. Engine Lubrication System:1. System Type: Full pressure, with engine-driven, positive displacement lubrication oil

pump, replaceable full-flow oil filter(s), and dip-stick for oil level indication. Provide oilcooler where recommended by manufacturer.

2. Oil Heater: Provide thermostatically controlled oil heater to improve starting under coldambient conditions.

F. Engine Cooling System:1. System Type: Closed-loop, liquid-cooled, with unit-mounted radiator/fan and engine-driven

coolant pump; suitable for providing adequate cooling while operating at full load underworst case ambient temperature.

2. Fan Guard: Provide suitable guard to protect personnel from accidental contact with fan.G. Engine Air Intake and Exhaust System:

1. Air Intake Filtration: Provide engine-mounted, replaceable, dry element filter.2. Engine Exhaust Connection: Provide suitable, approved flexible connector for coupling

engine to exhaust system.3. Exhaust Silencer: Provide critical grade or better exhaust silencer with sound attenuation

not less than basis of design; select according to manufacturer's recommendations tomeet sound performance requirements, where specified.

2.04 ALTERNATOR (GENERATOR)A. Alternator: 4-pole, 1800 rpm (60 Hz output) revolving field, synchronous generator complying

with NEMA MG 1; connected to engine with flexible coupling; voltage output configuration asindicated, with reconnectable leads for 3 phase alternators.

B. Exciter:1. Exciter Type: Brushless; provide permanent magnet generator (PMG) excitation system;

self-excited (shunt) systems are not permitted.2. PMG Excitation Short-Circuit Current Support: Capable of sustaining 300 percent of rated

output current for 10 seconds.3. Voltage Regulation (with PMG excitation): Plus/minus 0.5 percent for any constant load

from no load to full load.C. Temperature Rise: Comply with UL 2200.D. Insulation System: NEMA MG 1, Class H; suitable for alternator temperature rise.E. Enclosure: NEMA MG 1, drip-proof.F. Total Harmonic Distortion: Not greater than five percent.G. Alternator Heater: Provide strip heater to prevent moisture condensation on alternator windings.

2.05 GENERATOR SET CONTROL SYSTEMA. Provide microprocessor-based control system for automatic control, monitoring, and protection

of generator set. Include sensors, wiring, and connections necessary for functions/indicationsspecified.

B. Control Panel:1. Control Panel Mounting: Unit-mounted unless otherwise indicated; vibration isolated.2. Generator Set Control Functions:

a. Automatic Mode: Initiates generator set start/shutdown upon receiving correspondingsignal from remote device (e.g. automatic transfer switch).

b. Manual Mode: Initiates generator set start/shutdown upon direction from operator.c. Reset Mode: Clears all faults, allowing generator set restart after a shutdown.d. Emergency Stop: Immediately shuts down generator set (without time delay) and

prevents automatic restarting until manually reset.e. Cycle Cranking: Programmable crank time, rest time, and number of cycles.f. Time Delay: Programmable for shutdown (engine cooldown) and start (engine

warmup).



g. Voltage Adjustment: Adjustable through range of plus/minus 5 percent.3. Generator Set Status Indications:

a. Voltage (Volts AC): Line-to-line, line-to-neutral for each phase.b. Current (Amps): For each phase.c. Frequency (Hz).d. Real power (W/kW).e. Reactive power (VAR/kVAR).f. Apparent power (VA/kVA).g. Power factor.h. Duty Level: Actual load as percentage of rated power.i. Engine speed (RPM).j. Battery voltage (Volts DC).k. Engine oil pressure.l. Engine coolant temperature.m. Engine run time.n. Generator powering load (position signal from transfer switch).

4. Generator Set Protection and Warning/Shutdown Indications:a. Comply with NFPA 110; configurable for NFPA 110 Level 1 or Level 2, or NFPA 99

systems including but not limited to the following protections/indications:1) Overcrank (shutdown).2) Low coolant temperature (warning).3) High coolant temperature (warning).4) High coolant temperature (shutdown).5) Low oil pressure (shutdown).6) Overspeed (shutdown).7) Low fuel level (warning).8) Low coolant level (warning/shutdown).9) Generator control not in automatic mode (warning).10) High battery voltage (warning).11) Low cranking voltage (warning).12) Low battery voltage (warning).13) Battery charger failure (warning).

b. In addition to NFPA 110 requirements, provide the following protections/indications:1) High AC voltage (shutdown).2) Low AC voltage (shutdown).3) High frequency (shutdown).4) Low frequency (shutdown).5) Overcurrent (shutdown).

c. Provide contacts for local and remote common alarm.d. Provide lamp test function that illuminates all indicator lamps.

5. Other Control Panel Features:a. Event log.

C. Remote Annunciator:1. Remote Annunciator Mounting: Wall-mounted; Provide flush-mounted or surface-mounted

annunciator as indicated.2. Generator Set Status Indications:

a. Generator powering load (via position signal from transfer switch).3. Generator Set Warning/Shutdown Indications:

a. Comply with NFPA 110; configurable for NFPA 110 Level 1 or Level 2, or NFPA 99systems including but not limited to the following indications:1) Overcrank (shutdown).2) Low coolant temperature (warning).3) High coolant temperature (warning).4) High coolant temperature (shutdown).



5) Low oil pressure (shutdown).6) Overspeed (shutdown).7) Low fuel level (warning).8) Low coolant level (warning/shutdown).9) Generator control not in automatic mode (warning).10) High battery voltage (warning).11) Low cranking voltage (warning).12) Low battery voltage (warning).13) Battery charger failure (warning).

b. Provide audible alarm with silence function.c. Provide lamp test function that illuminates all indicator lamps.

D. Remote Emergency Stop: Provide approved red, mushroom style remote emergency stopbutton where indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction.

2.06 GENERATOR SET ENCLOSUREA. Enclosure Type: Sound attenuating, weather protective.B. Enclosure Material: Steel or aluminum.C. Hardware Material: Stainless steel.D. Color: Manufacturer's standard.E. Access Doors: Lockable, with all locks keyed alike.F. Openings: Designed to prevent bird/rodent entry.G. External Drains: Extend oil and coolant drain lines to exterior of enclosure for maintenance

service.H. Sound Attenuating Enclosures: Line enclosure with non-hydroscopic, self-extinguishing

sound-attenuating material.I. Utilize an upward discharging radiator hood.J. Exhaust Silencers: Where exhaust silencers are mounted within enclosure in main engine

compartment, insulate silencer to minimize heat dissipation as necessary for operation at ratedload under worst case ambient temperature.

2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROLA. Perform production tests on generator sets at factory to verify operation and performance

characteristics prior to shipment. Include certified test report with submittals.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that the ratings and configurations of generator sets and auxiliary equipment areconsistent with the indicated requirements.

B. Verify that rough-ins for field connections are in the proper locations.C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive equipment.D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Install generator sets and associated accessories in accordance with NECA/EGSA 404.D. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access.E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.F. Use manufacturer's recommended oil and coolant, suitable for the worst case ambient

temperatures.



G. Provide natural gas piping in accordance with Section 23 1123.H. Provide engine exhaust piping in accordance with Section 23 5100, where not factory installed.

1. Include piping expansion joints, piping insulation, thimble, condensation trap/drain, raincap, hangers/supports, etc. as indicated or as required.

2. Do not exceed manufacturer's maximum back pressure requirements.I. Install exhaust silencer in accordance with Section 23 5100, where not factory installed.J. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.K. Identify system wiring and components in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 00 1400 - Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC), for additional requirements.B. Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative to prepare and start systems

and perform inspection and testing. Include manufacturer's detailed testing procedures and fieldreports with submittals.

C. Notify Delaware Solid Waste Authority and Architect at least two weeks prior to scheduledinspections and tests.

D. Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for schedulinginspections and tests and for observation by their personnel.

E. Provide all equipment, tools, and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing,including load bank and fuel.

F. Preliminary inspection and testing to include, at a minimum:1. Inspect each system component for damage and defects.2. Verify tightness of mechanical and electrical connections are according to manufacturer's

recommended torque settings.3. Check for proper oil and coolant levels.

G. Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.H. Perform acceptance test in accordance with NFPA 110.I. Provide field emissions testing where necessary for certification.J. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with

Contract Documents.3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to matchoriginal factory finish.

3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIESA. See Section 00 1720 - Project Record Documents, for closeout submittals.B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of system to Delaware Solid Waste Authority ,

and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.D. Training: Train Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's personnel on operation, adjustment, and

maintenance of system.1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with

additional training materials as required.2. Provide minimum of four hours of training.3. Instructor: Manufacturer's authorized representative.4. Location: At project site.

3.06 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed engine generator system from subsequent construction operations.



3.07 MAINTENANCEA. Provide to Delaware Solid Waste Authority a proposal as an alternate to the base bid, a

separate maintenance contract for the service and maintenance of engine generator system fortwo years from date of Substantial Completion; Include a complete description of preventivemaintenance, systematic examination, adjustment, inspection, and testing, with a detailedschedule.

B. Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Delaware Solid Waste Authority :1. Provide on-site response within 4 hours of notification.2. Include allowance for call-back service during normal working hours at no extra cost to

Delaware Solid Waste Authority .3. Delaware Solid Waste Authority will pay for call-back service outside of normal working

hours on an hourly basis, based on actual time spent at site and not including travel time;include hourly rate and definition of normal working hours in maintenance contract.

C. Maintain an on-site log listing the date and time of each inspection and call-back visit, thecondition of the system, nature of the trouble, correction performed, and parts replaced.

END OF SECTION


TRANSFER SWITCHES 26 3600 - 1

SECTION 26 3600TRANSFER SWITCHES


A. Transfer switches for low-voltage (600 V and less) applications and associated accessories:1. Automatic transfer switches.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.B. Section 14 2100 - Electric Traction Elevators: For interface with transfer switch.C. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding.D. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.F. Section 26 0573 - Power System Studies: Additional criteria for the selection of equipment

specified in this section.G. Section 26 2100 - Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance.H. Section 26 2818 - Enclosed Switches: Safety switches not listed for use as transfer switch

equipment.I. Section 26 3213 - Engine Generators: For interface with transfer switches.

1. Includes code requirements applicable to work of this section.2. Includes additional testing requirements.3. Includes related demonstration and training requirements.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.C. NEMA ICS 10 Part 1 - Industrial Control and Systems Part 1: Electromechanical AC Transfer

Switch Equipment; 2005.D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;


Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.F. NFPA 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems; 2013.G. UL 1008 - Transfer Switch Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Coordinate compatibility of transfer switches to be installed with work provided under othersections or by others.a. Engine Generators: See Section 26 3213.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment,or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and workingclearances required by NFPA 70.

3. Coordinate arrangement of equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements ofthe actual equipment to be installed.

4. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting.5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain

direction before proceeding with work.




product, including ratings, configurations, dimensions, finishes, weights, service conditionrequirements, and installed features.1. Where applicable, include characteristic trip curves for overcurrent protective devices upon

request.B. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating locations of system

components, required clearances, and field connection locations. Include systeminterconnection schematic diagrams showing all factory and field connections.1. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are based on testing with

specific overcurrent protective devices or time durations; indicate short-time ratings whereapplicable.

C. Specimen Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty.D. Evidence of qualifications for maintenance contractor (if different entity from installer).E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,examination, preparation, installation, and operation of product.

F. Manufacturer’s detailed field testing procedures.G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on system operation, equipment

programming and setup, replacement parts, and recommended maintenance procedures andintervals.1. Include contact information for entity that will be providing contract maintenance and

trouble call-back service.H. Executed Warranty: Submit documentation of final executed warranty completed in Delaware

Solid Waste Authority 's name and registered with manufacturer.I. Maintenance contracts.J. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of system components, installed circuiting

arrangements and routing, and final equipment settings.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with the following:1. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code).2. NFPA 110 (Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems); meet requirements for

system Level specified in Section 26 3213.B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a


1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Receive, inspect, handle, and store transfer switches in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or

heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to avoid damage to transfer

switch components, enclosure, and finish.1.08 WARRANTY

A. See Section 00 1720 - Project Record Documents, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide minimum one year manufacturer warranty covering repair or replacement due to

defective materials or workmanship.




A. Transfer Switches:1. ASCO Power Technologies: www.ascopower.com/#sle.2. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle.3. Same as manufacturer of engine generator(s) used for this project.

B. Products other than basis of design are subject to compliance with specified requirements andprior approval of Engineer. By using products other than basis of design, Contractor acceptsresponsibility for costs associated with any necessary modifications to related work, includingany design fees.

C. Source Limitations: Furnish transfer switches and accessories produced by a singlemanufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

2.02 TRANSFER SWITCHESA. Provide complete power transfer system consisting of all required equipment, conduit, boxes,

wiring, supports, accessories, system programming, etc. as necessary for a complete operatingsystem that provides the functional intent indicated.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.C. Applications:

1. Utilize open transition transfer unless otherwise indicated or required.2. Provide signal before transfer contacts for transfer switches serving elevators.

D. Construction Type: Either "contactor type" (open contact) or "breaker type" (enclosed contact)transfer switches complying with specified requirements are acceptable.

E. Automatic Transfer Switch:1. Transfer Switch Type: Automatic transfer switch.2. Transition Configuration: Open-transition (no neutral position), utilizing in-phase monitor.3. Voltage: As indicated on the drawings.4. Ampere Rating: As indicated on the drawings.5. Neutral Configuration: Solid neutral (unswitched), except as indicated.6. Load Served: As indicated on the drawings.

F. Comply with NEMA ICS 10 Part 1, and list and label as complying with UL 1008 for theclassification of the intended application (e.g. emergency, optional standby).

G. Do not use double throw safety switches or other equipment not specifically designed for powertransfer applications and listed as transfer switch equipment.

H. Load Classification: Classified for total system load (any combination of motor, electricdischarge lamp, resistive, and tungsten lamp loads with tungsten lamp loads not exceeding 30percent of the continuous current rating) unless otherwise indicated or required.

I. Switching Methods:1. Open Transition:

a. Provide break-before-make transfer without a neutral position that is not connected toeither source, and with interlocks to prevent simultaneous connection of the load toboth sources.

b. Where in-phase transfer is indicated, utilize in-phase monitor to initiate transfer whenphase angle difference between sources is near zero to limit in-rush currents.

2. Obtain control power for transfer operation from line side of source to which the load is tobe transferred.

J. Enclosures:1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the

following installation locations:a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1 or Type 12.



2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.K. Short Circuit Current Rating:

1. Withstand and Closing Rating: Provide transfer switches, when protected by the supplyside overcurrent protective devices to be installed, with listed withstand and closing ratingnot less than the available fault current at the installed location as determined by shortcircuit study performed in accordance with Section 26 0573.

L. Automatic Transfer Switches:1. Description: Transfer switches with automatically initiated transfer between sources;

electrically operated and mechanically held.2. Control Functions:

a. Automatic mode.b. Test Mode: Simulates failure of primary/normal source.c. Voltage and Frequency Sensing:

1) Undervoltage sensing for each phase of primary/normal source; adjustabledropout/pickup settings.

2) Undervoltage sensing for alternate/emergency source; adjustable dropout/pickupsettings.

3) Underfrequency sensing for alternate/emergency source; adjustabledropout/pickup settings.

d. Outputs:1) Contacts for engine start/shutdown (except where direct generator

communication interface is provided).2) Auxiliary contacts; one set(s) for each switch position.

e. Adjustable Time Delays:1) Engine generator start time delay; delays engine start signal to override

momentary primary/normal source failures.2) Transfer to alternate/emergency source time delay.3) Retransfer to primary/normal source time delay.4) Engine generator cooldown time delay; delays engine shutdown following

retransfer to primary/normal source to permit generator to run unloaded forcooldown period.

f. In-Phase Monitor (Open Transition Transfer Switches): Monitors phase angledifference between sources for initiating in-phase transfer.

g. Engine Exerciser: Provides programmable scheduled exercising of engine generatorselectable with or without transfer to load; provides memory retention during poweroutage.

3. Status Indications:a. Connected to alternate/emergency source.b. Connected to primary/normal source.c. Alternate/emergency source available.

4. Automatic Sequence of Operations:a. Upon failure of primary/normal source for a programmable time period (engine

generator start time delay), initiate starting of engine generator where applicable.b. When alternate/emergency source is available, transfer load to alternate/emergency

source after programmable time delay.c. When primary/normal source has been restored, retransfer to primary/normal source

after a programmable time delay. Bypass time delay if alternate/emergency sourcefails and primary/normal source is available.

d. Where applicable, initiate shutdown of engine generator after programmable enginecooldown time delay.




A. Verify that the ratings and configurations of transfer switches are consistent with the indicatedrequirements.

B. Verify that rough-ins for field connections are in the proper locations.C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive transfer switches.D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access.D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.E. Install transfer switches plumb and level.F. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted transfer switches on properly sized 3 inch high

concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000.G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.H. Identify transfer switches and associated system wiring in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative to observe installation and assist

in inspection and testing. Include manufacturer's detailed testing procedures and field reportswith submittals.

B. Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Automatic Transfer Switches:

1. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.2. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.22.3. The

insulation-resistance tests listed as optional are not required.D. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with

Contract Documents.3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to matchoriginal factory finish.

3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIESA. See Section 00 1720 - Project Record Documents, for closeout submittals.B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of transfer switches to Delaware Solid Waste

Authority , and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.D. Training: Train Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's personnel on operation, adjustment, and

maintenance of transfer switches.1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with

additional training materials as required.2. Provide minimum of four hours of training.3. Instructor: Manufacturer's authorized representative.4. Location: At project site.

3.06 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed transfer switches from subsequent construction operations.



3.07 MAINTENANCEA. Provide to Delaware Solid Waste Authority a proposal as an alternate to the base bid, a

separate maintenance contract for the service and maintenance of transfer switches for twoyears from date of Substantial Completion; Include a complete description of preventivemaintenance, systematic examination, adjustment, inspection, and testing, with a detailedschedule.

B. Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Delaware Solid Waste Authority :1. Provide on-site response within 4 hours of notification.2. Include allowance for call-back service during normal working hours at no extra cost to

Delaware Solid Waste Authority .3. Delaware Solid Waste Authority will pay for call-back service outside of normal working

hours on an hourly basis, based on actual time spent at site and not including travel time;include hourly rate and definition of normal working hours in maintenance contract.

END OF SECTION


LIGHTNING PROTECTION FORSTRUCTURES

26 4113 - 1

SECTION 26 4113LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES


A. Strike (air) terminals and interconnecting conductors.B. Grounding and bonding for lightning protection.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding: Electrical system grounds.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NFPA 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems; 2014.B. UL 96 - Lightning Protection Components; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordination with Roofing Work: Ensure adequate attachment of strike terminals and

conductors without damage to roofing.B. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a meeting at least at least two weeks prior to commencement

of any work affected by lightning protection system requirements to discuss prerequisites andcoordination required by other installers; require attendance by representatives of installerswhose work will be affected.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location and layout of air terminals, grounding electrodes, and bonding

connections to structure and other metal objects. Include terminal, electrode, and conductorsizes, and connection and termination details.1. Include data on actual ground resistance determined by field measurement in accordance

with NFPA 780.2. Include engineering analysis of equalization of potential to metal bodies within the

structure.3. Include access panels, test holes, and disconnecting means for maintenance.

C. Product Data: Provide dimensions and materials of each component, indication of testingagency listing, and installation instructions.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.E. Installation Certification: Submit copy of certification agency's approval.F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide recommended inspection and testing plan, including

recommended intervals, to achieve periodic maintenance as recommended in NFPA 780;provide customized plan reflecting actual installation configuration with specific installedcomponents identified.

G. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air terminals, grounding electrodes,bonding connections, and routing of system conductors in project record documents.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Maintain one copy of each referenced system design standard on site.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in lightning protection equipment with

minimum three years documented experience and member of the Lightning Protection Institute.C. Designer Qualifications: Person or entity, employed by installer, who specializes in lightning

protection system design with minimum three years documented experience.D. Installer Qualifications: Capable of providing the specified certification of the installed system.E. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.



26 4113 - 2

F. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as aNationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.


A. Lightning Protection Components:1. Advanced Lightning Technology (ALT): www.altfab.com.2. Harger Lightning and Grounding: www.harger.com.3. National Lightning Protection Corporation: www.theprotectionsource.com.4. Robbins Lightning, Inc: www.robbinslightning.com.5. thermOweld®, subsidiary of Continental Industries; division of Burndy LLC:

www.thermoweld.com.6. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

2.02 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMA. Lightning Protection System: Provide complete system complying with NFPA 780, including air

terminals, bonding, interconnecting conductors and grounding electrodes.1. Provide system that protects:

a. The entire structure.b. Open air areas within 100 feet of exterior walls at grade level.c. Open air areas within building footprint.

2. Coordinate with other grounding and bonding systems specified.3. Treat isolated non-grounded protruding metal items as specified by NFPA 780 for

heavy-duty stacks.4. Determine ground resistance by field measurement.5. Provide copper, bronze, or stainless steel components, except where aluminum is allowed

by NFPA 780.6. Provide disconnecting means and access panels or similar devices to allow complete

periodic inspection and testing as described by NFPA 780 Annex D.7. Provide system certified by Underwriters Laboratories or the Lightning Protection Institute.

B. Strike Terminals: Provide strike (air) terminals on the following:1. Roofs.2. Penthouse roofs.3. Parapets.4. Roof mounted equipment.5. Stacks.6. Chimneys.

2.03 COMPONENTSA. All Components: Complying with applicable requirements of UL 96.B. Strike (Air) Terminals: Aluminum, solid, with adhesive bases for single-ply roof installations.C. Strike Terminal for Chimney: Lead-coated copper.D. Grounding Rods: Solid copper.E. Ground Plate: Copper.F. Conductors: Aluminum cable.G. Connectors and Splicers: Aluminum.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.B. Coordinate work with installation of roofing and exterior and interior finishes.



26 4113 - 3

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with referenced system standards and as required for specified

certification.B. Connect conductors using mechanical connectors or exothermic welding process; protect

adjacent construction elements and finishes from damage.3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 00 1400 - Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC), for additional requirements.B. Perform visual inspection as specified in NFPA 780 as if this were a periodic follow-up

inspection.C. Perform continuity testing as specified in NFPA 780 as if this were testing for periodic

maintenance.D. Obtain the services of the specified certification agency to provide inspection and certification of

the lightning protection system, including performance of any other testing required by thatagency.

END OF SECTION



26 4113 - 4


SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 4300 - 1

SECTION 26 4300SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES


A. Surge protective devices for service entrance locations.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding.B. Section 26 2413 - Switchboards.C. Section 26 2416 - Panelboards.D. Section 26 2419 - Motor Control Centers.

1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMSA. EMI/RFI: Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference.B. SPD: Surge Protective Device.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.C. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

2013.D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.E. UL 1449 - Standard for Surge Protective Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordination: Coordinate size and location of overcurrent device compatible with the actual

surge protective device and location to be installed. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviationsfrom the contract documents to obtain direction prior to ordering equipment.

1.06 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 00 1300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Include detailed component information, voltage, surge current ratings, repetitive

surge current capacity, voltage protection rating (VPR) for all protection modes, maximumcontinuous operating voltage (MCOV), nominal discharge current (I-n), short circuit currentrating (SCCR), connection means including any required external overcurrent protection,enclosure ratings, outline and support point dimensions, weight, service condition requirements,and installed features.1. SPDs with EMI/RFI filter: Include noise attenuation performance.

C. Shop Drawings: Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections with wire andcircuit breaker/fuse sizes.

D. Certificates: Manufacturer's documentation of listing for compliance with the followingstandards:1. UL 1449.2. UL 1283 (for Type 2 SPDs).

E. Field Quality Control Test Reports.F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include application conditions and limitations of use


G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include information on status indicators and recommendedmaintenance procedures and intervals.



H. Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty and documentation of final executedwarranty completed in Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's name and registered withmanufacturer.

I. Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of surge protectivedevices.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution


this section with minimum three years documented experience.1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Store in a clean, dry space in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and afterinstallation.

1.10 WARRANTYA. See Section 00 1720 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide minimum five year warranty covering repair or replacement

of surge protective devices showing evidence of failure due to defective materials orworkmanship.

C. Exclude surge protective devices from any clause limiting warranty responsibility for acts ofnature, including lightning, stated elsewhere.


A. Basis of Design: Schneider Electric; Square D Brand Surgelogic Products as indicated underproduct article(s) below; www.surgelogic.com.

B. Factory-installed, Internally Mounted Surge Protective Devices:1. Same as manufacturer of equipment containing surge protective device, to provide a

complete listed assembly including SPD.C. Source Limitations: Furnish surge protective devices produced by a single manufacturer and

obtained from a single supplier.2.02 ALL SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Description: Factory-assembled surge protective devices (SPDs) for 60 Hz service, listed andclassified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated;system voltage as indicated on the drawings.

B. Protected Modes:1. Wye Systems: L-N, L-G, N-G, L-L.

C. UL 1449 Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs):1. Equivalent to basis of design.

D. UL 1449 Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): Not less than 115% of nominalsystem voltage.

E. Enclosure Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for thefollowing installation locations:1. Indoor clean, dry locations: Type 1.



2.03 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR SERVICE ENTRANCE LOCATIONSA. Unless otherwise indicated, provide factory-installed, internally mounted SPDs.B. List and label as complying with UL 1449, Type 1 when connected on line side of service

disconnect overcurrent device and Type 1 or 2 when connected on load side of servicedisconnect overcurrent device.

C. Provide SPDs utilizing field-replaceable modular or non-modular protection circuits.D. Surge Current Rating: Not less than 120 kA per mode/240 kA per phase.E. UL 1449 Nominal Discharge Current (I-n): 20 kA.F. UL 1449 Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): Not less than the available fault current at the

installed location as indicated on the drawings.G. Diagnostics:

1. Protection Status Monitoring: Provide indicator lights to report the protection for eachphase.

2. Alarm Notification: Provide indicator light and audible alarm to report alarm condition.Provide button to manually silence audible alarm.

H. Basis of Design: Schneider Electric; Square D Brand Surgelogic Products;www.surgelogic.com.1. Factory-installed, Internally Mounted Surge Protective Devices:

a. IMA Series: Replaceable modules; 200 kA SCCR; individually fused MOVs, thermalfusing; dry contacts; EMI/RFI filtering; surge counter; duty cycle tested for 20,000impulses; 10 year warranty.


A. Verify that the service voltage and configuration marked on the SPD are consistent with theservice voltage and configuration at the location to be installed.

B. Verify system grounding and bonding is in accordance with Section 26 0526, including bondingof neutral and ground for service entrance and separately derived systems where applicable. Donot energize SPD until deficiencies have been corrected.


A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.B. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and NFPA 70.C. Unless indicated otherwise, connect service entrance surge protective device on load side of

service disconnect main overcurrent device.D. Do not energize SPD until bonding of neutral and ground for service entrance and separately

derived systems is complete in accordance with Section 26 0526 where applicable. ReplaceSPDs damaged by improper or missing neutral-ground bond.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 00 1400.B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS Section 7.19.1.D. Procure services of a qualified manufacturer's representative to observe installation and assist

in inspection, testing, and adjusting. Include manufacturer's reports with field quality controlsubmittals.



3.04 CLEANINGA. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION


INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5100 - 1

SECTION 26 5100INTERIOR LIGHTING


A. Interior luminaires.B. Emergency lighting units.C. Exit signs.D. Ballasts and drivers.E. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.B. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.D. Section 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices.E. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Manual wall switches and wall dimmers.F. Section 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and

Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type); 2002.B. ANSI C82.11 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency Fluorescent

Lamp Ballasts - Supplements; 2011.C. IEC 60529 - Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code); 2013-08, with 2015

Corrigendum.D. IES LM-79 - Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State

Lighting Products; 2008.E. IES LM-80 - Approved Method: Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance of LED

Packages, Arrays, and Modules; Illuminating Engineering Society; 2015.F. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.G. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; 2006.H. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; 2006.I. NEMA 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic

Drivers and Discharge Ballasts; 2011.J. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; 2012.K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.L. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; 2015.M. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.N. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.O. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:



1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under othersections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc.required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims withmounting surfaces at installed locations.

2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping,equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other potential conflictsinstalled under other sections or by others.

3. Coordinate the placement of exit signs with furniture, equipment, signage or other potentialobstructions to visibility installed under other sections or by others.

4. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain directionprior to proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including

detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mountingrequirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, andceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposedfeatures.1. LED Luminaires:

a. Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.1.06 LEED SUBMITTALS: COMPLY WITH SECTION 018113

A. EQ Credit 6: Interior Lighting1. Product data for light fixtures in regularly occupied spaces, indicating luminance value

between 45 and 90 degrees from nadir.2. Product data for all lamps, indicating CRI value and rated life statement.


1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTIONA. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial lighting),

NECA/IESNA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's written instructions.B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for

installation.1.09 WARRANTY

A. See Section 00 1720 - Project Record Documents, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide three year manufacturer warranty for LED luminaires, including drivers.C. Provide five year pro-rata warranty for batteries for emergency lighting units.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES

A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.2.02 LUMINAIRES

A. Manufacturers:1. Acuity Brands, Inc: www.acuitybrands.com/#sle.2. Cooper Lighting, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.3. Hubbell Lighting, Inc: www.hubbelllighting.com/#sle.4. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; www.lutron.com/#sle.5. Philips Lighting North America Corporation; www.lightingproducts.philips.com/#sle.

B. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.C. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.D. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.



E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets,ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize andprotect the lamp and distribute the light.

F. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operatingsystem.

G. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without anydamage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.

H. Recessed Luminaires:1. Ceiling Compatibility: Comply with NEMA LE 4.2. Luminaires Recessed in Insulated Ceilings: Listed and labeled as IC-rated, suitable for

direct contact with insulation and combustible materials.I. LED Luminaires:

1. Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.2. Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.3. LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance,

calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.J. Luminaires Mounted in Continuous Rows: Provide quantity of units required for length

indicated, with all accessories required for joining and aligning.K. Light Fixtures in regularly occupied spaces: Luminance of less than 2,500 cd/m2 between 45

and 90 degrees from nadir.L. Lamps: Minimum 80 CRI and minimum rated life (or L70 for LED sources) of 24,000 hours (at

3-hour per start, if available) for 75 percent of connected lighting load.2.03 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. Manufacturers:1. Acuity Brands, Inc: www.acuitybrands.com/#sle.2. Cooper Lighting, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.3. Hubbell Lighting, Inc: www.hubbelllighting.com/#sle.

B. Description: Emergency lighting units complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state andlocal codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.

C. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20percent voltage drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lampsto integral battery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, andautomatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source.

D. Battery:1. Sealed maintenance-free lead calcium unless otherwise indicated.2. Size battery to supply all connected lamps, including emergency remote heads where

indicated.E. Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually

activate emergency operation.F. Provide low-voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge.

2.04 EXIT SIGNSA. Description: Exit signs complying with NFPA 101 and applicable state and local codes, and

listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.1. Number of Faces: Single- or double-face as indicated or as required for installed location.2. Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for installed location.

2.05 BALLASTS AND DRIVERSA. Manufacturers:

1. Alloy LED; www.alloyled.com/#sle.



2. General Electric Company/GE Lighting: www.gelighting.com/#sle.3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; www.lutron.com/#sle.4. Philips Lighting North America Corporation; www.usa.lighting.philips.com/#sle.

B. Ballasts/Drivers - General Requirements:1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal

and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards.3. Electronic Ballasts/Drivers: Inrush currents not exceeding peak currents specified in

NEMA 410.C. Dimmable LED Drivers:

1. Dimming Range: Continuous dimming from 100 percent to five percent relative lightoutput unless dimming capability to lower level is indicated, without flicker.

2. Control Compatibility: Fully compatible with the dimming controls to be installed.a. Wall Dimmers: See Section 26 2726.b. Daylighting Controls: See Section 26 0923.

2.06 ACCESSORIESA. Stems for Suspended Luminaires: Steel tubing, minimum 1/2" size, factory finished to match

luminaire or field-painted as directed.B. Threaded Rods for Suspended Luminaires: Zinc-plated steel, minimum 1/4" size, field-painted

as directed.C. Provide accessory plaster frames for luminaires recessed in plaster ceilings.


A. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and areproperly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

B. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.C. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to

luminaires.D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for

installation of luminaires provided under this section.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.D. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500

(commercial lighting) and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.F. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.G. Suspended Ceiling Mounted Luminaires:

1. Do not use ceiling tiles to bear weight of luminaires.2. Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires unless ceiling support

system is certified as suitable to do so.3. Secure surface-mounted and recessed luminaires to ceiling support channels or framing

members or to building structure.4. Secure pendant-mounted luminaires to building structure.5. Secure lay-in luminaires to ceiling support channels using listed safety clips at four

corners.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20410









































6. In addition to ceiling support wires, provide two galvanized steel safety wire(s), minimum12 gage, connected from opposing corners of each recessed luminaire to buildingstructure.

7. See appropriate Division 9 section where suspended grid ceiling is specified for additionalrequirements.

H. Recessed Luminaires:1. Install trims tight to mounting surface with no visible light leakage.

I. Suspended Luminaires:1. Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to bottom of luminaire.2. Install using the suspension method indicated, with support lengths and accessories as

required for specified mounting height.3. Provide minimum of two supports for each luminaire equal to or exceeding 4 feet nominal

length, with no more than 4 feet between supports.J. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to center

of luminaire.K. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.L. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.M. Emergency Lighting Units:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feedingnormal lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lightingcontrols.

N. Exit Signs:1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding

normal lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lightingcontrols.

O. Install lamps in each luminaire.3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect each product for damage and defects.B. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.C. Test self-powered exit signs, emergency lighting units, and fluorescent emergency power supply

units to verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply.D. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or

replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or asdirected by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.

B. Aim and position adjustable emergency lighting unit lamps to achieve optimum illumination ofegress path as required or as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction.

C. Exit Signs with Field-Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properlydesignate egress path as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting),

and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material andrestore finishes to match original factory finish.

3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIESA. See Section 00 1720 - Project Record Documents, for closeout submittals.



















































3.07 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION







EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5600 - 1

SECTION 26 5600EXTERIOR LIGHTING


A. Exterior luminaires.B. Poles and accessories.C. Luminaire accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Materials and installation requirements for concrete

bases for poles.B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding.C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.D. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.E. Section 26 0650.16 - Lighting Fixture Schedule.F. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Receptacles for installation in poles.G. Section 26 2813 - Fuses.H. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AASHTO LTS - Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires

and Traffic Signals; American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 6thEdition, with 2015 Interim Revisions.

B. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge andLow-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type); 2002.

C. ANSI C82.11 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency FluorescentLamp Ballasts - Supplements; 2011.

D. ANSI C136.10 - American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment -Locking-Type Photocontrol Devices and Mating Receptacles - Physical and ElectricalInterchangeability and Testing; 2010.

E. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code; 2012.F. IES LM-63 - IESNA Standard File Format for Electronic Transfer of Photometric Data and

Related Information; 2002 (Reaffirmed 2008).G. IES LM-79 - Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State

Lighting Products; 2008.H. IES LM-80 - Approved Method: Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance of LED

Packages, Arrays, and Modules; Illuminating Engineering Society; 2015.I. IES RP-8 - Recommended Practice for Roadway Lighting; 2014.J. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.K. NECA/IESNA 501 - Standard for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems; 2006.L. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.M. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.




1. Coordinate placement of poles and associated foundations with utilities, curbs, sidewalks,trees, walls, fences, striping, etc. installed under other sections or by others. Coordinateelevation to obtain specified foundation height.

2. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain directionprior to proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including

detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mountingrequirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, weight, effective projectedarea (EPA), and installed accessories; include model number nomenclature clearly marked withall proposed features.1. LED Luminaires:

a. Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.b. Include IES LM-79 test report upon request.

2. Provide electronic files of photometric data certified by a National Voluntary LaboratoryAccreditation Program (NVLAP) lab or independent testing agency in IES LM-63 standardformat upon request.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of pole foundations,luminaires, and any pull or junction boxes.

1.06 LEED SUBMITTALS: COMPLY WITH SECTION 018113A. SS Credit 6: Light Pollution Reduction

1. For exterior luminaires, documentation indicating backlight, uplight, and glare ratings(BUG) rating.


1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's written

instructions.B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for

installation.1.09 WARRANTY

A. See Section 00 1720 - Project Record Documents, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide three year manufacturer warranty for all LED luminaires, including drivers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES

A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.B. Substitutions: See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements.

2.02 LUMINAIRESA. Manufacturers:

1. Acuity Brands, Inc: www.acuitybrands.com/#sle.2. Cooper Lighting, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.3. Hubbell Lighting, Inc: www.hubbelllighting.com/#sle.4. Philips Lighting North America Corporation; www.lightingproducts.philips.com/#sle.

B. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.C. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.D. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.



E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets,ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize andprotect the lamp and distribute the light.

F. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,connectors, hardware, poles, foundations, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for acomplete operating system.

G. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without anydamage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.

2.03 POLESA. Manufacturers:

1. Acuity Brands, Inc: www.acuitybrands.com/#sle.2. Cooper Lighting, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.3. Hubbell Lighting, Inc: www.hubbelllighting.com/#sle.4. Philips Lighting North America Corporation; www.lightingproducts.philips.com/#sle.

B. All Poles:1. Provide poles and associated support components suitable for the luminaire(s) and

associated supports and accessories to be installed.2. Structural Design Criteria:

a. Comply with AASHTO LTS.b. Wind Load: Include effective projected area (EPA) of luminaire(s) and associated

supports and accessories to be installed.3. Material: Steel, unless otherwise indicated.4. Shape: Square straight, unless otherwise indicated.5. Finish: Match luminaire finish, unless otherwise indicated.6. Mounting: Install on concrete foundation, height as indicated on the drawings, unless

otherwise indicated.7. Unless otherwise indicated, provide with the following features/accessories:

a. Top cap.b. Handhole.c. Anchor bolts with leveling nuts or leveling shims.d. Anchor base cover.e. Brackets.

C. Metal Poles: Provide ground lug, accessible from handhole.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and areproperly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

B. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.C. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to

luminaires.D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for

installation of luminaires provided under this section.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.D. Install luminaires in accordance with NECA/IESNA 501.E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.



F. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.G. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to center

of luminaire.H. Pole-Mounted Luminaires:

1. Maintain the following minimum clearances:a. Comply with IEEE C2.

2. Foundation-Mounted Poles:a. Provide cast-in-place concrete foundations for poles as indicated, in accordance with

Section 03 3000.1) Install anchor bolts plumb per template furnished by pole manufacturer.2) Position conduits to enter pole shaft.

b. Install foundations plumb.c. Install poles plumb, using leveling nuts or shims as required to adjust to plumb.d. Tighten anchor bolt nuts to manufacturer's recommended torque.e. Install non-shrink grout between pole anchor base and concrete foundation, leaving

small channel for condensation drainage.f. Install anchor base covers or anchor bolt covers as indicated.

3. Grounding:a. Bond luminaires, metal accessories, metal poles, and foundation reinforcement to

branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.4. Install separate service conductors, size as indicated on drawings, from each luminaire

down to handhole for connection to branch circuit conductors.I. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.J. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.K. Install lamps in each luminaire.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 00 1400 - Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC), for additional requirements.B. Inspect each product for damage and defects.C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.D. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or

replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or asdirected by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.

B. Luminaires with Field-Rotatable Optics: Position optics according to manufacturer's instructionsto achieve lighting distribution as indicated or as directed by Architect.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean surfaces according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt,

fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish.3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. See Section 00 1720 - Project Record Documents, for closeout submittals.3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.END OF SECTION


STRUCTURED CABLING 27 1000 - 1

SECTION 27 1000STRUCTURED CABLING


A. Communications system design requirements.B. Communications pathways.C. Copper cable and terminations.D. Fiber optic cable and interconnecting devices.E. Communications identification.F. Cabling and pathways inside building(s).G. Distribution frames, cross-connection equipment, enclosures, and outlets.H. Grounding and bonding the telecommunications distribution system.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 8413 - Penetration Firestopping.B. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 0536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. CEA-310 - Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment; Consumer Electronics

Association; Revision E, 2005.B. NECA/BICSI 568 - Standard for Installing Building Telecommunications Cabling; National

Electrical Contractors Association; 2006.C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.D. TIA-455-21 - FOTP-21 - Mating Durability of Fiber Optic Interconnecting Devices; 2012.E. TIA-526-14 - Optical Power Loss Measurement of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant; Rev

C, 2015.F. TIA-568 (SET) - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Set; 2015.G. TIA-569 - Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces; 2015d, with Addendum (2016).H. TIA-606 - Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure; 2017c.I. TIA-607 - Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer

Premises; 2015c, with Addendum (2017).J. ANSI/J-STD-607 - Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for

Telecommunications; Rev A, 2002.K. UL 444 - Communications Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.L. UL 1863 - Communications-Circuit Accessories; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Coordinate requirements for service entrance and entrance facilities with CommunicationsService Provider.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of other utilities or obstructionswithin the spaces dedicated for communications equipment.

3. Coordinate arrangement of communications equipment with the dimensions and clearancerequirements of the actual equipment to be installed.




B. Arrange for Communications Service Provider to provide service.C. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section to review

service requirements and details with Communications Service Provider representative.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each

product.1. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.2. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Show compliance with requirements on isometric schematic diagram ofnetwork layout, showing cable routings, telecommunication closets, rack and enclosure layoutsand locations, service entrance, and grounding, prepared and approved by BICSI RegisteredCommunications Distribution Designer (RCDD).

D. Manufacturer Qualifications.E. Evidence of qualifications for installer.F. Field Test Reports.G. Project Record Documents: Prepared and approved by BICSI Registered Communications

Distribution Designer (RCDD).1. Record actual locations of outlet boxes and distribution frames.2. Show as-installed color coding, pair assignment, polarization, and cross-connect layout.3. Identify distribution frames and equipment rooms by room number on drawings.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: List of all components with part numbers, sources of supply,and operation and maintenance instructions; include copy of project record documents.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: At least 3 years experience manufacturing products of the type

specified.B. Installer Qualifications: A company having at least 3 years experience in the installation and

testing of the type of system specified, and:1. Employing a BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD).2. Supervisors and installers factory certified by manufacturers of products to be installed.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.B. Keep stored products clean and dry.

1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 00 1720 - Project Record Documents, for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective Work within a 2 year period after Date of Substantial Completion.


A. Cabling and Equipment:1. 3M Communications Technologies: solutions.3m.com.2. TE Connectivity: www.te.com.3. Siemon Company: www.siemon.com.

2.02 SYSTEM DESIGNA. Provide a complete permanent system of cabling and pathways for voice and data

communications, including cables, conduits and wireways, pull wires, support structures,enclosures and cabinets, and outlets.1. Comply with TIA-568 (SET) (cabling) and TIA-569 (pathways) (commercial standards).



2. Provide fixed cables and pathways that comply with NFPA 70 and TIA-607 and are ULlisted or third party independent testing laboratory certified.

3. Provide connection devices that are rated for operation under conditions of 32 to 140degrees F at relative humidity of 0 to 95 percent, noncondensing.

4. In this project, the term plenum is defined as return air spaces above ceilings, inside ducts,under raised floors, and other air-handling spaces.

B. System Description:1. Building Entrance Cable: as indicated by utility.2. Backbones - Within Building: Fiber optic, 28-fiber.3. Offices and Work Areas: Provide as indicated on drawings in each work area.4. Classrooms: as indicated on drawings.

C. Main Distribution Frame (MDF): Centrally located support structure for terminating horizontalcables that extend to telecommunications outlets, functioning as point of presence to externalservice provider.1. Locate main distribution frame as indicated on the drawings.2. Capacity: As required to terminate all cables required by design criteria plus minimum 25

percent spare space.D. Backbone Cabling: Cabling, pathways, and terminal hardware connecting intermediate

distribution frames (IDF's) with main distribution frame (MDF), wired in star topology with maindistribution frame at center hub of star.

2.03 PATHWAYSA. Conduit: As specified in Section 26 0533.13; provide pull cords in all conduit.B. Cable Trays: As specified in Section 26 0536.

2.04 COPPER CABLE AND TERMINATIONSA. Copper Horizontal Cable: TIA/EIA-568 Category 6 solid conductor unshielded twisted pair

(UTP), 24 AWG, 100 ohm; 4 individually twisted pairs; covered with blue jacket and complyingwith all relevant parts of and addenda to latest edition of TIA/EIA-568 and UL 444.1. In locations other than in plenums, provide NFPA 70 type CMG general purpose, CMR

riser-rated, or type CMP plenum-rated cable.2. In plenums, provide NFPA 70 type CMP plenum-rated cable.

B. Copper Cable Terminations: Insulation displacement connection (IDC) type using appropriatetool; use screw connections only where specifically indicated.

C. Jacks and Connectors: Modular RJ-45, non-keyed, terminated with 110-style insulationdisplacement connectors (IDC); high impact thermoplastic housing; suitable for and complyingwith same standard as specified horizontal cable; UL 1863 listed.1. Performance: 500 mating cycles.2. Voice and Data Jacks: 8-position modular jack, color-coded for both T568A and T568B

wiring configurations.2.05 FIBER OPTIC CABLE AND INTERCONNECTING DEVICES

A. Fiber Optic Interconnecting Devices:1. Connector Type: Type LC.2. Connector Performance: 500 mating cycles, when tested in accordance with TIA-455-21.3. Maximum Attenuation/Insertion Loss: 0.3 dB.

B. Fiber Optic Backbone Cable: 24-fiber, multimode 62.5/125 um, complying with TIA-492AAAA;covered with orange cable jacket and complying with relevant portions of and addenda to latestedition of TIA/EIA-568.1. In locations other than in plenums, provide NFPA 70 type OFNR nonconductive-riser-rated

or type OFNP nonconductive-plenum-rated cable.2. In plenums, provide NFPA 70 type OFNP nonconductive-plenum-rated cable.



C. Fiber Optic Adapters and Connectors: Duplex SC, push-on-push-off type, multimode adaptorswith zirconia ceramic alignment sleeves; complying with relevant parts and addenda to latestedition of TIA/EIA-568 and with maximum attenuation of 0.3 dB at 1300 nm with less than 0.2dB change after 500 mating cycles when tested in accordance with TIA-455-21.

2.06 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTSA. Comply with TIA-606.

2.07 CROSS-CONNECTION EQUIPMENTA. Connector Blocks for Category 6 and Up Cabling: Type 110 insulation displacement

connectors; capacity sufficient for cables to be terminated plus 25 percent spare.B. Patch Panels for Copper Cabling: Sized to fit EIA standard 19 inch wide equipment racks; 0.09

inch thick aluminum; cabling terminated on Type 110 insulation displacement connectors;printed circuit board interface.1. Jacks: Non-keyed RJ-45, suitable for and complying with same standard as cable to be

terminated; maximum 48 ports per standard width panel.2. Capacity: Provide ports sufficient for cables to be terminated plus 25 percent spare.3. Labels: Factory installed laminated plastic nameplates above each port, numbered

consecutively; comply with TIA/EIA-606 using encoded identifiers.4. Provide incoming cable strain relief and routing guides on back of panel.5. Patch Cords: Provide one patch cord for each pair of patch panel ports.

C. Patch Panels for Fiber Optic Cabling: Sized to fit EIA standard 23 inch wide equipment racks;0.09 inch thick aluminum.1. Adaptors: As specified above under FIBER OPTIC CABLING; maximum of 24 duplex

adaptors per standard panel width.2. Labels: Factory installed laminated plastic nameplates above each port, numbered

consecutively; comply with TIA/EIA-606 using encoded identifiers.3. Provide incoming cable strain relief and routing guides on back of panel.4. Provide rear cable management tray at least 8 inches deep with removable cover.5. Provide dust covers for unused adaptors.6. Patch Cords: Provide one patch cord for each pair of patch panel ports.

2.08 ENCLOSURESA. Backboards: Interior grade plywood without voids, 3/4 inch thick; UL-labeled fire-retardant.

1. Do not paint over UL label.B. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: CEA-310 standard 19 inch wide component racks.

1. Wall Mounted Racks: 8 gage aluminum brackets, hinged to allow access to back ofinstalled components.

2. Floor Mounted Racks: 16 gage steel construction with corrosion resistant finish; verticaland horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs, and groundinglug.

3. Wall Mounted Cabinets: Front doors with locks, louvered side panels, top and bottomcable access, and ground lug.a. Cover inside of cabinet back with plywood backboard as specified.

4. Cabinets: 16 gage steel construction with corrosion resistant finish.5. Locks: Keyed alike.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Comply with latest editions and addenda of TIA-568 (SET) (cabling), TIA-569 (pathways),TIA-607 (grounding and bonding), NECA/BICSI 568, NFPA 70, and SYSTEM DESIGN asspecified in PART 2.

B. Comply with Communication Service Provider requirements.C. Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with TIA-607 and NFPA 70.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=TIA-607






3.02 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYSA. Install pathways with the following minimum clearances:

1. 48 inches from motors, generators, frequency converters, transformers, x-ray equipment,and uninterruptible power systems.

2. 12 inches from power conduits and cables and panelboards.3. 5 inches from fluorescent and high frequency lighting fixtures.4. 6 inches from flues, hot water pipes, and steam pipes.

B. Conduit, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 0533.13:C. Conduit:

1. Do not install more than 2 (two) 90 degree bends in a single horizontal cable run.2. Leave pull cords in place where cables are not initially installed.3. Conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceilings, and floors except

where specifically indicated to be exposed.a. Conduit may remain exposed to view in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and

telecommunications rooms.b. Treat conduit in crawl spaces and under floor slabs as if exposed to view.c. Where exposed to view, install parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and

structural members.d. Under floor slabs, locate conduit at 12 inches, minimum, below vapor retarder; seal

penetrations of vapor retarder around conduit.D. Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with ANSI/J-STD-607 and NFPA 70.E. Firestopping: Seal openings around pathway penetrations through fire-rated walls, partitions,

floors, and ceilings in accordance with Section 07 8400.3.03 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND CABLING

A. Cabling: 1. Do not bend cable at radius less than manufacturer's recommended bend radius; for

unshielded twisted pair use bend radius of not less than 4 times cable diameter.2. Do not over-cinch or crush cables.3. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended cable pull tension.4. When installing in conduit, use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer and do not

chafe or damage outer jacket.B. Copper Cabling:

1. Category 6 and Above: Maintain cable geometry; do not untwist more than 1/2 inch frompoint of termination.

2. For 4-pair cables in conduit, do not exceed 25 pounds pull tension.3. Use T568B wiring configuration.4. Copper Cabling Not in Conduit: Use only type CMP plenum-rated cable as specified.

C. Fiber Optic Cabling:1. Prepare for pulling by cutting outer jacket for 10 inches from end, leaving strength

members exposed. Twist strength members together and attach to pulling eye.2. Support vertical cable at intervals as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Wall-Mounted Racks and Enclosures:1. Install to plywood backboards only, unless otherwise indicated.2. Mount so height of topmost panel does not exceed 78 inches above floor.

E. Floor-Mounted Racks and Enclosures: Permanently anchor to floor in accordance withmanufacturer's recommendations.

F. Identification:1. Use wire and cable markers to identify cables at each end.

G. Field-Installed Labels: Comply with TIA/EIA-606 using encoded identifiers.1. Cables: Install color coded labels on both ends.























































2. Outlets: Label each jack on its face plate as to its type and function, with a uniquenumerical identifier.

3. Patch Panels: Label each jack as to its type and function, with a unique numericalidentifier.

4. Patch Cords: Label with jack identifier corresponding to initial installation.3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 00 1400 - Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC), for additional requirements.B. Comply with inspection and testing requirements of specified installation standards.C. Visual Inspection:

1. Inspect cable jackets for certification markings.2. Inspect cable terminations for color coded labels of proper type.3. Inspect outlet plates and patch panels for complete labels.4. Inspect patch cords for complete labels.

D. Testing - Copper Cabling and Associated Equipment:1. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks.2. Category 6 and Above Links: Perform tests for wire map, length, attenuation, NEXT, and

propagation delay.E. Testing - Fiber Optic Cabling:

1. Backbone: Perform optical fiber end-to-end attenuation test using an optical time domainreflectometer (OTDR) and manufacturer's recommended test procedures; performverification acceptance tests and factory reel tests.

2. Multimode Backbone: Perform tests in accordance with TIA-526-14.F. Final Testing: After all work is complete, including installation of telecommunications outlets,

and telephone dial tone service is active, test each voice jack for dial tone.END OF SECTION





























ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMSAND DATABASE MANAGEMENT

28 1317 - 1

SECTION 28 1317ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT


A. Feenics Management SystemB. Intelligent ControllerC. Proximity Card Readers

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (600 V and Less).B. Section 27 10 05 - Structured Cabling for Voice and Data

1.03 REFERENCES -A. Federal Communications Commission (FCC):

1. FCC Part 15 - Radio Frequency Devices2. FCC Part 68 - Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

a. UL294 - Access Control System Unitsb. UL1076 - Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):a. NFPA70 - National Electrical Code

5. Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA):a. RS232C - Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Communications

Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchangeb. RS485 - Electrical Characteristics of Generators and Receivers for use in Balanced

Digital Multi-Point Systems6. Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS):

a. Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) (FIPS 197)b. FIPS 201: Personal Identity Verification (PIV) of Federal Employees and Contractorsc. Homeland Security Presidential Directive 12 (HSPD-12)

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONA. The intent of this document is to specify the minimum criteria for the design, supply, installation,

and activation and expansion of the Delaware Solid Waste Authority Security ManagementSystem (hereinafter referred to as the System, which shall be a modular and network enabledsecurity management system.

B. The Security Management System shall function as an electronic access control system andshall integrate alarm monitoring, CCTV, digital video, ID badging and database managementinto a single platform. A modular and network-enabled architecture shall allow maximumversatility for tailoring secure and dependable access and alarm monitoring solutions.

C. In order to ensure integration capabilities and prompt, competent support, the System Integrator(security vendor) shall hold a Certification and shall maintain a minimum of 5 CertifiedTechnicians within the local (50 mile service radius of the project) service facility. All softwareprogramming with the Owner’s Security Integrator of record. This Security Integration firm isAdvantech headquartered in Dover, DE. The point of contact is Ryan Kelly,[email protected] .

D. Installer Qualifications: : Installer shall be certified Feenics Security Dealer with a minimum of20 years’ experience with similar projects.1. REQUIRED additional Installer Certifications - All certifications must be achieved prior to

the project bid date - certifications obtained after the bid date will not be accepted:2. Microsoft Certified Professional3. Microsoft Certified System Administrator

mailto:[email protected]









28 1317 - 2

4. CompTIA A+ Certified5. CompTIA Network + Certified6. ProWatch/MaxPro Video Manager Certified7. Advanced Macro & MGP Integration Certified8. Platinum Pro-Watch Certification9. Salto Inspired Business Partner (IBP)10. Indusoft Certified Programmer

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Provide system wiring diagram showing each device and wiring connection

required.C. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.D. Test Reports: Indicate satisfactory completion of required tests and inspections.E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product.

F. Project Record Documents: During construction maintain record drawings indicating location ofequipment and wiring. Submit an electronic version of record drawings for the SecurityManagement System not later than Substantial Completion of the project.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data,customized to the Security Management System installed. Include system and operatormanuals.

H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for State of Delaware's use in maintenance ofproject.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: The security management system is based on products ofFeenics, Inc., 301-2310 St. Laurent Blvd, Ottawa, ON Canada. Web site: www.Feenics.com.

B. Substitutions will not be considered.C. Security Management System (SMS) Software: Keep by Feenics

2.02 SMS FIELD HARDWAREA. (SMS) Hardware: The SMS shall be equipped with the access control field hardware required to

receive events and execute access granted and denied decisions. Field hardware must becapable of accepting on the fly commands from System Operators. All field hardware must bedesigned to meet UL 294 requirements. Hardware must be industry standard non-proprietaryand supported by a minimum of fifteen (15) other software manufacturers.1. Intelligent System Controllers (ISC): FN-LP1501, FN-LP3202, FN-LP3200, FN-LP4502,

FN-EP1501, FN-EP3202, FN-EP3200, FN-EP4502, FN-MS-ICS, FN-M5-IC, ProWatch6k1IC, ProWatch PRO32IC

2. Intelligent Single Door Controller: FN-EP1501, FN-LP15013. Intelligent Dual Reader Controller: FN-LP3202, FN-LP4502, FN-EP3202, FN-EP4502,

FN-M5-2SRP, FN-M5,2RP4. Input Control Module (ICM): FN-16IN, FN-MS-I8S, FN-M5-20IN5. Output Control Module (OCM): FN-16OUT, FN-MS-R8S, FN-M5-16DOR, FN-M5-16DO6. Single Reader Interface Module (SRI): FN-RIM17. Dual Reader Interface Module (DRI): FN-RIM28. Multi Reader Interface Module (MRI): FN-MS-ACS, FN-M5-8RP, FN-M5-2K9. Dual PoE Reader Interface Module: FN-RIM2e (OSDP only)10. Communication Star Multiplexer: FN-MUX8, FN-M5-COM

























































28 1317 - 3

11. UL, CUL, and CE listed power supplies and enclosuresB. SMS Authentication HardwareC. Hold-Up/Panic Switches:

1. Listed and labeled as complying with UL 634 or UL 636 as applicable.2. Hold-Up/Panic Buttons: Manual push button operation.

2.03 VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS (VMS) - REQUIRED:A. With integration to VMS, Security Management System shall control multiple sources of video

subsystems in a facility to collect, manage and present video in a clear and concise manner.VMS intelligently determines the capabilities of each subsystem across various sites, allowingvideo management of any analog or digital video device through a unified configuration andviewer. Disparate video systems are normalized and funneled through a common videoexperience. Drag and drop cameras from the Security Management System hardware tree intoVMS views. Leverage Security Management System alarm integration and advanced featuressuch as pursuit that help the operator track a target through a set of sequential cameras with asingle click to select a new central camera and surrounding camera views. All softwareprogramming with the Owner’s Security Integrator of record. This Security Integration firm isAdvantech headquartered in Dover, DE. The point of contact is Ryan Kelly,[email protected] .1. Manufacturer(s) and part numbers:

a. Milestone VMS (Basis of Design)2.04 INTERCOM INTERFACE - REQUIRED:

A. The interface shall provide control of both remote and master intercom stations from within theSecurity Management System application. The Security Management System shall allow theuser to define the site, channel, description, and address as well as provide a checkbox forprimary station.

B. Administrators shall have the capability to program a list of intercom functions that report to thealarm-monitoring module as events. These functions shall coincide with the intercom functionsprovided with the intercom system. For each intercom function, Security Management Systemadministrators shall be able to define an alphanumeric event description 1 to 40 characters inlength and shall also be able to set the parameter value of that function.

C. The intercom interface shall allow for secondary annunciation of intercom calls, events, andalarms in the alarm-monitoring window. Intercom reporting to the alarm monitoring window shallreport as any other access control alarm and shall have the same annunciation and displayproperties as access control alarms.

D. All intercom calls, events, and alarms that report into the Security Management System shall bestored in the system database for future audit trail and reporting capabilities. Intercom eventsshall include but not be limited to: Station busy, Station free, Intercom call to busy station,Intercom call to private station, Station disconnected, Function dialed outside connection,Intelligent station ID, Station reset, Station lamp test, Audio program changed, Group huntoccurred, Mail message, Digit dialed during connection, Direct access key pressed, Handset offhook, M-key pressed, C-key pressed

E. Manufacturer(s) and part numbers:1. Axis


A. Examine site conditions to determine site conditions are acceptable without qualifications. Notify Owner in writing if deficiencies are found. Starting work is evidence that site conditionsare acceptable.























































28 1317 - 4

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Security Management System, including but not limited to access control, alarm monitoring,

CCTV and ID badging system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

B. Supervise installation to appraise ongoing progress of other trades and contracts, makeallowances for all ongoing work, and coordinate the requirements of the installation of theSecurity Management System..

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000.B. The access control, video management system, video badging system and intercom system

shall be tested in accordance with the following:1. The contractor shall conduct a complete inspection and test of all installed access control

and security monitoring equipment. This includes testing and verifying connection toequipment of other divisions such as life safety and elevators.

2. The contractor shall provide staff to test all devices and all operational features of thesystem for witness by the owner's representative and the authority having jurisdiction. Theowner's representative prior to acceptance must witness all testing.

3. The testing and certification shall take place as follows:a. System shall be tested in conjunction with the manufacturer's representative.b. All deficiencies noted in the above test shall be corrected.c. Test results shall be submitted to the consultant or owner's representative.d. System test witnessed by owner's representative and correction of any deficiencies

noted.e. The owner's representative shall accept the system.f. The authority having jurisdiction shall witness system test. Any deficiencies noted

shall be corrected.3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required response to each.3.05 MAINTENANCE

A. See Section 01 7000 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating tomaintenance service.

END OF SECTION






































FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 4600 - 1

SECTION 28 4600FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 8413 - Penetration Firestopping: Materials and methods for work to be performed bythis installer.

B. Section 21 1300 - Fire Suppression Sprinklers: Supervisory, alarm, and actuating devicesinstalled in sprinkler system.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.B. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code; 2016.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 00 1300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Drawings must be prepared as reproducible drawings.C. Evidence of designer qualifications.D. Design Documents: Submit all information required for plan review and permitting by authorities

having jurisdiction, including but not limited to floor plans, riser diagrams, and description ofoperation:1. Copy (if any) of list of data required by authority having jurisdiction.2. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out to the extent known at the time.3. Clear and concise description of operation, with input/output matrix similar to that shown in

NFPA 72 Appendix A-7-5-2.2(9), and complete listing of software required.4. System zone boundaries and interfaces to fire safety systems.5. Location of all components, circuits, and raceways; mark components with identifiers used

in control unit programming.6. Circuit layouts; number, size, and type of raceways and conductors; conduit fill

calculations; spare capacity calculations; notification appliance circuit voltage dropcalculations.

7. List of all devices on each signaling line circuit, with spare capacity indicated.8. Manufacturer's detailed data sheet for each component, including wiring diagrams,

installation instructions, and circuit length limitations.9. Description of power supplies; if secondary power is by battery include calculations

demonstrating adequate battery power.10. Certification by either the manufacturer of the control unit or by the manufacturer of each

other component that the components are compatible with the control unit.11. Certification by the manufacturer of the control unit that the system design complies with

Contract Documents.12. Certification by Contractor that the system design complies with Contract Documents.

E. Evidence of installer qualifications.F. Evidence of instructor qualifications; training lesson plan outline.G. Evidence of maintenance contractor qualifications, if different from installer.H. Inspection and Test Reports:

1. Submit inspection and test plan prior to closeout demonstration.2. Submit documentation of satisfactory inspections and tests.3. Submit NFPA 72 "Inspection and Test Form," filled out.

I. Operating and Maintenance Data: See Section 00 1720 for additional requirements; revise andresubmit until acceptable; have one set available during closeout demonstration:1. Complete set of specified design documents, as approved by authority having jurisdiction.






























2. Additional printed set of project record documents and closeout documents, bound or filedin same manuals.

3. Contact information for firm that will be providing contract maintenance and troublecall-back service.

4. List of recommended spare parts, tools, and instruments for testing.5. Replacement parts list with current prices, and source of supply.6. Detailed troubleshooting guide and large scale input/output matrix.7. Preventive maintenance, inspection, and testing schedule complying with NFPA 72;

provide printed copy and computer format acceptable to Delaware Solid Waste Authority .8. Detailed but easy to read explanation of procedures to be taken by non-technical

administrative personnel in the event of system trouble, when routine testing is beingconducted, for fire drills, and when entering into contracts for remodeling.

J. Project Record Documents: See Section 00 1720 for additional requirements; have one setavailable during closeout demonstration:1. Complete set of floor plans showing actual installed locations of components, conduit, and

zones.2. "As installed" wiring and schematic diagrams, with final terminal identifications.3. "As programmed" operating sequences, including control events by device, updated

input/output chart, and voice messages by event.K. Closeout Documents:

1. Certification by manufacturer that the system has been installed in compliance withmanufacturer's installation requirements, is complete, and is in satisfactory operatingcondition.

2. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out completely and signed by installer andauthorized representative of authority having jurisdiction.

3. Maintenance contract.L. Maintenance Materials, Tools, and Software: Furnish the following for Delaware Solid Waste

Authority 's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 00 1650 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Furnish spare parts of same manufacturer and model as those installed; deliver in original

packaging, labeled in same manner as in operating and maintenance data and place inspare parts cabinet.

1.04 DESCRIPTIONA. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard 72 for Protected

Premises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by this specification. Thesystem shall be electrically supervised and monitor the integrity of all conductors. SYSTEMMUST BE COMPLETELY INTEGRATED AND DEPLOYED BY A SINGULAR SYSTEMSINTEGRATOR LICENSED AND CERTIFIED IN ALL SPECIFIED PRODUCTS.

B. The facility shall have an emergency voice alarm communication system. Digitally storedmessage sequences shall notify the building occupants that a fire or life safety condition hasbeen reported. Message generator(s) shall be capable of automatically distributing up to eight(8) simultaneous, unique messages to appropriate audio zones within the facility based on thetype and location of the initiating event. The Fire Command Center (FCC) shall also supportEmergency manual voice announcement capability for both system wide or selected audiozones, and shall include provisions for the system operator to override automatic messagessystem wide or in selected zones.

C. The system shall be support additional, alternate Fire Command Centers, which shall becapable of simultaneous monitoring of all system events. Alternate Fire Command Centersshall also support an approved method of transferring the control functions to an alternate FireCommand Center when necessary. All Fire Command Centers shall be individually capable ofassuming Audio Command functions such as Emergency Paging, audio zone control functions,and Firefighter's Telephone communication functions.

























































D. Each designated zone shall transmit separate and different alarm, supervisory and troublesignals to the Fire Command Center (FCC) and designated personnel in other buildings at thesite via a multiplex communication network.

E. The fire alarm system shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001:2008 certified company and meetthe requirements of BS EN9001: ANSI/ASQC Q9001-1994

F. The FACP and peripheral devices shall be manufactured 100% by a single U.S. manufacturer(or division thereof). It’s acceptable for peripheral devices to be manufactured outside of theU.S. by a division of the U.S. based parent company.

G. The system and its components shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed under theappropriate UL testing standard as listed herein for fire alarm applications and the installationshall be in compliance with the UL listing.

H. The installing company shall employ NICET (minimum Level II Fire Alarm Technology)technicians on site to guide the final checkout and to ensure the systems integrity.

I. In order to ensure integration capabilities and prompt, competent support, the System Integrator(security vendor) shall hold a Certification and shall maintain a minimum of 5 CertifiedTechnicians within the local (50 mile service radius of the project) service facility. All softwareprogramming with the Owner’s Security Integrator of record. This Security Integration firm isAdvantech headquartered in Dover, DE. The point of contact is Ryan Kelly,[email protected]

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Copies of Design Criteria Documents: Maintain at the project site for the duration of the project,

bound together, an original copy of NFPA 72, the relevant portions of applicable codes, andinstructions and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction; deliver to Delaware Solid WasteAuthority upon completion.

B. Designer Qualifications: NICET Level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician orregistered fire protection engineer, employed by fire alarm control panel manufacturer,Contractor, or installer, with experience designing fire alarm systems in the jurisdictional area ofthe authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum 3 years documented experience installing fire alarmsystems of the specified type and providing contract maintenance service as a regular part oftheir business.1. Authorized representative of control unit manufacturer; submit manufacturer's certification

that installer is authorized; include name and title of manufacturer's representative makingcertification.

2. Installer Personnel: At least 2 years of experience installing fire alarm systems.3. Supervisor: NICET level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician; furnish name and

address.D. Maintenance Contractor Qualifications: Same entity as installer or different entity with specified

qualifications.E. Instructor Qualifications: Experienced in technical instruction, understanding fire alarm theory,

and able to provide the required training; trained by fire alarm control unit manufacturer.1.06 WARRANTY

A. See Section 00 1720 - Project Record Documents, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide control panel manufacturer's warranty that system components other than wire and

conduit are free from defects and will remain so for 3-YEARS after date of SubstantialCompletion.

C. Provide installer's warranty that the installation is free from defects and will remain so for 1 yearafter date of Substantial Completion.





















































PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL OR NETWORK NODE:

A. Main FACP or network node shall be a NOTIFIER Model NFS2-640 and shall contain amicroprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU) and power supply in an economi-calspace saving single board design. The CPU shall communicate with and control the followingtypes of equipment used to make up the system: intelligent addressable smoke and thermal(heat) detectors, addressable modules, printer, annunciators, and other sys-tem controlleddevices.

2.02 SYSTEM CAPACITY AND GENERAL OPERATIONA. The FACP shall be capable of communicating on Noti-Fire-Net over a Local Area Network

(LAN) or Wide Area Network (WAN) utilizing a peer-to-peer, inherently regenerativecommunication format and protocol. The network shall support communication speed up to 100Mb and support up to 200 panels / nodes per network.

B. Each network node shall provide, or be capable of 318 intelligent / addressable devices per SLCloop.The Notification Appliance Circuits shall be programmable to Synchronize with SystemSensor, Gentex and Wheelock Notification Appliances.

C. The system shall include a full featured operator interface control and annunciation panel thatshall include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), individual color coded system status LEDs,and an alphanumeric keypad with easy touch rubber keys for the field programming and controlof the fire and gas detection system.

D. The system shall be programmable, configurable, and expandable in the field without the needfor special tools, PROM programmers or PC based programmers. It shall not requirereplacement of memory ICs to facilitate programming changes.

E. The system shall allow the programming of any input to activate any output or group of outputs.Systems that have limited programming (such as general alarm), have complicatedprogramming (such as a diode matrix), or require a laptop personal computer are notconsidered suitable substitutes.

F. The FACP shall support up to 20 logic equations, including "and," "or," and "not," or time delayequations to be used for advanced programming. Logic equations shall require the use of a PCwith a software utility designed for programming.

G. The FACP or each network node shall provide the following features:1. Drift compensation to extend detector accuracy over life. Drift compensation shall also

include a smoothing feature, allowing transient noise signals to be filtered out.2. Detector sensitivity test, meeting requirements of NFPA 72.3. Maintenance alert, with two levels (maintenance alert/maintenance urgent), to warn of

excessive smoke detector dirt or dust accumulation.4. Up to nine sensitivity levels for alarm, selected by detector. The alarm level range shall be

0.5 to 2.35 percent per foot for photoelectric detectors, 0.5 to 2.5 percent per foot forionization detectors,, 0.5 to 4.0 percent per foot for acclimate detectors and 1.0 to 4.0percent per foot for multi-criteria (IntelliQuad and IntelliQuad PLUS) detectors The systemshall also support sensitive advanced detection laser detectors with an alarm level rangeof .02 percent per foot to 2.0 percent per foot. The system shall also include up to ninelevels of Pre-alarm, selected by detector, to indicate impending alarms to maintenancepersonnel.

5. The ability to display or print system reports.6. Alarm verification, with counters and a trouble indication to alert maintenance personnel

when a detector enters verification 20 times.7. PAS presignal, meeting NFPA 72 requirements.8. Self optimizing pre-alarm for advanced fire warning, which allows each detector to learn its

particular environment and set its prealarm level to just above normal peaks.9. Cross zoning with the capability of counting: two detectors in alarm, two software zones in

alarm, or one smoke detector and one thermal detector.

























































10. Control-by-time for non-fire operations, with holiday schedules.11. Day/night automatic adjustment of detector sensitivity.12. Device blink control for sleeping areas.13. The FACP shall be capable of coding main panel node notification circuits in March Time

(120 PPM), Temporal (NFPA 72 A-2-2.2.2), and California Code. Panel notification circuits(NAC 1,2,3 and 4) shall also support Two-Stage operation, Canadian Dual Stage (3minutes) and Canadian Dual Stage (5 minutes). Two stage operation shall allow 20 PulsesPer Minute (PPM) on alarm and 120 PPM after 5 minutes or when a second deviceactivates. Canadian Dual stage is the same as Two-Stage except will only switch tosecond stage by activation of Drill Switch 3 or 5 minute timer. The panel shall also providea coding option that will synchronize specific strobe lights designed to accept a specific"sync pulse."

14. Network Communication15. For flexibility and to ensure program validity, an optional Windows(TM) based program

utility shall be available. This program shall be used to off-line program the system withbatch upload/download, and have the ability to upgrade the manufacturers (FLASH)system code changes. This program shall also have a verification utility, which scans theprogram files, identifying possible errors. It shall also have the ability to compare oldprogram files to new ones, identifying differences in the two files to allow complete testingof any system operating changes. This shall be in compliance with the NFPA 72requirements for testing after system modification.a. This utility shall provide the ability to create and print NFPA style Test and Inspection

reportsb. This utility shall provide the ability to create and print Device Maintenence information

H. The 80-character display keypad shall be an easy to use QWERTY type keypad, similar to a PCkeyboard. This shall be part of the standard system and have the capability to command allsystem functions, entry of any alphabetic or numeric information, and field programming. Twodifferent password levels shall be provided to prevent unauthorized system control orprogramming.1. When configured with an optional 640-character display the display shall use 10 "soft" keys

for screen navigation or to accomplish dedicated programming functions. Fullprogramming access shall require use of a laptop and the proper programming utility. With the 640 display option the system shall support distributed audio amplifiers on thedigital audio loop of the Digital Voice Command.

2.03 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUITS (SLC)A. Each FACP or FACP network node shall support up to two SLCs. Each SLC interface shall

provide power to and communicate with up to 159 intelligent detectors (onization, photoelectric,multi-criteria, thermal, laser, fire/CO) and 159 intelligent modules (monitor, control, relay,releasing) for a loop capacity of 318 devices. The addition of the optional second loop shalldouble the device capacity, supporting a total of 636 devices. Each SLC shall be capable ofNFPA 72 Style 4, Style 6, or Style 7 (Class A or B) wiring.

B. CPU shall receive analog information from all intelligent detectors to be processed to determinewhether normal, alarm, prealarm, or trouble conditions exist for each detector. The softwareshall automatically maintain the detector's desired sensitivity level by adjusting for the effects ofenvironmental factors, including the accumulation of dust in each detector. The analoginformation shall also be used for automatic detector testing and for the automatic determinationof detector maintenance requirements.

2.04 SERIAL INTERFACESA. The system shall include two serial EIA-232 interfaces. Each interface shall be a means of

connecting UL Listed Information Technology Equipment (ITE) peripherals.1. EIA-232 interface shall be used to connect an UL-Listed 40 or 80 column printer. Printers

that are not UL-Listed are not considered acceptable substitutes.

























































2. The system shall include an EIA-485 port for the serial connection of optional annunciatorsand remote LCD displays.

3. The EIA-485 interface may be used for network connection to a proprietary-receiving unit.2.05 DIGITAL VOICE COMMAND CENTER

A. The Digital Voice Command Center located with the FACP, shall contain all equipment requiredfor all audio control, emergency telephone system control, signaling and supervisory functions.This shall include speaker zone indication and control, telephone circuit indication and control,digital voice units, microphone and main telephone handset. The DVC shall support up to 8channels of voice when configured with Digital Audio Amplifiers and 4 channels of voice whenemploying the optional analog output card. Each DVC shall support up to 32 digital audioamplifiers.

B. Function: The Voice Command Center equipment shall perform the following functions:1. Operate as a supervised multi-channel emergency voice communication system.2. Operate as a two-way emergency telephone system control center.3. Audibly and visually annunciate the active or trouble condition of every speaker circuit and

emergency telephone circuit.4. Audibly and visually annunciate any trouble condition for digital tone and voice units

required for normal operation of the system.5. Provide all-call Emergency Paging activities through activation of a single control switch.6. As required, provide vectored paging control to specific audio zones via dedicated control

switches.7. Provide a factory recorded "library" of voice messages and tones in standard WAV. File

format, which may be edited and saved on a PC running a current Windows® operatingsystem.

8. Provide a software utility capable of off-line programming for the DVCoperation and theaudio message files. This utility shall support the creation of new programs as well asediting and saving existing program files. Uploading or downloading the DVC shall notinhibit the emergency operation of other nodes on the fire alarm network.

9. Support an optional mode of operation with four analog audio outputs capable of beingused with UL 864 fire-listed analog audio amplifiers and SLC controlled switching.

10. The Digital Voice Command shall be modular in construction, and shall be capable ofbeing field programmable without requiring the return of any components to themanufacturer and without requiring use of any external computers or other programmingequipment.

11. The Digital Voice Command and associated equipment shall be protected againstunusually high voltage surges or line transients.

C. The emergency voice alarm communication system shall incorporate a Two-way emergencytelephone communication system.1. Two-way emergency telephone communication circuits shall be supervised for open and

short circuit conditions.2. Two-way emergency telephone (Fire Fighter Telephone) communication shall be

supported between the Digital Voice Audio Command Center and up to seven (7) remoteFire Fighter's Telephone locations simultaneously on a telephone riser.

3. Means shall be provided to connect FFT voice communications to the speaker circuits inorder to allow voice paging over the speaker circuit from a telephone handset.

2.06 AUDIO AMPLIFIERSA. The Audio Amplifiers will provide Audio Power (@25 Volt RMS or 70 RMS ) for distribution to

speaker circuits.B. Multiple audio amplifiers may be mounted in a single enclosure, either to supply incremental

audio power, or to function as an automatically switched backup amplifier(s).C. The audio amplifier shall include an integral power supply, and shall provide built-in LED

indicators for the following conditions:1. Earth Fault on DAP A (Digital Audio Port A)


























































2. Earth Fault on DAP B (Digital Audio Port B)3. Audio Amplifier Failure Detected Trouble4. Active Alarm Bus input5. Audio Detected on Aux Input A6. Audio Detected on Aux Input B7. Audio Detected on Firefighter's Telephone Riser8. Receiving Audio from digital audio riser9. Short circuit on speaker circuit 110. Short circuit on speaker circuit 211. Short circuit on speaker circuit 312. Short circuit on speaker circuit 413. Data Transmitted on DAP A14. Data Received on DAP A15. Data Transmitted on DAP B16. Data Received on DAP B17. Board failure18. Active fiber optic media connection on port A (fiber optic media applications)19. Active fiber optic media connection on port B (fiber optic media applications)20. Power supply Earth Fault21. Power supply 5V present22. Power supply conditions - Brownout, High Battery, Low Battery, Charger Trouble

D. The audio amplifier shall provide the following built-in controls:1. Amplifier Address Selection Switches2. Signal Silence of communication loss annunciation Reset3. Level adjustment for background music4. Enable/Disable for Earth Fault detection on DAP A5. Enable/Disable for Earth Fault detection on DAP A6. Switch for 2-wire/4-wire FFT riser

E. Adjustment of the correct audio level for the amplifier shall not require any special tools or testequipment.

F. Includes audio input and amplified output supervision, back up input, and automatic switch overfunction, (if primary amplifier should fail).

G. System shall be capable of backing up digital amplifiers.H. One-to-one backup shall be provided by either a plug-in amplifier card or a designated backup

amplifier of identical model as the primary amplifier.I. One designated backup amplifier shall be capable of backing up multiple primary amplifiers

mounted in the same or adjacent cabinets.J. Multi-channel operation from a single amplifier shall be supported by the addition of an optional

plug-in amplifier card.2.07 AUDIO MESSAGE GENERATOR (PRERECORDED VOICE)/SPEAKER CONTROL:

A. Each initiating zone or intelligent device shall interface with an emergency voice communicationsystem capable of transmitting a prerecorded voice message to all speakers in the building.

B. Actuation of any alarm initiating device shall cause a prerecorded message to sound over thespeakers. The message shall be repeated four (4) times. Pre- and post-message tones shallbe supported.

C. A built-in microphone shall be provided to allow paging through speaker circuits.D. System paging from emergency telephone circuits shall be supported.E. The audio message generator shall have the following indicators and controls to allow for proper

operator understanding and control:1. Lamp Test























































2. Trouble3. Off-Line Trouble4. Microphone Trouble5. Phone Trouble6. Busy/Wait7. Page Inhibited8. Pre/Post Announcement Tone

2.08 CONTROLS WITH ASSOCIATED LED INDICATORS:A. Speaker Switches/Indicators

1. The speaker circuit control switches/indicators shall include visual indication of active andtrouble status for each speaker circuit in the system.

2. The speaker circuit control panel shall include switches to manually activate or deactivateeach speaker circuit in the system.

B. Emergency Two-Way Telephone Control Switches/Indicators1. The emergency telephone circuit control panel shall include visual indication of active and

trouble status for each telephone circuit in the system.2. The telephone circuit control panel shall include switches to manually activate or

deactivate each telephone circuit in the system.2.09 SPECIFIC SYSTEM OPERATIONS

A. Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: A means shall be provided for adjusting the sensitivity of anyor all addressable intelligent detectors in the system from the system keypad. Sensitivity rangeshall be within the allowed UL window and have a minimum of 9 levels.

B. Alarm Verification: Each of the intelligent addressable smoke detectors in the system may beindependently selected and enabled to be an alarm verified detector. The alarm verificationdelay shall be programmable from 0 to 60 seconds and each detector shall be able to beselected for verification. The FACP shall keep a count of the number of times that each detectorhas entered the verification cycle. These counters may be displayed and reset by the properoperator commands.

C. Point Disable: Any addressable device in the system may be enabled or disabled through thesystem keypad.

D. Point Read: The system shall be able to display or print the following point status diagnosticfunctions:1. Device status2. Device type3. Custom device label4. View analog detector values5. Device zone assignments

E. System History Recording and Reporting: The fire alarm control panel shall contain a historybuffer that will be capable of storing up to 800 events. Up to 200 events shall be dedicated toalarm and the remaining events are general purpose. Systems that do not have dedicated alarmstorage, where events are overridden by non-alarm type events, are not suitable substitutes.Each of these activations will be stored and time and date stamped with the actual time of theactivation. The contents of the history buffer may be manually reviewed, one event at a time, orprinted in its entirety. The history buffer shall use non-volatile memory. Systems that use volatilememory for history storage are not acceptable substitutes.

F. Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert: The fire alarm control panel shall automaticallyinterrogate each intelligent detector and shall analyze the detector responses over a period oftime. If any intelligent detector in the system responds with a reading that is above or belownormal limits, then the system will enter the trouble mode, and the particular detector will beannunciated on the system display, and printed on the optional printer. This feature shall in noway inhibit the receipt of alarm conditions in the system, nor shall it require any specialhardware, special tools or computer expertise to perform.

























































G. Pre-Alarm Function: The system shall provide two levels of pre-alarm warning to give advancenotice of a possible fire situation. Both pre-alarm levels shall be fully field adjustable. The firstlevel shall give an audible indication at the panel. The second level shall give an audibleindication and may also activate control relays. The system shall also have the ability to activatelocal detector sounder bases at the pre-alarm level, to assist in avoiding nuisance alarms.

H. Software Zones: The FACP shall support 142 independent programmable software zonesI. The fire alarm control panel shall include a walk test feature. It shall include the ability to test

initiating device circuits and notification appliance circuits from the field without returning to thepanel to reset the system. Operation shall be as follows:1. Alarming an initiating device shall activate programmed outputs, which are selected to

participate in walk test, for 3 seconds.2. Introducing a trouble into the initiating device shall activate the programmed outputs for 8

seconds.3. All devices tested in walk test shall be recorded in the history buffer.

J. Multiple agent releasing zones: The system shall support up to 10 releasing zones to protectagainst 10 independent hazards. Releasing zones shall provide up to three cross-zone and fourabort options to satisfy any local jurisdiction requirements.

K. Mass Notification Override:The system shall be UL 2572 listed for Mass Notification and shallbe capable, based on the Risk Analysis, of being programmed so that MassNotification/Emergency Communications events take precedence over fire alarm events.

2.10 CONVENTIONAL ASPIRATING DETECTIONA. An optional air aspiration detection system shall be available.B. The aspirating system shall support multiple sensitivity settings.C. The aspirating system shall operate from 24 VDC.D. The aspirating system shall provide alarm and trouble relays used to activate a fire alarm

control panel.2.11 ASPIRATION SYSTEM INTERFACE:

A. The system shall be capable of supporting Interface Modules for integrating Vesda Aspirationdetectors into SLC loop of the fire alarm control panel. The Interface Module shall support up to19 detectors detectors, each SLC loop shall support one interface module.

2.12 HIGH LEVEL ASPIRATION SYSTEM INTERFACE:A. The system shall be capable of supporting a High Level Interface for Vesda Aspirating

Detection Systems. The interface shall support up to 100 detectors and allow the fire alarmnetwork to monitor and control events on the aspiration system.

2.13 PORTABLE EMERGENCY TELEPHONE HANDSET JACKA. Portable emergency telephone handset jacks shall be flush mounted on stainless steel plates

as indicated on the plans. Jacks shall be approved for emergency telephone system application.B. Insertion of a portable handset plug into a jack shall send a signal to the fire command center,

which shall audibly and visually indicate the on-line condition, and shall sound a "ring" indicationin the handset.

C. The two-way emergency telephone system shall support a minimum of seven (7) handsets online without degradation of the signal.

2.14 FIXED EMERGENCY TELEPHONE HANDSETA. The telephone cabinet shall be painted red and clearly labeled as "Emergency Telephone." The

cabinets shall be located where shown on drawings.B. The handset cradle shall have a switch connection so that lifting the handset off of the cradle

shall send a signal to the fire command center, which shall audibly and visually indicate itson-line (off-hook) condition.





















































C. On activating the remote phone, the phone earpiece shall sound a telephone ring signal until themaster handset is lifted.

D. The two-way emergency telephone system shall support a minimum of seven (7) handsets online without degradation of the signal.

E. All interfaces and associated equipment are to be protected so that they will not be affected byvoltage surges or line transients consistent with UL standard 864.

2.15 COMMUNICATORSA. The UDACT shall be compact in size, mounting in a standard module position of the fire alarm

control cabinet. Optionally, the UDACT shall have the ability for remote mounting, up to 6,000feet from the fire alarm control panel. The wire connections between the UDACT and the controlpanel shall be supervised with one pair for power and one pair for multiplexed communication ofoverall system status. Systems that utilize relay contact closures are not acceptable.

B. The UDACT shall include connections for dual telephone lines (with voltage detect), perUL/NFPA/FCC requirements. It shall include the ability for split reporting of panel events up totwo different telephone numbers.1. The UDACT shall be capable of transmitting events in 4+2, SIA, and Contact ID.2. Communication shall include vital system status such as:

a. Independent Zone (Alarm, trouble, non-alarm, supervisory)b. Independent Addressable Device Statusc. AC (Mains) Power Lossd. Low Battery and Earth Faulte. System Off Normalf. 12 and 24 Hour Test Signalg. Abnormal Test Signal (per UL requirements)h. EIA-485 Communications Failurei. Phone Line Failure

C. The UDACT shall support independent zone/point reporting when used in the Contact ID format.In this format the UDACT shall support transmission of up to 3,064 points. This enables thecentral station to have exact details concerning the origin of the fire or response emergency.

D. The UDACT shall be capable of being programmed with the same programming utility as thehost FACP, and saved, edited and uploaded and downloaded using the utility. UDACT shall becapable of being programmed online or offline. The programming utility shall also supportupgrading UDACT operating firmware.

E. The UDACT shall be capable of generating Central Station reports providing detailedprogramming information for each point along with the central station point address.

F. An IP or IP/GSM Communicator option shall be available to interface to the UDACT and becapable of transmitting signals over the internet/intranet or Cellular (GSM) network to acompatible receiver.

2.16 SMOKE CONTROL ANNUNCIATORA. On/Auto/Off switches and status indicators (LEDS) shall be provided for monitoring and manual

control of each fan, damper, HVAC control unit, stairwell pressurization fan, and smoke exhaustfan. To ensure compliance the units supplied shall meet the following UL categories: UUKL,PAZX, UDTZ, QVAX as well as the requirements of NFPA 90A, HVAC, and NFPA 92A & 92B,Smoke Control. The control System shall be field programmable for either 90A operation or92A/B operation to allow for future use and system expansion.

B. The OFF LED shall be Yellow, the ON LED shall be green, the Trouble/Fault LED shall beAmber/Orange for each switch. The Trouble/Fault indicator shall indicate a trouble in the controland/or monitor points associated with that switch. In addition, each group of eight switches shallhave two LEDS and one momentary switch which allow the following functions: An Amber LEDto indicate an OFF-NORMAL switch position, in the ON or OFF position; A Green LED toindicate ALL AUTO switch position; A Local Acknowledge/Lamp Test momentary switch.
























































C. Each switch shall have the capability to monitor and control two addressable inputs and twoaddressable outputs. In all modes, the ON and OFF indicators shall continuously follow thedevice status not the switch position. Positive feedback shall be employed to verify correctoperation of the device being controlled. Systems that indicate on/off/auto by physical switchposition only are not acceptable.

D. All HVAC switches (i.e., limit switches, vane switches, etc.) shall be provided and installed bythe HVAC contractor.

E. It shall be possible to meet the requirements mentioned above utilizing wall mounted customgraphic.

2.17 GATEWAY & WEBSERVER OPTIONSA. Common Alerting Protocol (CAP) Gateway: The system shall support an optional CAP Gateway

(Common Alerting Protocol). The CAP Gateway translates fire system messages to industrystandard CAP messages for integration with CAP-compliant clients. A CAP gateway shall beavailable from the fire alarm control panel manufacturer.

B. LEDSIGN Gateway: The system shall support an optional and proprietary LEDSIGN Gateway tointerface to LED signs that will automatically display emergency messages. The signs shall becapable of storing up to 100 messages that can be activated via system programming with theability to be manually overridden. The Sign Gateway shall support up to 10 independent signs,each sign capable of playing an independent message. Multiple LEDSIGN Gateways can beused in network applications. An LEDSIGN gateway shall be available from the fire alarmcontrol panel manufacturer.

C. BACnet Interface Gateway: The system shall be capable of being interfaced with BACNetcompliant clients. A BACnet interface supporting BACnet/IP communication shall be availablefrom the fire alarm control panel manufacturer.

D. MODbus Interface Gateway: The system shall be capable of being interfaced with MODbuscompliant clients. A MODbus interface supporting MODbus/TCP communication shall beavailable from the fire alarm control panel manufacturer.

E. Noti-Fire-Net Gateway: The system shall support an IP based gateway to enable the panel orlocal Noti-Fire-Net to be connected to an ONYXWorks workstation via the Internet or Intranet.This gateway shall also support the ability to integrate the system to an interactive firefighter’sdisplay. The Noti-Fire-Net Gateway shall be available from the fire alarm control manufacturer.

F. Webserver: The system shall support a webserver allowing remote connection via the Internetor Intranet. Authorized users will have the ability to view panel/network history, event status anddevice properties. The webserver shall also support sending event information via email or textto up to 50 registered users, the webserver shall be available from the fire alarm control panelmanufacturer.

G. Web Portal Interface: The system shall be capable of being interfaced with a web portal tointegrate with Inspection and Service Manager utilities. The web portal and inspection andservice manager utilities shall be available from the fire alarm control panel manufacturer.

2.18 SYSTEM COMPONENTS - ADDRESSABLE DEVICESA. Addressable Devices - General

1. Addressable devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade, decimal addressswitches. Devices shall be capable of being set to an address in a range of 001 to 159.

2. Addressable devices, which use a binary-coded address setting method, such as aDIP-switch, are not an allowable substitute. Addressable devices that require the addressbe programmed using a special tool or programming utility are not an allowable substitute.

3. Detectors shall be intelligent (analog) and addressable, and shall connect with two wires tothe fire alarm control panel Signaling Line Circuits.

4. Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide dual alarm and power/pollingLEDs. Both LEDs shall flash green under normal conditions, indicating that the detector isoperational and in regular communication with the control panel, and both LEDs shall be
























































placed into steady red illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm conditionhas been detected. If required, the LED flash shall have the ability to be removed from thesystem program. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect anexternal remote alarm LED.

5. The fire alarm control panel shall permit detector sensitivity adjustment through fieldprogramming of the system. The panel on a time-of-day basis shall automatically adjustsensitivity.

6. Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dustaccumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance.The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirementsof NFPA Standard 72.

7. The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a separate twist-lock base withtamper proof feature. Base options shall include a sounder base with a built-in (local)sounder rated at 85 DBA minimum, a relay base and an isolator base designed for Style 7applications. The system shall also support an intelligent programmable sounder base, theprogrammable sounder base shall be capable of providing multiple tones based onprogramming and at a minimum be capable of providing a Temp-4 tone for CO (CarbonMonoxide) activation and a Temp-3 tone for fire activations and be capable of beingsynchronized with other programmable sounder bases and common area notificationappliances; 85 DBA minimum.

8. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm conditionand report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detectoritself (by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command from the controlpanel.

9. Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall useto identify the type of device (ION, PHOTO, THERMAL).

10. Detectors will operate in an analog fashion, where the detector simply measures itsdesigned environment variable and transmits an analog value to the FACP based onreal-time measured values. The FACP software, not the detector, shall make thealarm/normal decision, thereby allowing the sensitivity of each detector to be set in theFACP program and allowing the system operator to view the current analog value of eachdetector.

11. Addressable devices shall store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall useto identify the type of device.

12. A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test detectors and modules. Detectors shallreport an indication of an analog value reaching 100% of the alarm threshold.

13. Addressable modules shall mount in a 4-inch square (101.6 mm square), 2-1/8 inch (54mm) deep electrical box. An optional surface mount Lexan enclosure shall be available.

B. Addressable Manual Fire Alarm Box (manual station)1. Addressable manual fire alarm boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data

to the panel representing the state of the manual switch and the addressablecommunication module status; NOTIFIER model # NBG-12LX. They shall use a keyoperated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual emergency operation,they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key.

2. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a keytype reset.

3. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operatinginstructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stationsin raised letters, 1.75 inches (44 mm) or larger.

C. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector: The intelligent photoelectric smoke detector shall beNOTIFIER model # FSP-851 and shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal tomeasure smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panelrepresenting the analog level of smoke density.

D. Intelligent VIEW® Laser Photo Smoke Detector: The intelligent laser photo smoke detector shallbe a spot type detector, NOTIFIER model # FSL-751, that incorporates an extremely bright




























































laser diode and an integral lens that focuses the light beam to a very small volume near areceiving photo sensor. The scattering of smoke particles shall activate the photo sensor.1. The laser detector shall have conductive plastic so that dust accumulation is reduced

significantly.2. The intelligent laser photo detector shall have nine sensitivity levels and be sensitive to a

minimum obscuration of 0.02 percent per foot.3. The laser detector shall not require expensive conduit, special fittings or PVC pipe.4. The intelligent laser photo detector shall support standard, relay, isolator and sounder

detector bases.5. The laser photo detector shall not require other cleaning requirements than those listed in

NFPA 72. Replacement, refurbishment or specialized cleaning of the detector head shallnot be required.

6. The laser photo detector shall include two bicolor LEDs that flash green in normaloperation and turn on steady red in alarm.

E. Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector: The intelligent ionization smoke detector shall beNOTIFIER model # FSI-851 and shall use the dual-chamber ionization principal to measureproducts of combustion and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panelrepresenting the analog level of products of combustion.

F. Intelligent Multi Criteria Acclimating Detector: The intelligent multi-criteria Acclimate® Plus™detector shall be an addressable device, NOTIFIER model # FAPT-851, that is designed tomonitor a minimum of photoelectric and thermal technologies in a single sensing device. Thedesign shall include the ability to adapt to its environment by utilizing a built-in microprocessor todetermine its environment and choose the appropriate sensing settings. The detector designshall allow a wide sensitivity window, no less than 1 to 4% per foot obscuration. This detectorshall utilize advanced electronics that react to slow smoldering fires and thermal properties allwithin a single sensing device.1. The microprocessor design shall be capable of selecting the appropriate sensitivity levels

based on the environment type it is in (office, manufacturing, kitchen etc.) and then havethe ability to automatically change the setting as the environment changes (as walls aremoved or as the occupancy changes).

2. The intelligent multi criteria detection device shall include the ability to combine the signalof the thermal sensor with the signal of the photoelectric signal in an effort to react hastilyin the event of a fire situation. It shall also include the inherent ability to distinguishbetween a fire condition and a false alarm condition by examining the characteristics of thethermal and smoke sensing chambers and comparing them to a database of actual fireand deceptive phenomena.

G. Intelligent Thermal Detectors: The intelligent thermal detectors shall be NOTIFIER FST- seriesaddressable devices rated at 135 degrees Fahrenheit (58 degrees Celsius) and have arate-of-rise element rated at 15 degrees F (9.4 degrees C) per minute. A high heat thermaldetector rated at 190 degrees Fahrenheit shall also be available. The thermal detectors shallconnect via two wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit.

H. Intelligent Duct Smoke Detector: The smoke detector housing shall accommodate an intelligentphotoelectric detector that provides continuous analog monitoring and alarm verification fromthe panel. When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the FACP, andappropriate action taken to change over air handling systems to help prevent the rapiddistribution of toxic smoke and fire gases throughout the areas served by the duct system. TheIntelligent Duct Smoke Detector shall support the installation of addressable Photoelectricdetector capable or being tested remotely. The Intelligent Duct Detector housing shall be model# DNR(W) and the remote test capable photoelectric smoke detector shall be NOTIFIER model# FSP-851R.

I. IntelliQuad™ Advanced Multi-Criteria Intelligent Detector1. Intelligent multi-criteria fire detector shall be a NOTIFIER model number FSC-851. Smoke

detector shall be an addressable intelligent multi-criteria smoke detector. The detectorshall be comprised of four sensing elements, including a photoelectric (light-scattering)



























































particulate sensor, an electrochemical carbon monoxide (CO) sensor, a daylight-filteredinfrared sensor and solid state thermal sensor(s) rated at 135°F (57.2°C). The deviceshall be able to indicate distinct smoke and heat alarms.

2. The intelligent multi-criteria detection device shall include the ability to combine thesignal of the photoelectric signal with other sensing elements in an effort to react quickly inthe event of a fire situation. It shall also include the inherent ability to distinguish betweena fire condition and a nuisance alarm condition. The product design shall be capable ofselecting the appropriate sensitivity levels based on the environment type chosen by userin which it is installed (office, manufacturing, kitchen etc.) and then have the ability toautomatically change the setting as the environment changes.

3. The detector shall be capable of automatically adjusting its sensitivity by means of driftcompensation and smoothing algorithms. The detector shall be capable of automaticallyadjusting its sensitivity by means of drift compensation and smoothing algorithms. Thedevice shall provide unique signals to indicate when 20% of the drift range is remaining,when 100% of drift range is used, and when there is a chamber fault to show unit requiresmaintenance.

4. The detector shall indicate CO trouble conditions including 6 months of sensor liferemaining and sensor life has expired. The detector shall indicate a combined signal forany of the following: low chamber trouble, thermistor trouble, CO self test failure, IR selftest failure, and freeze warning.

5. The detectors shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using rotaryswitches. Because of the possibility of installation error, systems that use binary jumpersor DIP switches to set the detector address are not acceptable. The detectors shall alsostore an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the type ofdetector. Systems that require a special programmer to set the detector address(including temporary connection at the panel) are labor intensive and not acceptable. Eachdetector occupies any one of at least 99 possible addresses on the signaling line circuit(SLC) loop. It responds to regular polls from the system and reports its type and status.

6. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm conditionand report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detectoritself (by activating a switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel. There are three test methods: functional magnet, smoke entry aerosol, or direct heatmethod.

7. The detectors shall provide two LEDs to provide 360° visibility. The LEDs are placed intosteady red illumination by the control panel indicating that an alarm condition has beendetected. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an externalremote alarm LED, sounder base, and / or relay base (optional accessories). The externalremote alarm can be interconnected to other sounder or relay bases for activating alldevices in a space via a single alarming unit.

8. Two LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate sensor status. Codedsignals, transmitted from the panel, can cause the LEDs to blink, latch on, or latch off.Refer to the control panel technical documentation for sensor LED status operation andexpected delay to alarm.

9. The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall be plug-in mounted into a twist-lock base. These detectors shall be constructed of off-white UV resistant polymer and shall bedetachable from the mounting base to simplify installation, service and maintenance.Mounting base wiring connections shall be made by means of SEMS screws. The detectorshall allow pre-wiring of the base and the head shall be a plug-in type. Mounting baseshall be mounted on junction box which is at least 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) deep. Mountingbase shall be available to mount to standard junction boxes. Suitable boxes include:a. 4.0" (10.16 cm) square box with and without plaster ring.b. 4.0" (10.16 cm) octagonal box.c. 3.5" (8.89 cm) octagonal box.d. Single-gang box.

10. Meets Agency Standardsa. ANSI/UL 268 -Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Signaling Systems





























































b. CAN/ULC-S529- Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systemsc. FM 3230-3250- Smoke Actuated Detectors for Automatic Fire Alarm Signaling

J. IntelliQuad™ PLUS Advanced Multi-Criteria Intelligent Fire/CO Detector1. Advanced Multi-Criteria Fire/CO detector shall be NOTIFIER model # FCO-851 and shall

be an addressable advanced multi-criteria smoke detector with a separate signal forcarbon monoxide (CO) detection per UL 2075 standards.

2. The detector shall be comprised of four sensing elements, including a photoelectric(light-scattering) particulate sensor, an electrochemical CO sensor, a daylight-filteredinfrared (IR) sensor and solid state thermal sensor(s) rated at 135°F (57.2°C). The deviceshall be able to indicate distinct smoke and heat alarms.

3. The advanced multi-criteria detection device shall include the ability to combine the signalof the photoelectric signal with other sensing elements in order to react quickly in the eventof a fire situation. It shall also include the inherent ability to distinguish between a firecondition and a nuisance alarm condition. The detector shall be capable of selecting theappropriate sensitivity levels based on the environment type (office, manufacturing,kitchen, etc.) in which it is installed, and then have the ability to automatically change thesetting as the environment changes.

4. The CO detector component shall be capable of a functional gas test using a canned testagent to test the functionality of the CO sensing cell.

5. The detector shall be capable of automatically adjusting its sensitivity by means of driftcompensation and smoothing algorithms. The device shall provide unique signals toindicate when 20 percent of the drift range is remaining, when 100 percent of drift range isused, and when there is a chamber fault to show the unit requires maintenance.

6. The detector shall indicate CO trouble conditions, including six months of sensor liferemaining and sensor life has expired. The detector shall indicate a combined signal forany of the following: low chamber trouble, thermistor trouble, CO self test failure, IR selftest failure, and freeze warning.

7. The detector shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using rotaryswitches. Because of the possibility of installation error, systems that use binary jumpersor DIP switches to set the detector address are not acceptable. The detector shall alsostore an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the type ofdetector. Systems that require a special programmer to set the detector address (includingtemporary connection at the panel) are labor intensive and not acceptable. Each detectoroccupies any one of at least 159 possible addresses on the signaling line circuit (SLC)loop. It responds to regular polls from the system and reports its type and status.

8. The detector shall provide a test means whereby it will simulate an alarm condition andreport that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself(by activating a switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel. Thereshall be four test methods: functional magnet, smoke entry aerosol, carbon monoxideaerosol or direct heat method.

9. The detector shall provide two LEDs to provide 360° visibility. The LEDs shall be placedinto steady red illumination by the control panel indicating that an alarm condition has beendetected. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an externalremote alarm LED. The detector must be capable of connecting to a sounder base thatprovides both temporal 3 and temporal 4 patterns for fire and CO alarm.

10. Two LEDs on the sensor shall be controlled by the panel to indicate sensor status. Codedsignals, transmitted from the panel, shall cause the LEDs to blink, latch on, or latch off.Refer to the control panel technical documentation for sensor LED status operation andexpected delay to alarm.

11. The detector shall be plug-in mounted into a twist-lock base. The detector shall beconstructed of off-white, UV-resistant polymer and shall be detachable from the mountingbase to simplify installation, service and maintenance. Mounting base wiring connectionsshall be made by means of SEMS screws. The detector shall allow pre-wiring of the baseand the head shall be a plug-in type. The mounting base shall be mounted on a junction



























































box that is at least 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) deep. The mounting base shall be available tomount to standard junction boxes. Suitable boxes include:a. 4.0" (10.16 cm) square box with and without plaster ring.b. 4.0" (10.16 cm) octagonal box.c. 3.5" (8.89 cm) octagonal box.d. Single-gang box.e. Double-gang box

12. Meets Agency Standardsa. ANSI/UL 268 -Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Signaling Systemsb. CAN/ULC-S529- Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systemsc. FM 3230-3250- Smoke Actuated Detectors for Automatic Fire Alarm Signalingd. UL 2075 – Gas and Vapor Detector and Sensors – Systems Connected

K. Intelligent Addressable Aspiration Detector: The intelligent aspiration detector shall beNOTIFIER model # FSA-8000 an addressable aspiration detector that communicates directlywith the fire alarm control panel via the SLC communication protocol, no modules or high levelinterfaces shall be required. The fire alarm control panel shall support up to thirty one intelligentaspiration detectors per SLC loop. The aspiration detector shall have dual source (blue LED andinfra-red laser) optical smoke detection for a wide range of fire detection with enhancedimmunity to nuisance particulates. The FACP shall be capable of monitoring and annunciatingup to five smoke event thresholds and eleven trouble conditions. Each event threshold shall becapable of being assigned a discrete type ID at the FACP

L. Intelligent Addressable Reflected Beam Detector1. The intelligent single-ended reflected beam smoke detector shall connect with two wires to

the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit (SLC). The detectors shall consist of atransmitter/receiver unit and a reflector and shall send data to the panel representing theanalog level of smoke density. The detector shall be capable of being tested remotely via akeyswitch; NOTIFIER model # FSB-200. Model # FSB-200S shall be equipped with anintegral sensitivity test feature

M. Addressable Dry Contact Monitor Module1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of

conventional alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to one of the fire alarmcontrol panel SLCs. The addressable monitor module shall be NOTIFIER model # FMM-1(Class A or B) or FMM-101 (Class B)

2. The IDC zone shall be suitable for Style D/Class A or Style B/Class B operation. An LEDshall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitormodule is operational and in regular communication with the control panel.

3. For difficult to reach areas, the monitor module shall be available in a miniature packageand shall be no larger than 2-3/4 inch (70 mm) x 1-1/4 inch (31.7 mm) x 1/2 inch (12.7mm). This version need not include Style D or an LED.

4. For multiple dry contact monitoring a module shall be available that provides 10 Style B or5 Style D input circuits; NOTIFIER model # XP10-M.

N. Two Wire Detector Monitor Module1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of

conventional 2-wire smoke detectors or alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contactdevice); NOTIFIER model # FZM-1.

2. The IDC zone may be wired for Class A or B (Style D or Style B) operation. An LED shallbe provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module isoperational and in regular communication with the control panel.

3. For multiple 2-wire smoke detector circuit monitoring a module shall be available thatprovides 6 Style B/Class A or 3 Style D/Class B input circuits; NOTIFIER model # XP6-MA

O. Addressable Control Module1. Addressable control modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of

one conventional circuit of compatible Notification Appliances, 24 VDC powered, polarizedaudio/visual notification appliances; NOTIFIER model # FCM-1



























































2. The control module NAC may be wired for Style Z or Style Y (Class A/B) with a currentrating of 2 Amps for Style Z and 3 Amps for Style Y;

3. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised circuit from the main firealarm control panel or from a supervised UL listed remote supply.

4. For multiple circuit control a module shall be available that provides 6 Style Y (Class B) or3 Style Z (Class A) control circuits; NOTIFIER model # XP6-C.

P. Addressable Releasing Control Module1. An addressable FlashScan releasing module shall be available to supervise and control

compatible releasing agent solenoids; NOTIFIER model # FCM-1-REL.2. The module shall operate on a redundant protocol for added protection.3. The module shall be configurable for Style Z or Style Y (Class A/B) and support one 24

volt or two 12 volt solenoids.Q. Addressable Relay Module:

1. Addressable Relay Modules shall be available for HVAC control and other network buildingfunctions; NOTIFIER model # FRM-1.

2. The module shall provide two form C relays rated at up to 3 Amps resistive and up to 2.0Amps inductive.

3. The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements, andto insure that 100% of all auxiliary devices energize at the same time on the same pair ofwires.

4. For multiple relay control a module shall be available that provides 6 programmableForm-C relays; NOTIFIER model # XP6-R.

R. Addressable Two-In / Two-Out Monitor/Relay Module:1. An addressable Two-In / Two-Out module shall be available; NOTIFIER model # FDRM-1.2. The two-in/two-out module shall provide two Class B/Style B dry-contact input circuits and

two independent Form-C relays rated at up to 3 Amps resistive and up to 2.0 Ampsinductive.

S. Isolator Module: Isolator modules shall be provided to automatically isolate wire-to-wire shortcircuits on an SLC Class A or Class B branch. The isolator module shall limit the number ofmodules or detectors that may be rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC loopsegment or branch. At least one isolator module shall be provided for each floor or protectedzone of the building; NOTIFIER model # ISO-X.1. If a wire-to-wire short occurs, the isolator module shall automatically open-circuit

(disconnect) the SLC. When the short circuit condition is corrected, the isolator moduleshall automatically reconnect the isolated section.

2. The isolator module shall not require address-setting, and its operations shall be totallyautomatic. It shall not be necessary to replace or reset an isolator module after its normaloperation.

3. The isolator module shall provide a single LED that shall flash to indicate that the isolatoris operational and shall illuminate steadily to indicate that a short circuit condition has beendetected and isolated.

T. Smoke Control Annunciator1. On/Auto/Off switches and status indicators (LEDS) shall be provided for monitoring and

manual control of each fan, damper, HVAC control unit, stairwell pressurization fan, andsmoke exhaust fan. To ensure compliance the units supplied shall meet the following ULcategories: UUKL, PAZX, UDTZ, QVAX as well as the requirements of NFPA 90A, HVAC,and NFPA 92A & 92B, Smoke Control. The control System shall be field programmable foreither 90A operation or 92A/B operation to allow for future use and system expansion.

2. The OFF LED shall be Yellow, the ON LED shall be green, the Trouble/Fault LED shall beAmber/Orange for each switch. The Trouble/Fault indicator shall indicate a trouble in thecontrol and/or monitor points associated with that switch. In addition, each group of eightswitches shall have two LEDS and one momentary switch which allow the followingfunctions: An Amber LED to indicate an OFF-NORMAL switch position, in the ON or OFF


























































position; A Green LED to indicate ALL AUTO switch position; A Local Acknowledge/LampTest momentary switch.

3. Each switch shall have the capability to monitor and control two addressable inputs andtwo addressable outputs. In all modes, the ON and OFF indicators shall continuouslyfollow the device status not the switch position. Positive feedback shall be employed toverify correct operation of the device being controlled. Systems that indicate on/off/auto byphysical switch position only are not acceptable.

4. All HVAC switches (i.e., limit switches, vane switches, etc.) shall be provided and installedby the HVAC contractor.

5. It shall be possible to meet the requirements mentioned above utilizing wall mountedcustom graphic.

U. SpectrAlert Advance Speakers1. The Speaker appliance shall be System Sensor SpectrAlert Advance Speaker. The

speaker shall be listed to UL 1480 for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. It shall be adual-voltage transformer speaker capable of operation at 25.0 or 70.7 nominal Vrms. Thespeaker shall have a frequency range of 400 to 4,000 Hz and shall have an operatingtemperature between 32°F and 120°F. It shall mount to a 4 x 4 x 2 1/8-inch back box.

2. A universal mounting plate shall be used for mounting ceiling and wall speaker products.The notification appliance circuit and amplifier wiring shall terminate at the universalmounting plate.

3. Speakers shall be plug-in and shall have the ability to check wiring continuity via a shortingspring on the universal mounting plate. The shorting spring shall also provide tamperresistance via an open circuit if the device is removed. Speaker design shall isolatespeaker components to reduce ground fault incidents.

4. The speaker shall have power taps (from ¼ watt to 2 watts) and voltage that are selectedby rotary switches. All models shall have a maximum sound output of 86 dB at 10 feet andshall incorporate an open back construction.

5. All notification appliances shall be backward compatible.V. SpectrAlert Advance Speaker Strobes

1. The Speaker Strobe appliance shall be System Sensor SpectrAlert Advance SpeakerStrobe. The speaker strobe shall be listed to UL 1971 and UL 1480 and be approved forfire protective signaling systems. It shall be a dual-voltage transformer speaker strobecapable of operation at 25.0 or 70.7 nominal Vrms. The speaker shall have a frequencyrange of 400 to 4,000 Hz and shall have an operating temperature between 32°F and120°F. It shall mount to a 4 x 4 x 2 1/8-inch back box.

2. A universal mounting plate shall be used for mounting ceiling and wall speaker strobeproducts. The notification appliance circuit and amplifier wiring shall terminate at theuniversal mounting plate. Also, SpectrAlert Advance speaker strobes and theSync•Circuit™ Module MDL3 accessory, if used, shall be powered from a non-codednotification appliance circuit output and shall operate on a nominal 12 or 24 volts (includesfire alarm panels with built in sync). When used with the Sync•Circuit Module MDL3,12-volt rated notification appliance circuit outputs shall operate between 8.5 and 17.5 volts;24-volt rated notification appliance circuit outputs shall operate between 16.5 to 33 volts. Ifthe notification appliances are not UL 9th edition listed with the corresponding panel orpower supply being used, then refer to the compatibility listing of the panel to determinemaximum devices on a circuit.

3. Speaker strobes shall be plug-in and shall have the ability to check wiring continuity via ashorting spring on the universal mounting plate. The shorting spring shall also providetamper resistance via an open circuit if the device is removed. Speaker strobe design shallisolate speaker components to reduce ground fault incidents.

4. The speaker strobe shall have power taps (from ¼ watt to 2 watts) and voltage that areselected by rotary switches. All models shall have a maximum sound output of 86 dB at 10feet and shall incorporate an open back construction. The strobe shall consist of a xenonflash tube with associated lens/reflector system and operate on either 12V or 24V. Thestrobe shall also feature selectable candela output, providing options for 15 or 15/75




























































candela when operating on 12V and 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 110, or 115 when operating on 24V.The strobe shall comply with NFPA 72 and the Americans with Disabilities Act requirementfor visible signaling appliances, flashing at 1 Hz over the strobe’s entire operating voltagerange.

5. All notification appliances shall be backward compatible.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with applicable codes, NFPA 72, NFPA 70, and Contract Documents.B. Conceal all wiring, conduit, boxes, and supports where installed in finished areas.C. Obtain Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's approval of locations of devices, before installation.D. Install instruction cards and labels.E. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas

and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior to thesystem programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measuresshall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination and physical damage.

F. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators shall beflush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located inunfinished areas.

G. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi-flush mounting as shownon the plans, and shall be installed not less than 42 inches (1067 mm), nor more than 48 inches(122 mm) above the finished floor.

3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR COMPLETIONA. Notify Delaware Solid Waste Authority 7 days prior to beginning completion inspections and

tests.B. Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling

inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel.C. Provide the services of the installer's supervisor or person with equivalent qualifications to

supervise inspection and testing, correction, and adjustments.D. Prepare for testing by ensuring that all work is complete and correct; perform preliminary tests

as required.E. Provide all tools, software, and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing.F. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NFPA 72 and requirements of local

authorities; document each inspection and test.G. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with

Contract Documents.H. The service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the

manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment shall be provided to technically supervise andparticipate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. All testing shall be inaccordance with NFPA 72.

I. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits,ground faults, continuity, and insulation.

J. Close each sprinkler system flow valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at the FACP.K. Verify activation of all waterflow switches.L. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.M. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.N. Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.O. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals.




















































P. Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices.Q. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors using the walk

test.R. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the

system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP and thecorrect activation of the control points.

S. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual shall beconsulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items asverifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivitymonitoring, verification functionality and similar.

3.03 DELAWARE SOLID WASTE AUTHORITY PERSONNEL INSTRUCTIONA. Provide the following instruction to designated Delaware Solid Waste Authority personnel:

1. Hands-On Instruction: On-site, using operational system.2. Classroom Instruction: Delaware Solid Waste Authority furnished classroom, on-site or at

other local facility.B. Administrative: One-hour session(s) covering issues necessary for non-technical administrative

staff; classroom:1. Initial Training: 1 session pre-closeout.

C. Basic Operation: One-hour sessions for attendant personnel, security officers, and engineeringstaff; combination of classroom and hands-on:1. Initial Training: 1 session pre-closeout.

D. Furnish the services of instructors and teaching aids; have copies of operation and maintenancedata available during instruction.

3.04 CLOSEOUTA. Closeout Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of all functions to Delaware Solid

Waste Authority .1. Be prepared to conduct any of the required tests.2. Have at least one copy of operation and maintenance data, preliminary copy of project

record drawings, input/output matrix, and operator instruction chart(s) available duringdemonstration.

3. Have authorized technical representative of control unit manufacturer present duringdemonstration.

4. Demonstration may be combined with inspection and testing required by authority havingjurisdiction; notify authority having jurisdiction in time to schedule demonstration.

5. Repeat demonstration until successful.3.05 MAINTENANCE

A. See Section 00 1730 - Execution, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service.B. Provide to Delaware Solid Waste Authority , at no extra cost, a written maintenance contract for

entire manufacturer's warranty period, to include the work described below.C. Perform routine inspection, testing, and preventive maintenance required by NFPA 72,

including:1. Maintenance of fire safety interface and supervisory devices connected to fire alarm

system.2. Repairs required, unless due to improper use, accidents, or negligence beyond the control

of the maintenance contractor.3. Record keeping required by NFPA 72 and authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Provide a complete description of preventive maintenance, systematic examination, adjustment,cleaning, inspection, and testing, with a detailed schedule.

E. Maintain a log at each fire alarm control unit, listing the date and time of each inspection andcall-back visit, the condition of the system, nature of the trouble, correction performed, and parts























































replaced. Submit duplicate of each log entry to Delaware Solid Waste Authority 'srepresentative upon completion of site visit.

F. Comply with Delaware Solid Waste Authority 's requirements for access to facility and security.G. Include also a quote for unscheduled maintenance/repairs, including hourly rates for technicians

trained on this equipment, and response travel costs for each year of the maintenance period.Submittals that do not identify all post contract maintenance costs will not be accepted. Ratesand costs shall be valid for the period of five (5) years after expiration of the guaranty.

END OF SECTION












SITE CLEARING 311000 - 1

SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain.2. Removing existing vegetation.3. Clearing and grubbing.4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements.6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, removing site utilities, and abandoning site utilities in

place.7. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01510 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil organisms.

B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In undisturbed areas, surface soil is typically called "topsoil," but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil; the zone where plant roots grow.

D. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil; the zone where plant roots grow. Its appearance is generally friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials.

E. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction as needed in the field to protect the existing stand of trees on site.



F. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or video recordings.2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each

tree or other plant designated to remain.

B. Topsoil stripping and stockpiling program.

C. Rock stockpiling program.

D. Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Topsoil Stripping and Stockpiling Program: Prepare a written program to systematically demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow procedures and handle materials and equipment during the Work. Include dimensioned diagrams for placement and protection of stockpiles.

B. Rock Stockpiling Program: Prepare a written program to systematically demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow procedures and handle materials and equipment during the Work. Include dimensioned diagrams for placement and protection of stockpiles.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.



2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed trafficways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect.

C. Salvageable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated.

D. Utility Locator Service: Notify Miss Utility and a private utility locator for area where Project is located before site clearing.

E. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control and plant-protection measures are in place.

F. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the soil is dry or slightly moist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.

B. Antirust Coating: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, self-curing, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #23 (surface-tolerant, anticorrosive metal primer) or SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 zinc-rich coating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.



3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls, and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

3.3 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Owner will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing, when requested by Contractor.

1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.

B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in place.

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.2. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.3. Existing utilities to be abandoned shall be done in accordance with the City of Dover

Public Works Requirements.

C. Locate, identify, and disconnect utilities indicated to be abandoned in place.

D. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others, unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect not less than three days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

E. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed on the drawings.

3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.



2. Grind down stumps and remove roots larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in diameter, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18 inches (450 mm) below exposed subgrade.

3. Use only hand methods or air spade for grubbing within protection zones.4. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200 mm) and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to depth of 6 inches (150 mm) in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.

1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and other objects larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil or other materials. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water.

1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches (1800 mm).2. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones.3. Dispose of surplus topsoil. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity indicated to be

stockpiled or reused.4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.

3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut along line of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.

2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain with two coats of antirust coating, following coating manufacturer's written instructions. Keep paint off surfaces that will remain exposed.



3.7 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials, and transport them to recycling facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.

END OF SECTION 311000


EARTH MOVING 312000 - 1

SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Excavating and filling for rough grading the Site.

2. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, turf and grasses and plants.

3. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.

4. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade.

5. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.

6. Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving.

7. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.

8. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling

topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.

2. Section 315000 "Excavation Support and Protection" for shoring, bracing, and sheet

piling of excavations.

3. Section 329200 "Turf and Grasses" for finish grading in turf and grass areas, including

preparing and placing planting soil for turf areas.

4. Section 329300 "Plants" for finish grading in planting areas and tree and shrub pit

excavation and planting.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to

support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying

pipe.



D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward

capillary flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and

dimensions indicated.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond

indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation

and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices.

2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and more than 30 feet

(9 m) in length.

3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated

lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as

remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and

electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the

ground surface.

I. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix

asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete

pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

J. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill

immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services

within buildings.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct preexcavation conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to earthmoving, including, but not limited to, the

following:

a. Personnel and equipment needed to make progress and avoid delays.

b. Coordination of Work with utility locator service.

c. Coordination of Work and equipment movement with the locations of tree- and

plant-protection zones.

d. Extent of trenching by hand or with air spade.

e. Field quality control.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required:



1. Geotextiles.

2. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture.

3. Warning tapes.

B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated below:

1. Geotextile: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm).

2. Warning Tape: 12 inches (300 mm) long; of each color.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Material Test Reports: For each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill as

follows:

1. Classification according to ASTM D2487.

2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D698.

C. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction

and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused

by earth-moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E329 and

ASTM D3740 for testing indicated.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied

or used facilities during earth-moving operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities

without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing earth moving indicated on

property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect.

C. Utility Locator Service: Notify a private utility locator service as needed and “Miss Utility" for

area where Project is located before beginning earth-moving operations.

D. Do not commence earth-moving operations until temporary site fencing and erosion- and

sedimentation-control measures specified in Section 311000 "Site Clearing" are in place.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not

available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to

ASTM D2487 or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75

mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT

according to ASTM D2487, or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of

optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940/D2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-

1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed



F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed



G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940/D2940M; except with 100 percent passing a

1-inch (25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of [washed ]crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed

gravel; ASTM D448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch

(37.5-mm) sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.

I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and

natural sand; ASTM D448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch

(25-mm) sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve.

J. Sand: ASTM C33/C33M; fine aggregate.

K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

2.2 GEOTEXTILES

A. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications, made

from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with

AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:



1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.

2. Survivability: As follows:

a. Grab Tensile Strength: 247 lbf (1100 N); ASTM D4632.

b. Sewn Seam Strength: 222 lbf (990 N); ASTM D4632.

c. Tear Strength: 90 lbf (400 N); ASTM D4533.

d. Puncture Strength: 90 lbf (400 N); ASTM D4833.

3. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 (0.250-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D4751.

4. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D4491.

5. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D4355.

2.3 CONTROLLED LOW-STRENGTH MATERIAL

A. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Self-compacting, low-density, flowable concrete material

produced from the following:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I.

2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.

3. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C33/C33M, 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum

aggregate size.

4. Foaming Agent: ASTM C869/C869M.

5. Water: ASTM C94/C94M.

6. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.

B. Produce low-density, controlled low-strength material with the following physical properties:

1. As-Cast Unit Weight: 30 to 36 lb/cu. ft. (480 to 576 kg/cu. m) at point of placement,

when tested according to ASTM C138/C138M.

2. Compressive Strength: 80 psi (550 kPa), when tested according to ASTM C495/C495M.

C. Produce conventional-weight, controlled low-strength material with 80-psi (550-kPa)

compressive strength when tested according to ASTM C495/C495M.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for

marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm)

thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric.

2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.

3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.

4. Blue: Water systems.

5. Green: Sewer systems.

B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape

manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150

mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility,



with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal

detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric.

2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.

3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.

4. Blue: Water systems.

5. Green: Sewer systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by

settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth-moving

operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth-moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary

protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Provide dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control hydrostatic

pressures and to lower, control, remove, and dispose of ground water and permit excavation and

construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades.

B. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared

subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

C. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water

accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to

accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

D. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public health,

property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water and sediment

in a manner that avoids inconvenience to others.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

B. Explosives: Obtain written permission from authorities having jurisdiction before bringing

explosives to Project site or using explosives on Project site.



1. Perform blasting without damaging adjacent structures, property, or site improvements.

2. Perform blasting without weakening the bearing capacity of rock subgrade and with the

least-practicable disturbance to rock to remain.

3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface

and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil

materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be

authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials

and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

2. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent

construction without exceeding the following dimensions:

a. 24 inches (600 mm) outside of concrete forms other than at footings.

b. 12 inches (300 mm) outside of concrete forms at footings.

c. 6 inches (150 mm) outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast

against grade.

d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without

forms or exterior waterproofing treatments.

e. 12 inches (300 mm) beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade.

f. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath pipe in trenches and the greater of 24 inches (600 mm)

wider than pipe or 42 inches (1065 mm) wide.

B. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be

classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross sectioned

by Architect. The Contract Sum will be adjusted for rock excavation according to unit prices

included in the Contract Documents. Changes in the Contract Time may be authorized for rock

excavation.

1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface;

underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; and soil,

boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.

a. Intermittent drilling; blasting, if permitted; ram hammering; or ripping of material

not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25

mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and

removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.

Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms

to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.



2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 mm) above bottom of pile

cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced

material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps.

3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility

Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or

minus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing

surfaces.

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and

subgrades.

3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below

frost line.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or

conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than

top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit or as indicated on the plans.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of

pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of

pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp

objects along trench subgrade.

1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter, hand-excavate

trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.

2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches (150 mm) or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of

trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe or conduit circumference. Fill depressions

with tamped sand backfill.

3. For flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support

conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.

4. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other

unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

D. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches (100 mm) or as indicated on the plans, deeper than

bottom of pipe and conduit elevations to allow for bedding course. Hand-excavate deeper for

bells of pipe.

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other

unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.



3.8 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation

of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean

concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when

approved by Architect.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by

Architect.

3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.

Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of

remaining trees.

3.10 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing,

waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.

3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities.

4. Removing concrete formwork.

5. Removing trash and debris.

6. Removing temporary shoring, bracing, and sheeting.

7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.11 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding

course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,

fittings, and bodies of conduits.

C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450

mm) of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of

footings. Concrete is specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

D. Trenches under Roadways: Provide 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick, concrete-base slab support for

piping or conduit less than 30 inches (750 mm) below surface of roadways. After installing and

testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete



before backfilling or placing roadway subbase course. Concrete is specified in Section 033000

"Cast-in-Place Concrete."

E. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing.

F. Initial Backfill:

1. Soil Backfill: Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles

larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the

pipe or conduit.

a. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on

both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or

displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

2. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low-strength

material to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or conduit. Coordinate

backfilling with utilities testing.

G. Final Backfill:

1. Soil Backfill: Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade

elevation.

2. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place final backfill of controlled low-strength

material to final subgrade elevation.

H. Warning Tape: Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished

grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.12 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill

material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.

2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.

3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.

4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.

5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

D. materials.

3.13 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before

compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.



1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain

frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that

exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified

dry unit weight.

3.14 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth

for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches (100 mm)

in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations and

uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight

according to ASTM D698:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12

inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95

percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and

compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.

3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below

subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.

4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85

percent.

3.15 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply

with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.

2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding.

Finish subgrades to elevations required to achieve indicated finish elevations, within the

following subgrade tolerances:

1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

2. Walks: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).

3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested

with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge.



3.16 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as

follows:

1. Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written

instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement.

3. Shape subbase course and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope

grades.

4. Place subbase course and base course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness

in a single layer.

5. Place subbase course and base course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted

thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150

mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

6. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades,

lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit

weight according to ASTM D698.

C. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase course and base course to prevent

lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches (300 mm) wide, of satisfactory soil

materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95

percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D698.

3.17 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE

A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-

on-grade as follows:

1. Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written

instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Place drainage course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.

3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of

equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than

3 inches (75 mm) thick.

4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not

less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D698.

3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Contractor to engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following

special inspections:

1. Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with

requirements.